A406 - Manuale Cappa e Bruciatori

S.R.L.
Via di Tempagnano Arancio 55100 LUCCA Tel. 0583 496040 954249 Fax. 0583 496721 - 954261
STABILIMENTO/FACTORY : Via di Tempagnano - Arancio - 55100 - LUCCA Tel. 0583 496040 954249 Fax. 0583 496721 - 954261
Partita IVA 01294070469
MANUFACTURER ECCONFORMITY DECLARATION

(According to All. II A of the Direttiva Macchine DPR 24-7-1996- Directive 98/37/CEE) Manufacturer FOMAT AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. Via di Tempagnano, 180/B Arancio 55100 LUCCA Address DECLARATION OF THE KIND OF MACHINE DESCRIPTION Definition Hot air suction plant and natural gas / kerosene combustion products for hood above the yankee cylinder. Machine Model YANKEE HOOD AND HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM Machine type DUO SYSTEM N of Factory/rif.to A 406.07 N of Draw TA0406.07 Manufacture s Year 2008 Fluid inside Warm air and e products for natural gas / kerosene combustion Fluid max inside 530 C Max Tension 440/3/60 V/Hz MACHINE EC CONFORMITY DECLARATION MOD. YANKEE HOOD DUOSYSTEM (according to art. 2, paragraph 2, letter a) of the DPR 24-7-1996 n. 459) MACHINE Art. 4 paragraph 1a) (Machine do not put in the list of the Enclosure IV DPR 459/96)
MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
We declared that the machine described above is conforming to the essential requisites of safety and health foreseen by EC 98/37/CEE and by art. 2,paragraph 1 of the DPR 24-7-1996 n. 459. We also declare that in the planning and construction of this Machine , we applied the following rules: -Low Tension Directive 73/23/CEE, written in the law n 791 del 18/1071977 -Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/CEE e 92/31/CEE written with D.Lgs n476/92 -UNI EN 292-1, 292-2, 292-2/A1 (machinery safety ) -CEI EN 60204-1 (Machinery electric-equipment s safety ) -CEI EN 60439-1 (Put together equipment of protection and manoeuvre for BT picture-Part 1a ;equipment of series subjected to tests of series (As) and not of series, partially subjected to the series (ANS) -UNI EN 563 (Temperature limit values for the hot surface ) -D.M. LL. PP. 14-2-92- Part 2 (Technician rules for the calculationthe execution testing of the steel structures Calculation with method of the finished elements and of the admissibles solicitations)
Lucca, li: 01-09-2008
0/
A406.07 YANKEE HOOD DUOSYSTEM PM2 OFFICINE RECARD for CMPC 01.09.08
CLIENT DESTINATION
: :
OFFICINA MECCANICA RECARD CMPC ABSORMEX - Messico LOC.BIECINA-VILLA BASILICA (LUCCA ) PM2 - DUOSYSTEM KEROSENE / GAS FIRED YANKEE AND HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
MILL LOCATION : PLANT SYSTEM : :
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
0.1
0/
IF NOT OTHERWISE AEROTHERMIC
CONTENTS
SPECIFIED THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE ISSUED BY
1. P&I DIAGRAM (DWG TA0406.07) 1.2 HOW TO USE THE INFORMATIONS GIVEN IN THIS MANUAL 2. SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.1 TECHNICAL DATA 2.2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2.3 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
PAGE 1.2 PAGE 1.3 to 1.5 PAGE 2.1 to 2.12 PAGE 2.1 PAGE 2.3 PAGE 2.6
3. INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY/INSTALLATION 3.1 START-UP 3.2 OPERATION 3.3 CLEANING 3.4 MAINTENANCE 3.5 HOOD/YANKEE GAP ADJUSTMENT 3.6 AIR FLOW SYSTEM 3.7 INSPECTION PORTS 4. HOOD MOVEMENT SYSTEM 4.1 PNEUMATIC DIAGRAM 4.2 PISTON 4.3 BASE+ELETTROVALVE 4.4 FLOW CONTROL 4.5 QUIK EXHAUST VALVE 4.6 LIMIT SWITCH 4.7 DRIVE SIDE WHEEL 4.8 TENDER SIDE WHEEL 4.9 SYNCRONISME SHAFT
PAGE 3.1 to 3.13 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.12
PAGE 4.1 to 4.10 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE 4.1 4.2 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
0.2
0/
5. FANS
PAGE 5.1 to 5.14 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 5.10 5.11
5.1 V1 CIRCULATING AIR FAN 5.2 V2 CIRCULATING AIR FAN 5.3 V3 EXHAUST AIR FAN 5.4 COMBUSTION AIR FAN V4-V5 5.5 MAKE UP FAN V6 5.6 ISTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE 5.7 LUBRIFICATION 6. HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM R1 6.1 AIR TO AIR EXCHANGER 6.2 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 6.3 AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 7. GAS BURNERS G1,G2 7.1 P&I DIAGRAM G1 7.2 P&I DIAGRAM G2 7.3 GAS BURNER GROUPS 7.4 BURNER ICOTEC 7.5 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 7.6 FUEL OIL PUMPS 7.7 MAGHETIC LEVEL 8.DAMPERS 8.1 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC (S3 S5 S6 S8 ) 8.2 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC WITH AUTOMATIC ACTUATOR (S3 S5 S6 S8 ) 8.3 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC WITH MANUAL ACTUATOR (S4) 8.4 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SF WITH AUT.ACTUATOR (SG1-SG2) 8.5 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER ON EDGE DRY AND WET SECTION
PAGE 6.1 to 6.2 PAGE 6.1 PAGE 6.1 PAGE 6.2 PAGE 7.1 to 7.6 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7
PAGE 8.1 to 8.7 PAGE 8.1 PAGE 8.2 PAGE 8.3 PAGE 8.4 PAGE 8.6
0.3
0/
9. ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
PAGE 9.1 to 9.11 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11
9.1 P & I DIAGRAMS 9.2 WET END HOOD BURNER CONTROL PANEL Q1 9.3 DRY END HOOD BURNER CONTROL PANEL Q2 9.4 LOCAL PANEL Q4 9.5 MOISTURE PANEL Q6 9.6 TEMPERATURE SENSORS 9.7 AIR SAFETY SWITCHES 9.8 DCS CONFIGURATION AND LOGIC 9.9 ZIRCONIA HIGHT TEMPERATURES HUMIDITY ANALYSER 9.10 HOOD PLANT ELECTRIC DOCUMENTS ORGANIZATION 10. SPARE PARTS 11. DRAWINGS LIST
PAGE 10.1 to 10.11 PAGE 11.1
0.4
1/
WARNING
to avoid the risk of damaging the plant.
Upon receipt of the machine, check whether the machine structure or its internal parts have been damaged during transport. The operators handbook must be read entirely before operation of the machine in order
In order to obtain a quick consulting of this handbook, you can refer to the information scheme at the paragraph 1.2 Before to execute mainentance or regulating operations not described on this handbook, please contact our Customer Service at this address:
Fomat Aerothermic S.r.l. Via di Tempagnano 55100 - Lucca Tel. 0039 583 954249 / 954386
1.1
1/
1. P&I DIAGRAM
(DWG. TA0406.07)
1.2
INLET GAS DN80-PN16 P=300 mbar
INLET 1/2" ATOMIZING AIR P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h
1/2" ATOMIZING AIR INLET
P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h
1" Q=800Lt/h P =10Bar
DESCRIZIONE
RECARD - MEXICO - CMPC ABSORMEX - PM2

CODICE
A0406.07
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
DISEGNATO CONTROLLATO APPROVATO
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
08/11/2007 maurizio
1:1
FORMATO
A1
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TA0406.07_P&I_DIAGRAM
1/
1.2
HOW TO USE THE INFORMATIONS GIVEN IN THIS MANUAL
IN LINE POSITIONING AND UNIT INSTALLATION DEPARTMENT Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 par. 3 par. 3.5 par. 3.6 par. 3.7 INSTALLATION/SAFETY HOOD/YANKEE GAP ADJUSTMENT AIR FLOW SYSTEM INSPECTION PORT
PRODUCTION ORGANISING DEPARTMENT
Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3
par. 3 par. 3.1 par. 3.2 par. 3.3
INSTRUCTIONS/SAFETY START-UP OPERATION CLEANING
OPERATORS Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 par. 3 par. 3.1 par. 3.2 par. 3.3 par. 3.4 INSTRUCTION START-UP OPERATION CLEANING MAINENTANCE
1.3
1/
Sect. 3 Sect. 4 Sect. 5 Sect. 6 Sect. 7 Sect. 8 Sect. 9 par. par. par. par. par. par. par.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE COMPLETE
SPARES DEPARTMENT Sect. 10 par. COMPLETE
1.4
1/
Aerothermic code V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 R1 F1 F4 G1 G2 S4 S5 S6 S8 MP-051 MP-052
Reading this manual ,You can individuate the main plant units following this scheme. Description RECIRCULATING AIR FAN WE RECIRCULATING AIR FAN DE EXHAUST AIR FAN COMBUSTION AIR FAN FOR G1 BURNER COMBUSTION AIR FAN FOR G2 BURNER MAKE-UP AXIAL FAN HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM AIR FILTER ON R1 COMBUSTION AIR FILTER BURNER & COMBUSTION CHAMBER WE BURNER & COMBUSTION CHAMBER DE OVER PRESSURE DAMPER CROSS FLOW DAMPER COMBUSTION AIR MIXING DAMPER MAKE-UP AIR DAMPER OIL PUMP OIL PUMP
1.5
2/
2.1 TECHNICAL DATA
2. SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The plant to be sized on the following technical data: PRODUCTION DATA : Kind of paper Tissue Maximum production (at 95% dryness outlet 100% efficiency) 120 Machine speed (max) 1848 Basis paper weight on wire 16,4 Paper width on c/y 2900 Paper width at pope reel 2750 Dryness inlet 39 Dryness outlet dryness cylinder 94 CYLINDER DATA : Diameter Face Operating steam pressure H.T.C. (supposed) HOOD DATA : Sweep angle (Wet) Sweep angle (Dry) Blowing velocity (operating) Blowing temperature (operating) Blowing temperature (max) Blowing distance Heating medium 135 degree 120 degree 137 m/s 530 C 540 C 20 mm * Kerosene (ASTM specif.) Net calorific power = 9700 Kcal/Kg at 180 mbar pressure 4877 3200 8 590 mm mm bar kW/m2
T/D m/min g/m mm mm % B.D. % B.D.
2.1
2/
MILL DATA :
Electric supply=power Electric supply=control Compressed air available=instrument Elevation on sea level (max) PERFORMANCE DATA : Total power evap. Yankee evaporation Hood evaporation
440/3/60 / 6 100
V//Hz V//Hz bar m
7571 2262 5309
Kg/h Kg/h Kg/h
2.2
2/
2.2 YANKEE HOOD
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
The Aerothermic Yankee Hood comprises two drying sections connected to a circulating air system outside the hood. Each hood section consists of a blow box which is a fed with drying air coming from the supply air duct. This ensures a ridged and stiff construction which is important on wide machines when the hood should have the possibility of opening up or closing together. The box is made of a lower perforated plate where perforation of impingement air nozzles and return air holes are accurately calculated to get an even drying in the cross direction of the paper web. In the dry end of the dry section, above the creping doctors, the blow-box is provided with a blowing slot which is directed with an angle towards the paper direction to prevent hot air from being ejected out of the Hood with the paper web. The blow-box consists of an upper perforated plate where the return air pipes are fastened. Each (at least one for each indipendent chamber) end plates are provided with cleaning ports. The space between the blow-box and the outer walls acts like an exhaust air chamber. This chamber is connected to an exhaust air duct which is designed for an even exhaust air amount in the cross direction of the hood. The cladding of the hood consists of an aluminium frame resting against the inner plate only in a few points. This outside frame carry the cladding pannels made of extrude aluminium double walled profiles provided with air room. Between the inner and outer plates there is an insulation of mineral whool (200 mm thick). There is one inspection door for each hood section, on the roof and one front wall. The space between the hood and cylinder at the gables of the hood should be tightened to prevent in and out leakage of air. This is done by dismountable and ajustable aluminium sealing strips fixed by stainless steel clamps. The wet end of the wet section is provided with a suction adjustable slot to pick-up the vapour coming from the paper leaving the press. In order to facilitate the threading, cleaning and inspection of the space between the hood and the cylinder, the hood can be retracted from the cylinder with pneumatic pistons. The hood halves are resting on 4 brackets furnished with supporting wheels. The brackets are attached to special renforcements The supporting wheels are provided with flanges for steering the movement at the driving side of the hood, while the wheels at the operating side are flat, to be able to take up side displacement at the heat expansion of the hood in the cross direction of the machine. Two of the supporting wheels on each hood half are mounted on a mutual shaft and provided with geared wheels which roll in rack on the foundation. This guarantees a straight movement of the hood. The connection between the hood halves and the circulating air duct should be connected even the hood is retracted. Because of that, this connection has to be flexible.
2.3
2/
DUOSYSTEM DIRECT FIRED
The air system of the hood is of DUOSYSTEM type, this means the wet exhaust air is taken out from the wet hood section by the fan V3 controlled by the inverter, the exhaust air from the dry hood section is used as make-up of the wet hood section controlled by the damper S5, the incoming air is drawn in, part through the inlet and outlet paper slots, part from make-up air damper (S8). The drying required heat power is supplied by two direct fired burners (G1-G2) placed on the circulating air after the fans V1-V2. HOOD AIR BALANCE To avoid hot air spread out from the hood and/or cold air infiltration into the hood from the ambient the pressure (positive or negative) of the hood return chamber can be controlled by trottling the damper S5 (to controls the WE hood section), and the damper S8 (to control the DE hood section). BLOWING AIR FLOW CONTROL (HIC 120/221) The blowing air flow can be adjusted to the suitable value in order to obtain the higher evaporating efficiency and the lower as possible power consumptions of the fan. BLOWING TEMEPRATURE CONTROL (TIC 100/200) The temperature of blowing air can be setted and automatically controlled, the temperature controller operate on the burner servomotor. To prevent the over heating, the temperature controller TSAH-101/201 operate to stop the burner. COMBUSTION AIR The combustion air is coming part from economize (R1) and part from the ambient. COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE CONTROL (PDIC 115/PDIC 215) The pressure of the combustion air must be higher than the pressure into the furnace. This pressure difference must be constant even if the temperature/pressure changes into the furnace. The PDIC-115/215 controllers keep constant this difference operating on the inverters on the combustion air supply duct ahead of the burners. AUTOMATC CONTROLS & INTERLOCKS 2.4
2/
HEAT RECOVERY (R1)
The automatic controls will be installed on the operator control panel included in our supply. The instrumentation will be of conventional type. The logic funtions of the system will be carried out by a PLC Note: the Ul standard will be applied where possible
The make-up air and the combustion air will be preheated by the wet air exhaust on the air-air economizer R1. The heat exchanger consists of tubes expanted into collared holes in the tube plates. The bottom tube plate is bolted to a framework, whereas the top tube plate is guided in the framework but it is free to move vertically to accomodate the thermal expansion and contaction of the tubes. The wet air flows through the tubes whereas the fresh air flows accros the outside of the tubes at 90 to the direction of the wet air flow. MOISTURE PROFILE CONTROL The blow box of the wet end hood section will be divided into 8+2 indipendent compartments. Each compartment will be provided by a butterfly type damper, manually controlled, in order to reduce the air impingement on the relative paper band. DUCTWORKS The ductwork will be mainly of circular type, where it is possible, with connecting flanges and reinforcement of steel plate. The duct joints will be sealed with flat glass fibre gasket provided with special warping in the central part to allow the bolts insertion.
2.5
2/
Pos. 1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 Q.t 1 1 1 2
Descrizione
CAPPA AD ALTA EFFICIENZA per cilindro monolucido La cappa costituita dalle seguenti parti: Semistruttura lato entrata carta (WE) in profilati e lamiere di AISI 430 costituente le fiancate ed i collegamenti tra di esse, contenente il sistema di soffiaggio e ricircolo. Semistruttura per lato uscita carta (DE), costruita in lamiere di acciaio Corten A e profilati in acciaio al carbonio Coibentazione spess. totale 200 mm circa costituita da: - lana di roccia ad alta densit - Intelaiatura di contenimento della coibentazione in Alluminio Anodizzato Sistema di soffiaggio e ricircolo per semicappa lato entrata carta (WE), realizzato in lamiera di AISI 430 e costituito da: - lamiera perforata per il soffiaggio dell'aria - lamiere di separazione dei circuiti interni - tubi in acciaio inox per il ritorno dell'aria da ricircolare - Blow box WE diviso in 8+2 settori Sistema di soffiaggio e ricircolo c.s. per semicappa lato uscita carta, (DE) costruito in lamiera di acciaio Corten A e tubi di ripresa in CortenA Il blow box provvisto di 2 settori sui bordi Sistema di tenuta tra cappa e cilindro di tipo registrabile in Alluminio anticorodal Sistema di tenuta tra cappa WE e cappa DE in acciaio inox STRUTTURA DI SOSTEGNO DELLA CAPPA, poggiante sulle spalle del monolucido in profilati di acciaio al carbonio verniciato, provvisto di guide di scorrimento per la movimentazione della cappa SISTEMA ELETTROPNEUMATICO PER MOVIMENTAZIONE DELLA CAPPA comprendente: Attuatori elettro pneumatici completi di attacchi Ruote montate su cuscinetti a sfere Microinterruttore fine corsa (1 inst WE + 1 inst. DE) Barre di sincronismo c on supporti con cuscinetti a sfere LA
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4 1.5 2
2 1 1
3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
1 4 8 2 2
2.6
2/
Pos. 4 4.1 (V1-V2) Q.t 1 2
Descrizione
SISTEMA DI RICIRCOLO ARIA La fornitura costituita da: Ventilatori centrifughi con girante in Corten A, completi di: - carcassa divisa in due parti - supporti separati lubrificati a grasso - disco di raffreddamento - portina di ispezione - tappo di scarico - telaio di base con antivibranti - giunti flessibili in acciaio inox per aspirazione e mandata
4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7
2 2 2 2 8 1
Motori elettrici (vedi dati tecnici) KW/4 completi di inverter (esclusi dalla ns. fornitura) Giunto a denti di accoppiamento tra motore e ventilatore Condotti in lamiera di acciaio Corten A per la mandata dell'aria alla cappa Condotti in lamiera di acciaio Corten A per la ripresa dell'aria dalla cappa Flessibili in acciaio Inox per la apertura e chiusura della cappa Sistema di regolazione del circuito semicappa dry costituito da: - Serranda ad alette di regolazione della portata aria di rinnovo in lamiera di Corten A di forte spessore (S8) Sistema di regolazione del circuito semicappa wet costituito da: - Serranda di regolazione della portata aria di controcorrente, in lamiera di Corten A di forte spessore (S5) Condotto per aria in controcorrente in acciaio Corten A Supporto condotti airsystem in acciaio al carbonio verniciati
4.8
4.9 4.10
1 1
Pos.
Q.t
Descrizione 2.7
2/
5 5.1 (G1-G2) 2 5.1.1 2
SISTEMA DI RISCALDAMENTO AD ARIA costituito da: Generatore d'aria calda completamente assemblato meccanicamente in modo da costituire un'unit compatta e pronta all'uso previo collegamento alle tubazioni di alimentazione del kerosene e del gas ed allacciamento alle linee elettriche (escluso dalla nostra fornitura) Camera di combustione in lamiera di acciaio COR-TEN A completa di: - vetrino spia per controllo fiamma - intelaiatura di sostegno e appoggio in acciaio al carbonio verniciato sulla quale sono montate le seguenti apparecchiature: - bruciatore con valvola proporzionamento aria/combustibile, e boccaglio di protezione fiamma per circuito in pressione - servocomando elettrico modulante (4-20 mA) - cellula di rilevamento fiamma tipo U.V. - microinterruttore di basso fuoco - candela di accensione - trasformatore di accensione Quadro elettrico locale di comando bruciatore sul quale verranno montati: - pannello di allarme a 8 punti - controllo di fiamma - controllo tenuta valvole - pulsanti e spie Rack per treno Gas e Kerosene sul quale verranno montati e collegati idraulicamente ed elettricamente: - Treno gas principale costituito da rubinetto di intercettazione, filtro gas, riduttore di pressione, valvola di sicurezza, stabilizzatore di pressione, elettro valvole, - Treno Kerosene principale costituito da rubinetto di intercettazione, filtro gas, riduttore di pressione, valvola di sicurezza, stabilizzatore di pressione, elettro valvole, - Treno gas pilota costituito da rubinetto, (2) elettro valvole, pressostato min/gas Quadretto di comando locale per i bruciatori Pressostato aria di combustione e processo
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4 5.1.5
2 4
Pos.
Q.t
Descrizione
2.8
2/
5.1.6 2 5.1.7 2 5.2 (V4/V5) 2
5.3 5.4 6
2 2 1
Controllo automatico temperatura di mandata comprendente: - Termocoppie tipo J - Il regolatore elettronico Controllo temperatura di massima comprendente: - Termocoppie tipo J - Regolatore elettronico Ventilatori aria di combustione, in acciaio al carbonio verniciato completi di: - Portina di ispezione - Disco di raffreddamento comprensivo di carter - Telaio di base con slitte tendi cinghia Trasmissione a cinghie con carter - Antivibranti - Giunti tessili flessibili in aspirazione e mandata - Tappo di scarico Motore elettrico (vedi dati tecnici) KW / 2 poli + inverter (esclusi dalla nostra fornitura) Serie di condotti per l'aria di combustione in Fe360 GRUPPO DI ESTRAZIONE FUMANA La fornitura comprende: Condotto in lamiera di acciaio Corten A a valle del recuperatore R1 Ventilatore centrifugo di estrazione in acciaio Corten A completo di: - Girante in Corten A - Portina di ispezione - Disco di raffreddamento comprensivo di carter - Telaio di base con slitte tendi cinghia - Trasmissione a cinghie con carter - Antivibranti - Giunti tessili flessibili in aspirazione e mandata - Tappo di scarico Motore elettrico (vedi dati tecnici) KW / 4poli + inverter (esclusa dalla ns. fornitura)
6.1 6.2 (V3)
1 1
6.3
Pos. 7
Q.t 1
Descrizione GRUPPO RECUPERO CALORE (R1) 2.9
2/
7.1 (R1) 1 7.2 7.3 1 1
La fornitura costituita da: Scambiatore di calore aria-aria a sezioni premontate in fabbrica, costituito da: - Piastre tubiere in Alluminio - Tubi in Alluminio - Lamiere laterali di tamponamento coibentate in Alluminio Cassone ingresso fumana in lamiera in Acciaio Inox per fumana entrante completa di portina dispezione Cassone uscita fumana in lamiera in Acciaio Inox per fumana uscente completa di: - Portina dispezione -Telaio di sostegno dello scambiatore in profilati di acciaio inox Telaio porta filtri smontabile costruito in acciaio al carbonio contenente celle filtranti di pulizie per aria fresca entrante Filtro con rete di protezione in filo di acciaio e telai di contenimento per aria entrante (F1) Pressostato differenziale segnalazione filtro intasato (PDSAH-810) Cassoni laterali in lamiera di Corten A per aria fresca entrante ed uscente dal recuperatore completa di portina dispezione Ventilatore Assiale per aiuto aria di make-up completo di: - girante in alluminio presso fusa direttamente accoppiato al motore di Ns. fornitura e completo di morsettiera (da cablare carico cliente) - boccaglio aspirante - rete di protezione - Motore 5,5Kw/2poli (Siemens) [Fornitura Aerothermic] CONTROLLI AUTOMATICI Il controllo degli interblocchi funzionali e delle funzioni di seguito specificate sar effettuato da quadro touch sreen di ns fornitura. Lunit sopra descritta potr scambiare dati con lunit di controllo principale (DCS di fornitura del cliente).
7.4 7.5 7.5.1 7.6 7.7 1 1 2 1
8 1
Pos.
Q.t
Descrizione
2.10
2/
9 1 1 10 2 11 8+2 1 12
CONTROLLO TEMPERATURA ARIA COMBURENTE La fornitura costituita da: Sonda di temperatura (TIC tipo J) Servocomando elettromeccanico per azionamento serranda S4 (420 mA) CONTROLLO PRESSIONE ARIA COMBURENTE La fornitura costituita da: Trasmettitori elettronici di pressione differenziale CONTROLLO PROFILO SERRANDE CAPPA La fornitura costituita da: Attuatori Elettromeccanici per la regolazione in remoto dellapertura della serranda di parzializzazione dellaria di soffiaggio alla cappa. Sistema di protezione degli attuatori in lamiera di acciaio inox Sistema di Controllo umidit aria di estrazione (Vedi prezzo separato) 1 1 Sonda di umidit allossido di zirconio Quadro di controllo GRUPPO ALIMENTAZIONE CARBURANTE 1 1 Serbatoio carburante (Daily Tank) comprensivo di supporto Livello visivo comprensivo di valvole manuali di intercettazione e scarico galleggiante Pompa di rilancio del gasolio dal serbatoio generale al Daily Tank ( Esclusa dalla ns. Fornitura )
12.1 12.2 13 13.1 13.2
13.3 13.4
Pos.
Q.t
Descrizione
2.11
2/
13.5 13.6 1 13.7 1
Filtro da posizionare sulla linea del gasolio ( Esclusa dalla ns. Fornitura ) Tubazione di sfiato ed over flow comprensiva di rete antifiamma ( Esclusa dalla ns. Fornitura ) Valvola di ritegno ( Esclusa dalla ns. Fornitura )
2.12
3/
3. INSTRUCTIONS
Attention. In order to avoid future problems to the plant of air inhale and of the combustion products of the methane of the two semi-hood of the cylindrical monolucid (Duo System Yankee Hood plant ), it is necessary to verify that during the voyage , the goods have no damages as for the inner parts of various components. N.B: before to make the systems regulation of the plant or other operations not found into the manual , or if you find something abnormal or strange not written in the manual you have to stop the influx of wet product to the monolucid , reducing gradually the pressure of the monolucid and the temperature of the inhaling plant of air of the two semi-hoods, removing electrical tension and the pneumatic supply and then you will immediately inform AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. technicians.
GENERAL RULES FOR SECURITY

Duo System Yankee Hood plant, realized by Aerothermic S.r.l., was made focalising the attention on operators security , energetic efficiency and saving and also on the environment safe. We know that knowledge about every single part of all the Duo System Yankee Hood plant is basic to have the above condition, so we recommend you to read carefully this manual we are going to send you and to follow all the rules youll find in. You have to put attention especially to the following General Rules For Security and to all those parts with the symbol: Attention. AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. is not responsible for damages coming from: The installation of Duo System Yankee Hood plant with defectives products , non original, on the system ; Inobservance of the present manual; The use of different fans which are not mentioned in the Overhaul manual and the maintenance ; The use of things not subscribed by current rules about the prevention of accidents on the job; The lack of the expected maintenance The use of this system without having talked to an AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. SPECIALIZED TECHNICIAN, when the plant is in safe situation or when there are some anomalies. We remind you that according the rules for the improvement of the workers security, the employer is obliged to make the all staff, assigned to the surveillance of the plant , know about the risks connected to the use of this DUO SYSTEM YANKEE HOOD PLANT.
3.1
3/
Attention.
1.2.1 Forbidden to remove or to tamper with the securitys devices and protections: As foreseen by the rules for avoiding accidents on the job and by articles of the D. Lgs , the employer has to carry out all the foreseen securitys rules and he has to pretend , from his workers , to attend these rules . 1.2.2 Forbidden to repair or to over haut anything while the machine is going on : As foreseen by the rules for avoiding accidents on the job, maintenance and repairing works must be realized when the machines dont work. You have to remember that the plants pressure must reach zero before proceeding to work on the pressure set , then you have to verify that no pressure is still in the system and pipes have to be cold . You have to make all your workers informed of this also by obvious trusts. 1.2.3 Forbidden to make repair, registration and maintenance operations ON THE FAN OR ON THE PLANT in presence of current ( strike risk ): We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job , the customer is obliged to : a) Not to do maintenance works or any other thing when alternating current towards earth is superior to 25V . ( Thats to say that before doing any kind of work , you have to put the current off ) ; b) To currently protect the Duo System Yankee Hood plant with a good connection to an efficient ground cable into the paper mill .( So youll need to have a periodic control about more than every two years of the ground cable ); c) To realize a current connection to the pressure set according to EU rules (So youll need a certification from the installation of conformity as foreseen by law 46/90); 1.2.4 To verify periodically the functioning of all securities : We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job and according to the rules for the improvement of the workers security , its a customer duty to keep in a good stability , conservation and efficient way the plat and securities .
1.2.5 Attention. During all these maintenance, repairing or registration operations of the PLANT, in order to avoid risks linked to the accidental lighting of the fan and/or of the plant, you have always to put a segnalation trust on the control panel on the edge of the machine and on the current general switch. This trust should have this security indication: ATTENTION! DO NOT TOUCH! ASSISTENCE STAFF WORKING We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job, the customer has to adopt correct rules which allow people to work in security. 1.2.6 Machine conduction and all the normal maintenance works on the plant must be made according to the rules of the present manual and with specialized persons as AEROTHERMIC S.r.l council :
3.2
3/
We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job, the employer must assured a good formation to his operators . 1.2.7 Attention. BURN RISK TOUCHING AREAS WITH TEMPERATURE SUPERIOR TO 55OC DO NOT TOUCH DO NOT COME CLOSER We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job , the workers must not touch areas with dangerous temperature and that the hypothetical touch must be realized according to the limits foreseen by UNI EN 563 (55 C with a permanence of no more than 10 seconds with the metallic area). If the customer wants to remove temporary protection carters or the insulation surfaces of the two fans ,its required to well isolated those areas , putting on one or more of the above warning targets. We remind you that Aerothermic S.r.l. made an exact planning of the required with rock wool of the fan in order to guarantee the safety temperature of the same external surface ; according on these calculations the insulated external surface does not super , to regime , the max temperature of exercise of (34 C. +temp.mezzanine). We remind you that according to the rules for avoiding accidents on the job and according to the rules for the improvement of the workers security, the employer must give to those workers who are exposed to burn risks , work and protective clothes adapted to the working zone ( gloves , helmets ,protective jackets and overalls for rash and/r too hot bolt of water/steam , glasses and protective shoes , anti-noise bonnets and/or cover ears.. )
1.2.8 Attention. ZONE WITH DANGEROUS NOISINEES LEVELS DO NOT ENTER WITHOUT ANTINOISE BONNETS OR COVER EARS We remind you that, according to the laws for the prevention from the risk of noisiness, the employer is obliged to do annually the survey of the equivalent level of noise to which every worker is exposed every day and if the staff enter in contact with noises superior to 90 dB(A), periodic sanitary controls have to be made together with the usage of personal protections (anti-noise bonnets /cover ears). 1.2.9 Forbidden to remove or to modify the position of the fans anchorage or canalisations: AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. performed a precise study of the max expansions of the anchorages of the fan , of the canalisation of the machines which are part of the plant , linked to the max variations of temperature, admissible solicitations of the materials and of the anchorage positions as they result by the plants Layout. Every variation that the customer wants to bring to that position, has to be arranged with AEROTHERMIC S.r.l.. 1.2.10. Forbidden the substitution, the change or intervention of welding from the customer on every part of the plant : If you find some anomalies on the fan which need interventions to substitute some parts or components of the same and/or reparations welding , AEROTHERMIC S.r.l. has to be informed in advanced . 1.2.11 Forbidden the change, by the customer, of the temperatures setting of max turns of the plant and of the max turns of the superior fans to the foreseen limits: In order to avoid possible criccature, deformations and collapse of the fan, it is absolutely forbidden to make any kind of change of the max setting conditions of the exercise of the same.
3.3
3/
1.2.12 In the case in which you are not able to read the tag on the fan or if they are not on the fan, (v. fig. 3), which contain specific rules and safety, its an obligation of the customer to provide to the immediate substitution . 1.2.13 The commando zone of the fan and of its plant has to be good illuminated according to the national rules and it has to have an emergency illumination according to what is foreseen for the areas with high risk by national rules ( emergency illumination ). 1.2.14 The zones of the semi-hood of the monolucid, from which the fans inhale, are subjected to external burn risk due to the presence of paper powder; it is forbidden to leave to accumulate the powder , so the customer is obliged to periodically clean the aspirator itself . 1.2.15 The zones of the semi-fan of the monolucid, from which the fans inhale, are subjected to the risk of burst due to the presence of uncombustion methane and of carbon's dioxide in the inhaled air; the customer is obliged to provide to a periodic verification of the efficiency of the two (circumferentor )of flame rilevatori (one aloft and one in low ) which have to be present in front of the diffusers with double T dell. INSTALLATION Every modification in unit positioning or in functional solutions have to be done accordingly with Aerothermic Customer Service and with the applicable safety rules, When units are being lifted and located , it is advisable that only loading and shipping personnel be admitted to the work area. This is in conformity with general safety rules that provide for safety areas around raised loads, in addition to fork lift trucks and/or bridge cranes while in motion. LOADING AND POSITIONING PROCEDURES 1) The hood support frame has to be completely assembled. Before laying lay hoods to the frame verify that the frame has been fixed to the machine bean and the screw are tightened ; 2) The connection crossbars are mounted and fixed;In hood loading and moving use the wheel assembly ,for attaching steel ropes or chains suitable for the weights of the units and in a way such in the next images 3) Put the wheel and the synchronisme assemblies 4) Lift by crane exclusively the lower side of the hood section A by wheels and syncronisme (see par.3.3) 5) Put exactly the lower side of the hood section in rails on the blowing device on the machine beam. 6) Lift by chains, cables and crane only the upper side of the hood section A and couple it exactly on the related lower side previously rested (see par.3.4). To execute all these operations use only hook located on the roof of the upper hood section
3.4
3/
7) Regulate the hood position (see par.3.5) 8) Repeat all operations above described for the hood section B 9) N.B.: for every movement you have to consider each hood section such as a singular body and you have to lift them only by wheels (see par.3.5)
3.5
3/
3.1 START-UP Before start-up check the following:
A) Check that the fans rotation direction corresponds to the indication arrow placed on the fans B) Adjust the hood sections against the cylinder in order to obtain an even distance of 20-25 mm on closed position. (see par. 3.5) C) Check that the hood opening oleodynamic system is properly running D) Check that the control damper has free movements E) Check that the filter (F01) is assembled on the heat exchanger inlet. F) Check that all support are greased . G) Follow carefully IMECO instruction for the burner start-up.
Attention: during the start-up, it is necessary to be very carefully since more operators work simultaneously.
3.6
3/
3.2 OPERATION A) PRESETTING
Before the machine start-up the following presetting must be done: 1) Set the profile and the edge control dampers on the hood fully open 2) Set the blowing air temperature (TIC-100/TIC-200) at desired value between 150C and 520C 3) Set the limit air temperature (TIC-100/TIC-200) at 520C 4) Set the burner automatic block valve (for recirculatingair TIAH 121-221) at 520 C 5) Set the limit combustion air temperature (TIAH-100/ TIAH-200) at 120C 6) Set the burner automatic block valve(for combustion air TISH 400) at 140 C 7) Set the dampers S5/S8 fully open
B) START-UP At machine start the two hood section (W=wet-end/D=dry-end) have to be retracted from cylinder and with the hood open the start-up sequence is as follows: 1) START-UP AUTOMATIC CYCLE: a) The wet air exhaust fan V3 run b) The combustion air fans V4/V5 run c) The recirculating air fans V1/V2 run at presetted low speed (1200 rpm minimum speed) d) The make-up fan V6 run 2) Start the burners G1/G2 with its own push botton (the burners are at minimum heating capacity)
3.7
3/
C) OPERATION
Close the hood sections as soon as the paper is through the cylinder. When the paper machine is on normal production the following adjustment must be done: 1) Set the blowing air temperature (TIC-100/TIC-200) at required value (max 520 C) 2) Set the fan V1/V2 speed at required value. The nominal set point is 1870 rpm. For energy saving set in automatic with humidity sensor control . 3) Set the fan V3 speed at required value. The nominal set point is 1550 rpm. .to obtain the maximum capacity with the minimum heat consumption until the drying capacity decrease. 4) Close step by step the damper S8 till the hot air spread out from the wet end section. NOTE: Don't close the damper more than 30% 5) Close step by step the damper S5 till the hot air spread out from the dry end section. NOTE: Don't close the damper more than 30% 6) Close the edge control damper if the paper edges are overdryed. D) STOP a) In case of short interruption on paper production ( with plant in stand-by) open the hood in the following way: burners G1 and G2 will go to their minimum power; recirculating fan V1 V2 will go to the minimum speed value; exhaust air fan V3 will stay in standard operating conditions; hood is so ready for production restarting; b) In case of long interruption on paper production ( with plant stop): open the hood; stop burners G1 and G2; stop fans V4, V5, leave running V1 and V2 fans at the minimum range for 15 minutes about , in order to evacuate humidity from air circuits.
Warning! Job interaction involving several operators is typical of start/stop operations. Great care is therefore essential.
3.8
3/
D) HOOD OPENING
For regulating, control and cleaning operations it would be necessary to open the two halves hoods in order to facilitate the access to inspections areas. It is possible to open the hood in the following ways: a) automatically when , after operating breakdown the hood move from the cylinder b) manually from a selector located on local panel.
In case of fall oil pressure fail pressure a safety device on oil circuit prevent the unexpected movement of the hood. Verify always , before the access to the area between the two halves hoods the efficiency of this device. The authorized operator opening the hood must keep the key of the lock botton for manual opening command. For additional safety put always a stopping block between wheels and guide group such as in the following figure
3.9
3/
3.3 CLEANING WARNING! A)
Paper dust involves fire hazards! Please, put a particular attention to the plant cleaning!
- Only a perfectly clean of the hood gives its full efficiency and save it from corrosion The following parts are particularly to be cleaned: air filters, blow-box and negative chamber of the hood, the air-to-air economizer (R1) external hood jacket ductworks - The blow box and the negative chamber of the hood are to be checked and cleaned monthly - For cleaning operation open hood section and remove inspection port on the blow-box - The dust will be blown out of the inspection openings, if necessary use also a compressed air jet - During cleaning operation the inspection port on the negative and on the positive pressure duct can be open - After cleaning replace all the inspection covers - Clean the gas strainers according to the burner instructions - Clean the air-to-air economizer (R1) every three months at least - Clean the air filter (F1)on the economizer (R1) every week or more often if required.
B)
C) D) E)
To operate into plant units ( hood, combustion chamber, ducts) it is necessary to maintain the air flow , by exhaust air fan running and open inspection ports. Before to enter , stop the exhaust air fan pushing the emergency botton and verify the adequate temperature. There are risks of contact with hot surfaces and of toxic gases ( CO, Ch4) or Oxygen surplus /lack .The operators have to verify , by gas detectors , these possibilities and the entering into plant units have to be regulate by mill safety procedures Standing on the hood roof , for cleaning or control operations involves falling hazards and contact with moving crane. It is essential great care and several operators coordination . Operators acceding to hood roof must use stoppers that have to be fixed to the hook disposed on the hood.
3.10
3/
3.4 A) MAINTENANCE
-Recirculating air fans (V1/V2) -Check bearings every 6 months -Check frequently the fan impeller blades to prevent the accumulation of fibrous material which might cause bad balancing and dangerous vibrations -Check frequently the vibration of the fans.
B)
-Wet air exhaust fan (V3) -Check bearings every 3 months -Check frequently fan impeller blades, as for fans (V1/V2) -Check frequently the vibration of the fans
C)
-Combustion air fan (V4 V5) -Check bearings every 1 month -Check fan impeller blades once a year -Check frequently the vibration of the fans.
D)
-Make- up fan (V6) -Check bearings every 6 month -Check frequently fan nyeller blades once a year -Check frequently the vibration of the fans
E)
-Burners (G1/G2) -Follow the IMECO maintenance instructions
F) G)
Once a month check the hood wheels, clean and lubricate the bearings Every 6 months check the dampers shaft and connecting arms and lubricate NOTE: For maintenance and lubricating instructions of the fans, see chapter #5 The paper dust on the plant is particularly flammable; it is forbidden to execute welds or to use flames without before predispose the air flow on the machine units and the accurate cleaning of the working area.
3.11
3/
3.5 A) BEFORE START-UP
HOOD/YANKEE GAP ADJUSTMENT
Positioning the guide rail make sure that the dimension X is respected, in order to assure that the gap between the perforated sheet of the blow-box of the hood and the cylinder surface has to be aprox. 20mm as even as possible in warm conditions. The adjustment of this gap can be done by the screws "A. The screws "B" and "C" can be adjusted to regulate the correct positioning of the hood,. After the correct positioning of the hood ,take away the screw B and C in order to avoid damaging by the wheel bumping during its movement In the transversal positioning make sure that ,in hood cold conditions, inserted the drive wheel inits guide and verify that the tender wheel lay completely on the support ( see par. 4.6 and 4.7)
3.12
3/
3.6 AIR FLOW SYSTEM
TYPICAL WET SECTION
3.13
3/
TYPICAL DRY SECTION
3.14
3/
3.7 INSPECTION PORTS
3.15
3/
DANGER! DONT TOUCH

MAINTENANCE OPERATORS WORKING ON THE PLANT
-----------------------------3.16
4/
4. HOOD MOVEMENT SYSTEM
4.1
PNEUMATIC DIAGRAM (T15466)
4.1
DESCRIZIONE
SCHEMA PNEUMATICO DI APERTURA E CHIUSURA CAPPA

CODICE
C15466
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
28/02/2007 gventurini
1:1
FORMATO
A2
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
T15466
4/
4.2
PISTON Dia.250 mm PISTON RUN 200 mm (TRA/8250/M/200 NORGREN)
4.2
4/
TYPICAL SECTION
4.3
Back to Selector Page
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Pneumatic Cylinders ISO 6431, VDMA 24562 and NFE 49-003-1 Non-magnetic and Magnetic Piston Double Acting 32 to 320 mm G Comprehensive range for the utmost versatility G Conforms to ISO 6431, VDMA 24562 and NFE 49-003-1 G High performance, stability and reliability ideal for the demands of today G Supplied complete with piston rod locknut G Comprehensive range of standard mountings
Technical Data
Medium: Compressed air, filtered, lubricated or non-lubricated Standard: ISO 6431, VDMA 24562, NFE 49-003-1 Operation: Double acting RA/8000 Adjustable cushioning RA/8000/M Magnetic piston, adjustable cushioning Operating Pressure: 1 to 16 bar (1 to 10 bar for 250 and 320 mm) Operating Temperature: -20C* to +80C max. ( 32 to 125 mm) -10C* to +80C max. ( 160 to 320 mm)
*Consult our Technical Service for use below +2C
Ordering Examples
See page N 1.5.125.05
Mountings and Switches

See page N 1.5.125.04 and .05
Guide Blocks
QA/8000/51/* Plain Bearing QA/8000/61/* Roller Bearing See page N 1.5.125.18 to 20
Alternative Models
Single acting cylinders see page N 1.4.101
Cylinder Diameters: 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320 mm Strokes: Standard, see page N 1.5.125.03 Non-standard strokes (10 to 3000 mm) available Materials: Barrel: Anodised aluminium End covers: Pressure diecast aluminium ( 200 to 320 mm gravity cast aluminium) Piston rod: Stainless steel (Martensitic) Piston rod seals: Polyurethane ( 125 to 320 mm nitrile rubber) Piston seals: Polyurethane ( 125 to 320 mm nitrile rubber) O-rings: Nitrile rubber
Non-magnetic piston
Magnetic piston
2/01
Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N 1.5.125.01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Cylinder Variants
Symbol Model Non-magnetic piston RA/8000 CA/8000 SA/8000 RA/8000/W1 RA/8000/X1 Symbol Model Magnetic piston RA/8000/M CA/8000/M SA/8000/M RA/8000/W2 RA/8000/X2 Description Standard cylinder Cylinder with hard chromium plated piston rod Cylinder with stainless steel piston rod (Austenitic) Cylinder with special wiper/seal (suitable for applications with cement, plaster (stucco), Arizona sand, hoar-frost or ice ( 32 to 125 mm) Low friction cylinders ( 32 to 200 mm) Medium: Compressed air, filtered and non-lubricated recommended (1 to 10 bar) Cylinder with heat resistant seals (150C max.) Cylinder with extended piston rod Cylinder with extended piston rod and special wiper/seal (suitable for applications with cement, plaster (stucco), Arizona sand, hoar-frost or ice ( 32 to 125 mm). Cylinder with piston rod bellows Cylinder with piston rod bellows and heat resistant seals (150C max.) Cylinder without cushioning Low friction cylinders without cushioning ( 32 to 200 mm) Medium: Compressed air, filtered and non-lubricated recommended (1 to 10 bar) Cylinder with hydraulic ( 32 to 100 mm) Dimensions Page 6 6 6 6 6
T RA/8000 RA/8000/IU RA/8000/W5
T RA/8000/M RA/8000/MU RA/8000/W6
6 6 6
RA/8000/G TRA/8000/G RA/8000/W RA/8000/X3
RA/8000/MG TRA/8000/MG RA/8000/MW RA/8000/X4
6 6
H RA/8000/M
RA/8000/J RA/8000/W3
RA/8000/JM RA/8000/W4
RA/8000/IT
RA/8000/MT
Cylinder with double ended piston rod Cylinder with double ended piston rod and special wiper/seal (suitable for applications with cement, plaster (stucco), Arizona sand, hoar-frost or ice ( 32 to 125 mm) Four position cylinders ( 32 to 200 mm)
7 6
RA/8000/N1
RA/8000/N2
Cylinder with non-rotating piston rod ( 32 to 100 mm)
RA/8000/L2
RA/8000/L4
Cylinders with locking unit (PASSIVE). Locking is achieved by spring force on removal of the signal to the unit. Operating Pressure for locking unit: 4 to 10 bar Cylinder with Positioner ( 63 to 320 mm) Operation: The (electro-) pneumatic positioner is used for operating actuators by means of electrical/ pneumatic controllers with an analog output. Positioners: Electro Pneumatic Positioners*: Type: FOXBORO/ECKARDT, Basic-type SRI 986 SIEMENS, Basic-types 6DR3000-N/E, 6DR4000-N/E Pneumatic Positioner*: Type: FOXBORO/ECKARDT, Basic-type SRP 981 * Consult our Technical Service for technical data Operating Pressure: 2 to 6 bar Cylinder Diameters: 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320 mm Stroke Lengths: 100 to 600 mm Attention: The useable force for cylinders RA/8000/P1 to /P8 is 50% of the theoretical force
RA/8000/P1 to P8
9 + 10
For combinations of cylinder variants consult our Technical Service.
N 1.5.125.02
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M A/8 / /

Substitute T Substitute R C S Strokes (mm) 3000 max. Variants (non-magnetic piston) Substitute Standard None Special wiper/seal W1 Low friction X1 Piston rod bellow G Without cushioning W Without cushioning, low friction X3 Double ended piston rod J Double ended piston rod, special wiper/seal W3 Four position IT Non-rotating piston rod N1 Locking unit L2 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, left hand# P1 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, left hand## P2 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, right hand# P3 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, right hand## P4 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, left hand# P5 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, left hand## P6 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, right hand# P7 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, right hand## P8 Extended piston rod, special wiper/seal W5 Extended piston rod IU A/8/IU// /W5/ Extension (mm) # direct acting, ## reverse acting
Model Codes
Special Variants Heat resistant seals, 150C max. Piston Rod Material Stainless steel (Martensitic) Hard chromium plated Stainless steel (Austenitic) Threads Metric Series 8000
Substitute Ports: ISO 228 (G 1/8 to G 1) A Substitute 8
Cylinder Diameters (mm) Substitute 032, 040, 050, 063, 080, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320 Variants (magnetic piston) Substitute Standard M Special wiper/seal W2 Low friction X2 Piston rod bellow MG Without cushioning MW Without cushioning, low friction X4 Double ended piston rod JM Double ended piston rod, special wiper/seal W4 Four position MT Non-rotating piston rod N2 Locking unit L4 Extended piston rod MU Extended piston rod, special wiper/seal W6 A/8/MU// /W6/ Extension (mm) Note: If option is not required, disregard option position within part number eg. RA/8100/100. For combinations of cylinder variants consult our Technical Service.
Standard Strokes
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 Strokes (mm) 25 50 G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 80 G G G G G G G G G G G 100 G G G G G G G G G G G 125 G G G G G G G G G G G 160 G G G G G G G G G G G 200 G G G G G G G G G G G 250 G G G G G G G G G G G 320 G G G G G G G G G G G 400 G G G G G G G G G G G 500 G G G G G G G G G G G
2/01
N 1.5.125.03
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Mountings
Style A Style AK Style B, G Style C Style D Style D2 Style F Style FH Style H
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
Page 11 QM/8032/35 QM/8032/35 QM/8050/35 QM/8050/35 QM/8080/35 QM/8080/35 QM/8125/35 QM/8160/35 QM/8160/35 QM/8250/35 QM/8320/35 Style L
Page 17 QM/8025/38 QM/8040/38 QM/8050/38 QM/8050/38 QM/8080/38 QM/8080/38 QM/8125/38 QM/8160/38 QM/8160/38 Style M
Page 11 QA/8032/22 QA/8040/22 QA/8050/22 QA/8063/22 QA/8080/22 QA/8100/22 QM/8125/22 QM/8160/22 QM/8200/22 QM/8250/22 QM/8320/22 Style R
Page 11 QA/8032/21 QA/8040/21 QA/8050/21 QA/8063/21 QA/8080/21 QA/8100/21 QM/8125/21 QM/8160/21 QM/8200/21 QM/8250/21 QM/8320/21 Style S
Page 13 QA/8032/23 QA/8040/23 QA/8050/23 QA/8063/23 QA/8080/23 QA/8100/23 QM/8125/23 QM/8160/23 QM/8200/23 QM/8250/23 QM/8320/23 Style SS
Page 14 QA/8032/42 QA/8040/42 QA/8050/42 QA/8063/42 QA/8080/42 QA/8100/42 QA/8125/42 QA/8160/42 QA/8200/42 Style SW
Page 12 QM/8025/25 QM/8040/25 QM/8050/25 QM/8050/25 QM/8080/25 QM/8080/25 QM/8125/25 QM/8160/25 QM/8160/25 QM/8250/25 QM/8320/25 Style UF
Page 16 QA/8032/34 QA/8040/34 QA/8050/34 QA/8063/34 QA/8080/34 QA/8100/34 QA/8125/34 Style UH
Page 16 QA/8032/28 QA/8040/28 QA/8050/28 QA/8063/28 QA/8080/28 QA/8100/28 QM/8125/28 QM/8160/28 QM/8200/28 QM/8250/28 QM/8320/28 Style UL
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
Page 13 QA/8032/24 QA/8040/24 QA/8050/24 QA/8063/24 QA/8080/24 QA/8100/24 QM/8125/24 QM/8160/24 QM/8200/24 QM/8250/24 QM/8320/24 Style UR
Page 12 QM/8032/26 QM/8040/26 QM/8050/26 QM/8063/26 QM/8080/26 QM/8100/26 QM/8125/26 QM/8160/26 QM/8200/26 Style US
Page 15 QA/8032/27 QA/8040/27 QA/8050/27 QA/8063/27 QA/8080/27 QA/8100/27 QM/8125/27 QM/8160/27 QM/8200/27 Guide Blocks
Page 16 QA/8032/41 QA/8040/41 QA/8040/41 QA/8063/41 QA/8063/41 QA/8100/41 QA/8100/41 QA/8160/41 QA/8160/41 Guide Blocks **
Page 12 M/P19931 M/P19932 M/P19933 M/P19934 M/P19935 M/P19936 M/P19937 M/P19938 M/P19939 Locking Unit ***
Page 13 M/P19493 M/P19494 M/P19495 M/P19496 M/P19497 M/P19498 M/P19499 M/P19679 M/P19683 M/P19446 M/P19447 Bracket for Switches #
Page 17 QM/8025/32 QM/8040/32 QM/8050/32 QM/8050/32 QM/8080/32 QM/8080/32 QM/8125/32 QM/8160/32 QM/8160/32 QM/8250/32 QM/8320/32 Bracket for Switches ##
Page 16 QA/8032/40 QA/8040/40 QA/8050/40 QA/8063/40 QA/8080/40 QA/8100/40 QA/8125/40 QA/8160/40 QA/8200/40 Bracket for Switches ###
Page 14 QA/8032/43 QA/8040/43 QA/8050/43 QA/8063/43 QA/8080/43 QA/8100/43 QA/8125/43 QA/8160/43 QA/8200/43
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
Page 15 QA/8032/33 QA/8040/33 QA/8050/33 QA/8063/33 QA/8080/33 QA/8100/33 QM/8125/33 QM/8160/33 QM/8200/33 QM/8250/33 QM/8320/33
Page 14 M/P40310 M/P40311 M/P40312 M/P40313 M/P40314 M/P40315 M/P71355 M/P71356 M/P71357
Page 20 QA/8032/51/* QA/8040/51/* QA/8050/51/* QA/8063/51/* QA/8080/51/* QA/8100/51/*
Page 18 QA/8032/61/* QA/8040/61/* QA/8050/61/* QA/8063/61/* QA/8080/61/* QA/8100/61/*
Page 8 QA/8032/59 QA/8040/59 QA/8050/59 QA/8063/59 QA/8080/59 QA/8100/59 QA/8125/59
Page 21 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1 QM/27/2/1
Page 21 QM/31/032/22 QM/31/032/22 QM/31/032/22 QM/31/032/22 QM/31/080/22 QM/31/080/22 QM/31/080/22 QM/31/160/22 QM/31/160/22 QM/31/250/22 QM/31/320/22
Page 21 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22
# M/50, QM/34 or QM/134 ## QM/31, QM/32 or QM/132 ### QM/140 * Insert standard stroke length (50, 100, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, or 500) in mm. Consult our Technical Service for stroke lengths above 500 mm ** For Locking Cartridge see page 18 *** For Locking Cartridge see page 8
N 1.5.125.04
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Switches
Model Reed Solid state Pneumatic
M/50/LSU/.. M/50/RAC/5V M/50/EAP/.. M/50/EAN/..
M/50/LSU/CP M/50/EAP/CP M/50/EAN/CP
QM/33 TQM/33
QM/34 QM/134
QM/34/P QM/134/P
QM/31 TQM/31
QM/32 QM/132
QM/32/P QM/132/P
QM/140
Model Reed M/50/LSU/**V M/50/LSU/5U M/50/RAC/5V M/50/LSU/CP TQM/31/** QM/31/C/** QM/32/** QM/32/P TQM/33/** QM/33/C/** QM/34/** QM/34/P QM/34/S/** QM/34/N/**
Solid State M/50/EAP/**V M/50/EAP/CP M/50/EAN/**V M/50/EAN/CP QM/132/** QM/132/P QM/132/E/** QM/134/** QM/134/P QM/134/E/** QM/134/N/** QM/134/N/P QM/134/X/**
Voltage V a.c. 10 to 240 10 to 240 10 to 240 10 to 60 10 to 240 10 to 110 10 to 240 10 to 240 10 to 30 10 to 110 10 to 240
V d.c. 10 to 170 10 to 170 10 to 170 10 to 75 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 240 10 to 175 10 to 240 10 to 240 10 to 30 10 to 175 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 240 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 10 to 30 8,2
Current Max. 180 mA 180 mA 180 mA 180 mA 150 mA 150 mA 150 mA 150 mA 2A 0,25 A 1A 1A 1,5 A 0,25 A 1A 1A 0,5 A 1A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A 2,2 /1 mA
Temperature LED C -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +150 -20 to +80 -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +150 -20 to +80 -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -20 to +80 G -25 to +75 G
Features Changeover Plug M8x1 PNP PNP, plug M8x1 NPN NPN, plug M8x1 High Temperature Changeover High Temperature Changeover Output: Positive Output: Positive Output: Negative PNP PNP Pulse stretcher PNP PNP Pulse stretcher NPN NPN NAMUR
Cable Length 2, 5, 10 m 5m 5m 5m 2, 5, 10 m 5m 2, 5, 10 m 5m 5m 5 m 2, 5, 10 m 5m 5m 5m 2, 5, 10 m 5m 2, 5, 10 m 2, 5 m 2, 5, 10 m 5m 5m 2, 5 m 5m 5m 2, 5 m 5m 5m
Cable Type PVC 2 x 0,25 PUR 2 x 0,25 PVC 3 x 0,25 PVC 3 x 0,25 PVC 3 x 0,25 Silicone 2x0,75 PVC 3 x 0,5 PVC 2 x 0,75 PVC 3 x 0,34 Silicone 2x0,34 PVC 2 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,25 PVC 2 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,35 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,35 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,25 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,34 PVC 3 x 0,25 PVC 2 x 0,34
Plug-in Cable Straight M/P73001/5 M/P73001/5 M/P73001/5 M/P34692/5 M/P34614/5 M/P34692/5 M/P34614/5 M/P34614/5
90 M/P34615/5 M/P34615/5 M/P34615/5
Catalogue Page N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.005 N 4.3.021 N 4.3.021 N 4.3.021 N 4.3.021 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.051 N 4.3.025 N 4.3.025 N 4.3.025 N 4.3.055 N 4.3.055 N 4.3.055 N 4.3.055 N 4.3.055 N 4.3.055
Pneumatic QM/140
Operating Pressure 2 to 6 bar
Flow Rate 40 l/min
Orifice Size 2 mm
Temperature +60 C
Active Spot G
Connections For 3 mm I/D tubing
Catalogue Page N 4.3.061
** Insert cable length Full information on switches (technical data, polyurethane cable, dimensions etc.) please refer to relevant catalogue pages
Ordering Examples
Cylinders To order a basic 80 mm bore magnetic piston cylinder with a 50 mm stroke quote: RA/8080/M/50 Mountings To order a front flange mounting style G for 80 mm bore cylinder quote: QA/8080/22 Switches To order a reed switch with LED and 2 m cable length quote: M/50/LSU/2V Brackets for switches To order a bracket for magnetically operated switches M/50/LSU/2V; 80 mm bore cylinder quote: QM/27/2/1
2/01
N 1.5.125.05
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Theoretical Forces G Cushioning G Air Consumption

Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 Theoretical forces* (N) at 6 bar Outstroke Instroke 482 414 754 633 1178 990 1870 1680 3016 2722 4710 4416 7363 6882 12064 11310 18840 18090 29436 28236 48228 47292 Cushion length (mm) 19 22 24 24 27 34 41 45 45 60 65 Initial cushion volume (cm 3 ) 12,3 20,7 36 64 116 242 451 816 1324 2900 5200 Air consumption (l/cm stroke) at 6 bar Outstroke Instroke 0,056 0,048 0,088 0,074 0,137 0,114 0,218 0,195 0,35 0,32 0,55 0,51 0,86 0,79 1,41 1,32 2,20 2,10 3,44 3,30 5,63 5,41
*The useable force for cylinders RA/8000/P1 to P8 is 50% of the theoretical force.
BASIC DIMENSIONS RA/8000, RA/8000/M Standard Cylinders

A
WH L2 VD AM KW AP L 12 G PL EE Cushion screw L8 + stroke G PL EE VA E R Section
A-B
BA e 11
B e 11
RT
MM h 9
KK
KV
SW (A/F)
L9 BG
BH
80 to 320 mm BG
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
AM 22 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 72 84 96 L8 94 105 106 121 128 138 160 180 180 200 220
AP 3,5 4,5 6 10 8,5 9 10 18 18 22,5 22,5 L9 4 4 5 5 -
B e 11 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 65 75 90 110 L12 6 6,5 8 8 10 10 13 16 16 20 24
BA e 11 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 65 75 90 110 MM h 9 12 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40 50 63
BG 18 18 18 17,5 21,5 21,5 30 28,5 28,5 35 30 PL 13 15 18,5 19 19 18 22,5 21 21 29 30
BH (A/F) 6 6 8 8 19 19 24 32 32 36 46 R 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 72 89 110 140 175 220 270
E 47 53 65 75 95 115 140 183,5 224 280 350 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M 10 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 16 M 20 M 24
RT
EE G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 G1 SW (A/F) 10 13 17 17 22 22 27 36 36 41 55
G 27,5 32 31 33 33 37 46 50 50 58 60 VA 3 3,5 3,5 4 4 4 6 4 5 7 7
KK M 10 x 1,25 M 12 x 1,25 M 16 x 1,5 M 16 x 1,5 M 20 x 1,5 M 20 x 1,5 M 27 x 2 M 36 x 2 M 36 x 2 M 42 x 2 M 48 x 2 VD 6 6 6 6 6 6 15,5 15 15 13 13
BH
KV (A/F) 17 19 24 24 30 30 41 55 55 65 75 WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 80 95 105 120
KW 5 6 8 8 10 10 13,5 18 18 21 24 at 0 mm 0,51 kg 0,80 kg 1,33 kg 1,80 kg 3,25 kg 4,81 kg 8,00 kg 14,9 kg 21,7 kg 32,6 kg 59,8 kg
L2 20 22 27 29 33 36 45 58 67 80 90 per 25 mm 0,06 kg 0,08 kg 0,12 kg 0,13 kg 0,20 kg 0,23 kg 0,33 kg 0,55 kg 0,60 kg 0,92 kg 1,46 kg
N 1.5.125.06
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
CYLINDER VARIANTS RA/8000/J, RA/8000/JM Cylinders with Double Ended Piston Rod
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
ZM 146 165 180 195 220 240 290 340 370
L8 94 105 106 121 128 138 160 180 180
ZM + 2 x stroke L 8 + stroke
RA/8000/N1 and RA/8000/N2 Cylinders with Non-rotating Piston Rod
A
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 SW1 (A/F) 10 13 16 16 21 21
SW 1
Section
A-B
RA/8000/IT and RA/8000/MT Four-position Cylinders
L 10 + stroke 1 + stroke 2 L 8 + stroke 1 L11 L 8 + stroke 2
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
L8 94 105 106 121 128 138 160 180 180
L 10 247 278 294 325 357 387 462 532 560
L 11 7 8 8 9 9 9 12 12 10
2/01
N 1.5.125.07
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
RA/8000/G and RA/8000/MG Cylinders with Piston Rod Bellows

B
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
A 40 63 63 63 80 80 80 116 116 116 143
Maximum stroke per bellow 60 145 145 145 250 250 250 350 350 350 500
Piston rod extension B first bellow further bellow 30 25 50 32 40 32 40 32 50 45 50 45 50 45 70 60 70 60 70 60 110 100
RA/8000/L2, RA/8000/L4 Cylinders with Locking Unit

AB SW (A/F) AC L 8 + stroke AJ EE
AM
AO
B e 11
RT R VD AD AF WH AH AE AG AN AK AL E
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
AB 32 35.5 49 49 62 65 85 AO 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
AC 10 10 15 15 19 19 19 B e11 30 35 40 45 45 55 60
AD 12 12 16 15 16 18 27 E 48 56 68 82 100 120 140
AE 8 10 15 15 16 16 25 E1 50 58 70 85 105 130 150 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
AF 40 46 54 55 70 70 95 EE M5 M5 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 Model QA/8032/63 QA/8040/63 QA/8050/63 QA/8063/63 QA/8100/63 QA/8100/63 QA/8125/63
AG 4,2 4,5 11,5 7,5 10 10 11 L8 94 105 106 121 128 138 160 Forces * 600 N 1000 N 1500 N 2200 N 5000 N 5000 N 7000 N
AH 48 55 70 70 90 92 122 R 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 72 89 110
AJ 22,5 27,5 32,5 41 53 53 65 RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M 10 M 10 M 12
AK M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M8 M 10 SW (A/F) 8 8 13 13 17 17 17
AL 16 21 24 32 44 60 75 VD 10 10 12 12 20 23 32
E1
AM 70,5 74,5 91,5 108,5 141,5 141,5 152 WH 16 18 22 20 33 38 65
AN 8 10 12 12 16 16 20 Forces * 600 N 1000 N 1500 N 2200 N 5000 N 5000 N 7000 N
Separate Locking Cartridge
* Locking forces
N 1.5.125.08
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
RA/8000/P1 to RA/8000/P4 For Cylinders with FOXBORO/ECKARDT Positioner 63 to 320 mm

Left hand approx. L3 + stroke right hand approx. L4 + stroke left hand Reverse acting L7 max. Right hand L7 max.
Direct acting
KV
SW
L5
Port Sizes G 1/8 Cable Entry Pg 13,5 x 6-11
BA e 11
KK
RT
MM h9
L9 G G BG VA
BH R E
L 12 KW AM WH
L8 + stroke L1 + stroke RT BH
80 to 320 mm
Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, left hand# P1 BG Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, left hand## P2 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, right hand# P3 Cylinder with FOXBORO Positioner, right hand## P4 # direct acting, ## reverse acting Attention: The useable force for cylinders RA/8000/P1 to P4 is 50% of the theoretical force see table on page N 1.5.125.06
Model AM BA e 11 BG BH (A/F) E G KK KV (A/F) KW L1 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 (max.) L8 L9 L12 L13 MM h 9 R RT SW (A/F) VA WH at 0 mm per 25 mm
8063/P1 to ../P4 63 32 45 17,5 8 75 33 M 16 x 1,5 24 8 218 235 245 132,5 232 219 121 5 8 37,5 20 56,5 M8 17 4 97 6,1 kg 0,36 kg
8080/P1 to ../P4 80 40 45 21,5 19 95 33 M 20 x 1,5 30 10 229 240 250 134,5 239 219 128 10 47,5 25 72 M 10 22 4 101 7,6 kg 0,41 kg
8100/P1 to ../P4 100 40 55 21,5 19 115 37 M 20 x 1,5 30 10 239 240 250 144,5 248 219 138 10 57,5 25 89 M 10 22 4 101 9,2 kg 0,44 kg
8125/P1 to ../P4 125 54 60 32 24 140 46 M 27 x 2 41 13,5 275 253 263 159 262 219 160 13 70 32 110 M 12 27 6 115 13,0 kg 0,59 kg
8160/P1 to ../P4 160 72 65 28,5 32 180 50 M 36 x 2 55 18 300 258 268 174 277 219 180 16 90 40 140 M 16 36 4 120 20,5 kg 0,77 kg
8200/P1 to ../P4 200 72 75 28,5 32 220 50 M 36 x 2 55 18 310 265 275 202 305 248 180 16 110 40 175 M 16 36 5 130 29,3 kg 0,95 kg
8250/P1 to ../P4 250 84 90 35 36 280 58 M 42 x 2 65 21 365 300 310 228 327 274 200 20 140 50 220 M 20 41 7 165 42,3 kg 1,1 kg
8320/P1 to ../P4 320 96 110 30 46 350 60 M 48 x 2 75 24 380 295 305 265 357 309 220 24 175 63 270 M 24 55 7 160 70,7 kg 1,45 kg
2/01
N 1.5.125.09
L13
L6
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
RA/8000/P5 to RA/8000/P8 For Cylinders with SIEMENS Positioner 63 to 320 mm

approx. L3 + stroke right hand approx. L4 + stroke left hand
Left hand L7 max.
Right hand L7 max.
Direct or reverse acting
KV
SW
Port Sizes G 1/8 Cable Entry Pg 13,5 x 6-11 BA e 11
KK
L5
RT
MM h9
L9 G G BG VA
BH R E
L 12 KW AM WH
L8 + stroke L1 + stroke RT BH
80 to 320 mm BG Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, left hand# P5 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, left hand## P6 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, right hand# P7 Cylinder with SIEMENS Positioner, right hand## P8 # direct acting, ## reverse acting Attention: The usable force for cylinders RA/8000/P5 to P8 is 50% of the theoretical force see table on page N 1.5.125.06
Model AM BA e 11 BG BH (A/F) E G KK KV (A/F) KW L1 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 (max.) L8 L9 L12 L13 MM h 9 R RT SW (A/F) VA WH at 0 mm per 25 mm
8063/P5 to ../P8 63 32 45 17,5 8 75 33 M 16 x 1,5 24 8 218 235 245 132,5 230 155 121 5 8 37,5 20 56,5 M8 17 4 97 6,1 kg 0,36 kg
8080/P5 to ../P8 80 40 45 21,5 19 95 33 M 20 x 1,5 30 10 229 240 250 134,5 237 155 128 10 47,5 25 72 M 10 22 4 101 7,6 kg 0,41 kg
8100/P5 to ../P8 100 40 55 21,5 19 115 37 M 20 x 1,5 30 10 239 240 250 144,5 246 155 138 10 57,5 25 89 M 10 22 4 101 9,2 kg 0,44 kg
8125/P5 to ../P8 125 54 60 32 24 140 46 M 27 x 2 41 13,5 275 253 263 159 260 155 160 13 70 32 110 M 12 27 6 115 13,0 kg 0,59 kg
8160/P5 to ../P8 160 72 65 28,5 32 180 50 M 36 x 2 55 18 300 258 268 174 275 155 180 16 90 40 140 M 16 36 4 120 20,5 kg 0,77 kg
8200/P5 to ../P8 200 72 75 28,5 32 220 50 M 36 x 2 55 18 310 265 275 202 303 184 180 16 110 40 175 M 16 36 5 130 29,3 kg 0,95 kg
8250/P5 to ../P8 250 84 90 35 36 280 58 M 42 x 2 65 21 365 300 310 228 325 210 200 20 140 50 220 M 20 41 7 165 42,3 kg 1,1 kg
8320 /P5 to ../P8 320 96 110 30 46 350 60 M 48 x 2 75 24 380 295 305 265 355 245 220 24 175 63 270 M 24 55 7 160 70,7 kg 1,45 kg
N 1.5.125.10
2/01
L13
L6
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
MOUNTINGS QM/8000/35 Front or Rear Stud Mounting Style A

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431, Style MX1)
ZT + stroke WH BB DD TG
Q . /8000/22 Rear Flange Mounting Style B

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MF2)
Q . /8000/22 Front Flange Mounting Style G

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MF1)
UF ZF + stroke W MF MF TF FB
E1
Q./8000/21 - Foot Mounting Style C

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MS1) XA + stroke
AT
AH
AU SA + stroke
AO
AB TR E
AB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 18 22 26 33 TF 64 72 90 100 126 150 180 230 270 330 400
AH 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135 165 200 TG 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 72 89 110 140 175 220 270
AO 8 9 10 12 19 19 20 20 30 35 45 TR 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 115 135 165 200
AT 4 4 5 5 5 5 9 8 9 10 16 UF 80 90 110 125 154 186 224 280 320 395 475
AU 24 28 32 32 41 41 45 60 70 75 85 W 16 20 25 25 30 35 45 60 70 80 90
BB 17 17 23 23 28 28 34 42 42 50 60 WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65 80 95 105 120
DD M6 M6 M8 M8 M 10 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 16 M 20 M 24 XA 144 163 175 190 215 230 270 320 345 380 425
E 48 53 64 74 98 115 140 180 220 280 350 ZF 130 145 155 170 190 205 245 280 300 330 370
E1 50 55 65 75 100 120 140 180 220 280 350 ZT 137 152 166 181 202 217 259 302 317 355 400
FB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 18 22 26 33 Style A 0,02 kg 0,02 kg 0,05 kg 0,05 kg 0,08 kg 0,08 kg 0,14 kg 0,31 kg 0,31 kg 0,92 kg 1,46 kg
MF 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 30 Style B, G 0,25 kg 0,35 kg 0,70 kg 0,80 kg 1,35 kg 2,20 kg 1,70 kg 3,10 kg 4,60 kg 7,40 kg 13,6 kg
R 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 115 135 165 200 Style C 0,15 kg 0,18 kg 0,30 kg 0,39 kg 0,80 kg 0,95 kg 2,40 kg 3,50 kg 5,25 kg 9,50 kg 22,0 kg
SA 142 161 170 185 210 220 250 300 320 350 390
2/01
N 1.5.125.11
TG
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
QM/8000/25 Piston Rod Clevis Mounting Style F

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 8140)
RK CL CM LE CK h 11 KK
ER
CE
QM/8000/26 Front Hinge Mounting Style M

G1 CE RK
CA
D H2
L1
S G2 G3
K1 K2
M/P199 . . Bracket for Clevis Mounting Style SS

CN G 7 EM
R
G1
L1
CA H2
S K1 K2
G2 G3
CA 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135 H2 8 10 12 12 14 15 20 25 30
CE 40 48 64 64 80 80 110 144 144 168 192 KK M10x1,25 M12x1,25 M16x1,5 M16x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M27x2 M36x2 M36x2 M42x2 M48x2
CK h11 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 40 50 K1 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 118 122
CL 20 24 32 32 40 40 55 70 70 85 96 K2 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 156 162
CM 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 40 50 L1 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 2,5 2,5 3,2 4 4
CN G7 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 LE 20 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 72 84 96
D 11 11 15 15 18 18 20 20 24 R 10 11 13 15 15 19 22 31 31
EM 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 RK 28 32 41,5 41,5 50 50 62 95 95 106 121
ER 16 19 25 25 32 32 45 57 57 68 85 S 6,6 6,6 9 9 11 11 14 14 18
G1 21 24 33 37 47 55 70 97 105 Style F 0,09 kg 0,13 kg 0,33 kg 0,33 kg 0,67 kg 0,67 kg 1,35 kg 3,00 kg 3,00 kg 6,40 kg 8,70 kg
G2 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 88 90 Style M 0,24 kg 0,33 kg 0,81 kg 0,83 kg 1,42 kg 1,87 kg 3,85 kg 9,00 kg 10,60 kg
G3 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 126 130 Style SS 0,15 kg 0,20 kg 0,48 kg 0,50 kg 0,75 kg 1,20 kg 2,50 kg 6,00 kg 7,60 kg
N 1.5.125.12
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Q . /8000/23 Rear Clevis Mounting Style D

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MP2)
LH UB CB H 14 XD + stroke FL L
MR
Q . /8000/24 Rear Hinge Mounting Style L

(Corresponds to VDMA 24562 Part 2)
XD + stroke FL G1
EK f 8 D H2
K1 K2 LH
S G2 G3
M/P19 . . . Bracket for Clevis Mounting (wide clevis) Style SW

CK H 9
(Corresponds to VDMA 24562, Part 2)
EM
R
G1
L1
CA
S K1 K2
H2
G2 G3
CA 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135 165 200 K2 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 156 162 200 234
CB H14 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 90 90 110 120 L 13 16 17 22 22 27 31 35,5 36 45 50
CK H9 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30 40 45 L1 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 2,5 2,5 3,2 4 4 2 2
D 11 11 15 15 18 18 20 20 24 33 40 LH 52 60 68 79 99 119 139 181 181 218 238
EK f8 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30 40 45 MR 9 12 12 15 15 20 25 30 30 40 45
EM 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 90 90 110 120 R 10 11 13 15 15 19 22 31 31 40 45
FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 70 80 S 6,6 6,6 9 9 11 11 14 14 18 22 26
G1 21 24 33 37 47 55 70 97 105 128 150 UB 45 52 60 70 90 110 130 170 170 200 220
G2 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 88 90 110 122 XD 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335 375 420
G3 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 126 130 160 186 Style D 0,11 kg 0,16 kg 0,22 kg 0,34 kg 0,54 kg 0,90 kg 2,70 kg 4,30 kg 6,10 kg 19,0 kg 30,5 kg
H2 8 10 12 12 14 15 20 25 30 35 40 Style L 0,16 kg 0,23 kg 0,36 kg 0,52 kg 0,82 kg 1,32 kg 5,40 kg 10,6 kg 14,1 kg 32,4 kg 52,5 kg
L1
K1 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 118 122 150 170 Style SW 0,05 kg 0,07 kg 0,14 kg 0,18 kg 0,28 kg 0,42 kg 2,70 kg 6,30 kg 8,00 kg 13,4 kg 22,0 kg
2/01
N 1.5.125.13
CA
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
QA/8000/42 Rear Clevis Mounting Style D2

B2 B1 H 14 XD + stroke FL R1 B3 EK1 h 9 D H2 K1 K2 S G2 G3 CH L1
R2
QA/8000/43 Universal Rear Hinge Mounting Style UL

XD + stroke FL G1
M/P . . . . . Bracket Hinge for Clevis Mounting Style US

CN H 7
EN -0,1 EU
ER
G1
D L1 CH H2
S K1 K2
G2 G3
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
B1 H14 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 G3 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 126 130
B2 34 40 45 51 65 75 97 122 122 H2 8 10 12 12 14 15 20 25 30
B3 3,3 4,3 4,3 4,3 4,3 4,3 6,3 6,3 6,3 K1 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 118 122
CH 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 115 135 K2 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 156 162
CN H7 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 L1 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 2,5 2,5 3,2 4 4
D 11 11 15 15 18 18 20 20 24 R1 11 12 14,5 18 22 22 30 36 38
EK h9 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 R2 17 20 22 25 30 32 42 46 49
EN -0,1 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 S 6,6 6,6 9 9 11 11 14 14 18
ER 16 19 21 24 28 30 40 44 48 XD 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335
EU 10,5 12 15 15 18 18 25 28 28 Z 13 13 13 15 15 15 15 15 15
FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 Style D2 0,20 kg 0,23 kg 0,36 kg 0,55 kg 0,90 kg 1,45 kg 2,70 kg 4,30 kg 6,10 kg
G1 21 24 33 37 47 55 70 97 105 Style UL 0,39 kg 0,47 kg 0,82 kg 1,14 kg 1,93 kg 2,85 kg 5,80 kg 10,70 kg 15,20 kg
G2 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 88 90 Style US 0,19 kg 0,24 kg 0,46 kg 0,59 kg 1,03 kg 1,40 kg 3,10 kg 6,40 kg 9,10 kg
N 1.5.125.14
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Q . /8000/27 Rear Eye Mounting Style R

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MP4)
XD + stroke FL EW L1 CD H 9 MR
QA/8000/33 Universal Rear Eye Mounting Style UR

XD + stroke EN FL CN H 7
Z Z
ER
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
CD H9 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 30 30 -
CN H7 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 40 50
EN 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 49 60
ER 16 19 21 24 28 30 40 44 48 50 58
EW 25,8 27,8 31,7 39,7 49,7 59,7 69,7 89,7 89,7 -
FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 55 60 70 80
L1 13 16 17 22 22 27 33 35,5 37 -
MR 9 12 12 15 15 20 25 30 30 -
R 14,5 18 19 24 24 29 36 41 42 47 52
XD 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 315 335 375 420
Z 13 13 13 15 15 15 15 16 16 10 8
Style R 0,09 kg 0,11 kg 0,17 kg 0,24 kg 0,37 kg 0,59 kg 3,20 kg 6,10 kg 6,80 kg -
StyleUR 0,17 kg 0,25 kg 0,40 kg 0,55 kg 0,90 kg 1,50 kg 2,70 kg 4,60 kg 7,30 kg 16,5 kg 26,0 kg
2/01
N 1.5.125.15
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Q . /8000/28 Centre Trunnion Mounting Style H

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MT4)
QA/8000/40 Adjustable lntermediate Trunnion Mounting Style UH

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 6431 and VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MT4)
Situation Style ' UH' R TD e 9 UW Grease nipple XV min XV max + stroke L Situation Style ' H'
TL
TM h 14
Note: Style H: These mountings are only supplied assembled complete with the cylinder. Unless otherwise specified, units will be supplied with dimension XV plus half the stroke length. Grease nipple supplied as standard on cylinders 125 mm to 320 mm bore. Style UH: It is most important that the locking screws which secure the mounting to the tie rod are tightened to the torque figures shown in the table below. For maximum energy input, consult our Technical Service. Grease nipple supplied as standard on cylinders 125 mm to 200 mm
QA/8000/34 Front or Rear Detachable Trunnion Mounting Style FH

(Corresponds to VDMA 24562 Part 2, Style MT 5/6)
L1 R TD e 9 UW 1 XH L3 XL + stroke TL
D H11 TM h 14
QA/8000/41 Swivel Bearing Style S

For Trunnion Mountings Style H, FH, UH
D 3 D 1 H7 T1
D 2 A B1
H3
H1
F x 45
C B2
A 32 36 36 42 42 50 50 60 60 TD e9 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 32 40 50
B1 46 55 55 65 65 75 75 92 92 TL 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 32 40 50
B2 18 21 21 23 23 28,5 28,5 39 39 TM h14 50 63 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 320 400
C 10,5 12 12 13 13 16 16 21,5 21,5 T1 6,8 9 9 11 11 13 13 15,5 15,5
D H11 30 35 40 45 45 55 60 UW 50 58 70 80 100 126 152 192 240 318 400
D 1 H7 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 32 UW 1 50 55 65 75 100 120 145
D2 6,6 9 9 11 11 14 14 18 18 XH 18 20 25 25 32 32 40
D3 11 15 15 18 18 20 20 26 26 XL 128 145 155 170 188 208 250
F x 45 1 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 2 2 2,5 2,5 XV min. 63,5 74 82 84 93 107 136 155 170 193 215
H1 30 36 36 40 40 50 50 60 60 XV max. 82,5 91 98 111 127 133 154 185 200 217 245
H3 15 18 18 20 20 25 25 30 30 Torque 4 Nm 4 Nm 8 Nm 8 Nm 15 Nm 20 Nm 25 Nm 40 Nm 40 Nm
L 20 24 28 28 28 38 50 50 50 60 70 Style FH 0,20 kg 0,38 kg 0,60 kg 1,10 kg 1,90 kg 3,50 kg 6,50 kg
L1 16 20 24 24 28 38 50 Style H 0,16 kg 0,35 kg 0,65 kg 0,85 kg 1,20 kg 2,30 kg 3,30 kg 5,30 kg 9,40 kg 18,0 kg 30,0 kg
L3 8 10 12 12 14 19 25 Style UH 0,16 kg 0,35 kg 0,65 kg 0,85 kg 1,20 kg 2,30 kg 3,30 kg 5,30 kg 9,40 kg
R 1 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 2 2 2,5 2,5 3,2 3,2 Style S 0,11 kg 0,16 kg 0,16 kg 0,23 kg 0,23 kg 0,42 kg 0,42 kg 0,84 kg 0,84 kg
N 1.5.125.16
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
QM/8000/38 Piston Rod Swivel Mounting Style AK

SW 3 SW 2 SW 4 SW 1
KK
B1 L2 L
QM/8000/32 Universal Piston Rod Eye Mounting Style UF

(Corresponds to DIN ISO 8139)
CE CN H 7 EN -0,1
KK
ER
LE
AX
AX 20 22 28 28 33 33 51 56 56 60 65 L2 20 24 32 32 40 40 54 72 72
B1 5 6 8 8 10 10 13,5 18 18 LE 15 17 22 22 26 26 36 41 41 46 59
CE 43 50 64 64 77 77 110 125 125 142 160 SW 1 (A/F) 19 19 30 30 30 30 40 50 50
CN H7 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 35 35 40 50 SW 2 (A/F) 12 12 19 19 19 19 24 36 36
EN -0,1 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 43 43 49 60 SW 3 (A/F) 17 19 24 24 30 30 41 55 55
ER 14 16 21 21 25 25 35 40 40 45 58 SW 4 (A/F) 30 30 42 42 42 42 55 75 75
F 26 26 34 34 42 42 40 78 78 Z 13 13 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 17 12
KK M 10 x 1,25 M 12 x 1,25 M 16 x 1,5 M 16 x 1,5 M 20 x 1,5 M 20 x 1,5 M 27 x 2 M 36 x 2 M 36 x 2 M 42 x 2 M 48 x 2 Style AK 0,20 kg 0,20 kg 0,65 kg 0,65 kg 0,72 kg 0,72 kg 1,70 kg 5,40 kg 5,40 kg
2/01
N 1.5.125.17
Z Z
KK
L 73 77 106 106 122 122 147 251 251 Style F 0,09 kg 0,13 kg 0,33 kg 0,33 kg 0,67 kg 0,67 kg 1,35 kg 3,00 kg 3,00 kg 6,40 kg 8,70 kg
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
QA/8000/61/* Guide Blocks with Roller Bearings

CA CB +
* * + stroke
CC CF 0,2 T 0,2 CK CY DD 5 DG DC DF CX 0,2 DJ Centering sleeve 2,5 DL
VI
**
CD CH
CE DM CG
DH H7 x 2,5 deep
CJ CO -0,3 DE 0,2 2,5 + - 0,1 CV f7 CW
CT
Safety zone
* * (28 min)
CI
DH H7 CN
**
DK f6 CZ CX 0,2 CH
* * = Notice adjustment range Separate Locking Cartridge

Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 Model QA/8032/63 QA/8040/63 QA/8050/63 QA/8050/63 QA/8080/63 QA/8080/63 Forces * 600 N 1000 N 1500 N 1500 N 3000 N 3000 N
DB 0,3
DA -0,3
DH H7 x 2,5 deep
CR
CP
CS
BLANKING PLUG (remove when using locking cartridge)
* Locking forces per piece
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100
CA** 177 192 237 237 280 280 CP 90 110 130 145 180 200
CB + ** 100 + 5 111 + 5 128 + 10 128 + 10 151 + 10 156 + 10 CR 74 87 104 119 148 172
CC 65 69 65 97 112 112 CS 50,5 58,5 70,5 85,5 105,5 130,5
CD 28 33 40 40 50 55 CT (A/F) 17 19 24 24 30 30
CE 12 12 15 15 20 20 CV f7 12 16 20 20 25 25
CF 0,2 15,3 23 33,8 29,3 37 40,5 CW 61 69 85 100 130 150
CG 6,5 6,5 9 9 11 11 CX 0,2 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 72 89 DL 70,5 74,5 91,5 91,5 141,5 141,5
CH M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 CY (A/F) 5 6 6 6 8 8 DM 14 14 16 16 20 20
CI** 84,5 88 94 98,5 114 115,5 CZ 125 140 150 182 215 220 T 0,2 32,5 38,0 46,5 56,5 72,0 89,0
CJ (A/F) 13 15 22 22 27 27 DA 0,3 50 58 70 85 105 130 at 0 mm 1,20 kg 2,20 kg 3,60 kg 4,60 kg 8,70 kg 11,0 kg
CK 5 6 6 6 7 7 DB 0,3 45 54 63 80 100 120 per 100 mm 0,18 kg 0,32 kg 0,49 kg 0,49 kg 0,77 kg 0,77 kg
CN 60,5 67 75,5 80 92 93 DC 6,6 6,6 9 9 11 11
CO 0,3 97 115 137 152 189 213 DD 11 11 15 15 18 18
Cylinder DE 0,2 DF DG DH H7 DJ DK f6 32 78 M6 22,5 9 M5 9 40 84 M6 27,5 9 M5 9 50 100 M8 32,5 11 G 1/8 11 63 105 M8 41 11 G 1/8 11 80 130 M 10 53 13 G 1/8 13 100 150 M 10 53 13 G 1/8 13 ** Notice adjustment range Note: Supplied complete with mounting screws for cylinders and two centering sleeves.
N 1.5.125.18
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
Maximum load for QA/8000/61/*

Centre of gravity Centre of gravity of load capacity f Outstroke Outstroke
Max. load capacity is dependent on the outstroke of a horizontally installed guide unit. In the case of short stroke operation, the load capacity figures taken from the diagram must be multiplied by the correction factor (diagram 2). In the curves of load capacity (diagram 1), the short stroke corrections have already been taken into account for an outstroke > 60 mm.
The total deflection of guide rods will be determined by the addition of the amount of deflection caused by own weight (according to diagram 3) plus the amount of deflection due to load capacity (according to diagram 4).
Max. load capacity depending on outstroke

(diagram 1)
Load capacity (N) 500 400 300
80
Deflection caused by own weight

(diagram 3)
Deflection ( mm ) f 2,5 2,0 8032 1,5
Deflection caused by a load of 10 N

(diagram 4)
Deflection ( mm ) f 2,5 8032 2,0
(diagram 2)
Correction factor
1,0
0,9 0,8
80 -8 10
1,5
8040 8050 - 8063 8080 - 8100
200 100
80
80 4 803 0 2
50
0,7
1,0
1,0 8040 0,5 8050 - 8063 8080 - 8100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Outstroke
-8
06
0,6 0,5
0,5
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 ( mm ) Outstroke
20
40 60 Stroke ( mm )
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Outstroke
( mm )
( mm )
Reduction of load capacity for short-stroke operation In the case of shock load applications, the figures given in the diagrams above must be reduced by a factor of 2.
2/01
N 1.5.125.19
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
QA/8000/51/* Guide Blocks with Plain Bearings

AK
** + stroke
AJ AO AG AX AV AW
AD
AE
AF AG AM AH AC +
**
**
= Notice adjustment range
F
AW AG AN
AZ
BB BA
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100
AC + ** 69 + 2 74 + 2 91,5 + 4 92 + 4 106 + 6 111 + 6 AP 100 106 125 132 165 185
AD 12 12 15 15 15 15 AR 90 100 120 125 155 175
AE (A/F) 15 15 22 22 27 27 AS 74 80 96 104 130 150
AF (A/F) 17 19 24 24 30 30 AT 78 84 100 105 130 150
AG M6 M6 M8 M8 M 10 M 10 AV 45 50 60 70 90 110
AH 10 10 12 12 15 15 AW 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 72 89
AJ 32,5 38 46,5 56,5 50 70 AX 6,6 6,6 9 9 11 11
AK** 110 122 135 153 180 199 AZ 48 56 66 76 98 118
AL 58 64 80 95 130 150 BA 76 85 99 114 134,5 153,5
AM 10 12 12 12 16 16 BB 9 11 19 15 25 28,5
AN 6 6 6 7 9 9 at 0 mm 1,00 kg 1,20 kg 1,80 kg 2,20 kg 4,10 kg 5,80 kg
AW
AR
AP
AS
AL
AT
AO 9 11 19 15 14 19 per 100 mm 0,06 kg 0,09 kg 0,09 kg 0,09 kg 0,16 kg 0,16 kg
** Notice adjustment range Note: Supplied complete with mounting screws for cylinder
Maximum load for QM/8000/51
F (N) 1000 500 8100 8080 100 50 8063 8050 8040 8032 10 10 50 100 500 Stroke ( mm )
N 1.5.125.20
2/01
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKETS QM/27/2/1 Bracket Switches: M/50, QM/34 and QM/134 ( 8 mm)
12
Switch mounting bracket
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
A 9 8 7 7 7 2 -4 - 10 - 17
B 7 8 5 7 4 2 -3 -9 - 14
Weight 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg 0,010 kg
B Magnetically operated switch
QM/31/000/22 Bracket
Switches: QM/31, QM/32 and QM/132
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320
A 4,5 5,5 4,5 4,5 1,5 0,5 -1 0 -4 -3 - 21
B 38 43 48 53 61 68 79 91,5 106 138 154
Weight 0,026 kg 0,026 kg 0,026 kg 0,026 kg 0,028 kg 0,028 kg 0,028 kg 0,023 kg 0,023 kg 0,041 kg 0,080 kg
Switch mounting bracket A
B Magnetically operated switch
QM/140/010/22 Bracket with Holding Strap
Switch: QM/140
Switch mounting bracket
Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 31,5 30,5 31,5 29,5 30,5 30
Weight 0,020 kg 0,020 kg 0,020 kg 0,020 kg 0,020 kg 0,020 kg
Pneumatic switch
2/01
N 1.5.125.21
RA/8000, RA/8000/M
SPARES
26
11
10
Model Cylinder 32 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 RA/8032 RA/8032/M RA/8040, RA/8040/M RA/8050, RA/8050/M RA/8063, RA/8063/M RA/8080, RA/8080/M RA/8100, RA/8100/M RA/8125, RA/8125/M RA/8160, RA/8160/M RA/8200, RA/8200/M RA/8250, RA/8250/M RA/8320, RA/8320/M
Spares kit QA/8032/00 QA/8032/00 QA/8040/00 QA/8050/00 QA/8063/00 QA/8080/00 QA/8100/00 QA/8126/00 QA/8160/00 QA/8200/00 QA/8250/00 QA/8320/00
Comprising Item 2 5 6 10 11 26
Description Piston rod seal Cushion seal Sealing ring Piston seal Wear ring O-ring ( 32 to100 mm)
Quantity 1 2 2 2 1 1
Piston rod Item 1 RM/P19966/* SM/P19966/* RM/P19967/* RM/P19968/* RM/P19969/* RM/P19970/* RM/P19971/* RM/P30988/* RM/P30989/* RM/P30990/* RM/P19374/* RM/P19392/*
* Insert stroke length Note: Please quote the cylinder type number when ordering spares kits and piston rods.
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures can exceed those listed under Technical Data. Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not within published specifications, consult NORGREN. Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or damage to equipment in the event of such failure. System designers must provide a warning to end users in the system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode cannot be adequately provided. System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these products.
N 1.5.125.22
2/01
4/
4.3
BASE + ELECTRIC VALVE G (24 V) (UM22354/172/60/23N NORGREN)
4.4
4/
4.4
FLOW CONTROL (T1000-C4800 NORGREN)
4.5
Block Form Flow Regulators T1000 Series Uni-Directional

M5,
1 8"
1 2"
BSPP or NPT
q Compact size/low weight/In-line units q High flow performance q Suitable for panel and wall mounting q Two gain flow control q Adjustment can be locked q Captive regulator needle will not blow out when unscrewed q Adjusting knob position line
Technical Data Medium: Compressed air, filtered, lubricated or non lubricated, inert gases. Operation: Uni-directional flow control. Mounting: In-line. Panel mounted by hexagonal mounting nut. Wall mounted by through-holes in regulator body. (Note: M5 ported units cannot be wall or panel mounted) Port size: BSPP and M5 T1000M0500 1 8 T1000C1800 1 4 T1000C2800 3 8 T1000C3800 1 2 T1000C4800 NPT (Not Available) T1000A1800 T1000A2800 T1000A3800 T1000A4800
Ordering Information To order, quote product number from table overleaf: e.g. T1000C1800 for 1 8 BSPP model. T1000A2800 for 1 4 NPT model. Alternative Models: M/800 range of heavy duty regulators see page 5.9.051.01 M/600 range of heavy duty panel mounting flow regulators. see page 5.9.041.01 S/518 Precision flow regulator (air & hydraulic) see page 5.9.031.01
Operating pressure: 1-10 bar (2-10 bar for M5) Operating Temperature: -20C to 80C (-5C to 60C for M5)
Consult our technical service for use below +2C
Materials M5: Plastic body with brass thread inserts, Nitrile seals, Nickel plated needle. 1 8, 1 4: Zinc alloy body, Nitrile seals, brass needle and internal parts, external parts in aluminium alloy. 3 8, 1 2: Aluminium alloy body, Nitrile seals, brass needle and internal parts, external parts in aluminium alloy.
M5
1/ to 1/ 8 2
04/96
Our policy is one of continuous research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/UK 5.9.001.01
Block Form Flow Regulators
General Information
Model Port Connection NPT port Female thread T1000M0500 T1000C1800 T1000C2800 T1000C3800 T1000C4800 T1000A1800 T1000A2800 T1000A3800 T1000A4800 M5
1 8
Maximum Regulating Flow C* Flow Factor CV** BSPP port 0,26 0,06 0,48 0,12 1,31 0,32 4,29 1,05 6,59 1,61 0,48 0,12 1,31 0,32 3,85 0,94 5,67 1,39 NPT port
Free Flow Flow Factor BSPP port 0,16 0,04 0,5 0,12 1,31 0,32 5,87 1,44 7,14 1,75
C* CV** NPT port
Minimum Operating Pressure Bar 2
Opening Pressure (N-R Valve) Bar 2 <0,1 <0,1 <0,1 <0,1
Weight (gms) gms 12 65 115 150 180
Spares
M or BSPP
Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available
0,5 0,12 1,31 0,32 5,16 1,26 6,75 1,65
1 1 1 1
1 4
3 8
1 2
*C :measured in dm3/(s.bar) **Cv :measured in US gal/min
Model T1000M0500
Model
L P
T1000 M0500 M5 25,0 16,0 33,0 10,8
T1000 C1800 G1 8 34,0 20,0 51,0 16,5 24,0 4,5
T1000 A1800
1 8 NPT
T1000 C2800 G1 4 45,0 25,4 61,5 20,8 32,0 4,5 19,0 9,7 M14x1 10 17a/f 22.5 14,5 4,0
T1000 A2800
1 4 NPT
T1000 C3800 G3 8 58,0 32,5 78,5 27,0 43,0 6,5 28,0 13,0 M20x1 14a/f 24a/f 29,0 20,5 4,0
T1000 A3800
3 8 NPT
T1000 C4800 G1 2 65,0 36,0 82,0 30,5 50,0 6,5 30,0 15,0 M20x1 14a/f 24a/f 32.5 20,5 4,0
T1000 A4800
1 2 NPT
A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm) E (mm) F (mm) G (mm)

D
34,0 20,0 51,0 16,5 24,0 4,5 16,0 8,0 M12x1 10 14a/f 17,0 12,5 4,0
45,0 25,4 61,5 20,8 32,0 4,5 19,0 9,7 M14x1 10 17a/f 22.5 14,5 4,0
58,0 32,5 78,5 27,0 43,0 6,5 28,0 13,0 M20x1 14a/f 24a/f 29,0 20,5 4,0
65,0 36,0 82,0 30,5 50,0 6,5 30,0 15,0 M20x1 14a/f 24a/f 32.5 20,5 4,0
H (mm) J (mm) 10,0 5,0 10,0 K (mm) L (mm)
16,0 8,0 M12x1 10 14a/f
M (mm)
A J
N (mm) P (mm) panel hole max panel thickness 14,0
17,0 12,5 4,0
Model T1000C or T1000A
NPT according to ANSI B 1 20 1 G according to BS 2779/ISO 228/1 Note: Washer and Nut for Panel Mounting are delivered as standard.
G L
M (a/f or)knurled) N H D
P B
K A J
N/UK 5.9.001.02
04/96
Block Form Flow Regulators
Flow vs Turns at 6 bar (drop pressure = 6 - 0 bar) T1000M0500

Flow in Nl/min
T1000C1800
Flow in Nl/min
T1000C2800
Flow in Nl/min
600
100 80 60 40 20
250 200 150 100 50 0.5 1 2 2.5 4 5
500 400 300 200 100
1.5
3.5
4.5
10
11
12
10
11
12
Turns
Turns
Turns
T1000C3800
Flow in Nl/min
3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500
T1000C4800
Flow in Nl/min
3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500
10
12
14
16
10
12
14
16
Turns
Turns
For details of NPT flow factors see General information table above
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures can exceed those listed under Technical Data. Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not within published specifications, consult Norgren. Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or damage to equipment in the event of such failure. System designers must provide a warning to end users in the system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode cannot be adequately provided. System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these products where applicable.
04/96
N/UK 5.9.001.03
4/
4.5
QUIK DISCARGE (6050 AIGNEP)
4.6
4/
4.6
(E2A-M30KS15-WP-B1 2M PNP N.O. OMRON)
LIMIT SWITCHES
4.7
Cylindrical Proximity Sensor
E2A
Extended Range DC-3 Wire Proximity Sensors
Ensures a sensing distance approximately 1.5 to 2 times longer than standard proximity sensors. Minimizes collisions. Full range of standard sizes (M8, M12, M18 and M30; both long and short barrels). Choose from prewired, M8 or M12 connector versions.
Ordering Information (Shaded models are normally stocked.)

Size Type M8 Shielded Sensing Connection distance 2.0 mm Pre-wired Body material Model number Thread Length Output (overall length) configuration Operation mode NO PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08KS02-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1 E2A-S08KS02-M1-C1 E2A-S08LS02-M1-B1 E2A-S08LS02-M1-C1 E2A-M08KS02-M1-B1 E2A-M08KS02-M1-C1 E2A-M08LS02-M1-B1 E2A-M08LS02-M1-C1 E2A-S08KS02-M5-B1 E2A-S08KS02-M5-C1 E2A-S08LS02-M5-B1 E2A-S08LS02-M5-C1 E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08KN04-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1 E2A-S08KN04-M1-C1 E2A-S08LN04-M1-B1 E2A-S08LN04-M1-C1 E2A-M08KN04-M1-B1 E2A-M08KN04-M1-C1 E2A-M08LN04-M1-B1 E2A-M08LN04-M1-C1 E2A-S08KN04-M5-B1 E2A-S08KN04-M5-C1 E2A-S08LN04-M5-B1 E2A-S08LN04-M5-C1
Operation mode NC E2A-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M E2A-S08KS02-WP-C2 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-B2 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-C2 2M E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2 E2A-S08KS02-M1-C2 E2A-S08LS02-M1-B2 E2A-S08LS02-M1-C2 E2A-M08KS02-M1-B2 E2A-M08KS02-M1-C2 E2A-M08LS02-M1-B2 E2A-M08LS02-M1-C2 E2A-S08KS02-M5-B2 E2A-S08KS02-M5-C2 E2A-S08LS02-M5-B2 E2A-S08LS02-M5-C2 E2A-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M E2A-S08KN04-WP-C2 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-B2 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-C2 2M E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2 E2A-S08KN04-M1-C2 E2A-S08LN04-M1-B2 E2A-S08LN04-M1-C2 E2A-M08KN04-M1-B2 E2A-M08KN04-M1-C2 E2A-M08LN04-M1-B2 E2A-M08LN04-M1-C2 E2A-S08KN04-M5-B2 E2A-S08KN04-M5-C2 E2A-S08LN04-M5-B2 E2A-S08LN04-M5-C2
Stainless 27 (40) steel 49 (62)
M12 connector Stainless 27 (43) steel 49 (65) Nickelplated Brass M8 connector (3-pin) 27 (43) 49 (65)
Stainless 27 (39) steel 49 (61) Stainless 27 (40) steel 49 (62)
Unshielded
4.0 mm
Pre-wired
M12 connector Stainless 27 (43) steel 49 (65) Nickelplated Brass M8 connector (3-pin) 27 (43) 49 (65)
Stainless 27 (39) steel 49 (61)
Ordering Information continued (Shaded models are normally stocked.)

Size Type M12 Shielded Sensing Connection distance 4.0 mm Pre-wired Body material Nickelplated Brass Model number Thread Length Output (overall length) configuration Operation mode NO 34 (50) 56 (72) 34 (48) 56 (70) 34 (50) 56 (72) 34 (48) 56 (70) 39 (59) 61 (81) 39 (53) 61 (75) 39 (59) 61 (81) 39 (53) 61 (75) 44 (64) 66 (86) 44 (58) 66 (80) 44 (64) (See note.) 66 (86) 44 (58) (See note.) 66 (80) PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN E2A-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12KS04-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12KS04-M1-B1 E2A-M12KS04-M1-C1 E2A-M12LS04-M1-B1 E2A-M12LS04-M1-C1 E2A-M12KN08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12KN08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12KN08-M1-B1 E2A-M12KN08-M1-C1 E2A-M12LN08-M1-B1 E2A-M12LN08-M1-C1 E2A-M18KS08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M18KS08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M18LS08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M18LS08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M18KS08-M1-B1 E2A-M18KS08-M1-C1 E2A-M18LS08-M1-B1 E2A-M18LS08-M1-C1 E2A-M18KN16-WP-B1 2M E2A-M18KN16-WP-C1 2M E2A-M18LN16-WP-B1 2M E2A-M18LN16-WP-C1 2M E2A-M18KN16-M1-B1 E2A-M18KN16-M1-C1 E2A-M18LN16-M1-B1 E2A-M18LN16-M1-C1 E2A-M30KS15-WP-B1 2M E2A-M30KS15-WP-C1 2M E2A-M30LS15-WP-B1 2M E2A-M30LS15-WP-C1 2M E2A-M30KS15-M1-B1 E2A-M30KS15-M1-C1 E2A-M30LS15-M1-B1 E2A-M30LS15-M1-C1 E2A-M30KN20-WP-B1 2M E2A-M30KN20-WP-C1 2M E2A-M30LN30-WP-B1 2M E2A-M30LN30-WP-C1 2M E2A-M30KN20-M1-B1 E2A-M30KN20-M1-C1 E2A-M30LN30-M1-B1 E2A-M30LN30-M1-C1 Operation mode NC E2A-M12KS04-WP-B2 2M E2A-M12KS04-WP-C2 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-B2 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-C2 2M E2A-M12KS04-M1-B2 E2A-M12KS04-M1-C2 E2A-M12LS04-M1-B2 E2A-M12LS04-M1-C2 E2A-M12KN08-WP-B2 2M E2A-M12KN08-WP-C2 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-B2 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-C2 2M E2A-M12KN08-M1-B2 E2A-M12KN08-M1-C2 E2A-M12LN08-M1-B2 E2A-M12LN08-M1-C2 E2A-M18KS08-WP-B2 2M E2A-M18KS08-WP-C2 2M E2A-M18LS08-WP-B2 2M E2A-M18LS08-WP-C2 2M E2A-M18KS08-M1-B2 E2A-M18KS08-M1-C2 E2A-M18LS08-M1-B2 E2A-M18LS08-M1-C2 E2A-M18KN16-WP-B2 2M E2A-M18KN16-WP-C2 2M E2A-M18LN16-WP-B2 2M E2A-M18LN16-WP-C2 2M E2A-M18KN16-M1-B2 E2A-M18KN16-M1-C2 E2A-M18LN16-M1-B2 E2A-M18LN16-M1-C2 E2A-M30KS15-WP-B2 2M E2A-M30KS15-WP-C2 2M E2A-M30LS15-WP-B2 2M E2A-M30LS15-WP-C2 2M E2A-M30KS15-M1-B2 E2A-M30KS15-M1-C2 E2A-M30LS15-M1-B2 E2A-M30LS15-M1-C2 E2A-M30KN20-WP-B2 2M E2A-M30KN20-WP-C2 2M E2A-M30LN30-WP-B2 2M E2A-M30LN30-WP-C2 2M E2A-M30KN20-M1-B2 E2A-M30KN20-M1-C2 E2A-M30LN30-M1-B2 E2A-M30LN30-M1-C2
M12 connector Nickelplated Brass Unshielded 8.0 mm Pre-wired Nickelplated Brass
M12 connector Nickelplated Brass M18 Shielded 8.0 mm Pre-wired Nickelplated Brass
M12 connector Nickelplated Brass Unshielded 16.0 mm Pre-wired Nickelplated Brass
M12 connector Nickelplated Brass M30 Shielded 15.0 mm Pre-wired Nickelplated Brass
M12 connector Nickelplated Brass Unshielded 20.0 mm Pre-wired 30.0 mm Nickelplated Brass
20.0 mm M12 connector Nickelplated Brass 30.0 mm
Note: M30 unshielded Models with double sensing distance and short barrels cannot be mounted due to the necessary separation distance from the surrounding metal. Standard sensing models are thus available.
Specifications DC 3-wire Models

Size Type Item M8 Shielded Unshielded M12 Shielded -B1 -B2 -C1 -C2 Unshielded E2A-M12 E2A-M12 E2A-M12 E2A-M12 N08N08N08N08-B1 -B2 -C1 -C2
Sensing distance Setting distance Hysteresis Target Standard target (mild steel ST37) Response frequency (See note 1.) Power supply voltage (operating voltage range) Current consumption (DC 3-wire) Output type Control output
E2A-M12 S04E2A-M08 N04-M1-B1 E2A-M08 S02-M1-B1 E2A-M12 S04E2A-M08 N04-M1-B2 E2A-M08 S02-M1-B2 E2A-M12 S04E2A-M08 N04-M1-C1 E2A-M08 S02-M1-C1 E2A-M12 S04E2A-M08 N04-M1-C2 E2A-M08 S02-M1-C2 E2A-S08 N04-B1 E2A-S08 S02-B1 E2A-S08 N04-B2 E2A-S08 S02-B2 E2A-S08 N04-C1 E2A-S08 S02-C1 E2A-S08 N04-C2 E2A-S08 S02-C2 4 mm 10% 4 mm 10% 2 mm 10% 0 to 3.2 mm 0 to 3.2 mm 0 to 1.6 mm 10% max. of sensing distance Ferrous metal (The sensing distance decreases with non-ferrous metal.) 8 x 8 x 1 mm 12 x 12 x 1 mm 1,500 Hz 1,000 Hz 12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC) 10 mA max. -B models: PNP open collector -C models: NPN open collector 200 mA max. (32 VDC max.) 12 x 12 x 1 mm 1,000 Hz
8 mm 10% 0 to 6.4 mm
24 x 24 x 1 mm 800 Hz
Load current (See note 2.) Residual voltage 2 V max. (under load current of 200 mA with cable length of 2 m) Indicator Operation indicator (Yellow LED) Operation mode -B1/-C1 models: NO (with sensing object approaching) -B2/-C2 models: NC; For details, refer to the timing charts. Protection circuit Power source circuit reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, Power source Surge suppressor, Short-circuit protection circuit reverse polarity protection, Surge suppressor, Short-circuit protection Ambient air temperature Operating: -40C to 70C, Storage: -40C to 85C (with no icing or condensation) Temperature influence 10% max. of sensing distance at 23C within temperature range of -25C to 70C (See note 2.) 15% max. of sensing distance at 23C within temperature range of -40C to 70C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 95%, Storage: 35% to 95% Voltage influence 1% max. of sensing distance in rated voltage range 15% Insulation resistance 50 M min. (at 500 VDC) between current carry parts and case Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current carry parts and case Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 hours each in X, Y and Z directions Shock resistance 1,000 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions 500 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions Standards and listings IEC60529: IP67, Degree of protection EN60947-5-2: EMC UL (CSA) [E196555] (See note 3.) Connection method -WP models: Pre-wired models (Standard length: 2 m) -M1 models: M12 4-pin connector models -M5 models: M8 3-pin connector models Weight Pre-wired model Approx. 65 g Approx. 85 g (packaged) M12 connector model M12 connector models: Approx. 20 g Approx. 35 g M8 connector models: Approx. 15 g Material Case Stainless steel or brass-nickel plated Brass-nickel plated Sensing surface PBT Cable PVC Clamping nut Brass-nickel plated Note 1. The response frequency is an average value. Measurement conditions are as follows: standard target, a distance of twice the standard target distance between targets, and a setting distance of half the sensing distance. 2. When using any model at an ambient temperature between -40C and -25C and a power voltage between 30 and 32 VDC, use a load current of 100 mA max. 3. UL (CSA) [E196555]: Use class 2 circuit only.
Specifications continued DC 3-wire Models

Size Type Item M18 Shielded
E2A-M18 S08E2A-M18 S08E2A-M18 S08E2A-M18 S08-
M30 Unshielded
-B1 E2A-M18 N16-B2 E2A-M18 N16-C1 E2A-M18 N16-C2 E2A-M18 N16-
Shielded
-B1 E2A-M30 S15-B2 E2A-M30 S15-C1 E2A-M30 S15-C2 E2A-M30 S15-
Unshielded
-B1 E2A-M30KN20-B2 E2A-M30KN20-C1 E2A-M30KN20-C2 E2A-M30KN20-
Unshielded
-B1 E2A-M30LN30-B2 E2A-M30LN30-C1 E2A-M30LN30-C2 E2A-M30LN30-B1 -B2 -C1 -C2
Sensing distance Setting distance Hysteresis Target Standard target (mild steel ST37) Response frequency (See note 1.) Power supply voltage (operating voltage range) Current consumption (DC 3-wire) Output type Control output
8 mm 10% 0 to 6.4 mm
16 mm 10% 0 to 12.8 mm
15 mm 10% 0 to 12 mm
20 mm 10% 0 to 16 mm
30 mm 10% 0 to 24 mm
10% max. of sensing distance Ferrous metal (The sensing distance decreases with non-ferrous metal.) 60 x 60 x 1 mm 24 x 24 x 1 mm 48 x 48 x 1 mm 45 x 45 x 1 mm 100 Hz 500 Hz 400 Hz 250 Hz 12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max. (10 to 32 VDC) 10 mA max. -B models: PNP open collector -C models: NPN open collector 200 mA max. (32 VDC max.)
90 x 90 x 1 mm 100 Hz
Load current (See note 2.) Residual voltage 2 V max. (under load current of 200 mA with cable length of 2 m) Operation indicator (Yellow LED) Indicator Operation mode (with sensing -B1/-C1 models: NO -B2/-C2 models: NC; For details, refer to the timing charts. object approaching) Output reverse polarity protection, Power source circuit reverse polarity protection, Surge suppressor, Protection circuit Short-circuit protection Operating: -40C to 70C, Storage: -40C to 85C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient air temperature 10% max. of sensing distance at 23C within temperature range of -25C to 70C Temperature influence (See note 2.) 15% max. of sensing distance at 23C within temperature range of -40C to 70C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 95%, Storage: 35% to 95% Voltage influence 1% max. of sensing distance in rated voltage range 15% Insulation resistance 50 M min. (at 500 VDC) between current carry parts and case Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current carry parts and case Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 hours each in X, Y and Z directions Shock resistance 1,000 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions Standards and listings IEC60529: IP67, Degree of protection EN60947-5-2: EMC UL (CSA) [E196555] (See note 3.) Connection method -WP models: Pre-wired models (Standard length: 2 m) -M1 models: M12 4-pin connector models -M5 models: M8 3-pin connector models Pre-wired model Weight Approx. 160 g Approx. 280 g Approx. 280 g Approx. 370 g (packaged) M12 connector Approx. 70 g Approx. 200 g Approx. 200 g Approx. 260 g model Case Material Brass-nickel plated Sensing surface PBT Cable PVC Clamping nut Brass-nickel plated Note 1. The response frequency is an average value. Measurement conditions are as follows: standard target, a distance of twice the standard target distance between targets, and a setting distance of half the sensing distance. 2. When using any model at an ambient temperature between -40C and -25C and a power voltage between 30 and 32 VDC, use a load current of 100 mA max. 3. UL (CSA) [E196555]: Use class 2 circuit only.
Engineering Data
Operating Range (Typical)
Influence of Sensing Object Size and Materials
Engineering Data continued
Operation
PNP Output
Operation mode NO Model E2A- - -B1 Timing chart Output circuit
NC
E2A- - -B2
NPN Output
Operation mode NO Model E2A- - -C1 Timing chart Output circuit
NC
E2A- - -C2
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Pre-wired Models (Shielded)
Pre-wired Models (Unshielded)
Dimensions continued
Pre-wired Models (Shielded)
Pre-wired Models (Unshielded)
M12 Connector Models (Shielded)
M12 Connector Models (Unshielded)
10
M8 Connector Models (Shielded)
M8 Connector Models (Unshielded)
11
Precautions
Safety Precautions
Power Supply Do not impose an excessive voltage on the E2A, otherwise it may be damaged. Do not impose AC current (100 to 240 VAC) on any DC model, otherwise it may be damaged. Load Short-circuit Do not short-circuit the load, or the E2A may be damaged. The E2As short-circuit protection function will be valid if the polarity of the supply voltage imposed is correct and within the rated voltage range. Wiring Be sure to wire the E2A and load correctly, otherwise it may be damaged. Connection with No Load Be sure to insert loads when wiring. Make sure to connect a proper load to the E2A in operation, otherwise it may damage internal elements. Do not expose the product to flammable or explosive gases. Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the product.
Correct Use
Power Reset Time The Proximity Sensor is ready to operate within 100 ms after power is supplied. If power supplies are connected to the Proximity Sensor and load respectively, be sure to supply power to the Proximity Sensor before supplying power to the load. Effects of Surrounding Metal When mounting the E2A within a metal panel, ensure that the clearances given in the following table are maintained. Power OFF The Proximity Sensor may output a pulse signal when it is turned OFF. Therefore, it is recommended that the load be turned OFF before turning OFF the Proximity Sensor. Power Supply Transformer When using a DC power supply, make sure that the DC power supply has an insulated transformer. Do not use a DC power supply with an auto-transformer. Mutual Interference When installing two or more Sensors face-to-face or side-byside, ensure that the minimum distances given in the following table are maintained.
Type
Dimension M8
M12 M18
Shielded l m d D n Nonshielded l m d D n
0 4.5 0 12 12 8 24 12 24
0 12 0 18 15 20 40 15 40
M30 Short Long barrel barrel 0 (See 0 note 1) (See note 2) 24 45 27 45 1.5 4 27 45 22 30 40 48 70 90 70 90 120 22 30 40 70 90 120
Type
Dimension M8
M12 M18
Shielded A B NonA shielded B
20 15 80 60
30 20 120 100
60 35 200 120
M30 Short barrel 110 70 300 200
Long barrel
300 300
Note 1. In the case of using the supplied nuts. If true flush mounting is necessary, apply a free zone of 1.5 mm. 2. In the case of using the supplied nuts. If true flush mounting is necessary, apply a free zone of 4 mm.
12
Precautions continued
Wiring
High-tension Lines Wiring through Metal Conduit: If there is a power or high-tension line near the cable of the Proximity Sensor, wire the cable through an independent metal conduit to prevent against Proximity Sensor damage or malfunctioning. Cable Extension Standard cable length is less than 200 m. The tractive force is 50 N.
Maintenance and Inspection

Periodically perform the following checks to ensure stable operation of the Proximity Sensor over a long period of time. 1. Check for mounting position, dislocation, looseness, or distortion of the Proximity Sensor and sensing objects. 2. Check for loose wiring and connections, improper contacts, and line breakage. 3. Check for attachment or accumulation of metal powder or dust. 4. Check for abnormal temperature conditions and other environmental conditions. 5. Check for proper lighting of indicators (for models with a set indicator.) Never disassemble or repair the Sensor.
Mounting
The Proximity Sensor must not be subjected to excessive shock with a hammer when it is installed, otherwise the Proximity Sensor may be damaged or lose its waterresistivity. Do not tighten the nut with excessive force. A washer must be used with the nut.
Environment
Water Resistivity Do not use the Proximity Sensor underwater, outdoors, or in the rain. Operating Environment Be sure to use the Proximity Sensor within its operating ambient temperature range and do not use the Proximity Sensor outdoors so that its reliability and life expectancy can be maintained. Although the Proximity Sensor is water resistive, a cover to protect the Proximity Sensor from water or water-soluble machining oil is recommended so that its reliability and life expectancy can be maintained. Do not use the Proximity Sensor in an environment with chemical gas (e.g., strong alkaline or acid gasses including nitric, chromic, and concentrated sulfuric acid gases). Inrush Current A load that has a large inrush current (e.g., a lamp or motor) will damage the Proximity Sensor, in which case connect the load to the Proximity Sensor through a relay.
Type M8 M12 M18 M30
Stainless steel type Brass type
Torque 9 Nm 4 Nm 30 Nm 70 Nm 180 Nm
13
Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (Seller). Seller hereby objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales from your Omron company. 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Sellers payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Goods. 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Seller. 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in connection therewith. 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority. 10.Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer; c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. 11.Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from Seller in the condition claimed. 12.Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Sellers exclusive warranty is that the Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Sellers sole obligation hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Good or, at Sellers election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Goods unless Sellers analysis confirms that the Goods were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. 13.Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. 14.Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party. 15.Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. 16.Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, including means including without limitation.
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

1. Suitability of Use. Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the Buyers application or use of the Good. At Buyers request, Seller will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Good. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good: (i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document. (ii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. (iii) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Good. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE SELLERS PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. 2. Programmable Products. Seller shall not be responsible for the users programming of a programmable Good, or any consequence thereof. 3. Performance Data. Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Sellers test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Sellers Warranty and Limitations of Liability. 4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Good may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Sellers representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Good. 5. Errors and Omissions. The information in this catalog has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors, or omissions.
14
15
Complete Terms and Conditions of Sale for product purchase and use are on Omrons website at www.omron.com/oei - under the About Us tab in the Legal Matters section. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC

One Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173 847-843-7900
For US technical support or other inquiries:
OMRON CANADA, INC.

885 Milner Avenue Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 416-286-6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - http://www.omron.com USA - http://www.omron.com/oei Canada - http://www.omron.ca
800-556-6766
Cat. No. D096-E3-01 12/03 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA
16
4/
4.7 DRIVE SIDE WHEEL ASS.Y
(DWG. T15477)
4.8
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO RUOTA SCANALATA D=190 I=310

CODICE
C15477
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
Fe360
50
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
1:2
FORMATO
A2
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
T15477
4/
4.8
TENDER SIDE WHEEL ASS.Y (DWG. T15481)
4.9
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO RUOTA LISCIA D=190 I=3850

CODICE
C15481
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
Fe360
64.9
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
1:2
FORMATO
A3
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
T15481
4/
4.9 SYNCHRONISME SHAFT
(DWG. T15482)
4.10
5/
5. FANS 5.1 FAN (SIGN) MANUFACTURER MODEL ARRANGEMENT ROTATION AIR FLOW TOTAL PRESSURE SPEED
CIRCULATING AIR FAN V1 TECHNICAL DATA (referred at density of 1,2 Kg/m) V1 C.B.I. MB 160, CL III LG 90 8 see page #5.13 & 5.14
Counter-Clockwise 28,2 m/s 15400 Pa 1710 n/1' 518 kW 195 kW SNL524 22224 EKC3+H 3124 +N2 FRB 14-215 see CBI instruction manual (Mill supply) 288 KW 4 1710 g/min 440/3/60 V//Hz GR 315
POWER consumption (cold) POWER consumption (warm max) SUPPORTS BEARINGS (see page #5.11) LUBRICATION MOTOR POWER POLE SPEED SUPPLY FORM
5.1
5/
5.2 FAN (SIGN) MANUFACTURER MODEL ARRANGEMENT ROTATION AIR FLOW TOTAL PRESSURE SPEED
CIRCULATING AIR FAN V2 TECHNICAL DATA (referred at density of 1,2 Kg/m) V2 C.B.I. MB 160, CL III RD 90 8 see page #5.13 & 5.14
Clockwise 25,6 m/s 15350 Pa 1678 n/1' 425 kW 166 kW SNL524 22224 EKC3+H 3124 +N2 FRB 14-215 see CBI instruction manual (Mill supply) 288 KW 4 1710 g/min 440/3/60 V//Hz GR 315
POWER consumption (cold) POWER consumption (warm max) SUPPORTS BEARINGS (see page #5.11) LUBRICATION MOTOR POWER POLE SPEED SUPPLY FORM
5.2
5/
FAN DIAGRAM (MB160)
5.3
INSTRUCTION MANUAL BEDIENUNGSHANDBUCH MANUEL D'INSTRUCTIONS MANUALE D'ISTRUZIONE MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
ISO 9001 Cert. n.0646
INDEX
INHALT
INDEX
1.1 SAFETY RULES AND "EC" MARKING 1.2 GENERALES RULES
1.1
SICHERHEITSNORMEN UND CE KENNZEICHNUNG ALLGEMEINE VORSCHRIFTEN
1.1
NORMES DE SECURITE ET MARQUAGE CE NORMES GENERALES
1.2
1.2
1.3 MAINTENANCE RULES
1.3
WARTUNGSVORSCHRIFTEN
1.3
NORMES DE MANUTENTION
1.4 RESIDUAL RISKS
1.4
RESTRISIKEN
1.4
RISQUES RESIDUELS
1.5 NOISE LEVEL 1.6 TAGS INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE 2.1 RECEPTION
1.5 1.6
SCHALLENTWICHLUNG BESCHILDERUNG AUF DER MASCHINE MATERIALEINGANG
1.5 1.6
NIVEAU SONORE ETIQUETTES PLACEES SUR LE VENTILATEUR RECEPTION
2.1
2.1
3.1 MOVE
3.1
TRANSPORT
3.1
DEPLACEMENT
4.1 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
4.1
TRANSPORT UND LAGERUNG
4.1
TRANSPORT ET STOCKAGE
5.1 INSTALLATION
5.1
INSTALLATION
5.1
INSTALLATION
5.2 POSITIONING
5.2
POSITIONIERUNGSEINRICHTUNG
5.2
POSITIONNEMENT
6.1 STARTING
6.1
INBETRIEBNAHME BESONDERE HINWEISE
6.1 6.2
DEMARRAGE RECOMMANDATIONS IMPORTANTES MANUTENTION
6.2 IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS 6.2
7.1 MAINTENANCE
7.1
WARTUNG
7.1
7.2 CLEANING
7.2
REINIGUNG
7.2
NETTOYAGE
8.1 SPARE PARTS 9.1 PUTTING OUT OF SERVICE AND DISMANTLING 10.1 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
8.1 9.1
ERSATZTEILE AUSSERBETRIEBSETZUNG UND ZERLEGUNG KUNDENDIENST NACH DEM KAUF WARTUNGS- UND KONTROLLTABELLE
8.1 9.1
PIECES DE RECHANGE MISE HORS-SERVICE ET DEMANTELLEMENT ASSISTANCE APRES-VENTE
10.1
10.1
11.1 MAINTENANCE AND CONTROLS TABLE
11.1
11.1
TABLEAU DE MAINTENANCE ET CONTROLES
INDICE
INDICE
1.1
NORME DI SICUREZZA E MARCATURA CE NORME GENERALI
1.1
N O R M A S D E S E C U R ID A D Y MARCADURA CE NORMAS GENERALES
1.2
1.2
13
1.3
NORME PER LA MANUTENZIONE
1.3
NORMAS DE MANUTENCION
15
1.4
RISCHI RESIDUI
1.4
RIESGOS RESIDUOS
17 21
1.5 1.6
RUMOROSITA'
1.5
NIVEL SONORO CARTELES PUESTOS SOBRE LAS MAQUINAS RECIBIMIENTO
CARTELLI A BORDO MACCHINA 1.6
27
2.1
RICEVIMENTO
2.1
29
3.1
MOVIMENTAZIONE
3.1
MOVIMENTACION
31
4.1
TRASPORTO E MAGAZZINAGGIO
4.1
TRANSPORTE Y ALMACENAJE
35
5.1
INSTALLAZIONE
5.1
INSTALACION
37
5.2
POSIZIONAMENTO
5.2
POSICIONAMIENTO
39 55
6.1 6.2
AVVIAMENTO AVVERTENZE SPECIALI
6.1 6.2
ARRANQUE CONSEJOS IMPORTANTES
59
7.1
MANUTENZIONE
7.1
MANUTENCION
71
7.2
PULIZIA
7.2
LIMPIEZA
73 75
8.1 9.1
PARTI DI RICAMBIO MESSA FUORI SERVIZIO E SMANTELLAMENTO ASSISTENZA POST-VENDITA
8.1 9.1
PIEZAS DE REPUESTO DESMONTAJE Y DESMANTELACION ASSISTENCIA POST-VENTA
77
10.1
10.1
79
11.1
TABELLA REGISTRAZIONE 11.1 INTERVENTI DI MANUTENZIONE E CONTROLLI PERIODICI
TABLA DE MANTENIMIENTO Y CONTROLES
Thank you for having chosen a CBI fan. Our fans have been planned by technicians with long experience in this branch, and are manufactured to the high quality standards that distinguish our products.
Besten Dank, fr Ihre Wahl eines CBI Ventilators. Unsere Ventilatoren werden durch Techniker entwickelt die eine lange Berufserfahrung auf diesem Sektor aufweisen, unsere Ventilatoren werden in hohen Qualittsstandard gebaut, welcher unsere Produkte bis zum heutigen Tage immer auszeichnete. Sofort nach Erhalt des Ventilators, empfiehlt CBI den Kunden, dieses Handbuch mit groer Aufmerksamkeit zu lesen (nach Mglichkeit in Nhe des Ventilators). Nachdem Sie das Handbuch gelesen haben, sollten Sie in der Lage sein, Ihren Ventilator bestens zu bedienen. Auch die Sicherheit aller Personen sollte somit gewhrleistet sein. Wir empfehlen dieses Handbuch sorgfltig aufzubewahren und in Reichweite zu halten, damit falls erforderlich ein rasches Nachschlagen mglich ist.
Nous vous remercions pour avoir choisi un ventilateur CBI. Nos ventilateurs ont t tudis et mis au point par des techniciens de longue exprience dans le secteur, et construits suivant des critres de qualit qui ont depuis toujours caractriss nos produits.
CBI recommends that the first thing you do on getting the fan is to read the manual carefully (if possible, with the fan nearby). After having read this manual you will be able to get the best possible use out of the fan, while protecting yourself and others by following the safety precautions included. We would suggest carefully keeping this manual handy so that it can be consulted at any time.
Ds la reception du ventilateur, CBI recommande une lecture attentive du prsent manuel (si possible ct du ventilateur). Aprs avoir lu le manuel vous serez en mesure d'utiliser au mieux les capacits du ventilateur, mais aussi de sauvegarder votre scurit et celle des autres. Nous vous conseillons de conserver ce manuel avec soin et porte de mains, pour pouvoir le consulter en cas de besoin.
Grazie per avere scelto un ventilatore CBI. I nostri ventilatori vengono studiati da tecnici con lunga esperienza nel settore, sono costruiti secondo gli elevati standard di qualit che hanno sempre contraddistinto i nostri prodotti.
Os agradecemos por haber elegido un ventilador CBI. Nuestros ventiladores han sido estudiados por tecnicos de lunga experiencia en este sector, y construidos con criterios de cualidad que han desde siempre caracterizado nuestros produc-tos.
Appena ricevuto il ventilatore, la CBI raccomanda ai clienti di leggere con molta attenzione questo manuale (possibilmente vicino al ventilatore). Dopo aver letto il manuale sarete in grado di utilizzare nel migliore dei modi il vostro ventilatore, ma soprattutto di salvaguardare la vostra incolumit e quella degli altri. Consigliamo di custodire questo manuale con cura ed a portata di mano in modo da poterlo consultare alloccorrenza.
Despues de la entrega de su ventilador, CBI aconseja de leer con mucho cuidado el presente manual (si es posible cerca del ventilador). Despues de la lectura del manual podran ser capaz de utilizar a lo mejor las capacidades de su ventilador, y de salvaguardar su securidad y l de los otros. Aconsejamos de conservar este manual con atencin y al alcance de la mano para poder consultarlo en caso de necesidad.
1.1 SAFETY RULES AND "EC" MARKING Our technicians, who have been in this sector for years, research and develop our products every day in order to create efficient fans in accordance with current safety regulations.
1.1 SICHERHEITSNORMEN UND CE KENNZEICHNUNG Unsere Techniker, sind seit vielen Jahren in diesem Bereich ttig und beschftigen sich tglich mit der Erforschung und Entwicklung unserer Produkte um die Ventilatoren noch effizienter zu entwerfen und damit in Hinblick auf geltende Sicherheitsnormen stets auf dem aktuellen Stand zu sein. Nachfolgende Normen und Empfehlungen, spiegeln zur Zeit gltige Normen wider in Hinblick auf Sicherheit, sie basieren hauptschlich auf der Beobachtung solcher Allgemeinen Sicherheitsnormen. Wir weisen alle Benutzer ausdrcklich daraufhin, sich rigoros an die in den verschiedenen Lndern geltenden Unfallverhtungsvorschriften zu halten. CBI fordert alle verantwortlichen Personen auf, den nachfolgenden Absatz zu beachten und in der Praxis anzuwenden. CBI lehnt jegliche Verantwortung fr eventuell entstandene Schden ab, welche an Personen oder Gegenstnden entstanden sind, die verursacht durch fehlende Beachtung vorgeschriebener Sicherheitsnormen, gleiches gilt fr eventuelle Modifikationen am Ventilator durch den Kunden. Die Kennzeichnung CE entspricht einer Komformittserklrung, hiermit wird eine Konformitt zu anwendbaren Gemeinschaftsnormen bescheinigt. Ventilatoren die keine CE Markierung besitzen, mssen vom Kufer vervollstndigt werden, der dann die ganze Anlage zu zertifizieren hat, um somit eine Konformittsbescheinung liefern zu knnen.
1.1 NORMES DE SECURITE ET MARQUAGE CE Nos techniciens, spcialiss dans le secteur, sont occups chaque jour dans la recherche et le developpement de nos produits, pour obtenir des ventilateurs toujours plus efficaces dans le respect des normes de scurit en vigueur. Les normes et recommandations reportes plus en avant, sont le reflet des normes actuellement en vigueur en matire de scuritet se basent donc principalement sur le respect de ces dernires. Pour cette raison, nous conseillons toutes les personnes exposes de s'en tenir scrupuleusement aux normes de prvention des accidents en vigueur dans leur prope pays. CBI appelle toutes les personnes prposes, au respect et la mise en pratique des rgles qui suivront. CBI se dcharge de toutes responsabilits pour d'eventuels dommages causs aux personnes ou aux biens, drivant d'un manque de respect des normes de scurit, ou d'ventuelles modifications apportes au ventilateur.
All the rules and regulations shown in the following represent those currently in force regarding safety, and so are based on the compliance with these general laws.
Therefore we would advise those exposed to risk to strictly abide by the safety prevention regulations applied to their country. CBI reminds all staff concerned to comply with and put into practice all the indications shown in the following. CBI declines all responsibility for any damage to persons or property caused by the failure to comply with safety regulations or by modifications to the fans.
The "EC" marking and its conformity declaration, certifies compliance with European regulations. Fans which do not have the "EC" marking are to be filled in by the customer who must certify the entire installation, in order to have a conformity certificate. A certificate type "B" is delivered by CBI.
Le marquage CE et sa dclaration de conformit, atteste de la rgularit du matriel face aux normes Europennes applicables. Les ventilateurs ne reportant pas le marquage CE devront tres complets par l'acheteur qui devra par la suite certifier toute son installation, et fournir ensuite le certificat de conformit. CBI fourni ensuite le certificat de type "B".

1.1 NORME DI SICUREZZA E MARCATURA CE I nostri tecnici, da molti anni nel settore, sono impegnati quotidianamente nella ricerca e nello sviluppo dei nostri prodotti studiando ventilatori sempre pi efficienti nel rispetto delle "norme" di sicurezza in vigore. 1.1 NORMAS DE SECURIDAD Y MARCADURA CE Nuestros tecnicos, especializados en este sector, son ocupados cada da en la bsqueda y el desarollo de nuestros productos, para obtener ventilador con una mayor eficiencia en el respecto de las normas de securidad en vigo.
Le norme e le raccomandazioni riportate qui di seguito, riflettono prevalentemente quanto vigente, in materia di sicurezza e quindi si basano principalmente sullosservanza di tali norme di carattere generale. Pertanto, raccomandiamo vivamente a tutte le persone esposte di attenersi scrupolosamente alle norme di prevenzione degli infortuni in atto nel proprio paese. La CBI richiama tutto il personale preposto, a rispettare ed a mettere in pratica quanto riportato qui di seguito. La CBI si esime da ogni responsabilit per eventuali danni causati a persone e cose derivanti dalla mancata osservanza delle norme di sicurezza, nonch delle eventuali modifiche apportate al ventilatore.
Las normas y recomendaciones indicadas mas alante, son el reflejo de las normas actualmente en vigor en materia de securidad y son fundadas sobre el respecto de estas ultimas. Por este motivo aconsejamos a todas las personas expuestas de respectar con mucha atencin las normas de prevencin de los accidentes en vigor en el pas. CBI llama todas las personas expuestas al respecto y a poner en prctica toda las regulas indicadas mas alante. CBI rechaza toda responsabilidad para los perjuicios causados a la personas y a los materiales, naciendo de una falta de respecto de las normas de securidad o de modificas sobre el ventilador.
Il contrassegno CE e la relativa dichiarazione di conformit, attestano la conformit alle normative comunitarie applicabili. I ventilatori che non riportano sulla targhetta la marcatura CE, devono essere completati dall'acquirente che dovr poi certificare tutto l'impianto, fornendo cos la certificazione di conformit. CBI fornisce la certificazione di tipo "B".
La marcadura CE y su declaracion de conformidad, muestra la regularidad del material de frente a las normas Europeas en vigo. Los ventiladores que no llevan marcadura CE tienen que ser completados por el comprador que tendr que certifiar su instalacin, dando en este modo el certificado de conformidad. CBI entrega en este modo el certificado de tipo "B".
7
1.2 GENERAL RULES The protection guards are not to be removed, unless absolutely necessary for maintenance purposes, in which case appropriate steps must be taken to clearly indicate the possible danger. The protection guards must be re-installed on the machine as soon as the maintenance work has finished.
1.2 A L L G E M E I N E VORSCHRIFTEN Schutzvorrichtungen drfen in keinem Fall entfernt werden, sollte dies aus arbeitstechnischen Grnden erforderlich sein, mssen entsprechende Vorsichtsmanahmen ergriffen werden, damit eine Gefhrdung des Personals vermieden wird. Das Anbringen der Schutzvorrichtungen, hat umgehend nach Beendigung von Arbeiten und damit der Ursachenbeseitigung fr die Betriebsunterbrechung zu erfolgen.
1.2 NORMES GENERALES Les protections de scurit ne doivent en aucuns cas tres retires, moins d'une necessit absolue de manutention; dans ce cas il sera indispensable d'adopter des mesures adquates mise en vidence des dangers possibles. Le remontage sur les machines, de ces protections deva tre ralis immdiatement aprs la fin de l'intervention.
All maintenance work (routine or extraordinary) must be done with the fan stopped and all electrical, pneumatic, and steam, etc supplies disconnected.
Jeglicher Eingriff zwecks Wartung (gewhnlicher oder auergewhnlicher Natur) darf nur im Ruhezustand des Ventilators erfolgen, d.h. bei unterbrochener Stromzufuhr, pneumatischen Stillstand und frei von Dmpfen. Um Unflle bei Arbeiten am stillgelegten und damit vom Stromnetz getrennten Ventilator zu vermeiden, mssen an Ventilator, Schaltksten und Steuereinheiten gut sichtbar Hinweisschilder angebracht werden. "Achtung: Gesperrt wegen Wartungssarbeiten, einschalten verboten !".
Toutes les interventions de manutention (ordinaires ou extraordinaires) devront tres effectues le ventilateur l'arrt, avec alimentation lectrique, pneumatique, vapeur, etc.. desenclenche. Pour viter tous dangers d'enclenchement accidentels, placer des panneaux d'avertissements sur tous les cadres lectiques, les centrales et sur les puptres de commande reportant la phrase suivante: "attention: commande exclue pour manutention en cours".
In order to ensure that such supplies are not mistakenly reconnected it would be advisable to place notices on the electrical panels, the power units and the control pulpits with the following sentence :"Attention : controls suspended for maintenance".

1.2 NORME GENERALI Le protezioni di sicurezza non devono essere rimosse se non per assoluta necessit di lavoro; nel qual caso dovranno essere immediatamente adottate idonee misure atte a mettere in evidenza il possibile pericolo. 1.2 NORMAS GENERALES Las protecciones de securidad tienen que ser quitadas solo en caso de necesidad para trabajos de manutencin; y en este caso precauciones particulares tienen que ser utilizadas para evidenciar los peligros posibles.
Il ripristino sul ventilatore di dette protezioni deve avvenire non appena vengono a cessare le ragioni della temporanea rimozione.
El montaje de las mismas protecciones sobre el ventilador tiene que ser realizado en cuanto se remata la intervencin.
Tutti gli interventi di manutenzione (ordinaria e straordinaria) devono essere effettuati a ventilatore fermo ed alimentazioni elettrica, pneumatica, vapore, ecc., disinserite. Per scongiurare il pericolo di possibili inserimenti accidentali, apporre sui quadri elettrici, sulle centrali e sui pulpiti di comando cartelli di avvertimento con la dicitura attenzione: comando escluso per manutenzione in corso.
Todas las intervenciones de manutencin (ordinarias o extraordinarias) tienen que ser hechas el ventildor parado, sin ninguna alimentacin electrica, pneumatica, vapor, etc ... Para evitar los peligros de arranque accidental, posizionar carteles de advertencia sobre los cuadros electricos y plpito de comando indicando la frase : atencion: comando excluso para manutencion en curso".
Before connecting the power supply cable to the fan's connection box, check that the line voltage is the same as the one shown on the motor's data plate.
Vor dem Anschluss des Ventilatormotors muss unbedingt geprft werden ob die Netzspannung mit der Motorspannung gemss Motorschild bereinstimmen.
Avant de brancher le cable d'alimentation lectrique, la bote bornes du ventilateur, veuillez vrifier que la tension de ligne soit approprie celle reporte sur la plaquette du moteur.
Take note of the tags placed on the fan.
Beachten Sie bitte die angebrachten Etiketten auf dem Ventilator.
Prter une attention toute particulire l'tiquette place sur le ventilateur.
Replace the tags if they should become illegible over time.
Falls diese mit der Zeit durch Witterungsbedingungen unleserlich werden, ersetzen Sie diese durch neue.
Si avec l'usure du temps les plaquettes deviennent illisibles il convient de les remplacer.
10
Prima di collegare il cavo di alimentazione elettrica alla morsettiera del ventilatore verificare che la tensione di linea sia idonea a quella riportata sulla targhetta posta sul motore.
Antes de conectar el cable de alimentacin a la caja de conexin del ventilador, es importante verificar que la tension de lnea sea apropriada a l del cartel del motor.
Prestare attenzione alle etichette poste sul ventilatore.
Tener mucho cuidado al cartel puesto sobre el ventilador.
Se col passare del tempo dovessero diventare illeggibili sostituirle.
Si con el pasar del tiempo el cartel del ventilador se vuelve ilegible, es mejor cambiarlas.
11
1.3 MAINTENANCE RULES
1.3 WARTUNGSVORSCHRIFTEN
1.3 NORMES DE MANUTENTION
Maintenance staff must not only comply with current safety prevention regulations but also the following rules:
Das Wartungspersonal, welches die geltenden gesetzlichen Unfallverhtungsvorschriften zu beachten hat, mu auerdem nachfolgend aufgefhrten Anweisungen beachten: Es mu zweckmssige unfallvorbeugende Kleidung getragen werden. Dies bedeutet, das Kleidungstcke keine losen Teile besitzen drfen, welches ein Verhaken der Kleidung mit der Maschine begnstigen knnte.
Le personnel responsable de la manutention, doit non seulement respecter les rgles dictes par la lgislation en vigueur, mais galement celles reportes cidessous : Il doit porter des vtements de scurit adapts. Ces mmes vtements ne devront donc pas comporter de parties volantes ou pouvant donner la possibilit de prise dans les organes de la machine.
It is important that suitable safety prevention clothing is worn. These must not have loose parts that can get caught in the machine.
Special earphones or protectors must be used when noise exceeds permitted levels.
Es ist Pflicht Gehrschutz zu tragen, falls erlaubte Schallgrenzwerte berschritten werden.
L'utilisation de casques acoustiques ou de bouchons auriculaires est obligatoire, lorsque le niveau sonore dpasse les limites admissibles.
It is important to check that there is an interlocking device preventing others from starting up the machine.
Um eine Inbetriebnahme durch Dritte zu verhindern, muss das Vorhandensein einer zustzlichen Unterbrechnungseinheit berprft werden.
Il doit vrifier l'existence d'un interrupteur de blocage qui puisse empecher le dmarrrage de la machine par d'autres personnes.
12

1.3 NORME PER LA MANUTENZIONE Il personale addetto alla manutenzione, oltre a dover osservare i vigenti dispositivi di legge in materia di prevenzione, deve rispettare le istruzioni qui di seguito riportate: Deve indossare adeguato abbigliamento antinfortunistico. Gli indumenti non devono quindi presentare parti svolazzanti o che possono dare luogo ad appiglio in organi dei ventilatori. 1.3 NORMAS DE MANUTENCION
El personal responsable de la manutencin, tiene que respectar las regulas dictadas por las leyes en vigor, y tambien las siguientes : Tienen que llevar vestidos de securidad adaptados. Estos vestidos non tienen que comportar partes que pueden volar, o presentar partes que dejan la possibilidad de entrar en las partes en movimiento del ventilador.
obbligatorio l'uso di cuffie afoniche o inserti di protezione quando il rumore supera i limiti ammissibili.
La utilizacin de protectores acsticos o de tapnes es obligatoria, cuando el nivel sonoro supera el lmite admisible.
Deve verificare l'esistenza di un interblocco che impedisca l'avviamento della macchina da parte di altre persone.
Es importante verificar la presencia de un interruptor que pueda impedir el arranque de la mquina por otras personas.
13
1.4 RESIDUAL RISKS We have analysed the risks represented by the axial fan as required by the Machines Directive. The present manual reports the information required by staff exposed to risk in order to prevent any damage to persons or property due to residual risks.
1.4 RESTRISIKEN Es wurde eine Risikoanalyse der Axialventilatoren durchgefhrt wie vorgesehen von der Maschinenrichtlinie. Dieses Handbuch beinhaltet Informationen fr den Personen kveis welcher fr die Unfallverhtung verantwortlich ist. Mit dem Ziel Schden an Personen oder/ und Gegenstnden zu vermeiden. Whrend des Betriebs und sofort nach ausschalten (fr zirka 30 Minuten) knnten sich nachfolgende Restrisiken ergeben: - Erhitzte Metallteile - Drehende Teile Ansauggefahr (nicht kanalisierter Ansaug) Austrittsgefahr des Frdermediums (nicht kanalisierter Ausblas).
1.4 RISQUES RESIDUELS Comme prvu par la directive machine, une analyse des risques des ventilateurs axiaux t ralise. Ce manuel reporte les informations destines au personnel expos, afin de prevenir les dommages possibles aux personnes et aux biens, causs par des risques rsiduels. Lors du fonctionnement et immdiatement aprs larrt prendre garde aux risques suivants: - parties mtalliques haute temprature - parties tournantes danger de succion (aspiration non canalise) danger de perte de fluide (refoulement non canalis).
During operation and soon after a stop (for about 30 minutes) pay attention to the following possible risks: - metallic parts at hot temperature - rotating parts danger of suction (inlet not ducted) danger of fluid leakage (outlet not ducted).
14

1.4 RISCHI RESIDUI stata effettuata l'analisi dei rischi dei ventilatori centrifughi come previsto dalla Direttiva Macchine. Questo manuale riporta le informazioni destinate a tutto il personale esposto al fine di prevenire possibili danneggiamenti a persone e/o cose a causa di rischi residui. Durante il funzionamento e subito dopo la fermata (per circa 30 minuti) si possono presentare i seguenti rischi residui: - parti metalliche in temperatura - parti in rotazione - pericolo da aspirazione (aspirazione non canalizzata) - pericolo uscita fluido (mandata non canalizzata). 1.4 RIESGOS RESIDUOS Como previsto en la directiva mquinas, una anlisis de los riesgos de los ventiladores axiales ha sido realizada. El presente manual es destinado al personal expuesto, para impedir los daos posibles a las personas y a los materiales, debidos a los riesgos residuos.
Durante la operacion y pronto despues de parar (unos 30 minutos) poner atencion a los siguientes posibles riesgos: - partes metalicas a una alta temperatura - partes rotatorias peligro de succion (admision sin conducto) peligro de fluido (salida sin conducto).
15
1.5 NOISE LEVEL The various regulations regarding phonometric monitoring in the test room, establish very exact procedures and environmental conditions for measuring the sound pressure level LpA to be indicated in catalogues. (*) In practice not all the installations are made or can be made in compliance with these regulations. There are often operating conditions, accessories and environmental situations that differ from the test rooms.
1.5 SCHALLENTWICHLUNG Die unterschiedlichen Normen bezglich der Schallmessungen in Testrumen legen Vorgehensweisen und Umfeldbedingungen fest um den Schalldruck LpA messen zu knnen und welche dann angegeben werden mssen auf den Katalogen (*). In der Wirklichkeit knnen in den Testanlagen nicht immer alle gewnschten Vorbedingungen eingehalten oder simuliert werden. Oft sind unterschiedliche Betriebsbedingungen gegeben durch von Zubehr oder Umgebungsbedingungen gegebenber den Testrumen. Dieses verursacht Abweichungen zwischen dem gemachten Angaben ber Schalldruck in den Katalogen und den gemessenen Werten auf der Anlage. Es gibt hierfr verschiedene Grnde. Folgende Abweichungen knnen zur Vernderungen des verursachten Schall-druckes in dB(A) fhren:
1.5 NIVEAU SONORE Les diffrentes normes relatives aux relevs phonomtriques en salles d'ssais, tablissent des procdures et conditions d'ambience bien prcises, pour mesurer la pression sonore LpA indiquer sur les catalogues (*). Dans la ralit les installations ne sont pas ou ne peuvent pas toujours, tres ralises en respectant de telles dispositions. Des conditions de fonctionnement particulires, des accessoires ou des situations d'ambience sont souvent diffrentes de celles utilises en salles d'ssais. Dans le but d'en dmontrer l'importance, nous tablissons une liste des cas plus significatifs en quantifiant les variation en dB(A) de pression sonore qu'ils gnrent :
This is generally the cause of the difference between sound pressures indicated in catalogues, and the ones obtained from the installation. There are various causes for this difference. With the intention of pointing out the importance of this phenomenon we list some particular cases quantifying the variation in dB(A) of sound pressure that they cause : actual use differing from that selected in catalogues: this can result in nearly 3 dB(A) variation; traditional flexible connections between fan and ducts : emission in the environment about 2 dB(A); inlet vane control : increase of about 9 dB(A); outlet damper : increase of about 3 dB(A); electrical motor : the increase of noise level due to the electric motor is obtained by adding the highest noise level to the B values in the following table:
* (see "Noise Level" chapter in CBI 16catalogues)
effektive Leistungen abweichend von der Selektion im Katalog: vernderung um 3 dB(A); herkmmliche Flexible Stutzen zwischen Ventilator und Kanalverbindung: emission ins Umfeld 2 dB(A) ; drallregler auf der Ansaugseite: zunahme um 9 dB(A); ausblasklappen auf Ausblasseite: zunahme um zirka 3 dB (A); elektromotor: der durch den Motor verursachte Schall muss bercksichtigt werden, zum Schallwert auf hherem Niveau mssen die Werte B aus der folgenden Tabelle addiert werden:
* (siehe Kapitel Schall in den CBI Katalogen)
prestations effectives diffrentes de celles slectionnes dans le catalogue: il est possible de relever une variation de 3 dB(A); manchettes souples traditionnelles entre ventilateur et canalisation: emission en ambience de 2 dB(A); inclineur sur l'aspiration : augmentation de 9 dB(A); clapet de rglage sur le refoulement : augmentation de 3 dB(A); moteur lectrique : l'augmentation du niveau sonore due au moteur lectrique s'obtient en ajoutant au niveau sonor le plus importante, les valores B reportes dans le tableau suivant:
* (l'augmentation du niveau sonore due au moteur lectrique s'obtient)
1.5 RUMOROSIT Le varie norme relative ai rilievi fonometrici in Sala Prove stabiliscono procedure e condizioni ambientali ben precise per misurare la pressione sonora LpA da indicare sui cataloghi (*).
1.5 NIVEL SONORO Las diferentes normas relativas a los rilievos fonometricos en salas de pruebas, establecen procedimientos y condiciones de ambiente, para la medida de la presin sonora LpA de indicar sobre los catalogos (*). En realidad las instalaciones no son o no pueden ser siempre indenticas a las disposiciones de estas normas. Condiciones particular de funcionamiento, accessorios o situaciones de ambiente son muchas veces diferentes de las condiciones de las salas de pruebas. Para demostrar la importancia de la influencia de las condiciones de funcionamiento,establecemos una lista de los casos mas significativos indicando las variaciones en dB(A) de presion acustica que pueden crear :
Nella realt non sempre gli impianti vengono o possono essere realizzati rispettando tali presupposti. Spesso vi sono condizioni di funzionamento, presenza di accessori, situazioni ambientali diverse da quelle di Sale Prove.
Ci causa differenza tra la pressione sonora indicata sui cataloghi e i valori rilevabili sugli impianti. Le cause della differenza sono varie. Nellintento di segnalarne limportanza ne elenchiamo alcune quantificando la variazione in dB (A) di pressione sonora che generano:
prestazioni effettive diverse da quelle selezionate sui cataloghi: pu risultare una variazione anche di 3 dB(A); giunti antivibranti tradizionali tra ventilatore e tubazione: emissione in ambiente di 2 dB (A); regolatore di portata alla bocca aspirante: incremento di 9 dB(A); serranda di taratura alla bocca premente : incremento di circa 3 dB (A); motore elettrico : l'aumento di rumorosit dovuto al motore elettrico si ottiene sommando alla rumorosit a livello pi alto i valori B riportati nella tabella seguente :
* (vedi capitolo Rumorosit sui Cataloghi CBI)
prestaciones efectivas diferentes de las del catalogo: es posible relevar una variacin de 3 dB(A); juntas flexibles tradicionales entre el ventilador y el canal : emicin en ambiente de 2 dB(A); regulador de caudal sobre la aspiracin del ventilador : aumento de 9 dB(A); cierre de regulacin en rechazo: aumento de 3 dB(A); motor electrico: el aumento del nivel sonoro debido al motor electrico se obtiene sumando al nivel sonoro ms importante, los valores B indicando en el cuadro siguiente:
* (indicar captulo " Nivel sonoro" sobre los catalogos CBI)
17
in which A= dBA fan - dBA motor
wo A = dBA vent. - dBA motor Aufstellort des Elektroventilators: aufgebaut in der Nhe einer nicht schallabsorbierenden Wand: Verminderung um 3 dB(A) aufgebaut in der Nhe eines Eckpunktes, Berhrungspunkt zweier Wnde: Verminderung um 6 dB(A) aufgebaut in der Nhe eines Eckpunktes, Berhrungspunkt zweier Wnde: Verminderung um 9 dB(A)
pour lequel A= dBA vent. - dBA motor
position of fans with electric motor in the environment : Installed near a wall without any absorbent property : increase of 3 dB(A) Installed near where two walls meet : increase of 6 dB(A) Installed near where two walls meet in a room with a low ceiling : increase of 9 dB(A)
position du moto-ventilateur en ambience : Install proximit d'une paroi non absorbente : augmentation de 3 dB(A) Install proximit de la rencontre entre deux parois : augmentation de 6 dB(A) Install proximit de la rencontre entre deux parois en ambience basse : augmentation de 9 dB(A)
environment noise : The increase of sound level due to environmental noises is obtained by adding the highest noise level to the B values in the following table :
Geruschtiefe des Umfeldes: Die Erhhung des Schallwertes bedingt durch den Schall des Umfeldes, erhlt man indem zur Geruschentwicklung im hheren Bereich die Werte aus der Tabelle B in der nachfolgenden Tabelle hinzurechnet werden. wo A = dBA Ventilat. - dBA Umfeld
bruits de fond de l'ambience : L'augmentation du niveau sonore due au bruit de fond, s'obtient en ajoutant au niveau le plus haut les valeurs B reportes dans le tableau cidessous : pour lequel A = dBA ventil.-dBA ambiance
in which A= dBA fan - dBA environment
18

A B 0 +3 1 +2,5 23 +2 4 +1,5 58 +1 910 0,5 >10 0
dove A = dBA vent. - dBA motore posizione dellelettroventilatore nellambiente : Installato vicino ad una parete non assorbente: incremento di 3 dB(A) Installato vicino allincontro di due pareti: incremento di 6 dB (A) Installato vicino all'incontro di due pareti in un ambiente basso: incremento di 9 dB(A)
el cual A= dBA vent. - dBA motor
posicin del moto-ventilador en el ambiente : Instalado cerca de una pared sin poder absorbente : aumento de 3 dB(A) Instalado cerca del punto de encuentro de dos paredes: augmentation de 6 dB(A) Instalado cerca del punto de encuentro de dos paredes en ambiente bajo : augmentation de 9 dB(A) ruido de fundo del ambiente : El aumento del nivel sonoro debido al ruido de fundo se obtiene sumando al nivel mas importante los valores B indicados en el cuadro siguiente :
rumorosit di fondo dellambiente: L'aumento di rumorosit dovuto al rumore dell'ambiente si ottiene sommando alla rumorosit a livello pi alto i valori B riportati nella tabella seguente :
A B
3 +3
4-5 +2
68 +1
4 +1,5
910 0,5
>10 0
dove A = dBA vent. - dBA ambiente
para el cual A = dBA vent. - dBA ambiente
19
1.6 TAGS INSTALLED ON THE MACHINE On the machine several indication tags are installed. These are not to be removed for any reason. The indications are divided into : obligation signal danger signal identification signal
1.6 BESCHILDERUNG AUF DER MASCHINE Auf der Maschine befinden sich verschiedene Hinweisaufkleber, welche nicht entfernt werden drfen. Die Signalisierungsaufkleber werden unterschieden in: Pflichtkennzeichnungen Gefahrenkennzeichnungen Identifizierungskennzeichungen
1.6 ETIQUETTES PLACEES SUR LE VENTILATEUR Sur les machines sont presentes diffrentes tiquettes de signalisation, qui ne doivent en aucun cas tres retires. Ces panneaux sont diviss en : Panneau d'obligation Panneau de danger Panneau d'identification
Obligation signal
Pflichtkennzeichnugen
Panneau d'obligation
Use the lubricant indicated on the tag ;
Verwendung der auf dem Schild angegebenen Schmiermittel;
Utiliser les lubrifiants du type indiqu sur la plaquette;
use lifting hoists inserting the hooks into the special holes of the fan.
Verwendung von Kranhebeeinrichtungen, bei welchen der Hebehaken am Ventilator eingehakt wird.
utiliser une grue en placant le crochet dan les percages prvus pour le levage du ventilateur.
Danger signal Warning moving parts. Do not remove guards and do not approach unless authorised.
Gefahrenkennzeichen Vorsicht vor in Bewegung befindlichen Teile, keine Entfernung von Schutzvorrichtungen und keine Annherung unbefugter Personen.
Panneau de danger Attention aux organes en mouvement, ne pas rtirer les protections et ne pas s'approcher si non autoris.
20

1.6 CARTELLI A BORDO MACCHINA Sulla macchina sono presenti diversi pittogrammi di segnalazione, che non devono essere rimossi. I segnali sono divisi in : segnali di obbligo segnali di pericolo segnali di identificazione 1.6 CARTELES PUESTOS SOBRE LAS MAQUINAS Sobre la maquina son presentes diferentes carteles de seal, que no tienen que ser quitados. Estados carteles son dividosen : Cartel de obligo Cartel de peligro Cartel de identificacin
Segnali di obbligo Utilizzare lubrificanti del tipo indicato sulla targa;
Cartel de obligo Utilizado para los lubrificantes indicados sobre el cartel;
utilizzare sollevatori a funi inserendo i ganci nei fori predisposti sul ventilatore.
utilizar levantadores introduciendo los ganchos en los agujeros previstos para alzar el ventilador.
Segnali di pericolo Attenzione agli organi in movimento, non rimuovere le protezioni e non avvicinarsi se non autorizzati.
Cartel de peligro Cuidado con los organos en movimiento, no quitar las protecciones y no acercarse si no autorizado.
21
Indicates the presence of live parts within the container on which the label is applied.
Signalisierung der unter Stromspannung stehenden Bestandteile im Inneren des Klemmenkastens auf welchen nebenstehendes Hinweisschild angebracht wurde.
Signal de prsence d'lments en sous tension l'interieur de la bote sur laquelle est place cette tiquette.
Prohibits opening the access door with the fan in operation.
Verbietet das ffnen der Inspektionstre bei laufendem Ventilator.
Interdit l'ouverture de la porte de visite lorsque le ventilateur est en fonctionnement.
Identification signal EC marking Shows the fan's data and the address of the manufacturer. If the EC marking is seen on the tag, it certifies conformity with European regulations.
Identifizierungskennzeichen CE Registriernummernschild Weist Ventilatordaten und Adresse des Herstellers aus. Falls das Zeichen CE vorhanden ist, wird eine Konformitt bescheinigt gem der Europischen Gemeinschafts Normen.
Signal d'identification Plaquette d'immatriculation CE Reporte les donnes du ventilateur et indique l'adresse du constructeur. En prsence du marquage CE elle atteste de la conformit du matriel aus normatives CEE.
Register tag It is placed class "B" certified fans.
Registriernummernschild Wir angebracht auf Ventilatoren der Klasse B.
Plaquette d'immatriculation Elle est applique sur les ventilateurs certifis en classe "B".
22

Segnala la presenza di parti in tensione allinterno del contenitore su cui la targhetta applicata. Seal de la presencia de elementos en tensin, dentro a la caja sobre la cual est reportado.
Vieta lapertura della portella dispezione con ventilatore in funzione.
Prohibida la abertura de la puerta de inspeccin cuando el ventilador esta funcionando.
Segnali d'identificazione Targhetta matricola CE Riporta i dati del ventilatore e lindirizzo del costruttore. Se presente il marchio CE attesta la conformit del ventilatore alle normative CEE.
Cartel de identificacin Cartel de matricula CE Indica todos los datos del ventilador y indica la direccion del constructor. En presencia de esta marcadura CE certifica la conformidad del material a las normas CEE.
Targhetta matricola applicata sui ventilatori certificati in classe "B".
Cartel de matricula Esta applicada sobre ventiladores de clase "B". los
23
Indicates the earth connection point.
Hinweis an welcher Stelle sich die Erdungsverbindung mit dem Ventilator befindet.
Indique le point pour le branchement de la mise terre.
Shows that the fan has passed the operational trials.
Diese Schild besagt, das der Ventilator die Endkontrollprfung erfolgreich bestanden hat.
Indique que le ventilateur sur lequelle l'tiquette t place, "pass" l'essai avec rsultat positif.
24

Indica il punto per il collegamento di messa a terra. Indica el punto de conexin a la tierra.
Indica che il ventilatore sul quale applicato, passato al collaudo con esito positivo.
Indica que el ventilador sobre el cual esta puesto a pasado la prueba con resultado positivo.
25
2.1 RECEPTION Each fan is carefully checked before being shipped. On receiving, the fan should be checked to ensure that it has not been damaged in transport and, if it has, a claim should be lodged with the forwarder.
2.1
MATERIALEINGANG
2.1 RECEPTION Chaque ventilateur est controll avec soin avant l'expdition. Lors de la reception du matriel il convient de vrifier que le ventilateur n' pas subi de dommages durant le transport, en cas contraire poser une rclamation auprs du transporteur. Le transporteur est responsable des ventuels dommages survenus lors du transport.
Jeder Ventilator wird genauestens berprft vor dem Versand. Bei Empfang ist es erforderlich den Ventilator auf Transportschden zu kontrollieren und gegebenfalls umgehend beim Transporteur reklamieren.
The delivery company is responsible for any damage caused during transport.
Der Frachtfhrer ist verantwortlich fr entstandene Schden whrend des Transportes.
26
2.1 RICEVIMENTO Ogni ventilatore viene controllato accuratamente prima di essere spedito. Allatto del ricevimento occorre controllare che il ventilatore non abbia subito danni durante il trasporto, in caso contrario esporre reclamo al trasportatore.
2.1 RECIBIMIENTO Cada ventilador ha sido controlado con atencin antes de ser mandado. Durante el recibimiento del material es importante verificar que el ventilador no ha subido daos en fase de transporte, para poder poner una reclamacin al transportador. El transportador es responsable de los daos que deirvan del transporte.
Il vettore responsabile di eventuali danni derivanti dal trasporto.
27
3.1 MOVE Before moving the fan, make sure that the vehicle used has sufficient load capacity.
3.1 TRANSPORT Vor Befrderung des Ventilators, vergewissern Sie sich ob das verwendete Transportmittel geeignet ist.
3.1 DEPLACEMENT Avant de dplacer le ventilateur, vrifier que le chariot levateur utils est de taille adapte.
For the lifting use a hoist crane or a fork-lift, inserting the hooks in the holes shown on the tags.
Heben Sie den Ventilator mittels Kran oder Gabelstapler , verwenden Sie dabei die mit Hinweisschild gekennzeichnete Stellen.
Pour le levage, utiliser une grue ou un chariot levateur en placant les crochets dans les points indiqus sur l'tiquette.
Particular care must be taken during handling, avoiding knocking the machine which could damage the paint or even cause the fan to malfunction.
Eine Befrderung sollte mit groer Vorsicht erfolgen, d.h. ein Anstoen sollte vermieden werden, da ansonsten eine Beschdigung der ueren Lackierung oder unter Umstnden mit Beeintrchtigungen der Leistungsfhigkeit des Ventilators zu rechnen ist.
Le dplacement doit tre ralis avec une extrme attention, en vitant les chocs qui peuvent endommager la peinture exterieure du ventilateur, et qui pourrait compromettre le bon fonctionnement de la machine.
When moving using the fork-lift truck, do not exceed the speed or maximums slope limits. Never leave the load hanging.
28
Bei der Befrderung mit dem Gabelstabler sind die vorgeschriebenen Geschwindigkeiten und die Transportneigungswinkel zu beachten. Belassen Sie in keinem Fall die Ladung in angehobenem Zustand.
Lors du dplacement avec chariot levateur il est important de respecter les vitesses et pentes autorises. Ne jamais laiser la charge en suspension.
!
3.1 MOVIMENTAZIONE Prima di spostare il ventilatore, accertarsi che il mezzo utilizzato sia di portata adeguata. 3.1 MOVIMENTACION Antes de mover el ventilador, verificar la carga maxima del medio utilizado.
Per il sollevamento servirsi di una gru a funi o di un sollevatore a forche inserendo i ganci nei punti indicati dall'apposito pittogramma.
Para levantar el ventilador utilizar una gra o un carro elevador posicionando los ganchos en los agujeros indicados por los carteles.
La movimentazione deve avvenire con estrema cura, evitando urti che potrebbero danneggiare la verniciatura esterna del ventilatore e potrebbero anche compromettere il corretto funzionamento.
La movimentacin tiene que ser realizada con una extrema atencin, evitando los choques, que pueden daar la pintura externa del ventilador, y que pueden comprometer un funcionamiento correcto del ventilador.
Nella movimentazione con sollevatori a forche rispettare le velocit e le pendenze consentite. Non lasciare mai il carico sospeso per aria.
Durante la movimentacin con el carro elevador es importante respectar las velocidades y declives autorizados. No dejar nunca el cargo en suspensin.
29
4.1
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
4.1
TRANSPORT UND LAGERUNG
4.1
TRANSPORT ET STOCKAGE
The fans must be stored in a dustfree and closed area where the relative humidity is lower than 80 %. Monthly, new grease must be added through the greasing point, turning the impeller by hand (about 100 turns) to avoid rusting from contact on the bearings.
Die Ventilatoren sollten eingelagert werden in geschlossener, nicht staubhaltiger Umgebung und bei einer Luftfeuchtigkeit von max. 80%. Jedes Monat ist es erforderlich neues Schmierfett mittels der Schmiervorrichtung hinzu zugeben und mit der Hand das Laufrad zu drehen (ca. 100 Umdrehungen), um damit eine Kontaktoxidation der Kugellager zu vermeiden.
Les ventilateurs doivent tres entreposs dans un lieu ferm, non poussiereux dont lequel l'humidit relative ne doit pas tre suprieure 80 %. Chaque mois il est important d'introduire de la nouvelle graisse par l'intermdiare des graisseurs, et faire tourner la turbine la main (environ 100 tours) pour viter l'oxydation au contact des roulements.
Introduce new grease in the motor bearings if this one is equipped with greaser. Attention A long storage, even if adequate, may reduce oil or grease lubrication capacity which must be necessarily replaced every two years. Moreover we recommend to check joints and belts before start-up because they may have deteriorated due to long standing. During tranport make sure no water enters the motor, bearings or other delicate components (instrumentation).
Hinzugeben von neuem Schmierfett in Motorkugellagern, falls diese externe Schmiernippel besitzen. Achtung Bei lange Einlagerungszeit, auch wenn korrekt durchgefhrt, reduziert sich die Schmiereigenschaft des Fettes oder ls, welche unbedingt ausgetauscht werden muss nach allen zwei Jahre. Darber hinaus mssen vor einer wieder in Betriebnahme der Zustand von Dichtungen und der Keilriemenantrieb kontrolliert werden, welche durch lngere Einlagerungszeiten Qualittsbeeintrchtigungen in ihren Eigenschaften aufweisen knnten. Whrend des Transportes darauf achten das kein Wasser in den Motor, Lager und in anderen delikaten Breichen (Instrumentierungen) eindringt.
Introduire de la graisse neuve dans les roulements du moteur, si ce dernier est quip de graisseurs. Attention Une longue priode de stockage, mme si adquat peut rduire les capacits de lhuile ou de la graisse, qui doit doivent tres changs tous les deux ans. De plus il est important de contrler les manchettes et les courroies avant le dmarrage car une longue priode dinactivit peut les avoir dtriors. Aprs le transport veuillez vrifier que de leau ne soit pas entrer dans le moteur, les roulements ou dautres parties dlicates (instrumentation).
30
"
4.1 TRASPORTO E MAGAZZINAGGIO I ventilatori devono essere immagazzinati in un luogo chiuso non polveroso dove l'umidit relativa non deve essere superiore all'80%. Ogni mese occorre introdurre nuovo grasso attraverso gli ingrassatori e far girare a mano le giranti (100 giri circa) per evitare l'ossidazione da contatto sui cuscinetti. 4.1 TRANSPORTE Y ALMACENAJE
Los ventiladores tienen que ser almacenados en un lugar cerrado, sin polvo, en el cul la humedad relativa no tiene que ser superior a 80 %. Cada mes es importante introducir nueva grasa por los ingrassadres, y de rotear con las manos el rodete (mas o menos 100 vueltas) para evitar la oxydacin al contacto con los cujinetes.
Introdurre nuovo grasso nei cuscinetti dei motori, quando questi sono dotati di ingrassatori esterni. Attenzione Un lungo immagazzinaggio, anche se corretto, riduce il potere lubrificante del grasso o dell'olio che deve essere obbligatoriamente sostituito ogni due anni. Inoltre, alla messa in marcia, occorre verificare lo stato delle guarnizioni e delle cinghie che possono essersi deteriorate per l'inattivit. Durante il trasporto assicurarsi che non penetri acqua nel motore, nei cuscinetti ed in altre parti delicate (strumentazione).
Introducir nueva grasa en los conjinetes del motor, si este esta equipado de ingrasadores. Atencion Un largo almacenaje, aunque adecuado, puede reducir la capacidad de lubricacion de aceite o grasa, lo cual debe ser necesariamente cambiado cada dos aos. Ademas, nosotros recomendamos comprobar juntas y correas antes de la puesta en marcha porque se pueden haber deteriorado debido a un largo tiempo parado. Durante el transporte, asegurarse de que no entra agua en el motor, cojinetes u otros componentes delicados (instrumentacion).
31
If the fan is delivered without any packing, and if the inlet or outlet are free, it is important to close them with protective plastic film to prevent the entry of dust, foreign bodies, animals, etc ...
Falls der Ventilator ohne Verpackung ist und bei freien Ansaug- und Ausblasffnungen wre, ist es erforderlich diese zu verschliessen mit einer Schutzfolie aus Plastik, um somit ein Eindringen von Schmutz, Fremdkrpern, Tieren usw. zu vermeiden.
Si le ventilateur est dpourvu d'emballage et que les bouches d'aspiration et de refoulement sont libres, il est preferable de placer une pellicule plastique de protection, afin d'viter l'entre de corps trangers, salets, animaux, etc ...
32
"
Se il ventilatore privo di imballo e le bocche aspiranti e prementi fossero libere, si deve chiuderle con una pellicola plastica protettiva, per evitare l'entrata di sporcizia, corpi estranei, animali ecc. Si el ventilador ha sido entregado sin embalaje, y que las bocas aspirante y de rechazo son libres, es aconsejado de poner una hoja plastica de proteccin, para evitar la entrada de cuerpos extraos, suciedad, animales, etc ...
33
5.1 INSTALLATION Position the fan in such a way to assure a minimum space for the maintenance and repair work.
5.1 INSTALLATION Den Ventilator so positionieren, dass ein Mindestfreiraum vorhanden bleibt, damit Arbeiten aus Wartungsoder Reparaturgrnden ohne Platzprobleme durchgefhrt werden knnen. Fr nicht kanalisierte Ventilatoren gilt die Regel das der Abstand D von der Gebudewand grer oder gleich dem Durchmesser der Ansaugffnung des Ventilators sein muss. Im erforderlichen Sicherheitsabstand ist eine Schutzbarriere zu errichten, sodass eine unbeabsichtigte Annherung, an nicht kanalisierte Ansaugffnungen, verhindert wird.
5.1 INSTALLATION Positionner le ventilateur de manire ce qu'un espace minimum soit garanti, pour les interventions de manutention et de rparation.
For fans with inlet not ducted the distance D from the wall must be higher or at least equal to the inlet diameter.
Pour les ventilateurs avec aspiration non canalise la distance D du mur doit tre suprieure ou au moins gale au diamtre daspiration.
We recommend to put a safety barrier to prevent possible accidental approach to fan unducted inlet or outlet.
Nous recommandons de mettre une barrire de scurit pour viter tout accident en cas dapproche de laspiration ou du refoulement non canaliss.
Foundations The foundation should, by preference, be made in reinforced concrete and its minimum weight must to be four times the weight of the rotating mass (around double the total static weight). If the fan is installed on a metallic structure, make sure that it is solid.
Verankerung Das Fundament sollte vorzugsweise aus Stahlbeton bestehen und ein Mindestgewicht entsprechend dem Vierfachen der Schwungmasse (ca. dem Doppelten des statischem Gesamtgewichts) haben. Falls der Ventilator auf einer Metallkonstruktion aufliegt, mu darauf geachtet werden, dass diese entsprechend der Belastung Steifheit und damit gengend Festigkeit aufweist. Eine richtige Nivellierung der Verankerungsvorrichtung oder der Trgerstruktur ist sehr wichtig um schadhaften Vibrationen vorzubeugen.
Fondations Les fondations doivent tre preferablement en bton arm, et le poids minimum doit tre gal au moins 4 fois le poids de la masse tournante (environ le double du poids statique totale). Si le ventilateur est install sur une structure mtallique il est important que cette dernire soit suffisament rigide.
The foundations or support structure must be level to prevent any damaging vibrations.
Un niveau correct des fondations ou de la structure d'appui est trs important pour viter des vibrations qui pourrait entrainer des dommages importants.
34
#
5.1 INSTALLAZIONE Posizionare il ventilatore in modo da garantire sempre uno spazio minimo per gli interventi di manutenzione e di riparazione. 5.1 INSTALACION Posicionar el ventilador de maniera a dejar un espacio minimo para los interventos de manutencin y reparacin.
Per ventilatori con aspirazione non canalizzata, la distanza "D" dalla parete deve essere maggiore o uguale al diametro della bocca aspirante.
Para ventiladores con admision sin conducto, la distancia d desde la pared debe ser mas alta o al menos igual al diametro de admision.
Prevedere, alla necessaria distanza di sicurezza, una barriera che impedisca l'avvicinamento involontario alle bocche del ventilatore non canalizzate.
Recomendamos poner una barrera de seguridad para prevenir posibles accidentes al acercarse al ventilador sin conductos en la admision o salida.
Fondazioni La fondazione deve essere preferibilmente in cemento armato ed il suo peso minimo deve essere uguale a 4 volte il peso della massa rotante (circa il doppio del peso statico totale). Se invece il ventilatore poggia su una struttura metallica, attenzione che questa sia adeguatamente rigida.
Cimientos Los cimientos del ventilador tienen que ser de preferencia em cimiento armado, de un peso minimo igual a 4 veces el peso de la masa roteante (el doble del peso estatico total). Si el ventilador esta instalado sobre una estructura metlica es importante que esta ultima sea suficientemente rigida.
Un corretto livellamento delle fondazioni o della struttura di appoggio molto importante per prevenire dannose vibrazioni.
Una nivelacin correcta de los cimientos o de la estructura de apoyo es importante par evitar vibraciones que pueden provocar daos importantes.
35
5.2 POSITIONING Take the anti-vibrations supports (if included with the supply) from the plastic bag attached to the fan.
5.2 P O S I T I O N I E R U N G S E I N RICHTUNG Entnahme der Schwingungsdmpfer (falls diese im Lieferumfang enthalten sind) aus der hierfr vorgesehenen Verpackung die sich am Ventilator festgemacht befindet.
5.2 POSITIONNEMENT Prelever les supports antivibratoires (si inclus dans la fourniture) dans le sachet fix sur le ventilateur.
Lift up the fan, remove the wood feets
Anheben des Ventilators und entfernen der Holzsttzfsse
Lever le ventilateur, retirer les pieds en bois
and install the antivibrations supports.
nachfolgend anbringen der Schwingungsdmpfer.
et visser antivibratiles.
les
supports
36
#
5.2 POSIZIONAMENTO Prelevare i supporti antivibranti (se inclusi nella fornitura) dall'apposito sacchetto fissato al ventilatore. 5.2 POSICIONAMIENTO Prelevar los soportes antivibraciones (si incluidos en el abastecimiento) en la bolsa de plastico puesta sobre el ventilador.
Sollevare il ventilatore e rimuovere i piedini di legno
Levantar el ventilador, quitar los pies de madera
successivamente avvitare i supporti antivibranti.
y atornillar los soportes antivibraciones.
37
6.1 STARTING Before starting up it is important to carry out various checks : check that the bearings of the fan and motor are correctly lubricated.
6.1 INBETRIEBNAHME Vor Inbetriebnahme ist es angebracht einige Kontrollen durchzufhren: uberprfung der Schmierung der Kugellager des Ventilators und des Motors.
6.1 DEMARRAGE Avant le dmarrage il est opportun d'ffectuer certains contrles : vrifier que les roulements du ventilateur et su moteur sont lubrifi.
Make sure the drive flexible connection is adequately lubricated.
berprfen ob der Flexible Kupplungsantrieb ber gengend Schmierung verfgt.
Vrifier que les joints daccouplement soit correctement lubrifis.
Make sure that all the bolts are fully tightened, particularly the bolts of the supports,
Kontrolle ob alle Schrauben angezogen sind, dabei besondere Beachtung den Lagerhalterungen,
Etres srs que tous les boulons soit serrs fond, en prtant une attention particulire ceux des supports,
of the foundations,
der Verankerungen schenken,
des fondations,
38
$
6.1 AVVIAMENTO Prima dellavviamento opportuno effettuare alcuni controlli: verificare che i cuscinetti del ventilatore e del motore siano lubrificati. 6.1 ARRANQUE Antes del arranque es oportuno efectuar algunos controlos : verificar que los cujinetes del ventilador y del motor sean correctamente lubrificados.
Verificare che il giunto di trasmissione sia lubrificato.
Asegurarse de la lubricacion adecuada del acoplamiento elastico para ventiladores en es.8
Accertarsi che tutti i bulloni siano serrati a fondo, prestando particolare attenzione a quelli dei supporti,
Ser seguros que todos los tornillos sean bloqueados, con una atencin particular a los tornillos de los soportes.de los cimientos,
delle fondazioni,
de las fundacines,
39
of the pulley bushes,
den Buchsen der Riementriebscheiben,
des douilles des poulies,
of the coupling joint
den flexiblen Antriebskupplungen
des joints d'accouplement
the motor
Motors zu schenken
du moteur
and close the head screw of the impeller.
und der Kantschrauben des Laufrades.
et de la vis de tte de la turbine.
40
$
delle bussole delle pulegge, de las poleas,
del giunto di trasmissione
de la junta de acoplamiento
del motore
del motor
e della vite di testa della girante.
y del tornillo delante al rodete.
41
Check that there is no foreign matter inside the fan.Rotate the impeller by hand to be sure that it does not touch the walls.
Kontrollieren ob sich innerhalb des Ventilators keine Fremdkrper befinden.
Vrifier qu' l'interieur du ventilateur ne soit prsent aucun corps tran-ger.
Rotate the impeller by hand to be sure that it does not touch the walls.
Manuelle berprfen und sich vergewissern, dass das Laufrad nicht an der Innenseite des Gehuses schleift.
Essayer de faire tourner manuellement la turbine afin d'tra srs qu'elle ne frotte pas sur les parois.
Check the alignment of the pulleys.
berprfen der Riemenscheibenausrichtung.
Contrler l'alignement des poulies.
Check the alignment of the pulleys.Check the alignment of the coupling joint (See art. 7.1).
berprfen der Ausrichtung des flexiblen Kupplungsantriebes (siehe Kap. 7.1).
Contrler l'alignement de joint d'accouplement (Voir Art. 7.1).
42
$
Accertarsi che all'interno del ventilatore non ci siano corpi estranei. Verificar la presencia de cuerpos extraos al interior del ventilador.
Provare manualmente che la girante non sfreghi sulle pareti.
Verificar con la mano si el rodete no toca el pabelln de aspiracin.
Controllare lallineamento delle pulegge.
Controlar el alineamiento de las poleas.
Controllare l'allineamento del giunto (vedi cap. 7.1).
Controlar el alineamiento de la junta de acoplamiento (ver art. 7.1).
43
Check the tension of the belts (see art. 7.1).
berprfen der Riemenspannung (siehe Kap. 7.1).
Vrifier la tension des courroies (Voir Art. 7.1)
Manually check that all the parts rotate freely.
berprfen ob sich alle drehbaren Teile ohne Widerstand von Hand drehen lassen.
Vrifier que toutes les parties tournent librement manuellement.
Check if all the protection guards are fitted and make sure that the screws are fully tightened.
Kontrolle ob alle Riemenschutzvorrichtungen montiert und alle Schrauben angezogen sind.
Contrler que tous les carters de transmission soient installs et vrifier le serrage de la visserie.
Check that the access door is closed.
Kontrolle der Inspektionstre.
Vrifier que la porte de visite soit ferme.
44
$
Verificare la tensione delle cinghie (vedi cap. 7.1) Verificar la tension de las correas (ver art. 7.1).
Appurare che tutte le parti girino liberamente ruotando a mano la girante.
Verificar manualmente que todas las partes rotean libremente.
Controllare che tutti i carter di protezione siano montati e verificare il serraggio della bulloneria.
Controlar que todas las protecciones sean instaladas, y verificas todos los tornillos.
Verificare che la portella dispezione sia chiusa.
Verificar que la puerta de inspeccin sea cerrada.
45
Attention If the inlet or the outlet of the fan are not ducted, it is important to attach a suitable protection screen.
Achtung Wenn Einstrm- und Austrmffungen offen sind, mssen entsprechende Schutzgitter angebracht werden.
Attention Si les bouches ne sont pas canalises il est important de prvoir une grille de protection adquate.
Check the earth connection.
Kontrolle der Erdungsverbindung.
Contrler le branchement de la mise terre.
At this point start the motor.
An diesem Punkt angelangt, den Motor in Betrieb nehmen.
A ce point dmarrer le moteur.
Check if the rotating direction is the same as the one shown on the target.
berprfen Sie, ob die Drehrichtung mit jener auf dem Typenschild bereinstimmt.
Vrifier que le sens de rotation soit le mme que celui report sur la plaquette.
46
$
Attenzione Se le bocche non sono canalizzate si deve prevedere una adeguata rete di protezione. Atencin Si las bocas non son canalizadas es importante preveder unas rejillas de proteccin adaptada.
Controllare il collegamento di messa a terra.
Controlar la conexin a la tierra.
A questo punto avviare il motore.
A este punto arranquar el motor.
Verificare che il senso di rotazione sia quello riportato sulla targhetta.
Verificar que el senso de rotacin sea el mismo que sobre el cartel del ventilador.
47
If it goes in a different direction, shut off the power supply and reverse the phases in the connection box.
Nach ca. einer Stunde nach Inbetriebnahme, berprfung ob alle Bolzen und Schrauben angezogen sind.
Si le sens de rotation est diffrent, isoler le ventilateur de l'alimentation lectrique, et invertir les phases sur la bote bornes.
Restart the motor and make sure the bearings do not heat over 90C and that vibrations are within the contractual limits. Should vibrations be too high as a consequence of transport, handling on site or quality of the foundations, check belt drive alignment (belts flexible connection), control quality of the foundations and in case proceed with fan rebalancing.
Wieder einschalten des Motors. Am Ventilator eine Temperaturkontrolle an den Lagern durchfhren, dabei darauf achtend das 90C nicht berschritten werden und Vibrationen innerhalb vertraglich vereinbarter Tolleranzen liegen. In Fllen von starken Vibrationen, bedingt durch den Transport, der Befrderung innerhalb der Baustelle, der Qualitt der Bodenverankerungen, ist eine Ausrichtung des Antriebs erforderlich (Keilriemen, Flexible Kupplung), ebenfalls mssen berprft werden die Qualitt der Bodenverankerung und wenn notwendig auch die Wuchtgte des Laufrades. Nach ca. einer Stunde Betriebsdauer berprfen ob alle Muttern und Schrauben fest sitzen. Falls erforderlich anziehen der Schrauben wiederholen. Besonderer Aufmerksamkeit mu den Schraubenmuttern des Monoblocks geschenkt werden,
Redmarrer le moteur et vrifier que la temprature ne soit pas suprieure 90C et que les vibrations soit comprises dans les limites contractuelles. Si les vibrations sont trop importantes en raison du transport, du type dinstallation ou de la qualit des fondations, vrifier lalignement des courroies (courroies et manchettes souples), contrler la qualit des fondations et en cas de besoin procder lquilibrage du ventilateur.
After one hour running, check the lock of all the screws. In case of necessity repeat the locking of the screws. With a particular attention to the monoblock support bolts,
Aprs une heure de fonctionnement controller que toutes les vis soit bien bloques. Si ncessaire repeter le serrage. Porter une attention toute particulire aux boulons du monobloc,
48
$
Se il senso di rotazione diverso, isolare il ventilatore dallalimentazione elettrica e invertire le fasi nella morsettiera. Si el senso de rotacin es diferente, aislar el ventilador de la alimentacin electrica, y invertir las fases en la caja de conexin del motor.
Riavviare il motore e controllare che i cuscinetti del ventilatore non scaldino oltre i 90 C e non vibrino oltre i limiti contrattuali. In caso di eccessive vibrazioni, conseguenti al trasporto, alla movimentazione in cantiere, alla qualit delle fondazioni, procedere ad un controllo dell'allineamento della trasmissione (cinghie giunto), della qualit delle fondazioni e se necessario rivedere l'equilibratura.
Volver a arrancar el motor y asegurarse de que los cojinetes no alcanzan una temperatura superior a los 90C y que las vibraciones estan entre los limites contractuales. Las vibraciones deberian ser muy altas como consecuencia del transporte, de la manipulacion o de la calidad de las fundas, comprobar el alineamiento de las correas (correas - conexion flexible), control de calidad de las fundas y en caso de que proceda, con el reequilibrado del ventilador.
Dopo unora circa di funzionamento controllare che tutti i bulloni e le viti siano bloccati. Se necessario ripetere il serraggio. Prestare particolare attenzione ai dadi del monoblocco,
Despues de una ora de funcionamiento, controllar el bloqueo de todos los tornillos. En caso de necessidad repetir el bloqueo. Llevar una atencin particular a los tornillos del soporte monobloque,
49
of the motor,
del Motor,
du moteur,
of the guards
der Schutzvorrichtungen
des protections
and of the antivibrations supports.
und der Schwingungsdmpfer.
et des supports antivibratiles.
50
$
del motore, del motor,
delle protezioni
de las proteccines
e dei piedini antivibranti.
y de los soportes antivibraciones.
51
Check the tension of the belts after 2-4-8-100 hours of running (see art. 7.1).
berprfen der Riemenspannung nach 2 - 4 - 8-100 Stunden Betrieb (Siehe Kap. 7.1).
Vrifier la tension des courroies aprs 2-4-8-100 heures de fonctionnement (voir. Art. 7.1).
Check the alignment of the coupling joint after 4 hours of running.
berprfen der Ausrichtung des Flexiblen Kupplungsantriebes nach 4 Stunden Betrieb.
Vrifier l'alignement du joint d'accouplement aprs 4 heures de fonctionement.
52
$
Verificare la tensione delle cinghie dopo 2-4-8-100 ore di funzionamento (vedi cap. 7.1). Verificar la tensin de las correas despues de 2-4-8-100 oras de funcionamiento funcionamiento (ver art. 7.1).
Verificare l'allineamento del giunto dopo 4 ore di funzionamento.
Verificar el alineamiento de la junta de acoplamiento despues de 4 oras de funcionamiento.
53
6.2 IMPORTANT NOTICE

Temperature and rotation Fan working at lower revolutions per minute and higher temperatures than the contractual values is forbidden. Fan working at lower revolutions must be authorized by the manufacturer in order to avoid resonance frequencies.
6.2 BESONDERE HINWEISE

Temperatur und Drehgeschwindigkeit Dern Betrieb des Ventilators gilt als untersagt, wenn die Drehzahl oder die Temperatur hher liegen als vertraglich vereinbart. Der Betrieb des Ventilators mit niedrigerer Drehzahl als vertraglich vereinbart bedingt der Zustimmung des Herstellers, mit der Begrndung eine mgliche Bildung von Resonanzschwingungen zu vermeiden.
6.2 NOTE IMPORTANTE

Temprature et rotation Lutilisation des ventilateurs fonctionnant une vitesse infrieure ou un temprature suprieure aux valeurs contractuelles est interdites. Les ventilateurs tournant une vitesse infrieure doivent tre autoriss par le fabricant pour viter les problmes de rsonances.
Adjustment of the r.p.m. Adjustment shall not cause excessive accelerations or decelerations of the impeller. The maximum allowed value to avoid breaking due to overwork in a short time is 0.5 rad/sec2 .
Drehzahlregelung Beide der Drehzahlregelung darf keine berhhte Beschleunigung oder eine zu starke Abbremsung des Laufrades generiert werden. Der maximal zulssige Wert betrgt 0,5 rad/sec2 (Beschleunigung/Bremsung), um damit eine berbeanspruchung des Materials, welche gleichbedeutend wre mit einer Reduzierung der Lebensdauer, zu vermeiden. Auf alle Flle, untersteht ein Ventilator mit Drehzahlregulierung sehr viel hheren Beanspruchungen als bei Betrieb mit fixen Drehzahlen, bedingt durch die Beschleunigungen und des Frequenzwechseldurchlaufes der verschiedenen Komponenten. Dies fhrt zu eine Reduzierung der Lebensdauer des Ventilators. Es empfiehlt sich daher eine vollstndige Ventilatorrevision alle zwei Jahre durchzufhren und den Austausch des Laufrades alle 0,5 Millionen Drehzahlnderungen.
Rglage de la vitesse Le rglage de la vitesse ne doit pas causer de fortes acclrations ou dclrations de la turbine. La valeur maximale admise pour viter une rupture rapide due dpassement de la limite est de 0.5 rad/sec.
In any case a fan with r.p.m. adjustment is more likely subject to accelerations and is also crossed by the frequencies of the other components which are the cause of shorter fan life.
Il reste entendu quun ventilateur subissant des rglages de vitesse et sujet des sollicitations dues aux acclrations, et aux passages des frquences propres des diffrents composants, causant une rduction de la dure de vie du ventilateur. Nous conseillons une rvision complte du ventilateur tous les deux ans ou le remplacement de la turbine chaque 0,5 millions de variations de la vitesse.
We recommend a complete revision of the fan every two years and replacement of the impeller every 0.5 million variations of the r.p.m.
54
$
6.2 AVVERTENZE SPECIALI
Temperatura e Rotazione Non consentito far funzionare il ventilatore ad un numero di giri ed a temperatura superiori a quella contrattuale. Per funzionamento ad un numero di giri inferiore necessario l'autorizzazione del costruttore per evitare le frequenze di risonanza.
6.2 AVISO IMPORTANTE

Temperatura y rotacion Ventiladores estan trabajando a tan bajas revoluciones por minuto y a altas temperaturas que los valores contractuales estan olvidados. Los ventiladores que estan trabajando a tan bajas revoluciones, deben ser autorizados por el fabricante con el objetivo de evitar frecuencias.
Regolazione del numero di giri La regolazione non deve generare accelerazioni o decelerazioni eccessive della girante. Il valore massimo consentito di 0.5 rad/sec2, per non incorrere in rotture per affaticamento entro breve periodo.
Ajuste de r.p.m. El ajuste no debe causar excesivas aceleraciones o deceleraciones al ventilador. El valor maximo permitido para evitar que se rompa debido al exceso de trabajo en poco tiempo, es 0,5 rad/seg2.
In ogni caso un ventilatore con regolazione di giri molto pi sollecitato per le accelerazioni e per l'attraversamento delle frequenze proprie dei vari componenti comportando una riduzione della durata del ventilatore stesso. Si consiglia la revisione completa della macchina ogni due anni ed una sostituzione della girante ogni 0.5 milioni di varazioni del n. di giri.
En cualquier caso, un ventilador con modificacion de r.p.m., es preferible sujeto a aceleraciones y tambien esta cruzado por las frecuencias de otros componentes, los cuales son la causa de la corta vida del ventilador.
Nosotros recomendamos una revision completa delventilador cada dos aos y el reemplazamiento del ventilador cada 0,5 millones de variaciones de r.p.m.
55
Working at high temperatures (> 100C) Before turning the fan off, make it work with fluid at lower temperature until impeller and shaft reach a temperature of 90C to avoid damage to bearings and deterio-ration of the lubricant.
Betrieb bei erhhter Temperatur (> 100C) Vor Ausschaltung des Ventilators, den Ventilator bei niedrigeren Fluidum Temperaturen betreiben, bis Laufrad und Welle eine Temperatur unter 90C aufweisen, um somit einer Beschdigung der Lager und der Verschlechterung des Schmierfettes zu vermeiden. Darauf achten das: ein Betrieb mit reduzierter Drehzahl (Drehzahlreger) die Funktion des Khlflgel beeintrchtigt. Eine pltzliche Auerbetriebnahme (Strommangel) eine Erhhung der Lagertemperatur verursacht, aus diesem Grund ist eine zustzliche externe Luftkhlung notwendig (mittels Pressluft oder einen kleinen Service Ventilator), welche von einer sicheren Quelle versorgt werden muss um eine berschreitung der Temperatur von ber 90C stehts zu vermeiden.
Fonctionnement temprature leves (> 100C) Avant dteindre le ventilateur, il est ncessaire de le faire fonctionner plus basse temprature jusqu ce que la turbine et larbre atteignent la temprature de 90C pour viter dendommager les roulements et dtriorer le lubrifiant. Attention : Le fonctionnement une vitesse infrieure (par variateur de frquence) diminue leffet de la turbine de refroidissement. Un arrt soudain (interruption de lalimentation) comporte une hausse de la temprature des roulements, il est donc ncessaire dintervenir extrieurement avec un jet dair aliment par une source sure (air comprim ou petit ventilateur de service pour viter que la temprature dpasse les 90C sur le support.
Pay attention to: fan working at reduced r.p.m. (r.p.m. regulator) reduces the cooling wheel efficacy. A sudden top (power failure) causes bearings temperature increase; it is therefore necessary an intervention with additional air flow from outside through a safe air generator (compressed air or small service fan) so that the bearing support temperature never exceeds 90C.
56
$
Funzionamento a temperature elevate (>100 C) Prima di spegnere il ventilatore, farlo funzionare con fluido a pi bassa temperatura sino a che la girante e l'albero non raggiungono una temperatura di 90 C per evitare il danneggiamento dei cuscinetti ed il deterioramento del lubrificante. Fare attenzione che: un funzionamento a giri pi ridotti (variatore di giri) diminuisce l'effetto della ventolina di raffreddamento. un arresto improvviso (mancanza di alimentazione) comporta un innalzamento della temperatura dei cuscinetti ed quindi necessario intervenire esternamente con un getto di aria supplementare alimentata da una sorgente sicura (aria compressa o piccolo ventilatore di servizio) per non superare mai i 90 C sul supporto. Trabajando a altas temperaturas (superior a 100c) Antes de desviar el ventilador, hacerlo trabajar con fluidos a una baja temperatura hasta que el ventilador y el eje alcancen una temperatura de 90c, para evitar daos a los cojinetes y deterioro del lubricante. Poner atencion a: un ventilador trabajando a r.p.m. reducidas (regular r.p.m.) reduce la eficacia del enfriamiento de la rueda. Un repentino paro (fallo de encendido) causa un incremento de temperatura de los cojinetes; por lo tanto, es necesario una intervencion con adicional flujo de aire del exterior a traves de un generador de aire seguro (aire comprimido o un pequeo servicio de un ventilador) pero que nunca sobrepase la temperatura del cojinete de 90C.
57
7.1 MAINTENANCE The maintenance of the fan basically means ensuring that all the bearings are properly lubricated, periodically checking the transmission, and in cleaning the impeller.
7.1 WARTUNG Eine Wartung der Ventilatoren besteht hauptschlich aus einer Gewhrleistung einwandfreier Schmierung aller Kugellager, der periodischen Kontrolle des Riementriebes und einer Suberung des Laufrades. Achtung Alle Wartungseingriffe am Ventilator drfen nur im Ruhezustand des Ventilator erfolgen und bei entfernter elektrischer Stromverbindung, Preluft oder Dampfes usw.
7.1 MANUTENTION La manutention des ventilateurs consiste principalement dans le maintien d'une correcte lubrification de tous les roulements, dans un contrle priodique de la transmission et de la propret de la turbine. Attention Toutes les interventions de manutention doivent tres effectus avec un ventilateurs l'arrt, il est important de vrifier que toute alimention qu'elle soit lectrique, air comprim ou vapeur, ait t coupe. Lubrification des roulements Les roulements des ventilateurs sont livrs avec la quantit de graisse ncessaire un fonctionnement normal. A la suite de la priode de rodage durant laquelle les roulements doivent lubrifis chaque semaine, l'intervalle de lubrification sera fonction du nombre de tours du ventilateur et la taille et du type des roulements. Lubrification des moteurs Les moteurs lectriques n'tant quips de graisseurs extrieurs, sont fournis avec des roulements tanches prlubrifis viem ne demandant donc pas de lubrification priodique. Les moteurs lectriques quips de graisseurs extrieurs doivent tres lubrifis priodiquement (voir manuel d'instruction du moteur).
Attention All maintenance must only be carried out when the fan is stopped and supplies of electricity, compressed air and steam, etc. disconnected.
Lubrication of the bearings The fan bearings are supplied with the necessary quantity of grease for normal running. After the initial running-in period during which the bearings must be lubricated weekly, the lubrication interval will depend on the speed of the fan and on the type and size of the bearings
Schmierung der Kugellager Die im Ventilator eingebauten Kugellager sind mit der ntigen Schmierung versehen fr den Normalbetrieb. Nach der ersten Betriebszeit in welcher einer Schmierung der Kugellager jede Woche erfolgen muss, richtet sich der Schmierinterval nach der Drehzahl des Ventilators und Grsse und Typ der Kugellager sowie Temperatur. Schmierung Motoren Elektromotoren, welche ber keine extern angebrachten verlngerten Schmiernippel verfgen, sind mit lebenslang vorgeschmierten Kugellager ausgestattet, aus diesem Grund bentigen diese keine periodische Schmierung. Motoren, welche extern angebrachte Schmiernippel besitzen, mssen in regelmigen Abstnden geschmiert werden (Siehe Bedienungsanleitung des Motors). Schmierung der Flexiblen Kupplungsantriebe Flexibler Kupplungen sollten zirka alle 8 Monate nachgeschmiert werde.
Motor lubrication The electric motors supply without external geasers, are equipped with sealed life prelubrificated bearings, and don't need any periodical lubrification.
The electric motors supply with external greasers requires a periodical lubrification. (See manual of instructions of the motor). Lubrication of flexible connections Flexible connections must be greased every 8 months.
58
Lubrification des joints daccouplements Les joints daccouplement doivent tres graisss en moyenne tous les 8 moins.
%
7.1 MANUTENZIONE La manutenzione dei ventilatori consiste principalmente nel mantenere una corretta lubrificazione di tutti i cuscinetti, di un controllo periodico della trasmissione e della pulizia della girante. 7.1 MANUTENCION La manutencin de los ventiladores consiste principalmente en el mantenimiento de una correcta lubrificacin de todos los cojinetes, in un control periodico de la transmicin y de la limpieza.
Attenzione Tutti gli interventi di manutenzione devono essere effettuati a ventilatore fermo provvedendo a disinserire tutte le alimentazioni quali elettricit, aria compressa, vapore, ecc.
Atencin Todos los interventos de manutencin tienen que ser efectuados con el ventilador parado, es importante de verificar que la alimentacin que sea electrica, de aire comprimido o de vapor ha sido cortada. Lubrificacin de los cujinetes Los cojinetes de los ventiladores son entregados con la cantidad de grasa necesaria a un funcionamiento normal. Despues del periodo de rodaje durante la cual los cojinetes tienen que ser lubrificados cada semana, el intervalo de lubrificacin sara funcin de las vueltas del ventilador, y de la misura y del tipo de cojinetes. Lubricacion del motor Los motores electricos que no tienen ingrasadores exteriores, son fornidos con cojinetes estaos prelubrificados a vida, y no piden ninguna lubrificacin periodica.
Lubrificazione cuscinetti I cuscinetti dei ventilatori sono consegnati con la quantit di lubrificante necessaria per il normale funzionamento. Dopo il periodo iniziale di rodaggio in cui si devono lubrificare i cuscinetti ogni settimana, lintervallo di lubrificazione in funzione del numero di giri del ventilatore e della grandezza e tipo di cuscinetti. Lubrificazione motori I motori elettrici che non hanno ingrassatori esterni sono equipaggiati con cuscinetti stagni prelubrificati a vita, quindi non richiedono nessuna lubrificazione periodica. I motori equipaggiati con ingrassatori esterni devono essere periodicamente lubrificati (vedi manuale di istruzione del motore).
Los motores electricos fornidos con ingrasadores exteriores tienen que ser lubrificados periodicamente (ver manual de instrucciones del motor).
Lubrificazione giunti I giunti di trasmissione vanno ingrassati mediamente ogni 8 mesi.
Lubricacion de acoplamientos elasticos Los acoplamientos elasticos deben ser engrasados cada 8 meses.
59
Belts stretching Before belts tensioning mark on the tensioned belt a line A-B of 1 meter and then make the first tensioning until you extend the line A-B of 5 mm.
Spannung der Riemen Vor Spannung der Keilriemen, einen leicht angespannten Abschnitt des Keilriemen Abschnitt zwischen A-B gleichbedeutend mit 1 m markieren und eine erste Keilriemenspannung durchfhren, bis sich der markierte A-B Abschnitt um 5 mm verlngert hat. Nach zwei Tage eine zweite Spannung durchfhren um eine weitere Streckung von 3 mm des markierten A-B Abschnittes zu erhalten. Nach zwei weiteren Tagen eine dritte Spannung durchfhren, sodass schlielich eine Gesamtstreckung von 10 mm erhalten wird.
Tension des courroies Avant de tendre les courroies marquer sur le ct de la courroie un trait A-B gal 1 mtre et effectuer la premire tension, jusqu obtenir une extension du trait A-B de 5 mm.
After 2 days make the second tensioning until to extend the line A-B of 3 mm more.
Aprs 2 jours effectuer la seconde tension, jusqu tendre les courroies de 3 mm supplmentaires. Aprs 2 jours effectuer la troisime tension, jusqu tendre les courroies de 2 mm supplmentaires, pour obtenir une extension totale de 10 mm.
After 2 days make the third tensioning until to extend the line A-B of 2 mm more, for a total extension of 10 mm.
Correct alignment
Ausrichtung des Flexiblen Kupplungsantriebs Die maximal erlaubten Abweichung bei der Ausrichtung (a = kanten Ungenauigkeit p = parallel Ungenauigkeit) sind in der Tabelle angegeben.
Alignement correct
The maximum tolerated misalignments (a= angular misalignment p = parallel misalignment) are as shown in the table.
Les dsalignement maximum admissibles (a = dsalignement angulaire p= dsalignement parallle) sont indiqus dans le tableau.
60
%
Tensione delle cinghie Prima di tendere le cinghie contrassegnare sul ramo teso un tratto A-B pari ad 1 metro ed effettuare il 1 tensionamento fino ad allungare il tratto A-B di 5 mm. Tensin de las correas Antes de tensar las correas marcar una linea A-B de 1 metro sobre la correa tensada y luego tensar la primera vez hasta tener una alargamiento de la linea A-B de 5 mm.
Dopo due giorni effettuare il 2 tensionamento fino ad allungare il tratto A-B di altri 3 mm.
Con intervalos de dos dias, tensar las correas progresivamente hasta alcanzar un alargamiento de 3 cm de la linea marcada A-B. Con intervalos de dos dias, tensar las correas progresivamente hasta alcanzar un alargamiento de 2 cm de la linea marcada A-B, para un alargamiento total de 10 mm.
Dopo due giorni effettuare il 3 tensionamento fino ad allungare il tratto A-B di altri 2 mm ottenendo un allungamento complessivo di 10 mm.
Allineamento giunto
Alineamiento correcto
I disallineamenti massimi ammessi (a =disallineamento angolare p =disallineamento parallelo) sono indicati in tabella.
El desalineamiento maximo admisible (a= desalineamiento angular p= desalineamiento paralelo) estan indicados en el cuadro.
d (mm) d85 85d130 130d180 180d230 230d280 280d350
a (mm) 0,20 0,35 0,48 0,62 0,80 1,0
p (mm) 0,08 0,13 0,18 0,25 0,33 0,43
61
Replacing the belts Owing to natural wear and tear the belts will need to be replaced with a frequency depending on the running conditions. To dismantle the belts first of all remove the transmission guard,
Austausch der Riemen Aus Verschleissgrnden ist es erforderlich, die Riemen periodisch zu ersetzen, der Austauschzeitpunkt ist abhngig von den Anwendungsbedingungen. Zur Demontage der Riemen muss der Riemenschutz abmontiert werden,
Changement des courroies En raison de l'usure naturelle il est ncessaire de substituer les courroies avec une priodicit variable en fonction des conditions d'utilisation. Pour pouvoir dmonter les courroies il es tout d'abord ncessaire, de retirer le carter de transmission,
then release the screws for the motor,
nachfolgend sind die Befestigungsschrauben des Motors zu lsen
de deserrer successivement les vis de bloquage du moteur
and turn the adjustment screws to reduce the distance between the motr pulley and the fan pulley.
und ebenfalls die Regulierschrauben lsen, mit welchen der Abstand zwischen den Riemenscheiben vom Motor und Ventilator bestimmt werden kann.
yet d'agir sur les vis de rglage pour rduire l'entraxe entre la poulie du moteur et celle du ventilateur.
62
%
Sostituzione delle cinghie Per l'usura naturale necessario effettuare la sostituzione delle cinghie con periodicit variabile in base alle condizioni di utilizzo. Per poter smontare le cinghie bisogna innazzitutto rimuovere il carter di protezione della trasmissione, Cambio de las correas Por culpa de la usura natural es necesario cambiar las correas con periodicamente en funcin de las condiciones de utilizo. Para poder desmontar las correas es necesario quitar las protecciones de la transmisin,
successivamente allentare le viti di bloccaggio del motore
de alentar los tornillos que bloquean el motor electrico
ed agire sulla vite di regolazione per ridurre l'interasse tra la puleggia del motore e quella del ventilatore.
de obrar sobre los tornillos de regulacin para reducir la distancia entre la polea del motor la del ventilador.
63
At this point it is possible to change the belts installing new belts of the same type.
Es drfen nur ganze lngengleiche Riemenstze eingesetzt werden. Riemen nicht mit Gewalt auf die Riemenscheibe setzen.
A ce point effectuer la substitution avec des courroies ayant les mmes caractristiques.
Turning the adjustment screws bring back the motor and check the tension of the belts as previously explained, and then fasten the motor onto the stretchers. Refit the belts guard and fully tighten the bolts.
Riemen spannen mit Regulierschraube gemss Beschreibung, anschliesend Motor festschrauben.
En agissant sur les vis de rglage, faire reculer le moteur, retendre les courroies comme nous l'avons expliqu precedement, et bloquer les vis du moteur sur les rails tendeurs. Remonter le carter et bloquer energiquement les boulements.
Riemenschutz aufsetzen und festschrauben.
64
%
A questo punto effettuare la sostituzione con cinghie aventi caratteristiche uguali. A este punto cambiar con correas de caracteristicas identicas.
Agendo sulla vite di regolazione far arretrare il motore ed eseguire il tensionamento delle cinghie come spiegato precedentemente, quindi bloccare il motore sulle slitte. Rimontare il carter e bloccare energicamente i bulloni.
Obrando sobre los tornillos de regulacin, retraeril motor y executar la tensin de las correas como explicado mas arriba, bloquear los tornillos del motor sobre los trineos de tension. Montar las protecciones, y bloquear todos los tornillos.
65
Replacing the pulleys It is important to periodically check the state of the channels in the pulleys and, if necessary, to change them. It is important to note that the tension of the belts, and the alignment of the transmission are significant factors in prolonging the life of the pulleys. The pulleys with conical bush are replaced as follows: release the three screws and insert one of them in the free hole; turn the screw in until the complete unlock clean the bush shaft support with a cloth but don't grease it mount the pulley on the fan shaft
Austausch der Riementriebsscheiben In periodischen Zeitabstnden den Zustand der Rillen der Scheiben auf Abnutzungsgrad berprfen und falls erforderlich austauschen. Riemenspannung und Ausrichtung der Scheiben sind entscheidend fr die Lebensdauer der verwendeten Scheiben und der Keilriemen. Die Riemenscheiben mit einer konischer Buchse versehen mssen folgendermaen ausgetauscht werden: lsen der drei Blockierschrauben, danach eine Schraube in die Abdrckvertiefung festschrauben bis die Scheibe von der Buchse sich gelst hat Suberung der Wellenbuchse mit einem Tuch, dabei jedoch nicht Schmierfett auftragen Montage der Scheibe auf die Welle des Ventilators
Substitution des poulies Il est important de vrifier priodiquement l'tat des gorges des poulies et si ncessaire de les changer. Il convient de tenir compte du fait que la tension des courroies et l'alignement de la transmission sont des facteurs important dans la dure de vie des poulies. Les poulies douilles coniques doivent tres changes comme suit: dbloquer les trois vis de serrage et en inserer une dans le percage libre, visser fond jusqu'au bloquage nettoyer l'arbre de support de la poulie avec un chiffon qui ne soit pas graisseux monter la poulie sur l'arbre du ventilateur
insert the bush in the pulley taking care that the threaded half holes of the pulley coincide with the nonthreaded half holes of the bush
Einfgen der Buchse in die Scheibe, dabei aufpassend das die vorhanden Lcher von Buchse und Scheibe bereinstimmen
inserer la douille dans la poulie, en ayant soin de faire coincider les demi percage filts de la poulie, avec les demi percages non filts des douilles
put in and tighten the three screws evenly and alternating between them until the pulley is fully fastened
Scheibe ausrichten, Schrauben einfgen und gleichmssig abwechselnd anziehen, bis die Scheibe festsitzt
serrs les trois vis retires pour le dmontage de facon uniforme et alterne, jusqu'au bloquage complet de la poulie
check that the pulleys are statically and dynamically balanced.

66
Sich versichernd das Scheiben statisch und dynamisch gewuchtet sind.
vrifier que les poulies soit quilibres staqtiquement et dynamiquement.
%
Sostituzione delle puleggie Periodicamente verificare lo stato di usura delle gole delle puleggie e se necessario procedere alla loro sostituzione. Tener presente che il tensionamento delle cinghie e l'allineamento della trasmissione sono fattori rilevanti per la durata delle puleggie. Le puleggie a bussola conica vanno sostituite come segue: sbloccare le tre viti di serraggio ed inserirne una nel foro libero, avvitare a fondo sino a sbloccaggio avvenuto pulire lalbero di supporto della bussola con un panno ma non ingrassare montare la puleggia sullalbero del ventilatore Sustitucin de las poleas Es importante verificar periodicamente el estado de los trineos de las poleas para ver si es necesario cambiarlas. Conviene tener cuento del hecho de que las correas y el alineamiento de la transmision son factores importantes para la durada de las poleas. Las brjulas conicas tienen que ser cambiadas como sigue: alentar los tres tornillos y plazar un tornillo en el foro libre, atornillar hasta bloquearla
limpiar el eje del soporte de la polea con un trapo sin grasa. montar la polea sobre el eje del ventilador
inserire la bussola nella puleggia, avendo cura di far coincidere i semi fori filettati della puleggia con i semi fori non filettati della bussola
inerir la brjula en la polea, tenendo mucho cuidado a hacer coincidar los semi foros de la polea, con los semi foros de las brjulas
avvitare le tre viti rimosse per lo smontaggio in modo uniforme ed alternativamente sino al completo bloccaggio della puleggia
atornillar los tres tornillos quitados por el desmontaje, de maniera uniforme y alternada hasta bloquear completamente la polea
accertarsi che le pulegge siano equilibrate staticamente e dinamicamente.
verificar que las poleas han sido equilibradas estaticamente y dinamicamente.

67
Periodical checks We recommend a complete overhaul of the bearings and the supports once a year, washing them with mineral oil (light petrol) and then lubricating them with new grease: It is also recommended to check the impeller periodically (every 3 months) through the inspection door, especially if you note vibrations.
Periodische Kontrollen Es empfiehlt sich einmal im Jahr eine vollstndige Wartung der Kugellager und der Lagergehuse durchzufhren, indem man diese mit Leichtpetrolium reinigt und danach eine Schmierung mit neuem Fett vornimmt: Es empfiehlt sich (zirka alle 3 Monate) regelmig die des Laufrad ber den Inspektionsdeckel zu berprfen, insbesondere dann wenn Vibrationen sich bemerkbar machen (Inspektionsdeckel stehts nur im ausgeschalteten Zustand entfernen).
Contrles priodiques Il est conseill d'effectuer une fois par an, une rvision complte des roulements et des supports en les lavant avec un diluant mineral (petrole lger) et procder ensuite la lubrification avec de la graisse neuve : Nous conseillons une inspection rgulire (en moyenne tous les 3 mois) de la turbine au travers de la porte de visite, surtout si des vibrations se font sentir.
It is also recommended to check periodically (every 6 months) tensioning of the belts, alignment of the V-belt drive and of the coupling joint as well as status of anti-vibration supports.
berprfung in regelmigen Zeitabstnden (zirka alle sechs Monate) der Keilriemenspannung, Keilriemenausrichtung, Ausrichtung des Flexiblen Kupplungsantriebes und den guten Zustand der Schwingungsdmpfer.
Contrler priodiquement (en moyenne tous les 6 mois) la tension des courroies, lalignement de la transmission, lalignement du joint daccouplement et ltat des amortisseurs.
68
%
Controlli periodici Si consiglia una volta all'anno di effettuare una revisione completa dei cuscinetti e dei supporti lavandoli con ragia minerale (petrolio leggero) e poi lubrificandoli con nuovo grasso: si consiglia pure di ispezionare regolarmente (mediamente ogni 3 mesi) la girante attraverso la portella d'ispezione, specialmente se si avvertono vibrazioni. Controlos periodicos Es aconsejado efectuar una vez por ao, una revision completa del cojinete y de los soportes, limpiando con un diluante mineral (petrleo ligero) y lubrificar con grasa nueva: es tambien recomendable comprobar periodicamente el ventilador (cada 3 meses) mediante la puerta de inspeccion, especialmente si se notan vibraciones.
Controllare poi periodicamente (mediamente ogni 6 mesi) la tensione delle cinghie, l'allineamento della trasmissione, l'allineamento del giunto ed il buono stato degli antivibranti.
Es tambien recomendable comprobar periodicamente (cada 6 meses) la tension de las correas, alineamiento de la vcorrea y del acoplamiento, asi como el estado del soporte antivibratorio.
69
7.2 CLEANING In order to prolong the life and good working order of the fan it should periodically have a general clean.
7.2 REINIGUNG Wir empfehlen Ihnen, die Ventilatoren zwecks Erhaltung eines einwandfreien Zustandes und damit einer Dauerhaftigkeit des Ventilators zu gewhrleisten, periodisch eine allgemeine Reinigung durchzufhren. Achtung Isolieren Sie stets den Ventilator vom Netz bevor mit den Reinigungsarbeiten begonnen wird. Fr die Reinigung ist es ausreichend einen Lappen mit Wasser und Reinigungsmittel zu verwenden, setzen Sie keine Reinigungsmittel ein welche die Lackierung und die Dichtungen beschdigen knnten. Achtung Es ist absolut untersagt den direkten Wasserstrahl gegen den Ventilator zu richten.
7.2 NETTOYAGE Pour une bonne conservation et dure du ventilateur effectuer priodiquement un nettoyage gnral.
Attention Before proceeding with the cleaning shut off electrical power to the fan. For the cleaning it is sufficient to use a damp cloth with water or detergent. Do not uses solvents that could damage the painting or the seals.
Attention Isoler chaque fois le ventilateur de l'alimentation lectrique avant de procder au nettoyage. Pour le nettoyage il suffit d'utiliser un chiffon humide avec de l'eau ou du dtergent, ne pas utiliser de solvant qui pourrait endommager la peinture ou les joints.
Attention Jets of water must not be directed onto the fan.
Attention Il est absolument interdit de diriger un jet d'eau directement sur le ventilateur.
If the impeller is encrusted with matter, it should be thoroughly cleaned using a wire brush, removing all the bits with a vacuum cleaner.
Weist das Laufrad Verkrustungen auf, empfiehlt es sich das Laufrad grndlich mit einer Drahtbrste zu subern und den sich ergebenden Schmutz mittels eines Staubsauger zu entfernen.
Si la turbine prsente des dpots de matriaux, il est recommand de la nettoyer avec soins, l'aide d'une brosse mtallique, et de rtirer tous les dchets avec un aspirateur.
70
%
7.2 PULIZIA Per una buona conservazione e durata del ventilatore effettuare periodicamente una pulizia generale. 7.2 LIMPIEZA Para una buena conservacin y durada de su ventilador efectuar periodicamente una limpieza general.
Attenzione Isolare sempre il ventilatore dall'energia elettrica prima di procedere alla pulizia. Per la pulizia sufficiente utilizzare un panno inumidito con acqua o detergente, non utilizzare solventi che potrebbero danneggiare la verniciatura e le guarnizioni.
Atencin Aislar cada vez el ventilador de la corriente electrica antes de limpiarlo. Para la limpieza utilizar un trapo hmedo con agua o detergente, no se tiene que utilizar solventes que pueden daar la pintura o las juntas.
Attenzione assolutamente vietato indirizzare getti d'acqua direttamente sul ventilatore.
Atencines Absolutamente prohibido de dirigir chorros de agua directamente sobre el ventilador.
Nel caso la girante presenti incrostazioni, si raccomanda di pulirla accuratamente in tutte le sue parti con spazzola metallica ed estrarre tutto il materiale asportato con un aspiratore.
Si el rodete presenta depositos de materiales, se aconseja de limpiarlo con atencin, utilizando un cepillo de hierro y extirpar todos los residuos con un aspirador.
71
8.1 SPARE PARTS To order spare parts contact CBI directly indicating, as well as the part required (shaft, impeller, bearings, etc...), all the data as shown on the fan's ID plate.
8.1
ERSATZTEILE
8.1 PIECES DE RECHANGE Pour commander des pices de rechange, contacter directement CBI, en indiquant outre la pice ncessaire (arbre, turbine, roulement, etc ...), toutes les donnes reportes sur la plaquette d'identification du ventilateur.
Zur Bestellung von Ersatzteilen, wenden Sie sich bitte an CBI oder an die einzelnen Lndervertretungen, indem Sie zusammen mit dem bentigten Ersatzteil ( Welle, Laufrad, Kugellager, usw.) smtliche Daten des Ventilators wiedergeben welche sich auf dem Identifikationschild des Ventilators befindet. Da die Zahl der Ersatzteile sehr klein ist, muss keine Ersatzteiliste erstellt werden.
Since there are only a limited number of parts that may need to be changed, a spare part list is not necessary. It is recommended to have a set of bearings always ready for fitting in case of unexpected need.
Etant donn que les composants qui ont besoin d'tres changs sont assez limits, il n'est pas ncessaire de prvoir une liste de pice de rechange. Il est recommand d'avoir une srie de roulements toujours disposition en cas d'urgence.
Es empfiehlt sich stets einen Satz Ersatzkugellager auf Lager zu halten.
72
&
8.1 PARTI DI RICAMBIO 8.1 PIEZAS DE REPUESTO Para ordenar piezas de repuesto, contactar directamente CBI indicando la parte necesitada (eje, rodete, cojinetes, etc ...) y todos los datos indicados sobre el cartel del ventilador.
Per ordinare i ricambi contattare direttamente CBI indicando oltre al particolare richiesto (albero, girante, cuscinetti, ecc.), tutti i dati riportati sulla targhetta di identificazione del ventilatore.
Essendo limitata la quantit di componenti che necessitano essere sostituiti non necessario un elenco ricambi. Si raccomanda di avere una serie di cuscinetti sempre pronta di scorta per ogni evenienza.
La cantidad de componentes que tienen que ser cambiados es muy limitada, no es necesario preveder una lista de piezas de repuesto. Puede ser importante tener siempre a disposicin una serie de cojinetes en caso de urgencia.
73
9.1
PUTTING OUT OF SERVICE AND DISMANTLING
9.1
AUSSERBETRIEBSETZUNG UND ZERLEGUNG
9.1
MISE HORS-SERVICE ET DEMANTELLEMENT
When dismantling the machine, set aside all still functioning parts in order to re-use them.
Im Augenblick der Ausserbetriebnahme und damit der Zerlegung des Ventilators zwecks einer Verschrottung, sollten alle Komponenten die noch einen guten Zustand aufweisen aufbewahrt werden, um diese gegebenenfalls wieder verwenden zu knnen. Trennung der Materialien nach der Rohstoffzugehrigkeit: Eisen, Gummi, l, usw. Die Abflle mssen gesammelt werden in dafr vorgesehene beschriftete Behlter und danach entsorgt werden gem der jeweils am Ort geltenden Bestimmungen, unter Verwendung von anerkannten spezialisierten Industrieunternehmen aus der Abfallbeseitigungswirtschaft. Achtung Es ist strengstens untersagt toxische Abflle in den gewhnlichen Abfall zu werfen oder in Abwasser zu schtten. Normales Schrottmaterial, welches nicht versehen war mit Zertifikaten, darf normal beseitigt werden auf ffentlichen Mllpltzen.
Au moment du demantellement, rcuperer les composants en bon tat, pour pouvoir les rutiliser.
Separate the materials according to type: iron, rubber, oil, etc. Rubbish must be collected in special containers bearing labels, and disposed of in compliance with local laws in force, going to companies specialised in the disposal of waste.
Diviser les matriaux en fonction te leur tipologie : ferreux, gomme, huile, etc ... Les dchets devront tres recolts dans des bacs adquats avec un etiquettage, et jets dans les respect des normatives locales en vigueur, en faisant appel des socits spcialises et reconnues pour le demantellement des dchets.
Attention Do not dispose of toxic wastes in municipal sewerage and drain systems. Uncertified scrap materials can be disposed of at municipal rubbish dumps.
Attention Il est absolument interdit de jeter des dchets toxiques dans les gouts. Les matriaux jeter non pourvus d'une certification peuvent tres jeter automatiquement dans une dcharge municipale.
74
'
9.1 MESSA FUORI SERVIZIO E SMANTELLAMENTO 9.1 DESMONTAJE Y DESMANTELACION
Al momento dello smantellamento recuperare i componenti in buono stato per un riutilizzo.
Al momento de desmantelar el ventilador, recuperar los componentes que lo pueden ser, para poder reutilizarles.
Dividere i materiali in base alla tipologia: es. ferrosi, gomma, olio, ecc. I rifiuti dovranno essere raccolti in appositi contenitori etichettati e smaltiti secondo le normative locali in vigore, ricorrendo a speciali industrie riconosciute per lo smaltimento dei rifiuti.
Dividir los materiales en funcin de su tipo : hierro. goma, aceite, etc ... Los rechazos tienen que ser tirados en basura apropriadas con carteles adaptados, respectando las normas en vigor, utilizando sociedades especializadas y reconocidas para el desmantelamiento de los rechazos.
Attenzione assolutamente vietato scaricare rifiuti tossici nelle condotte di scarico e nei pluviali. I materiali da rottamare non provvisti di certificazione possono essere smaltiti automaticamente ricorrendo a discariche comunali.
Atencin Es absolutamente prohibido tirar los resisuos toxicos en los conductos de descargo. Los materiales residuos sin certificacin pueden ser desmantelados en la descargas municipales.
75
10.1 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
10.1 KUNDENDIENST NACH DEM KAUF Noch einmal vielen Dank fr Ihre Entscheidung einen CBI Ventilator erworben zu haben und welcher wie viele Gerte seine Lebensdauer und Effizienz verlngert, wenn diese mit gutem Kundendienst versorgt wird!
10.1 ASSISTANCE APRESVENTE Nous vous remercions une nouvelle fois pour avoir choisi un ventilateur CBI, qui comme tous les appareils augmente leur dure de vie et efficacit lorsqu'ils sont bien "assists" !
We thank you once again for having chosen a CBI fan which, like all equipment, will increase its life and efficiency if it has good "service".
Please note that all maintenance not mentioned in this manual is to be considered "extraordinary" and thus to be completed by qualified staff.
Wir machen Sie darauf aufmerksam, dass nicht in diesem vorliegendem Handbuch vorgesehene Wartungseingriffe unter auergewhnliche Wartung fallen und deshalb nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgefhrt werden sollte. Mit jeglichem Kundendienst nach dem Kauf ist unsere assoziierte Gesellschaft CBI SERVICE betraut.
Nous vous rappelons que toutes les interventions de manutention non prvues par ce manuel, entre dans les oprations de manutention non communes, et doivent donc tres ralises par des personnes qualifies.
All after-sales service is carried out by our partner company, CBI SERVICE.
Tous les services d'assistance aprs-vente, ont t confie notre filiale CBI SERVICE.
76

10.1 ASSISTENZA POST VENDITA Ancora grazie per aver scelto un ventilatore CBI che come tutte le apparecchiature aumentano la loro durata ed efficienza se vengono ben "assistite"! 10.1 ASSISTENCIA POST VENTA Os agradecemos por haber eligido un ventilador CBI, que como todas las maquinas aumentan su durada de vida y rendimiento si son asistidas en una maniera correcta.
Facciamo notare che interventi di manutenzione non previsti dal presente manuale rientrano nella manutenzione straordinaria e quindi vanno eseguiti da personale qualificato.
Os informamos que los interventos que no hemos describido en el presente manual son de tipo extraordinarios, y por esta razn tienen que ser realizados por un personal especializado.
5AHLE?A
Tel. 02/95.30.84.00 Fax 02/95.30.83.91 E-Mail:info@cbi-service.com Viale delle Industrie, 22 20040 Cambiago (MI) - ITALIA
Tutti i servizi di assistenza post vendita sono delegati alla nostra consociata CBI SERVICE.
Todos los servizios de assistencia post-venta son delegados a nuestra filial CBI SERVICE.
77
11.1 REGISTRATION OF MAINTENANCE AND PERIODICAL CONTROLS
11.1 R E G I S T E R T A B E L L E BER DUCHGEFHRTE P E R I O D I S C H E WARTUNGS- UND KONTROLLARBEITEN
11.1 ENREGISTREMENT DE LA MAINTENANCE ET CONTROLES PERIODIQUES
Item P o s.
Type of operation-Art der durchgefhrten Arbeiten-Type d'opration Tipo di operaz ione effettuata-Tipo de intervencin
78

11.1 TABELLA REGISTRAZIONE INTERVENTI DI MANUTENZIONE E CONTROLLI PERIODICI 11.1 REGISTRO DE MANTENIMIENTO Y CONTROL PERIODICO
Signature of the technician Date-Datum Unterschrift-Signature du technicien Date-Data-Fecha Firma operatore-Firma del tcnico
Comments-Notiz -CommentairesNote-C omentarios
79
Industrie CBI
ed.06/2001
ISO 9001 Cert. n.0646
5/
5.3 EXHAUST AIR FAN FAN (SIGN) MANUFACTURER MODEL ARRANGEMENT ROTATION AIR FLOW STATIC PRESSURE SPEED
TECHNICAL DATA (referred at density of 1,2 Kg/m) V3 F.FERRARI FQ1121N12B CL.I LG 0 12-Z see pages #5.13 & 5.14 Counter-Clockwise 13,88 m/s 2650 Pa 1318 n/1' 51 kW 25,63 kW GREESE LUBRIFICATED F.FERRARI see FERRARI instruction manual (Mill supply) 37 kW 4 / n/1' 440/3/60 V//Hz
POWER consumption (cold) POWER consumption (warm max) MONOBLOC BEARINGS (see page #5.12) LUBRICATION MOTOR POWER POLE SPEED SUPPLY FORM V-BELT DRIVE:
motor pulley F.FERRARI fan pulley V-belt F.FERRARI N F.FERRARI
5.4
5/
FAN DIAGRAM (FQ1121N12B)
5.5
Diagrammi e dimensioni di ingombro esecuzione 1 I Curves and dimensions arrangement 1 I Diagrammes et dimensions arrangement 1 I Leistungskurven und masse ausfhrung 1
Caratteristiche, pesi e dimensioni dingombro del ventilatore tipo Specifications, weight and overall dimensions fan type Caracteristiques, poids et dimensions dencombrement du ventilateur type Eigenschaften, gewichte und masse des ventilators typ
160
FQ 901 N1A
5/
5.4 FAN (SIGN) MANUFACTURER MODEL ARRANGEMENT ROTATION AIR FLOW STATIC PRESSURE SPEED
COMBUSTION AIR FAN V4 V5 TECHNICAL DATA (referred at density of 1,2 Kg/m) V4 V5 F.FERRARI VCM 801 N12B, CLI, LG.0 (V4)-RD0 (V5) 12-Z see pages #5.13 & #5.14 Counter-Clockwise (V4) Clockwise (V5) 2,1 m/s 12100 Pa 2963 n/1' 33,51 kW 22,82 kW GREESE LUBRIFICATED F.FERRARI see FERRARI instruction manual
POWER consumption (cold) POWER consumption (warm) JOURNAL BOX BEARINGS (see page #5.12) LUBRICATION
MOTOR POWER POLE SPEED SUPPLY FORM TRANSMISSION
(MILL SUPPLY) 41,5 Kw 2 3000 n/1 440/3/60 V//Hz
fan pulley
F.FERRARI
motor pulley F.FERRARI V-belt NF.FERRARI
5.6
5/
FAN DIAGRAM (VCM 801 N12B)
5.7
5/
5.5 MAKE UP FAN V6 FAN (SIGN) MANUFACTURER MODEL ARRANGEMENT ROTATION AIR FLOW TOTAL PRESSURE SPEED
TECHNICAL DATA (referred at density of 1,2 Kg/m) V6 C.B.I. EF906/I4A/A 21 / / 5 m/s 495 Pa 1180 n/1' 3,8 KW 3,8 KW / / see F.FERRARI instruction manual (Aerothermic supply) 5,5 Kw 6 1180 g/min 440/3/60 V//Hz
POWER consumption (cold) POWER consumption (warm max) JOURNAL BOX BEARINGS (see page #5.12) LUBRICATION MOTOR POWER POLE SPEED SUPPLY FORM
5.8
5/
FAN DIAGRAM (EF906/I4A/A 21)
5.9
5/
5.6
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS F.FERRARI (SEE PAG. 5.7)
5.10
5/
5.7 FAN TYPE MB 160 SUPPORT TYPE IMPELER SIDE BEARINGS MOTOR SIDE BEARINGS LUBRICANT INTERVAL
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATION
SNL 524 22224 EK C3 + H324 22224 EK C3 + H324+N2 FRB 14-215 CHANGE AFTER 550 HOURS 62 gr. for bearing 470 gr. for fan joint SKF LGEP2 or equivalent
QUANTITY IN GRAMS OF GREASE QUANTITY IN GRAMS OF GREASE GREASE TYPE
FAN TYPE FQ1121N12B MONOBLOC TYPE IMPELLER SIDE BEARINGS MOTOR SIDE BEARINGS LUBRICANT INTERVAL QUANTITY IN GRAMS OF GREASE GREASE TYPE F.FERRARI F.FERRARI F.FERRARI see F.FERRARI user manual see F.FERRARI user manual see F.FERRARI user manual
5.11
5/
FAN TYPE VCM 801 N12B JOURNAL BOX IMPELLER SIDE BEARINGS MOTOR SIDE BEARINGS LUBRICANT INTERVAL
F.FERRARI F.FERRARI F.FERRARI see F.FERRARI user manual see F.FERRARI user manual see F.FERRARI user manual
QUANTITY IN GRAMS OF GREASE GREASE TYPE
5.12
5/
5.13
5/
5.14
6/
6. HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM 6.1 AIR TO AIR EXCHANGER TECHNICAL DATA: SIGN MANUFACTURER PLATE TUBES TOTAL SURFACE TOTAL HEAT RECOVERY WET AIR FLOW
R1 AEROTHERMIC ALLUMINIUM ALLUMINIUM 223.81 878 Kw 17172 Kg/h - temp. in - temp. out 16513 Kg/h - temp. in - temp. out 363C 272C 20C 298C m
2
FRESH AIR FLOW
6.2
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION (R1)
The performance of the economiser is very important for the economy of the drying system To maintain the performance at maximum value the economiser must be clean, especially inside the pipes. On the fresh air inlet duct of the economiser there is a filter; The filter panels are removable for cleaning It is possible to check the inside of pipes throw the inspection ports installed on the bottom and top receivers Cleaning frequencies: Filter net :every week or more often Pipes :every 6 months
Rev. n 0
6. 1
6/
6.3 TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL RANGE SET POINT
AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
PS 410- PS 400- PS 310 310PS 311 Kromschroder DG 10U 1-10 mbar 4 mbar
FOR PRESSURE SWITCH INSTRUCTIONS SEE BELOW
Rev. n 0
6. 2
03250199 04.01 Fx/ivd 63.000
4.1.1.4 Edition 8.01

D
DK
GR
GB
NL
Gas-Druckwchter DG Betriebsanleitung
G Bitte lesen und aufbewahren
www.kromschroeder.de
Pressure switch for gas DG Operating instructions

G Please read and keep in a safe place Explanation of symbols G, 1, 2, 3 ... = Action = Instruction All the work set out in these operating instructions may only be completed by authorised trained personnel! WARNING! Incorrect installation, adjustment, modication, operation or maintenance may cause injury or material damage. Read the instructions before use. This unit must be installed in accordance with the regulations in force.
Pressostat pour gaz Gas-drukschakelaar DG DG Instructions de service Bedieningsvoorschrift

G A lire attentivement et con- G Lezen en goed bewaren a.u.b. server Lgendes G, 1, 2, 3... = action = remarque Toutes les actions mentionnes dans les prsentes instructions de service doivent tre excutes par des spcialistes forms et autoriss uniquement ! ATTENTION ! Un montage, un rglage, une modication, une utilisation ou un entretien inadapts risquent dengendrer des dommages matriels ou corporels. Lire les instructions avant utilisation. Cet appareil doit tre install en respectant les rglements en vigueur. Legenda G, 1, 2, 3... = werkzaamheden = aanwijzing Alle in deze bedrijfshandleiding vermelde werkzaamheden mogen alleen door technici worden uitgevoerd! WAARSCHUWING! Ondeskundige inbouw, instelling, wijziging, bediening of onderhoudswerkzaamheden kunnen persoonlijk letsel of materile schade veroorzaken. Aanwijzingen voor het gebruik lezen. Dit apparaat moet overeenkomstig de geldende regels worden genstalleerd.
Pressostati per gas DG Istruzioni duso

G Si prega conservare di leggere e
Presostato de gas DG Instrucciones de utilizacin

G Se ruega que las lean y conserven Explicacin de smbolos G, 1, 2, 3... = Actividad = Indicacin Todas las actividades indicadas en estas Instrucciones de utilizacin, slo deben realizarse por una persona formada y autorizada! ADVERTENCIA! La instalacin, ajuste, modicacin, manejo o mantenimiento incorrecto puede ocasionar daos personales o materiales. Leer las instrucciones antes de usar. Este dispositivo debe ser instalado observando las normativas en vigor.
Zeichenerklrung G, 1, 2, 3... = Ttigkeit = Hinweis Alle in dieser Betriebsanleitung aufgefhrten Ttigkeiten drfen nur von autorisiertem Fachpersonal ausgefhrt werden! WARNUNG! Unsachgemer Einbau, Einstellung, Vernderung, Bedienung oder Wartung kann Verletzungen oder Sachschden verursachen. Anleitung vor dem Gebrauch lesen. Dieses Gert mu nach den geltenden Vorschriften installiert werden.
Spiegazione dei simboli G, 1, 2, 3... = Operazione = Avvertenza Tutte le operazioni indicate nelle presenti istruzioni duso devono essere eseguite soltanto dal preposto esperto autorizzato. ATTENZIONE! Se montaggio, regolazione, modica, utilizzo o manutenzione non vengono eseguiti correttamente, possono vericarsi infortuni o danni. Si prega di leggere le istruzioni prima di utilizzare il prodotto che dovr venire installato in base alle normative vigenti.
Konformittsbescheinigung
Wir erklren als Hersteller, da die Produkte DG.., gekennzeichnet mit der Produkt-ID-Nr. CE 0085AP0467 die grundlegenden Anforderungen folgender Richtlinien erfllen: 90/396/EWG in Verbindung mit EN 1854 Teil 1, 73/23/EWG in Verbindung mit den einschlgigen Normen. Die entsprechend bezeichneten Produkte stimmen berein mit dem bei der zugelassenen Stelle 0085 geprften Baumuster. Eine umfassende Qualittssicherung ist gewhrleistet durch ein zertiziertes Qualitsmanagementsystem nach DIN EN ISO 9001 gem Anhang II Absatz 3 der Richtlinie 90/396/EWG. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
EC certificate of conformity
We, the manufacturer, hereby declare that the products DG.., marked with product ID No. CE 0085AP0467, comply with the essential requirements of the following Directives: 90/396/EEC in conjunction with EN 1854, Part I, 73/23/EEC in conjunction with the relevant standards. The relevant products correspond to the type tested by the notied body 0085. Comprehensive quality assurance is guaranteed by a certied Quality System pursuant to DIN EN ISO 9001 according to annex II, paragraph 3 of Directive 90/396/EEC. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
Attestation de conformit
En tant que fabricant, nous dclarons que les produits DG.., identis par le numro de produit CE 0085AP0467, rpondent aux exigences essentielles des directives suivantes : 90/396/CEE en association avec EN 1854, partie 1, 73/23/CEE en association avec les normes pertinentes. Les produits dsigns en consquence sont conformes au type prouv lorganisme noti 0085. Une assurance de la qualit complte est garantie par un systme qualit certi selon DIN EN ISO 9001, conformment lannexe II, paragraphe 3, de la directive 90/396/CEE. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
Certificaat van overeenstemming

Wij verklaren als fabrikant dat de producten DG.., gemerkt met het product-identicatienummer CE 0085AP0467, aan de fundamentele voorschriften van de volgende richtlijnen voldoen: 90/396/EEG in combinatie met EN 1854, deel 1, 73/23/EEG in combinatie met de toepasselijke normen. De overeenkomstig gedenticeerde producten komen overeen met het door de aangewezen instantie 0085 gecontroleerde type. Een uitgebreide kwaliteitsborging wordt gegarandeerd door een gecerticeerd kwaliteitsborgingssysteem conform DIN EN ISO 9001 overeenkomstig bijlage II, lid 3 van de richtlijn 90/396/EEG. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
Dichiarazione di conformit
Dichiariamo in qualit di produttori che i prodotti DG.., contrassegnati con il numero di identicazione del prodotto CE 0085AP0467, rispondono ai requisiti essenziali posti dalle direttive seguenti: 90/396/CEE in unione con EN 1854, Parte 1, 73/23/CEE in unione con le norme pertinenti. I prodotti con tale contrassegno corrispondono al tipo esaminato dallorganismo noticato 0085. La sicurezza della qualit garantita da un sistema di management della qualit ai sensi della DIN EN ISO 9001, in base allappendice II, comma 3 della direttiva 90/396/CEE. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
Certificado de conformidad
Nosotros, el fabricante, declaramos que los productos DG.., marcados con el n de identicacin de producto CE 0085AP0467, cumplen con los requisitos bsicos de las siguientes Directivas: 90/396/CEE en relacin con EN 1854, Parte 1, 73/23/CEE en relacin con las normas pertinentes. Los productos denominados de la forma arriba mencionada son conformes con el modelo de construccin ensayado por el respectivo Organismo Noticado 0085. El exhaustivo control de calidad est garantizado por un sistema de gestin decalidad,certicadoconformealanorma DIN EN ISO 9001 segn el Anexo II, Prrafo 3 de la Directiva 90/396/CEE. G. Kromschrder AG, Osnabrck
D-49018 Osnabrck, Germany
DG CE 0085AP0467
2 1 3
Prfen
Netzspannung, Umgebungstemperatur und Schutzart siehe Typenschild. M
Testing
Vrifier
Controleren
Verificare
Comprobacin
Tensin de la red, temperatura ambiente y tipo de proteccin; vase la placa de caractersticas. M
Mains voltage, ambient tempera- la tension du secteur, la tempra- Netspanning, omgevingstempe- tensione di rete, temperatura amture and enclosure see type lature ambiante et le type de protecratuur en beschermingsklasse biente e tipo di protezione tarbel. tion voir la plaque signaltique. zie typeplaatje ghetta dati M M M M
-1-
DG..B Fr berdruck, Anschluss 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N Fr berdruck, Anschluss 1 oder 2, fr Gas, Luft oder Rauchgas. Anschluss 3 oder 4 zur Belftung offen lassen. Fr Unterdruck, Anschluss 3 oder 4, nur fr Luft oder Rauchgas. Anschluss 1 oder 2 zur Belftung offen lassen. Fr Differenzdruck, Anschluss 1 oder 2, und 3 oder 4, nur fr Luft oder Rauchgas. Freibleibende Anschlsse dichtsetzen. DG..B, DG..U schalten bei steigendem Druck. DG..H schaltet und verriegelt bei steigendem Druck mit Handrckstellung. DG..N schaltet und verriegelt bei fallendem Druck mit Handrckstellung. Bei stark schwankenden Drcken Vordrossel einbauen. (Siehe Zubehr) Bei Ozonbelastung ber 200 g/m3 verringert sich die Lebensdauer.
2 1 4
DG..B For positive pressure, port 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N For positive pressure, port 1 or 2, for gas, air or ue gas. Leave port 3 or 4 open for ventilation. For negative pressure, port 3 or 4, for air or ue gas only. Leave port 1 or 2 open for ventilation. For differential pressure, port 1 or 2, and 3 or 4, for air or ue gas only. Seal all remaining ports. DG..B, DG..U switch with rising pressure. DG..H switches and locks off with rising pressure with manual reset. DG..N switches and locks off with falling pressure with manual reset. Fit an upstream restrictor if the system is subject to greatly uctuating pressures. (See accessories). The service life will be shorter if subject to ozone concentrations exceeding 200 g/m3.
DG..B Pour pression, raccord 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N Pour pression, raccord 1 ou 2, pour gaz, air ou fumes. Laisser le raccord 3 ou 4 ouvert pour laration. Pour dpression, raccord 3 ou 4, uniquement pour air ou fumes. Laisser le raccord 1 ou 2 ouvert pour laration. Pour pression diffrentielle, raccord 1 ou 2, et 3 ou 4, uniquement pour air ou fumes. Obturer les raccords libres. DG..B, DG..U activs lorsque la pression monte. DG..H activ et verrouill lorsque la pression monte avec mise ltat initial main. DG..N activ et verrouill lorsque la pression chute avec mise ltat initial main. En cas de pression trs instable, installer un obturateur primaire. (Voir Accessoires) Si la quantit dozone est suprieure 200 g/m3, la dure de vie est rduite.
DG..B Voor overdruk, aansluiting 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N Voor overdruk, aansluiting 1 of 2, voor gas, lucht of rookgas. Aansluiting 3 of 4 voor de luchtverversing open laten. Voor onderdruk, aansluiting 3 of 4, alleen lucht of rookgas. Aansluiting 1 of 2 voor de luchtverversing open laten. Voor verschildruk, aansluiting 1 of 2 en 3 of 4, alleen lucht en rookgas. Vrij blijvende aansluitingen afsluiten. DG..B, DG..U schakelen bij stijgende druk. DG..H schakelt en vergrendelt bij stijgende druk en kan met de hand worden teruggezet. DG..N schakelt en vergrendelt bij dalende druk en kan met de hand worden teruggezet. Bij sterk schommelende druk een voorrestrictie inbouwen (zie toebehoren). Ozonbelasting boven 200 g/m3 verkort de levensduur.
DG..B Per sovrapressione, collegamento 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N Per sovrapressione, collegamento 1 o 2, per gas, aria o fumi. Lasciare aperto il collegamento 3 o 4 per laerazione. Per depressione, collegamento 3 o 4, solo per aria o fumi. Lasciare aperto il collegamento 1 o 2 per laerazione. Per pressione differenziale, collegamento 1 o 2 e 3 o 4, solo per aria o fumi. Ermetizzare i collegamenti restanti. DG..B, DG..U commutano quando la pressione in aumento. DG..H commuta e si blocca quando la pressione in aumento con ripristino manuale. DG..N commuta e si blocca quando la pressione in diminuzione con ripristino manuale. In caso di pressione molto instabile montare una valvola di ingresso (vedi Accessori). In caso di carico di ozono superiore a 200 g/m3 si riduce la durata.
DG..B Para sobrepresin, conexin 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N Para sobrepresin, conexin 1 2 para gas, aire o gases producto de la combustin. Dejar abierta la conexin 3 4 para la ventilacin. Para depresin, conexin 3 4, slo para el aire o gases producto de la combustin. Dejar abierta la conexin 1 2 para la ventilacin. Para presin diferencial, conexin 1 2, y 3 4, slo para aire o gases producto de la combustin. Sellar las conexiones que queden libres. DG..B, DG..U conectan con la presin ascendente. DG..H conecta y bloquea con la presin ascendente con rearme manual. DG..N conecta y bloquea con la presin descendente con rearme manual. En sistemas con presiones oscilantes, montar el estrangulador previo. (Vanse los accesorios). Con concentraciones de ozono por encima de 200 g/m3, la vida del presostato se ve reducida.
Einbauen
Einbaulage beliebig, vorzugsweise mit senkrecht stehender Membrane, mit freiem Blick auf den Skalenring. Dabei ist zu beachten, dass Schmutz oder Feuchtigkeit nicht in die zur Belftung offenen Anschlsse gelangen kann. Das Gehuse darf kein Mauerwerk berhren. Mindestabstand 20 mm. DG vor direkter Sonneneinstrahlung schtzen (auch bei IP 65). DG..B..S Kein Gas, sondern nur O2 oder NH3 an berdruck-Anschluss 1 anschlieen. Auf fettfreien Einbau achten. DG 1 Rohrleitung splen. 2 Geeignetes Dichtmaterial verwenden. 3 Wenn sich Schmutz am Anschluss 3 oder 4 sammeln kann, Filter verwenden, Bestell-Nr. 74916199. 4 DG einbauen.
Installation
Fitting position as required, preferably with diaphragm vertical, with unobstructed view of the graduated collar. Ensure that no dirt or moisture can penetrate open ventilation ports. The housing may not contact masonry. Minimum clearance 20 mm. Protect from direct sunlight (even with IP 65). DG..B..S Do not connect gas but only O2 or NH3 to the positive pressure port 1. Ensure that no grease is used during installation. DG 1 Flush the pipework. 2 Use suitable sealing material. 3 If dirt can accumulate at port 3 or 4, use the lter, Order No. 74916199. 4 Fit the DG.
Montage
Montage au choix, de prfrence avec membrane verticale et molette gradue bien visible. Veiller ce que les impurets ou lhumidit ne pntrent pas dans les raccords ouverts pour laration. Le botier ne doit toucher aucun obstacle. Ecart minimal : 20 mm. Protger le DG contre les rayons de soleil (aussi en cas dIP 65). DG..B..S Ne pas raccorder de gaz, mais uniquement de lO2 ou du NH3 sur le raccord de pression 1. Attention : montage sans graisse. DG 1 Rincer la tuyauterie. 2 Utiliser un matriel dtanchit appropri. 3 Si des impurets risquent de saccumuler sur le raccord 3 ou 4, utiliser un ltre, rf. 74916199. 4 Monter le DG.
Inbouwen
Inbouwpositie willekeurig, bij voorkeur met verticaal staand membraan, met vrije zicht op de schaalring. Daarbij dient erop te worden gelet dat verontreiniging of vocht niet in de ademopening mag komen. Het huis mag geen muur aanraken. Minimale afstand 20 mm. De DG mag niet in contact komen met directe zonnestralen (ook bij IP 65). DG..B..S Geen gas maar alleen O2 of NH3 op overdruk-aansluiting 1 aansluiten. Op vetvrije inbouw letten. DG 1 Leiding spoelen. 2 Geschikt afdichtingsmateriaal gebruiken. 3 Een lter gebruiken als er zich vuil op aansluiting 3 of 4 kan ophopen. Bestelnummer 74916199. 4 DG inbouwen.
Montaggio
Posizione di montaggio arbitraria, preferibilmente con la membrana in verticale, lasciare la possibilit di visionare lanello graduato. Prestare attenzione che sporco o umidit non si depositino sui collegamenti aperti per laerazione. La scatola non deve essere a contatto con murature. Distanza minima 20 mm. Protettere il DG dei raggi del sole (anche con IP 65). DG..B..S Non collegare gas, ma solo O2 o NH3 al collegamento 1 per sovrapressione. Attenzione: montare in assenza di grassi. DG 1 Lavare la tubazione. 2 Utilizzare materiale di tenuta adeguato. 3 Se sul collegamento 3 o 4 si possono depositare sporco o umidit, utilizzare un ltro n ordine 74916199. 4 Montare il DG.
Montaje
Posicin de montaje: cualquiera, preferentemente con la membrana en posicin vertical y con fcil acceso a la rueda de ajuste. Deben evitarse los depsitos de suciedad y la entrada de humedad a travs de las conexiones abiertas para la ventilacin. No debe instalarse en contacto con las paredes del recinto. Distancia mnima de 20 mm. Proteger el DG de los rayos de sol (tambin con el IP 65). DG..B..S Emplear slo con O2 NH3, para sobrepresin, conexin 1. Evitar restos de grasa. DG 1 Preparar la tubera. 2 Emplear un material sellante adecuado. 3 Cuando en la conexin 3 4 se acumule la suciedad, deber utilizarse el ltro. Nmero de referencia 74916199. 4 Montar el DG.
IP 65
IP 54
-2-
DG..B, DG..U
DG..H, DG..N
Rp 1/4 pmax = 600 mbar
2
1 2
Rp 1/4 pmax = 600 mbar
3
3
Rp 1/8 pmax = 4 -600 mbar
4
pmax = 600 mbar
pmax = -600 mbar
Rp 1/8
pmax = 600 mbar
Dichtheit prfen
DG..B, DG..U DG..H, DG..N
Tightness test
Vrifier ltanchit
Controle op lekkage
Controllo della tenuta
Comprobar la estanqueidad
N2 900 mbar max. 2 bar <15 min
-3-
Schaltdruck ps verstellen
1 Anlage spannungsfrei schalten.
Adjusting the switching pressure ps

1 Disconnect the system from the electrical power supply.
Rgler la pression de commutation ps

1 Mettre linstallation hors tension.
Schakeldruk ps verstellen
1 Installatie spanningsvrij maken.
Regolazione della Ajustar la presin de pressione di innesto ps actuacin ps

1 Togliere la tensione dallimpianto. 1 Desconectar la instalacin de la alimentacin elctrica.
DG..B, DG..U
DG..H, DG..N
Einstellbereich 15 % vom Skalenwert Adjusting range 15 % of the scale value Plage de rglage 15 % de la valeur de lchelle Instelbereik 15 % van de op de schaal aangegeven waarde Campo di misura 15 % del valore indicato sulla scala Margen de ajuste 15% de la lectura mnima de la escala
Schaltdifferenz Switching difference Diffrence de commutation Schakelverschil Differenza di commutazione Diferencia de conmutacin
Differenz zwischen Schaltdruck und mglicher Entriegelung Difference between switching pressure and possible reset Diffrence entre la pression de commutation et un ventuel dverrouillage Verschil tussen schakeldruk en mogelijke ontgrendeling Differenza fra pressione di innesto ed eventuale sbloccaggio Diferencia entre presin de conmutacin y posible desbloqueo
DG 6B, U DG 10B, U DG 50B, U DG 150B, U DG 500B, U DG 10H, N DG 50H, N DG 150H, N DG 500H, N 2 3
0,4 1,0 2,5 30,0 100,0 1,0 2,5 30,0 100,0 4
[mbar] 6 10 50 150 500 10 50 150 500
0,20 0,25 0,60 2,50 8,00
[mbar] 0,3 0,4 1,5 5,0 24,0
[mbar]
0,4 1 0,4 2 0,4 4 4,0 17 5

NO 1 2 NC NO 3 COM
7
45
25
30
35
0
5
2
NC
COM
8
0
1 cm = 1 mbar
-4-
40
2,5
5
10
15
20
ps
25
30
35
DG..N
9
0
40
45
10
11 DG..N
>ps
25
30
35
DG..B DG..U, DG..H, DG..N
14
Verdrahten
DG 24250 V~: I = 0,055 A, cos = 1, I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6; DG..G 12250 V~: I = 0,015 A, cos = 1, I = 0,011 A, cos = 0,6; 1248 V=: I = 0,011 A Wenn der DG..G einmal eine Spannung >24 V und einen Strom >0,1 A geschaltet hat, ist die Goldschicht an den Kontakten weggebrannt. Danach kann er nur noch mit dieser oder hherer Leistung betrieben werden. Die Kontakte 3 und 2 schlieen bei steigendem Druck. Die Kontakte 1 und 3 schlieen bei fallendem Druck. M
D-49018 Osnabrck, Germany
Wiring
DG CE 0085AP0467
2 1 3
Cblage
DG 24250 V~: I = 0,055 A, cos = 1, I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6 ; DG..G 12250 V~: I = 0,015 A, cos = 1, I = 0,011 A, cos = 0,6 ; 1248 V=: I = 0,011 A. Si le DG..G est soumis une fois une tension > 24 V et un courant > 0,1 A, la couche dor sur les contacts est dtruite. Ensuite, il ne peut fonctionner qu cette puissance ou une puissance suprieure. Les contacts 3 et 2 se ferment en cas de monte de la pression. Les contacts 1 et 3 se ferment en cas de chute de la pression. M
Bedraden
DG 24250 V~: I = 0,055 A, cos = 1, I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6; DG..G 12250 V~: I = 0,015 A, cos = 1, I = 0,011 A, cos = 0,6; 1248 V=: I = 0,011 A. Als de DG..G ooit een spanning van >24 V en een stroom van >0,1 A geschakeld heeft, is de gouden laag op de contacten weggebrand. Daarna kan de DG..G alleen nog maar voor dat vermogen of voor hogere vermogens worden gebruikt. De contacten 3 en 2 gaan bij stijgende druk open. De contacten 1 en 3 gaan bij dalende druk dicht. M
Cablaggio
DG 24250 V~ I = 0,055 A, cos = 1 I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6 DG..G 12250 V~ I = 0,015 A, cos = 1 I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6 1248 V= I = 0,011 A Se il DG..G commuta una tensione > 24 V e una corrente > 0,1 A lo strato dorato si deteriora. Successivamente pu ancora essere azionato solo con potenza pari a questa o superiore. Il contatto 3 e 2 si chiude quando la pressione aumenta. Il contatto 1 e 3 si chiude quando la pressione diminuisce. M
40
45
ps
6,3 AF, DIN 41661
NO 2 NC 1
COM 3
DG 24250 V AC: I = 0.055 A, cos = 1, I = 0.051 A, cos = 0.6; DG..G 12250 V AC: I = 0.015 A, cos = 1, I = 0.011 A, cos = 0.6; 1248 V DC: I = 0.11 A. If the DG..G has switched a voltage > 24 V and a current > 0.1 A once, the gold plating on the contacts will have been burnt through. It can then only be operated at this power rating or higher power rating. Contacts 3 and 2 close when subject to increasing pressure. Contacts 1 and 3 close when subject to falling pressure. M
-5-
2,5
2,5
DG..B, DG..U, DG..H
10
11
10
15
12
13 DG..H
20
12
13
10
15
20
Cableado
DG 24250 V ca: I = 0,055 A, cos = 1, I = 0,051 A, cos = 0,6; DG..G 12250 V ca: I = 0,015 A, cos = 1, I = 0,011 A, cos = 0.6; 1248 V cc: I = 0,011 A. Cuando el DG..G se conecta a una tensin > 24 V y una corriente > 0,1 A, se quema la capa dorada en los contactos. Despus slo podr funcionar con esta tensin o una superior. Los contactos 3 y 2 cierran con el aumento de presin. Los contactos 1 y 3 cierran con el descenso de presin. M
1 Anlage spannungsfrei schalten.
1 Disconnect the system from the electrical power supply.
1 Mettre linstallation hors tension.
1 Installatie spanningsvrij maken.
1 Togliere la tensione dallimpianto.
1 Desconectar la instalacin de la alimentacin elctrica.
DG..B, DG..U
DG..H, DG..N
5
3
L1(+)
6
NO
COM
1 2 NC
3
COM
2
NO
1
NC
Pg 11: 812 mm
DG..T: 220/240 V~, DG..N: 110/120 V~, DG..K: 24 V=, LED
L1(+)
6
NO
3
COM NO
2 NC
3
COM
1
NC
24 V= LED + = schwarz black noir zwart nero negro
= wei white blanc wit bianco blanco
L1(+)
6
3
NO
COM
1 2 NC
COM
2
NO
1
NC
+ N
N(-)
N(-)
DG..6
5
3
L1(+)
6
L1(+)
COM NO
1
NC
L1(+)
Pg 11: 812 mm
DG..T: 220/240 V~, DG..N: 110/120 V~, DG..K: 24 V=, LED
L1(+)
6
L1(+)
N (-)
3
COM
+ 2 NO - 1
N(-)
24 V= LED + = schwarz black noir zwart nero negro
= wei white blanc wit bianco blanco
Funktiontest
Zu empfehlen ist eine Funktionsprfung einmal im Jahr.
Function check
We recommend a function check once a year.
Essai de fonctionnement
Un essai de fonctionnement annuel est recommand.
Functietest
Raadzaam is een controle op goede werking n keer per jaar.
Verifica di funzionamento
Si consiglia lesecuzione di un controllo del funzionamento una volta lanno.
Ensayo de funcionamiento
Se recomienda un ensayo del funcionamiento una vez al ao.
-6-
Zubehr
Befestigungsset
Accessories
Fastening set
Accessoires
Jeu de fixation
Toebehoren
Montageset
Accessori
Set di fissaggio
Accesorios
Set de fijacin
74915387
Verbindungsset Zur berwachung eines minimalen/maximalen Eingangsdruckes pe.
Connecting set For monitoring the minimum/ maximum inlet pressure pe.
Jeu de connexion Pour la surveillance dune pression dentre pe mini/maxi.
Verbindingsset Voor het bewaken van een minimale/maximale ingangsdruk pe.
Set di collegamento Per il controllo di una pressione di ingresso pe di minima / di massima.
Set de unin Para el control de la presin de entrada mnima / mxima pe.
DG..U, DG..H, DG..N,
2
2x
1
1x
74912250
Auenverstellung
External adjustment
Ajustement extrieur
Buitenverstelling
Regolatore esterno
Ajuste exterior
74916155
Prftaste PIA
PIA test key
Cl dessai PIA
Testtoets PIA
Tasto di prova PIA
Pulsador de control PIA
Click
TEST Rp 1/4
74329466
M M M M M M
-7-
Schlauchset Nur fr Luft
Tube set for air only
Jeu de flexibles uniquement pour air
Slangenset alleen lucht
Set di tubi flessibili solo per aria
Set de tubos flexibles slo para aire
74912952
Normgertestecker
Standard coupler plug
Socle connecteur standard
Standaardstekker
Spina per apparecchi a norma
Conector normalizado
2
1 2 NC NO
COM
L1(+)
3
COM
NO
1
NC
74915388
Signallampe
Pilot lamp
Lampe tmoi
Controlelampje
Spia di controllo
Lmpara de seal
220/240 V~: 74916122 110/120 V~: 74916121 48 V~/=: 74916123 24 V=, LED: 74916120
Technische nderungen, die dem Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to make technical modications in the interests of progress.
Sous rserve de modications techniques visant amliorer nos produits.
Technische wijzigingen ter verbetering van onze producten voorbehouden.
Salvo modiche migliorie.
tecniche
per
Se reserva el derecho a realizar modicaciones tcnicas sin previo aviso.
-8-
7/
7. GAS BURNERS G1 G2
7.1
P&I DIAGRAM G1- (DWG. IMECO)
7.1
10
11
12
N
DSP10
3/8"
51 57
58
PSl
3/8"
DCF1
5
DT2
M N
UV 6 DUV1
1/4"
DYV7
SI
47
PI
ATOMIZING AIR P= 5 bar , Q= 40 Nm/h B
I
DYV8
3/8"
48 45 46 50
(2) (3) (1)
51
3/8"
L
10
7
DSP1
T1= 370 C P1= 95 mbar @20 C
DYV6 DSP5
A
49
PSl
PSl
DYV9
1/2"
13
11 12 1
DYV10
L
1/4"
PI
flame lenght ~4000 T2= 530 C (max= 550 C)
H
C
44 35
PI
1/2"
42 40
DSP1 PSl
DCTV
PI
4
3/8"
65
DSP6 PS
44
PI
M
22 TCV02
53
52 14 16 DYV2 15 DYV1
DN300 DN100
DSP2
PSh
56
TSAH2
NAT-GAS Pmax= 300 /min.220 mbar Qmax= 370 Nm/h HHV= 10,9 kWh/Nm
F
DN80
36 32 33 34 39
39
DYV3
40
DYV4
38 DN80 G
DN80x50
60 20
SC
TE
2"
DSQ1
23 17
DN50x100
42
DST1
55
TIR
61
D
29
PSl
29
PSh
30
PI
18
3/8"
DSP3
DSP4
D
1/2"
28 27
31
1/2"
60
1/2"
19
1/2"
DOP
67 62 63
PI
54
RACK IMECO FOR "G1"
54
64
PI
62
65
66
A
F OIL Max 7 CST [7x10 -6 m2 s-1] LHV= 11,9 kWh/Nm Qmax= 460 l/h MAX SUCTION 0,6 bar
63 62
DOP
B O
PSl
(3) (1)
25
DSP7 DYV11
DN200 F
DSQ2
62
65
66
62
COMBUSTION AIR MAX Q=5920 m/h , T=130 C FOR NAT-GAS Q=4250 m/h , @15 C P=25 mbar @15C + CHAMBER PRESSURE FOR OILQ=3802 m/h , @15 C P=20 mbar @15C + CHAMBER PRESSURE
26
(2)
24
DN300
60
21
TWIN PUMPS UNIT

{\fSimplex|b0|i0|c161|p0;\U+0394\fSimplex|b0|i0|c0|p0; }P=13mbar G G
RACK IMECO FOR "G2"

H
Drawings Ref: Dis. B.08.076.02 : Dis. B.08.076.03 : Dis. B.08.076.04 : DATA COMPONENTS PIPE-RACK LAY-OUT BURNER LAY-OUT
SUPPLY LIMITS CUSTOMER IMECO
H
22.04.08 22.04.08 22.04.08 22.04.08 GAR GAR MODIF. DN200 IN 300 UPDATED GAR GAR
DISEGNATO DA: CONTROLLATO DA:
B B
REV.
MILANO
IMECO
Riferimento cliente:
c. A406 Mexico
SCALA DATA
ITALIA
e-mail: imeco@imecosrl.com
CLIENTE
PIPES TRAINS SKETCH FOR MEGAFIRE 15M MAXON BURNER Qmax= 3700 kW - EN746-2 RULES - IP54
ORDINE COMMESSA QUANTITA'
-N DISEGNO
09.04.2008
Dis. B.08.076.05 : TWIN PUPMS UNIT

1 2 3
DATA
DESCRIZIONE
FOMAT AEROTHERMIC
076/08
2
11
B.08.076.01 B
Seriale Rev.
Tipo Anno Comm. DISEGNO DI PROPRIETA' DELLA IMECO Srl. E' VIETATA LA CESSIONE A TERZI E LA RIPRODUZIONE ANCHE PARZIALE
10
12
A2
ITEM EL.TAG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Qt
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 1 2 2 1
DESCRIPTIONS
BURNER GAS/OIL BLOCK W/SS SEAL & SUPPORT SPARK IGNITOR MANOMETER IGNITION TRANSFORMER U.V. SCANNER SELF-CECK AIR RESTRICTOR PILOT FLEXIBLE PILOT GAS PRESSURE GOVERNOR LOW GASPILOT PRESSURE SW. MAIN GAS PILOT SOLENOID VALVE AUXILIARY GAS PILOT SOLENOID VALVE GAS PILOT ADJUSTABLE ORIFICE OIL CHECK VALVE MAIN OIL SOLENOID VALVE AUXILIARY OIL SOLENOID VALVE OIL FLOW METER INDICATOR OIL STRAINER OIL REGULATING VALVE 'SYNCHRO' GAS CONTROL VALVE 'SYNCHRO' COMBUSTION AIR CONTROL VALVE 'BUTTERFLY' ELECTRIC CONTROL MOTOR LOW FIRE LIMIT SWITCH HIGH FIRE LIMIT SWITCH LOW COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SW. 3 WAY AIR VALVE FOR DSP7 CHECK MANUAL COCK OIL PRESSURE REDUCER HIGH / LOW OIL PRESSURE SW. MANOMETER MANUAL COCK NAT-GAS MANUAL COCK NAT-GAS FLEXIBLE NAT-GAS FILTER MANOMETER MANUAL PUSH-COCK NAT-GAS PRESSURE GOVERNOR LOW GAS PRESSURE SW. MAIN GAS SOLENOID VALVE AUXILIARY GAS SOLENOID VALVE LEAK-TEST GAS PRESSURE SW. HIGH GAS PRESSURE SW. MANOMETER PILOT MANUAL COCK AIR MANUAL COCK AIR FILTER/REDUCER MANOMETER MANUAL COCK LOW ATOMIZING AIR PRESSURE SWITCH 3 WAY AIR VALVE FOR SP5 PRESSURE SW. ATOMIZING AIR SOLENOID VALVE CHECK VALVE ANGLE VALVE PURGE MANUAL COCK HIGH TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTOR THERMOCOUPLE K LOW PURGE AIR PRESSURE SWITCH FLAME CONTROL LEAK TESTER AIR FLEXIBLE TEMPERATURE REGULATOR AND DETECOR MANUAL COCK MANUAL COCK MANOMETER OIL FILTER OIL PUMP MANOMETER
NOTES
#301932
CONN.
---
VOLTAGE
MODEL
MEGAFIRE 15M HD 15M HD --T.F8/115 C7061A-1020 SC2200F-02-08 091502210 RG/2MC-RC02 010 DG-50 U VMR1B VMR1B 050431 3/8" L133V10-Z110A L133V10-Z110A VLA -#327503 - 1/2-O-100 #327611 - 2"M GD6-300 In-Max-50.75-Y GLCB07A1B GLCB07A1B DG-50 U D363CVG-M 066 BGE-2 XML A010A2S11 MG 1/3 069 38 080720080 FF090000 MBP A4/1 -RG/2MC-RC09 040 DG-150 U VMR8B VMR8B DG-150 U DG-150 U MBP A4/1 066 068 SK-3/8-H MG 1/3 069 XML A010A2S11 D363CVG-M L133V10-Z110A 6062 AM5066 MVS 1/4 DC120L 'K' Type XML A010A2S11 RM7850A-1001 TC410-1 --066 MVS 1/4 MG 1/3 203011 VBHR-M-I-2-10 MG 1/3
SUPPLYER
MAXON MAXON MAXON MAXON RUBES HONEYWELL OLAB ACOM MADAS KROM SCHRODER ELEKTROGAS ELEKTROGAS MAXON SOCLA SIRAI SIRAI KYTOLA SATI NORD MAXON MAXON ECONEX SCHISCHEK HONEYWELL HONEYWELL KROM SCHRODER EVIAN ITAP HP TECHNIK TELEMECANIQUE BIOLCHI ITAP TYCO VALVES ACOM MADAS TERMAF ECONEX MADAS KROM SCHRODER ELEKTROGAS ELEKTROGAS KROM SCHRODER KROM SCHRODER TERMAF ITAP ITAP HOERBIGER BIOLCHI ITAP TELEMECANIQUE EVIAN SIRAI SATI NORD UNIVER OLAB EASYTEC ELSI TELEMECANIQUE HONEYWELL KROM SCHRODER CUSTOMER CUSTOMER ITAP OLAB BIOLCHI FAG HP TECHNIK BIOLCHI
DWT2 DUV1
115V/6000V 1/4" 1/2"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/2"ISO 3/8"NPT 3/8"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/2"ISO 3/8"ISO 1/2"ISO 2"ISO DN300 PN16
DYV9 DYV10
8-28 mbar 2,5-50 mbar IP54 IP54
115VAC 115VAC
DYV1 DYV2
115VAC 115VAC
90-500 l/h
ON EACH OF 2 BURNER
TCV02 DSQ1 DSQ2 DSP7 DYV11
4-20 mA
50-75Nm
24VAC
2,5-50 mbar 2,5 mm orifice - IP65 30-600 l/h , 2-9 bar 0,6-10 bar - IP66 63 - 0-10 bar
DSP3-4
63 - 0-400 mbar 50-130 mbar 30-150 mbar IP54 IP54 30-150 mbar 30-150 mbar 63 - 0-250 mbar
DSP1 DYV3 DYV4 DSP6 DSP2
0,5-15 bar - 850 l/min 63 - 0-10 bar 0,6-10 bar - IP66 2,5 mm orifice - IP65
DSP5 DYV6 DYV7-8
1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/2"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO DN80 PN16 DN80 PN16 DN80 PN16 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO DN80 PN16 1/4"ISO DN80 PN16 DN80 PN16 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/2"ISO 3/8"ISO 3/8"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/2"ISO 3/8"ISO 3/8"ISO 1/4"ISO
110VAC
110VAC 110VAC
110VAC 115VAC
DST1 TSAH2 DSP10 DCF1 DCTV DTIR
L=800mm 0,6-10 bar
1/4"ISO 120VAC 110-120VAC
63 - -1/+1,5 bar 1500 l/h - 0,37kW - IP65 63 - 0-10 bar
3/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 1/4"ISO 3/4"ISO 3/4"ISO 1/4"ISO
1 UNIT
460/60Hz
29.05.08 29.05.08 29.05.08 29.05.08
GAR GAR GAR ITEM 21:MODIF. DN200 IN 300 GAR

DRWG: CHECKED
MILANO
IMECO
Customer Ref:
c. A406
Mexico
SCALE DATE
ITALIA
A
Nr.
CUSTOMER
DATA COMPONENTS FOR HOT AIR HEATER WITH 'MEGAFIRE 15M' MAXON BURNER Qmax= 3700 kW / min= 250 kW
ORDER/REF. JOB Nr. Q.ty
-DRWG. Nr.
09.04.2008
DATE
REVISION
FOMAT AEROTHERMIC 08/115
076/08
B.08.076.02 A
Serial Rev.
Type Year CONSENT Job THIS DRAWING REMAIN PROPERTY OF IMECO Srl. MUST BE RETURNED ON REQUEST AND CANNOT BE COPIED WITHOUT IMECO'S
A3
7/
7.2
P&I DIAGRAM G2 (DWG. IMECO)
7.2
10
11
12
N
DSP10
3/8"
51 57
58
PSl
3/8"
DCF1
5
DT2
M N
6 DUV1 UV
1/4"
DYV7
SI
47
PI
ATOMIZING AIR P= 5 bar , Q= 40 Nm/h B
I
DYV8
3/8"
48 45 46 50
(2) (3) (1)
51
3/8"
L
10
7
DSP1
T1= 370 C P1= 95 mbar @20 C
DYV6 DSP5
A
49
PSl
PSl
DYV9
1/2"
13
11 12 1
DYV10
L
1/4"
PI
flame lenght ~4000 T2= 530 C (max= 550 C)
H
C
44 35
PI
1/2"
42 40
DSP1 PSl
DCTV
PI
4
3/8"
65
DSP6 PS
44
PI
M
22 TCV02
53
52 14 16 DYV2 15 DYV1
DN300 DN100
DSP2
PSh
56
TSAH2
NAT-GAS Pmax= 300 /min.220 mbar Qmax= 370 Nm/h HHV= 10,9 kWh/Nm
F
DN80
36 32 33 34 39
39
DYV3
40
DYV4
38 DN80 G
DN80x50
60 20
SC
TE
2"
DSQ1
23 17
DN50x100
42
DST1
55
TIR
61
D
29
PSl
29
PSh
30
PI
18
3/8"
DSP3
DSP4
D
1/2"
28 27
31
1/2"
60
1/2"
19
1/2"
DOP
67 62 63
PI
54
RACK IMECO FOR "G1"
54
64
PI
62
65
66
A
F OIL Max 7 CST [7x10 -6 m2 s-1] LHV= 11,9 kWh/Nm Qmax= 460 l/h MAX SUCTION 0,6 bar
63 62
DOP
B O
PSl
(3) (1)
25
DSP7 DYV11
DN200 F
DSQ2
62
65
66
62
COMBUSTION AIR MAX Q=5920 m/h , T=130 C FOR NAT-GAS Q=4250 m/h , @15 C P=25 mbar @15C + CHAMBER PRESSURE FOR OILQ=3802 m/h , @15 C P=20 mbar @15C + CHAMBER PRESSURE
26
(2)
24
DN300
60
21
TWIN PUMPS UNIT

{\fSimplex|b0|i0|c161|p0;\U+0394\fSimplex|b0|i0|c0|p0; }P=13mbar G G
RACK IMECO FOR "G2"

H
Drawings Ref: Dis. B.08.076.02 : Dis. B.08.076.03 : Dis. B.08.076.04 : DATA COMPONENTS PIPE-RACK LAY-OUT BURNER LAY-OUT
SUPPLY LIMITS CUSTOMER IMECO
H
22.04.08 22.04.08 22.04.08 22.04.08 GAR GAR MODIF. DN200 IN 300 UPDATED GAR GAR
DISEGNATO DA: CONTROLLATO DA:
B B
REV.
MILANO
IMECO
Riferimento cliente:
c. A406 Mexico
SCALA DATA
ITALIA
CLIENTE
PIPES TRAINS SKETCH FOR MEGAFIRE 15M MAXON BURNER Qmax= 3700 kW - EN746-2 RULES - IP54
ORDINE COMMESSA QUANTITA'
-N DISEGNO
09.04.2008
Dis. B.08.076.05 : TWIN PUPMS UNIT

1 2 3
DATA
DESCRIZIONE
FOMAT AEROTHERMIC
076/08
2
11
B.08.076.01 B
Seriale Rev.
Tipo Anno Comm. DISEGNO DI PROPRIETA' DELLA IMECO Srl. E' VIETATA LA CESSIONE A TERZI E LA RIPRODUZIONE ANCHE PARZIALE
10
12
A2
7/
7.3 GAS BURNER GROUPS
- Combustion chamber assembly G1 DWG.TR0547 - Combustion chamber assembly G2 DWG.TR0548
7.3
Q O
O
***
H M
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE G1

CODICE
GR0547
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
DISEGNATO DATA FIRMA
CONTROLLATO
APPROVATO
SCALA
1:20
VERSIONE Data Stampa
DOCUMENTO
TR0547
Q O
O
***
H M
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE G2

CODICE
GR0548
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
DISEGNATO DATA FIRMA
CONTROLLATO
APPROVATO
SCALA
1:20
DOCUMENTO
TR0548
7/
7.4 BURNERS ICOTEC TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL POWER max FUEL PRINCIPAL POWER SECONDARY POWER
G1 G2
IMECO MAXON (MEGAFIRE M 15) 3700 KW (NATURAL GAS) 3380 KW (KEROSENE) NATURAL GAS / KEROSENE 440/3/60 V/HZ 220/60 V/HZ
FOR THE INSTRUCTIONS MAINTENANCE SEE BELOW.
7.4
IMECO
Cliente: Customer: Client: Kunde: FOMAT AEROTHERMIC Cliente: Rif. Cliente Ref. Client Ref. cliente Customer ref. Bezug des kunden N. Impianto: Job number: N.installation: Anlagen typ. N.installacion 08/115
076/08
BRUCIATORE TIPO BURNER TYPE BRULEUR TYPE BRENNER-TYP QUEMADOR TIPO POTENZA CAPACITY PUISSANCE LEISTUNG POTENCIA COMBUSTIBILE FUEL COMBUSTIBLE BRENNSTOFF COMBUSTIBLE PRESSIONE INGRESSO INLET PRESSURE PRESSION DENTREE EINGASDRUCK PRESION DE ENTRADA TENSIONE ALIMENTAZIONE SUPPLY VOLTAGE TENSION DALIMENTATION NETZSPANNUNG ALIMENTACION ELETRICA POTENZA ELETTRICA ELECTRIC RATING PUISSANCE ELECTRIQUE ELEKTRISCHE LEISTUNG POTENCIA ELECTRICA
MEGAFIRE 15M HD
MAX./MIN METANO 3700KW/250KW GASOLIO 3380KW/500KW
METANO / GASOLIO
MIN/MAX 300mB
3X400V/60Hz
3 KVA
IMECO
Milano Italy INDICE INDEX VERZEICHNIS
1. AVVERTENZA WARNING WARNUNG
1. AVIS ADVERTENCIA ADVERTNCIA
2. BRUCIATORE TIPO / ACCESSORI BURNER TYPE / ACCESSORIES BRENNER / ZUBEHOER
2. BRULEUR TYPE / ACCESSOIRES QUEMADOR TIPO / ACCESORIOS QUEIMADOR TIPO / ACESSRIOS
3. TARATURA BRUCIATORE BURNER SETTING EICHUNG BRENNER
3. ETALONNAGE BRULEUR REGULACION QUEMADOR REGULAO QUEIMADOR
4. SEQUENZE ACCENSIONE IGNITION SEQUENCE ZUENDUNGSABFOLGEN
4. SUITES DALLUMAGE SECUENCIAS DE ENCENDIDO SEQUNCIAS DE ACENSO
5. REGOLAZIONE TEMPERATURA TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATUR KONTROLLE
5. REGULATION TEMPERATURE REGULACION TEMPERATURA REGULAO TEMPERATURA
6. MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE WARTUNG
6. ENTRETIEN MANUTENCION MANUTENO
7. RICERCA GUASTI TROUBLE SHOOTING FEHLERSUCHE
7. RECERCHE PANNES BUSQUEDA AVARIOS BUSCA AVARIAS
8. SCHEMA ELETTRICO WIRING DIAGRAM SHALTPLAENE 9. DISEGNI MECCANICI / PIPING MECHANICAL DIAGRAMS / PIPING MECHANISCHE SCHEMATA / PIPING 10. APPARECCHIATURE DI SICUREZZA SAFETY GAS EQUIPMENT SICHERHEITSEINRICHTUNGEN 11. VARIE VARIOUS VERSGHIEDENE 12. CERTIFICATO DI CONFORMITA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY KONFORMITATSBESCHEINIGUNG
8. SCHEMA ELECTRIQUE ESQUEMA ELECTRICO ESQUEMA ELCTRICO 9. SCHEMA MECANIQUE / PANOPLIE GAZ ESQUEMA MECANICO / PIPING ESQUEMA MECNICO / PIPING 10. APPAREILLAGE DE SECURITE EQUIPOS DE SEGURIDAD APARELHAGENS DE SEGURANA 11. DIVERS VARIOS VRIOS 12. CERTIFICAT DE CONFORMIT CERTIFICADO DE CONFORMIDAD CERTIFICADO DE CONFORMIDADE
IMECO
Milano - Italy
ITALIANO BRUCIATORI E RAMPE GAS I bruciatori e le rampe gas Imeco, hanno lo scopo di fornire un certo quantitativo di calore al processo, ad una temperatura impostata. Per questo i bruciatori, sono dotati di adeguata strumentazione e di tutti gli organi di sicurezza. Laria lambisce la fiamma del bruciatore direttamente, si riscalda e viene distribuita ai punti di utilizzo. Le varie operazioni per laccensione del bruciatore, la sua taratura e quella degli organi di sicurezza sono descritti nel manuale distruzione per luso alla sez. 3. I punti di pericolo ed i rischi nelluso del bruciatore sono descritti alla sez. 1. Gli organi del bruciatore e della rampa gas, soggetti a manutenzione, sono descritti alla sez. 6.
_____
ENGLISH BURNERS AND PIPE TRAIN Imeco air heaters model are engineered to supply hot air to the process at a set temperature. This is why the generators are equipped with appropriate instruments and safety devices. The air is heated directly by the flame before being distributed to the points of utilization. The instructions on how to adjust and operate the burner and on how to set the safety devices are contained in section 3 of the operator's manual. Safety and danger warnings are contained in section 1 of same manual. Generator parts subject to maintenance routine are described in section 6
IMECO
ISTRUZIONI PER LA SICUREZZA NELL'USO DEI GENERATORI DI ARIA CALDA IMECO FUNZIONANTI CON COMBUSTIBILI GASSOSI MODELLI: OVENPAK SERIE 400, EB, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE IMECO GAS FIRED AIR-HEATERS, MAXON MODEL
208, NP, VALUPAK, LV, INCINOPAK, TUBE-OFLAME, KINEMAX,WIDERANGE,KINEDIZER, INDIPAK, LINOFLAME, BRUCIATORI LINEARI,MEGAFIRE.
OVENPAK SERIE 400, EB, 208, NP, VALUPAK, LV, INCINOPAK, TUBE-O-FLAME, KINEMAX,WIDE RANGE,KINEDIZER, INDIPAK, LINOFLAME, LINEAR BURNER, MEGAFIRE.
DIRETTIVA CEE N 89/392
CEE REGULATIONS N 89/392
AVVERTENZA IMPORTANTE: Se non seguirete queste istruzioni potranno verificarsi incendi o esplosioni che potranno causare danni a cose e a persone, sino a provocare anche la morte. Nessuna persona che non sia qualificata dovr installare o eseguire manutenzioni, riparazioni e assistenza sui generatori d'aria calda funzionanti a gas di fabbricazione Imeco S.R.L. --------------
IMPORTANT WARNING: fire and explosions may cause serious and even lethal injuries or damage to the equipment. You must always follow these instructions to avoid the danger of fire and explosions. Always have a qualified person to install, maintain, repair or in any way look after an Imeco S.R.L. air heater.
-------------Allo scopo di diminuire la possibilit di incendi, esplosioni o ogni altro rischio: 1) Tutti i componenti del sistema funzionante a gas DEVONO essere installati ed usati in accordo con le istruzioni del fabbricante, con le leggi ed i regolamenti dello Stato, con le norme vigenti e con il normale buon senso. 2) Non usate limpianto di combustione se stato vicino ad una fonte di calore. Alcuni organi interni degli apparecchi (stabilizzatori, pressostati, ecc.) potrebbero essere danneggiati e causare perdite di gas e di conseguenza gravi pericoli. In order to reduce the risk of fire, explosion or any other risk: 1) All gas-system components MUST be installed and used according to manufacturers instructions, state laws and current regulations, and common sense. 2) Do not use the air heater if it has been near a source of heat. Some of its components (pressure switches, gas pressure regulators) might have suffered damage resulting in gas leaks and consequently serious danger.
IMECO
3) Prima di aprire la valvola di intercettazione del gas, assicuratevi che la pressione di alimentazione sia quella prevista. Una pressione superiore potrebbe danneggiare o rompere le membrane degli apparecchi a valle. 4) Controllate le eventuali perdite dopo la messa in funzione dellimpianto. Usate una miscela di acqua e sapone spennellandola su tutte le connessioni. 5) ALTA TENSIONE: in corrispondenza di questo cartello si trovano dei cavi ed apparecchiature ad alta tensione. Le operazioni sullimpianto elettrico devono essere eseguite solamente da personale specializzato ed autorizzato, poich possibile provocare gravi danni ai componenti ed alle persone. 3) Before turning the gas on manually, make sure that supply pressure is the correct one. An higher pressure could damage or break the diaphragms of the instruments downstream. 4) Check for leaks after starting the air heater by brushing soapy water on all the joints.
5) HIGH TENSION: this warning is placed near wires and high tension equipment. Only qualified and authorized personnel must be allowed to work on the electric system. The risk of serious injuries and damage to equipment are very high.
380 VOLT
CAUTION ATTENZIONE
CARTELLO USATO PER SEGNALARE ALTA TENSIONE. LALTA TENSIONE PUO PROVOCARE SHOCK, USTIONI O CAUSARE LA MORTE. INTERROMPERE LA CORRENTE PRIMA DI EFFETTUARE LA MANUTENZIONE.
PERICOLO: in corrispondenza di questo cartello si trovano delle superfici che per la loro funzione, sono ad alta temperatura. Mantenere le dovute distanze e fare molta attenzione per evitare scottature ed ustioni.
NOTICE USED TO INDICATE HIGH TENSION WHICH CAN CAUSE SHOCK, BURNS AND EVEN DEATH. SWITCH OFF AT THE MAINS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
DANGER: This notice is placed near high temperature surfaces. Keep due distance and be very careful to avoid serious burns.
IMECO
PERICOLO SUPERFICIE AD ALTA TEMPERATURA RIMUOVERE O DANNEGGIARE IL SEGNALE NON
DANGER
HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACE DO NOT REMOVE OR DAMAGE HIS NOTICE

6) Generators are designed to heat fresh air coming from indoors or, better, from outdoors. If recycled air is used, the installer is responsible for setting the recycled quantity in order to avoid dangerous solvent concentrations that may cause an explosion. 7) Never install the generator in places or positions where they may come into contact with inflammable solvents present in the surrounding air. 8) Close the Shut off valve when the plant is not working.
6) Gli impianti di combustione sono solitamente progettati per riscaldare aria fresca proveniente dallambiente o meglio dallesterno. Qualora si utilizzi aria di ricircolo responsabilit dellinstallatore dosarne la quantit allo scopo di evitare pericolose concentrazioni di componenti gassosi che possono provocare esplosioni. 7) I bruciatori e le rampe gas, non debbono mai essere montati in posizione o luoghi nei quali possano venire in contatto con vapori infiammabili presenti nellaria. 8) Quando limpianto disattivato opportuno chiudere la valvola di intercettazione a monte.
Bulletin 2600
MEGAFIRE Gas/Oil Burners
15M MEGAFIRE Burner firing on natural gas with 10:1 turndown ratio capabilities
Provides clean burning of #2 oil, natural, or propane gas Easy installation due to compact design Quiet operation with exceptionally low horsepower requirements In-line blower (IB) version includes energy-efficient centaxial direct-drive combustion air blower Provides application flexibility with: Heat releases to 45,000,000 Btu/hr High turndown capabilities 10:1 on #2 oil 15:1 on natural gas Nine different styles and three different sizes
MEGAFIRE Burner applications have included:
Boilers, rotary dryers (for sand, gravel, minerals, and chemicals), municipal solid waste incinerators, indirect air heaters, heater/treaters for the petroleum industry, food process dryers, fertilizer dehydration, rendering plant operations, gypsum board dryers, and fluidized bed installations for power plants
CORPORATION
201 East 18th Street, P.O. Box 2068, Muncie, Indiana, 47307-0068. Phone: (765) 284-3304. Fax (765) 289-8394
Page 2600-S-1
Installation Instructions
General Instructions
Important: Do not discard packing material until all loose items are accounted for. To prevent damage in transit, the control valves, pipe trains, spark ignitor, combustion sleeve, mounting gaskets and connecting linkage components may be packed separately and shipped loose with your new Maxon MEGAFIRE Burner. The burner itself is normally only a part of your complete combustion system. Additional pipe train accessories and control components will be required for a complete system installation. IB MEGAFIRE Burner provides its own combustion air supply (EB version requires a separate combustion air blower). Both nozzle mixing burners serve as their own fuel/air mixing device. Burner should not be exposed to direct radiant heat or positioned where it might draw in inert gases. If problems exist, consider relocation and/or use of the EB version and external air supply. Electrical service must match the voltage, phase and cycle of all electrical system components and be compatible with burner nameplate ratings. Insure that all normal control safeguards are satisfied. Combustion air blower should continue to run after shutdown to allow burner to cool. Gas supply piping must be large enough to maintain the required fuel pressures cataloged for the particular burner size used with burner operating at full-rated capacity. Anything more than minimal distance or piping turns may necessitate oversizing piping runs to keep pressure drops within acceptable ranges. If multiple burners are fed from a single gas train, care should be taken to minimize pressure drop and give maximum uniformity. Clean fuel lines are essential to prevent blockage of pipe train components or burner gas ports. Main Shut-Off Cock should be upstream of both the main gas regulator and pilot line take-off. Use it to shut off fuel to both pilot and main burner during shutdown periods of more than a few hours. The fuel throttling MICRO-RATIO Valve with a Maxon MEGAFIRE Burner is not intended for tight shut-off. Main gas regulator is essential to maintain a uniform system supply pressure. If one pipe train supplies multiple burners, provide a separate regulator in the branch leading to each burner system. Size the regulator for full system capacity at the required pressure, carefully considering pipe train losses. Follow the instructions attached to the regulator during installation and be sure to remove any shipping pin or block. Pilot take-off should be upstream of the main gas regulator, but downstream of the main gas cock. It should normally include its own pilot gas regulator, a solenoid valve, and shut-off cock. A pilot adjustable orifice at the pilot inlet simplifies adjustment. Pilot piping must be large enough to provide for the full flow and pressures shown in the catalog for your particular burner size. Fuel Shut-Off Valves (when properly connected to a control system) shut the fuel supply off when a hazardous operating condition is sensed. Manual reset valves require operator attendance each time the system is started up (or restarted after a shutdown). Motorized shut-off valves permit automatic start-restart when used with an appropriate control system. Test connections are essential for burner adjustment. They should be provided immediately downstream of the regulator and are included in the burner itself. Test connections must be plugged except when readings are being taken. Blower location must deliver a reasonably clean and cool air supply. Where external blowers are used, care must be taken to keep pressure drops to a minimum and to independently support the weight of air piping. Gas, oil, and air piping should be located reasonably close to the burner and sized for the pressure and volume requirements of the burner, with supply pressures high enough to permit subsequent regulation at each burner. Gas piping drops should not exceed 10% of initial supply pressure. NOTE: To prevent dripping of oil at shut-down, oil piping should include a means to purge the oil gun of unburned oil after firing. This can be accomplished with a steam or air atomizing purge sequence. Oil shut-off should be located as close as possible to the burner oil inlet.
8/97
Maxon practices a policy of continuous product improvement. It reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.
INDUSTRIAL COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT AND VALVES
m
MUNCIE, INDIANA, USA
CORPORATION
Page 2600-S-2
Installation Instructions
For proper operation, atomizing train should include a low pressure switch, interlocked with the oil shut-off valve, installed downstream of the regulator, with no valving between that tap and the burner itself. Oil pipe train should be located below the burner inlet. The oil solenoid valve must be interlocked with the low pressure atomizing air switch. Control systems should provide all normally recommended interlocks (including operation of fuel shut-off valves). Sequencing Control Systems are available from Maxon that include provision for postpurge pilots during all but emergency shut-downs. This sequencing is essential to minimize risk of smoke during oil-fired shutdown. Always re-establish gas pilot before shutting off oil. For gas-and-oil combination firing, valves for both fuels must operate simultaneously on light-off and on shut-down. For gas or oil firing, interlock fuel valves electrically so only one or the other can be used, not both together. Oil shut-off valves should be installed as close as possible to burner for dependable light off. If not, oil may not reach the burner nozzle before flame safeguard times-out. Low fire start and interrupted pilot are essential to obtain cataloged minimums. Burner and pipe manifold support will be required to support weight of the burner and connected pipe train components. Air control motors, in particular, require additional support. Maxon connecting base and linkage assemblies are designed to position the control motors to work with the burner, not to support their weight. Horizontal mounting is preferred, but burner may be mounted in any position suitable for automatic control motor and UV scanner. MEGAFIRE Burner will typically be installed through a refractory wall or insulated air duct. Cut opening at least 2" larger in diameter than combustion sleeve to allow for thermal expansion of sleeve. The MEGAFIRE Burner requires external auxiliary support provided by the user. Lifting lugs are provided on the burner to assist in lifting and the alignment mounting of the MEGAFIRE Burner. Burner mounting requires 16 studs and a flat mounting surface perfectly centered on the combustion sleeve. After placing burner in position over studs, add lock washers and nuts, then draw up all 16 hand-tight only. Check that burner is seated evenly all around the flange, filling any gaps to prevent air leakage, then tighten all nuts firmly. For proper performance of any burner, air inlet and motor should be surrounded by clean, fresh, cool air. Additional burner support will be required in conjunction with a stiffener plate when mounting MEGAFIRE Burner (weighing 650-1000 pounds) through typical thin wall of heater/oven panels. Combustion sleeve must be flush with, or extend beyond, interior wall. An external viewing port should be provided for flame observation, preferably in such a position that burner pilot and main flame can both be seen. Flame sensing must be accomplished by UV scanner. UV scanner should be kept as close to burner as feasible. Heat block, if used, may affect signal strength with some brands of scanners. Alternate fuels may require correction of supply pressures. Maxon assumes no responsibility for the use or misuse of the layouts shown. Specific piping and wiring diagrams should always be submitted to the appropriate agencies for approval on each application. Multi-burner installations require special considerations if supplied by a common pipe train and/or air supply. Air Balancing Valves and separate burner gas pressure regulators should be used for improved heating uniformity; Gas Swing Check Valves should be installed as close as possible to each burner inlet for dependable light-off (gas manifold may otherwise act as a reservoir, preventing light-off during trial-forignition period). Control systems circuitry must not allow main Fuel Shut-Off Valve to be opened unless combustion air is on, and must de-energize valve upon loss of combustion air pressure, along with the other usual system interlocks. Motor starter is to be interlocked with valve, whether or not a combustion air pressure switch is used.
m
CORPORATION
Page 2604
Performance and Selection Data

MEGAFIRE Burners Maximum Capacity (Btu/hr) Turndown Ratios Fuel Pressures required at burner inlet Pilot Gas Inlet Pressure Combustion Air Natural Gas, Propane, or #2 Oil Natural Gas or Propane #2 Oil Natural Gas #2 Oil Propane (range) 100k 300 kBtu/hr (SCFM) [1] 2750 2.9" wc 4.4" wc 20 58 3 9 3.5 40 lbs. 87 15M 15,000,000 15 to 1 10 to 1 22" wc 70 psig 8.8" wc 30M 30,000,000 15 to 1 10 to 1 26" wc 70 psig 10.4" wc 0.5 5" wc 6000 2.9" wc 5.1" wc 37 109 5 15 4 50 lbs. 88 9500 3.3" wc 9.9" wc 72 207 10 21 4 60 lbs. 89 45M 45,000,000 15 to 1 10 to 1 38" wc 60 psig 15.2" wc
Combustion Air Differential Pressure @ test connection upstream of air shutter (IB and EB versions) Total Combustion Air Pressure Required (EB version only) Atomizing Media (for oil firing option) IB Blower Horsepower Approximate Flame Dimension @ EB transition inlet SCFM Air @ 60 psig lbs/hr Steam @ 60 psig Direct Drive 230/460/3/60 Length (in feet) Diameter (in feet)
Force (pounds) required to open air shutter with combustion air on (refer to Bulletin 7000-Control Valves for torque required to operate control valve set Noise Levels (IB burner only) [2] dBA
[1]The SCFM shown is based on the IB fan cur ves at the known differential through the burner with the air shutter fully open. For both IB and EB versions, combustion air must be provided at differential pressure (burner over combustion chamber) for cataloged burner capacities. [2] Silencers are available to reduce noise levels to below 80 dBA
To select your MEGAFIRE Burner, specify:

1. Quantity 2. Size 15M = 15,000,000 Btu/hr (maximum) 30M = 30,000,000 Btu/hr (maximum) 45M = 45,000,000 Btu/hr (maximum) 3. Fuel and atomizing media Gas: If other than natural or propane gas, provide: Specific fuel and/or analysis; Specific gravity, calorific value, and available pressure Oil: If other than #2 oil, provide: Specific fluid and/or analysis; Specific gravity, calorific value, viscosity, temperature and available pressure Atomizing media: Air Volume and pressure Steam Volume, temperature and pressure 4. Combustion chamber static pressure condition 5. In-Line (IB) or External (EB) Blower version For IB version:
6. 7.
8.
9.
Electrical specification for motor For EB version: Electrical specification for motor Blower discharge position Blower volume and pressure For XC version (EB only): Verify that control of combustion air/fuel gas and/or fuel oil is specified Discharge options #310 stainless steel discharge sleeve, or Refractory block with seal and support housing Control valve options Standard cam version Packaged control valve arrangement: Right-hand assembly, or Left-hand assembly Assembly arrangement options Gas inlet position (Note: pilot/scanner always opposite side from gas inlet) Air inlet position Accessory options Connecting base & linkage for specific automatic control motor Atomizing air train Atomizing steam train Light oil train Gas train Shut-off valve(s) Control panel
Page 2605
Performance and Selection Data

Performance Curves 15M MEGAFIRE Natural Gas
25 16000 14000
Natural Gas Pressure, inches w.c.
20 12000 10000
15
Flow
10
8000
Pressure
6000 4000
5 2000 0
Min 0
10
0 Max 11
Fuel Gas Control Valve Position
NOTE: The fuel gas pressures shown are measured at the fuel gas test connection downstream of the control valve at the gas manifold inlet flange. NOTE: The fuel gas control valve, represented on the x-axis of the above graph is a Maxon 3 inch -M style control valve. This valve is supplied in the 15M, 30M and 45M MEGAFIRE pre-assembled control valve/pipe train package.
15M MEGAFIRE #2 Fuel Oil

70 60 50 80 40 120
Natural Gas Flow, cubic feet / hour
100
Pressure
30 20 10 0 0 Min 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Fuel Oil Control Valve Position
60
Flow
40
20
0 11 Max
NOTE: The fuel oil control valve, represented on the x-axis of the above graph is a Maxon 1/2" O 100 SYNCHRO oil valve. This valve is supplied in the 15M MEGAFIRE pre-assembled control valve/pipe train package.
8/97
Fuel Oil Flow, gallons / hour
Fuel Oil Pressure, psig
Page 2608
Dimensions
15M EB MEGAFIRE Combination Burners Right Hand Arrangement
48.44 36.63 30.0 1/4" NPT 16.5 Comb. Air Test 1/2" NPT Conn. Oil Inlet
Combustion Air Inlet
Lifting Lug 9.88
7.13
28.69 19.44
5/8" (.625) dia. Mounting Holes 27.656 dia. 29.656 dia. 16.76
15.0 21.03 dia. Observation Port Main Gas 2.0 Inlet Stainless Steel Discharge Sleeve 19.28 dia.
3/4" NPT Atomizing Media Inlet
Access Plate
Pilot Inlet Plate
22 22
Alternate Air Inlet Positions
15M EB MEGAFIRE Combination Burners Left Hand Arrangement

48.44 36.63 30.0 Lifting Lug 16.5 Access Plate 1/4" NPT Comb. Air Test Conn. Combustion Air Inlet
5/8" (.625) dia. Mounting Holes
28.69 19.44
9.88
7.0
27.656 dia. 29.656 dia.

19.28 dia. 21.03 dia.
15.0
16.76
Observation Port
Alternate Air Inlet Positions
22
22
Stainless Steel Discharge Sleeve
Main Gas Inlet 1/2" NPT Oil Inlet Pilot Inlet Plate 2.0
Gas Pressure Test Connection
3/4" NPT Atomizing Media Inlet
17.0 dia.
15 15
22
19.0 dia. 12.0 dia. outside 9/16" (.562) dia. 12 holes
4" ANSI raised face 150# slip-on welding flange w/2.688 lg. 4" NPT Sch. 40 pipe Bolt holes to straddle centerline
Main Gas Inlet
Page 2609
Dimensions
15M IB MEGAFIRE Combination Burners Right Hand Arrangement
56.94 36.63 30.0 16.5 Lifting Lug Combustion Air Inlet 1/2" NPT Oil Inlet 9.88 Lifting Lug
27.656 dia. 29.656 dia. 28.69 19.44 5/8" (.625) dia. Mounting Holes
16.76
24.03 dia.
19.28 dia.
22 22
Main Gas Inlet Access 2.0 Plate
1/4" NPT Comb. Air 3/4" NPT Test Atomizing Conn. Media Inlet
Pilot Inlet Plate
15M IB MEGAFIRE Combination Burners Left Hand Arrangement

56.94 36.63 30.0 Access 16.5 Plate 1/4" NPT Lifting Comb. Air Lug Test Conn.
Lifting Lug
9.88
5/8" (.625) dia. Mounting Holes 28.69 19.44
27.656 dia. 29.656 dia.
19.28 dia.
24.03 dia.
16.76

22 22
Main Gas Inlet 1/2" NPT Oil Inlet 3/4" NPT Atomizing Media Inlet 2.0
Pilot Inlet Plate Gas Pressure Test Connection
22
4" ANSI raised face 150# slip-on welding flange w/2.688 lg. 4" NPT Sch. 40 pipe Bolt holes to straddle centerline
Main Gas Inlet
8/97
Page 2614
Dimensions
Oil Gun Assembly
Combustion Air Test Connection
COMBUSTION AIR TEST
39255B
R
Name
Lifting lugs to be in upright (or 12 o'clock) position regardless of air, oil or gas inlet rotation Blower Lifting Lug
FLAME DETECTOR
PILOT SPARK IGN.
See pilot detail below
MAIN GAS
Main Gas
ATOMIZING MEDIA
OIL
Mounting feet to be in down (6 o' clock) position regardless of air, oil or gas inlet rotation
Atomizing Air/Steam
Oil
MEGAFIRE Raw Gas Pilot

No Gaps Note: Oil gun assembly must seat solidly against mixing cone
Sight Port UV Scanner Connection Spark Ignitor Pilot Gas Connection
Suggested Block Mounting for Seal & Support Blocks

Metal Wall Refractory Cast or Block Fiber Blanket Wrapping Block 1" minimum
Burner Block with Stainless Support Sleeve
Maximum chamber temperature ratings for discharge options: SS discharge sleeve 1100F (593C) Refractory block discharge 1600F (870C)
Page 2615
Dimensions
Refractory Block/Seal & Support Assembly 15M MEGAFIRE Burner
ITEM NO. 1
ENG
SEA
5/8" (.625) 16 holes
2 3 4
BUR
HEX
FLA
27.656 dia.
25.0
29.656 dia.
5.875 9.875
30M MEGAFIRE Burner
34.0
42.312 dia.
40.312 dia. 5/8" (.625) 16 holes
12.0 16.0
8/97
IMECO
Milano - Italy
ACC16.TXT VERIFYING AND SETTING GAS AND AIR PRESSURE SWITCHES AFTER STARTING AND SETTING THE BURNER. A. LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH: START BURNER AND DRIVE IT TO MAXIMUM CAPACITY. READ PRESSURE DOWNSTREAM THE GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR SITUATED BEFORE THE MAIN GAS VALVE WHERE THE PRESSURE SWITCH IS MOUNTED. THE PRESSURE SWITCH SHOULD BE SET TO APPROXIMATELY 80% OF THE READING. (E.G. READING VALUE = 20 mB; SET VALUE = 16 mB) B. HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH: CONNECT THE MANOMETER IN THE PIPE TEST CONNECTION DOWNSTREAM THE GAS VALVES WHERE THE PRESSURE SWITCH IS MOUNTED, JUST BEFORE THE INLET TO THE MAIN BURNER. START BURNER: READ THE MAXIMUM GAS PRESSURE LEVEL IN THE WHOLE RANGE (MIN-MAX). THE PRESSURE SWITCH SHOULD BE SET TO APPROXIMATELY 30% MORE THAN THE READING. (E.G. READING VALUE = 4 mB; SET VALUE = 13 mB) C. COMBUSTION AND PROCESS AIR PRESSURE SWITCH START BURNER. ALLOW TO GET INTO TEMPERATURE. READ THE PRESSURE AT THE POINT WHERE THE PRESSURE SWITCH IS MOUNTED. IF THE PRESSURE SWITCH IS CONNECTED IN DIFFERENTIAL MODE, BOTH THE CONNECTION POINTS OF THE WATER COLUMN MANOMETER SHOULD BE USED. SET THE PRESSURE SWITCH TO AROUND 80% OF THE READING. (E.G. READING VALUE = 2 mB; SET VALUE = 1,6 mB). NOTE: ANTUNES SERIES PRESSURE SWITCHES POSSES A DOUBLE SACLE: ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE IS THE WATER COLUMN SCALE IN mm (10 mm H20 = 1 mB) ON THE RIGHT HAND SIDE IS THE WATER COLUMN SCALE IN INCHES (1 INCH = APPROX.2,5 mB)
Page 2600-S-3
Start-Up Instructions
Read complete instructions before proceeding, and familiarize yourself with all the systems equipment components. Verify that your equipment has been installed in accordance with the original manufacturer's current instructions. CAUTION: Initial adjustment and light off should be undertaken only by trained and experienced personnel familiar with combustion systems, with control/safety circuitry, and with knowledge of the overall installation. Instructions provided by the company and/or individuals responsible for the manufacture and/or overall installation of complete system incorporating Maxon burners take precedence over these provided by Maxon. If Maxon instructions conflict with any codes or regulations, contact Maxon Corporation before attempting start-up. 6. Prepare Maxon SYNCHRO Control Valve(s) for initial fuel firing adjustment. (See catalog pages 7000-S-1 through 4.) Remove screw carrier cover plate(s) from top of fuel control valve(s) exposing multiple adjusting screws. If multiple fuel arrangement, adjust linkage rods and toggle arrangements between SYNCHRO Fuel Valves, so that all fuel control valves travel together (from minimum to maximum positions). Leave SYNCHRO Fuel Valve(s) at minimum position, as shown by pointer on the position indicator strip. 7. Temporarily shut down MEGAFIRE Burner blower and remove the access hatch cover entrance into your MEGAFIRE Burner housing. This permits observing the internally mounted air shutter. Adjust length of the flexible operating cable by screwing the rod end bearings on either end of the cable to insure that when the fuel valve is at minimum position, the air control shutter is completely closed. At maximum setting position for the fuel valve(s), the air control shutter must have been pulled to its full open position. Once the air control shutter positions are confirmed with regard to the fuel valves' minimum and maximum positions, the access hatch cover(s) must be replaced. Restart MEGAFIRE Burner's combustion air blower. 8. Verify differential air pressure setting. With combustion air blower on and all volume air fans operating, connect a manometer between the 1/4" diameter air test connection on MEGAFIRE Burner and your combustion chamber static pressure connection. This differential pressure reading (burner over combustion chamber) should be set per values on page 2604. Obtain this setting by either adjusting inlet air control valve (on EB MEGAFIRE Burner) or combustion chamber shutters involved with IB MEGAFIRE Burner applications. 9. With combustion air fan on, pilot gas regulator should initially be set at approximately midpoint of its adjustment range (range equals 0.55 inches wc). With pilot gas solenoid closed, open pilot gas cock. Energize spark ignitor and pilot gas solenoid. Observe pilot ignition through sight port of pilot assembly and/or by viewing micro-amp signal metered from flame safeguard relay circuit.
For initial system start-up: 1. Close all burner fuel valves and/or cocks. Make preliminary adjustments to fuel regulators and oil back pressure relief valves. Check oil supply system to be free from air entrainment. 2. Check all electric circuitry. Verify that all safety devices and interlocks are operable and functioning within their respective settings/ranges. Be sure all manifolds are tight and that test ports are plugged if not being used. 3. Check that all duct and chamber dampers are properly positioned and locked into operating positions. 4. Start all system-related fans and blowers. Check for proper motor rotations and impeller direction. Verify safety interlocks are working. Allow air handling equipment to run for adequate purge of manifold and combustion chamber plenums. CAUTION: Do not by-pass control panel timers typically controlling sequential operations. 5. Using 3/16" allen wrench, disconnect the automatic control motor(s) linkage from Maxon SYNCHRO Control Valve by loosening the control motor's connecting rod from the valve's toggle linkage. Initial start-up adjustment should only be accomplished during a manual control mode.
8/97
m
CORPORATION
Page 2600-S-4
Start-Up Instructions (cont'd.)

MEGAFIRE Raw Gas Pilot
Sight Port UV Scanner Connection Spark Ignitor Pilot Gas Connection
Refine pilot setting for a hard blue flame (and/ or strongest micro-amp signal) by adjusting gas flow through pilot regulator. Shut off pilot gas cock to extinguish pilot fire. Reopen and confirm easy re-ignition several times. The flame safeguard relays should now power the main fuel Shut-Off Valves. 10. To light and adjust MEGAFIRE burner on oil: With gas pilot established and flame supervision system operational, the atomizing flow (either compressed air or steam) must be introduced to the burner's atomizing inlet. Verify that pressure and volume of atomizing media is being supplied to the burner inlet per catalog specifications. Verify that oil supply pump is on. Verify all safety interlocks are operational before opening any main and/or individual burner oil valves. With manual oil valve open, oil will flow to the Oil SYNCHRO Valve which is on minimum and the air control shutter is closed. NOTE: The oil start-up procedure can advance to step #14. 11. To light and adjust MEGAFIRE Burner on gas: With gas pilot established and flame supervision system operational, opening the main fuel ShutOff Valve(s) will allow fuel flow to the SYNCHRO Fuel Control Valve. NOTE: At this point, refer to pages 2605-2607 for pressure settings versus valve position for each size MEGAFIRE, oil and gas.
12. To establish full range of burner's gas capacity: With gas flowing to burner, the first adjusting screw on your SYNCHRO gas valve is ready for adjusting. 13. To adjust SYNCHRO Fuel Control Valve(s): Turn SYNCHRO Valve to minimum. Open upstream fuel cock. Using the allen wrench provided, turn that adjusting screw down (clockwise) to permit fuel to flow to your MEGAFIRE Burner. The gas will come out of the radial spokes inside your burner assembly. The oil flows out the nozzle in the center of the burner cone. NOTE: At this point, it is more important to get any kind of a flame as soon as possible. The flame geometry can be adjusted and refined as needed later. Once your flame is established and refined at this position, and without advancing the screw carrier quadrant higher, screw all remaining screws down to at least the same level as your first adjusted screw. NOTE: A preliminary setting can be established with all the remaining adjusting screws. Generally, each succeeding screw needs to be screwed in approximately one full turn deeper than its preceeding screw. A smooth "stair-step" gradient pre-set at this point from low to high will simplify the remaining adjustment steps. CAUTION: Oil flames are highly radiant. Use eye protection and avoid prolonged viewing. Prepare to shut off oil quickly if there is a noticeable drop in oil pressure or if ignition does not occur. 14. Without advancing the SYNCHRO Valve quadrant, screw down on #2 screw (one or two turns). Then slowly advance the SYNCHRO Valve quadrant to the #2 position. Adjust flame appearance at this new position #2. NOTE: If firing chamber is of refractory construction, allow your MEGAFIRE Burner system to operate at this low setting for the necessary dry/ cure-out time period recommended by the chamber or refractory manufacturer. Then continue adjustments of SYNCHRO Valve.
m
CORPORATION
Page 2600-S-5
Start-Up Instructions (cont'd.)

Again, without moving SYNCHRO Valve, bring #3 and all remaining adjusting screws down to the same level as #2 screw. NOTE: If approximate pre-set gradient was made earlier, the remaining screws will already be at or below appropriate levels. Progressively work your way up through each adjusting screw position, developing a smooth progression slope from your first screw to the "maximum" position. NOTE: To adjust the flame at any position, you must move the SYNCHRO Valve to the number you desire to adjust. This aligns the adjusting screw directly on top of the fuel valve plunger. A resulting adjustment of the screw is directly applied to the fuel valve plunger and its interconnected valve body linkage. 15. Cycle burner from minimum to maximum and refine adjustment, if necessary. Always set SYNCHRO Valve to the numbered position you wish to adjust. For operation with interrupted pilot (as recommended), shut off pilot and cycle burner from minimum to maximum and back several times to verify the flame is maintained. 16. Reconnect linkage to control motor, plug all test connections, replace equipment cover caps and tighten linkage screws. 17. Check out overall system operation on all fuels by cycling through light-off at minimum, interrupting pilot, and allowing temperature control system to cycle burner from minimum to maximum and return. Recheck all safety system interlocks for proper setting and operation. CAUTION: Test every UV installation for dangerous spark excitation from ignitors, and other burners, direct or reflected UV radiation. 18. Before system is placed into full service, instruct operator personnel on proper start-up operation with shutdown of system, establishing written instructions for their future reference. SYNCHRO Poppet SYNCHRO Oil
Legend
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Description Adjusting Screws Cam Springs Plunger/Cap Assembly Plunger Bushing Set Collar Operating Crank Upper Spring Retainer Gas Valve Spring Spring Return Shaft Shaft Retainer Lower Spring Retainer Packing Collar O-Rings Operating Shaft Valve Disc Valve Body Valve Disc Spring Valve Disc Guide Valve Stem Spring Support Plug Stud Bolt Bushing Locking Screw
CAUTION: If flame is extinguished, immediately return SYNCHRO Valve to minimum position and shut off fuel (if flame safeguard has not already done so). Turn in slightly on adjusting screw at point where ignition was lost, then return SYNCHRO Valve to minimum position, re-establish pilots, open fuel valve and verify ignition.
8/97
m
CORPORATION
START UP INSTRUCTIONS FOR MEGAFIRE BURNER- JOB 76/08
Pag.1of 2
1- Start the combustion air and process air blowers. The start up of the burner can be done from the Imeco local control panel or from DCS. The operation selection, gas or light oil, can be done only from the Imeco local control panel. FUEL GAS OPERATION (Start up from Imeco control panel) . 2 - Turn the Local Remote switch in Local position. Turn the Gas-Light oil switch in Gas position. Push the Burner start button. 2a- If any alarm red lamp is on, check and remove the fault . Push the Reset button. Now the red lamps must be off. 3 - When all the alarm red lamps are off ,the compressed air solenoid valve YV7 will be open to cool the light oil gun. In the air cooling gun system a low pressure switch ,connected to a lamp, inform for any air failure. The leak test of the main gas valves starts This test is made by a CTV appliance and relevant gas pressure switch SP6 located between the two main gas shut off valves on the gas pipe train. The approximative duration of the test is 20 seconds After the positive end of this test the flame control check the no air pos. of the combustion air pressure switch SP7 by a 3 way solenoid valveYV11. If the test is negative lockout occurs 4 The electric servomotor TCV01drives the gas/air/light oil control valve to maximun opening . (input 20mA) The high fire limit switch SQ2, on the gas/air /light oil control valve, checks the reached position of maximun opening. The control motor is stopped in this position for the purge time, 30 seconds . This time is set by a card inserted in the flame control. At the end of the purge time the control motor returns to the minumun position checked by the low fire limit Switch SQ1. 5 -Then start the ignition period for 5 seconds. During this time the ignition transformer and the two pilot solenoid valves YV9+YV10 are energized from the flame control and the pilot burner will be lighted. The self checking UV1 scanner detects the presence of the flame. After a few seconds the main gas shut off valves YV3+YV4 open and the lamp Burner on is lighted. 6 -The burner is firing at the minimun capacity .After 20 seconds the pilot goes off and the temperature regulator can send to the control motor the modulating signal (4/20mA). 7 - If during the normal operation a failure happened all the safety valves will be immediately closed and a lamp will be lighted to indicate the reason of the shut down. For restart the burner is necessary to repeat the operation from item 2a. 8 - To shut down the burner push the button Burner stop. START UP FROM DCS 9 - Turn the Local Remote switch in Remote position. 10- When the start contact from DCS is on the ignition start begins
FUEL LIGHT OIL OPERATION (Start up from Imeco control panel) . 11 - Turn the Local Remote switch in Local position.
Pag.2of 2
Turn the Gas-Light oil switch in OIL position. 12 - Push the Burner start button. Oil pump stars 12a- If any alarm red lamp is on, check and remove the fault . Push the Reset button. Now the red lamp must be off. 13 - When all the alarm red lamps are off the flame control checks the no air pos. of the combustion air pressure switch by a 3 way solenoid valve. If the test is negative ,lockout occurs 14 - The electric servomotor drives the gas/air/light oil control valve to maximum opening . The high fire limit switch, on the gas/air /light oil control valve, checks the reached position of maximum opening. The control motor is stopped in this position for the purge time, 30 seconds . This time is set by a card inserted in the flame control. At the end of the purge time the control motor returns to the minimum position checked by the low fire limit switch . 15- Then starts the ignition period for 5 seconds. During this time the ignition transformer and the two pilot solenoid valves are energized from the flame control and the pilot burner will be lighted. The self checking UV1 scanner detects the presence of the flame. After a few seconds the main light oil shut off valves YV1-YV2 and the air atomizing valve YV8 open and the lamp Burner on is lighted. 16 -The burner is firing at the minimum capacity. After 20 seconds the pilot goes off and the temperature regulator can send to the control motor the modulating signal (4/20mA). 17- If during the normal operation a failure happened all the safety valves will be immediately closed and a lamp will lighted to indicate the reason of the shut down. For restart the burner is necessary to repeat the operation from item 12a. 18- To shut down the burner push the button Burner stop. START UP FROM DCS 19- Turn the Local Remote switch in Remote position. 20- When the start contact from DCS is on the ignition star up is coming . SHUT DOWN PROCEDURE FOR LIGHT OIL OPERATION ONLY 21- When the Burner stop push button is pressed or the contact coming from DCS opened, the burner doesnot immediately exstinguished, but start a procedure after described. This procedure is necessary to corrently burn the remaining light oil and to avoid the dirty of the gun. 22- At the burner stop the control motor goes to minimun position, checked by the the low fire switch, and the pilot is lighted by the spark ignitor and the opening of the pilot gas valves. 23- After 10 seconds the light oil valves will closed and the opening of the Purge air allows the cleaning of the gun. The air atomizing valve is still open. 24- After 40 seconds all the valves will be closed and the turning off is completed. ///////////////////
Maxon SVNCHRO@ valves precisely control fuel flows to burners by means of micro-adjustment. Three designs are available: SVNCHRO@ butterfly valves, SVNCHRO@ poppet valves and SVNCHRO@ oil valves.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION SYNCHRO:!: valves provide micro-adjustable gradient flOw control using a series of adjusting screws. SYNCHRO:l; valves with standard cam assemblies (for use under normal ambient conditions) allow 12 adjusting screws to bear against flexible cam strips to form a Slope !ha! determines the motion impar1ed to a plunger causing Opening of the valve. After a one-time adjustment to establish the desired flow at each position, the cam assembly can be rotated manually or automatically to throttle fuel flow. Tolally-enclosed cam assemblies (for greater proleclion againsl corrosive almospheres) include 10 adjusling screws, each Ihreaded inlo a separale ..C"-shaped elemenl. Two sels of cam slrips wilhin the "C"-shaped elemenl are separaled by Ihe side-mounled roller on Ihe valve plunger. Opening is delermined by Ihe relalive posilion of each "C"-casling as il rotales pasl Ihe plunger. Precision adjustment of the fuel input at each ' 'ent points can easily be made. cf the
FEATURES .Throttling range fully adjustable. .SYNCHRO. butterfly valves -designated "M" or "S" are offered in Rp , , /2 through DN 300. They feature a full-flow butterfly valve body with ratings up to , .7 bar. .SYNCHRO:F poppet valves -designated ..P" use a poppet-type valve for greater flow control in smaller sizes. They are offered in Rp , /2 through Rp 2 , /2 with pressure ratings up to , .4 bar. .SYNCHRO.. oil valves -designated "O" incorporate a V-grooved rising-stem body for control of oil flow. They are available in Rp 3/8" through Rp , with pressure ratings up to 20 bar. .SYNCHRO~ valves can be used alone or "stacked" for single-control throttling or multiple flow paths or fuels. .Temperature limits are 90C (fluid) '75C (for oil) Ambient temperature should not exceed 50 C. .Ali valves can be equipped with electric or pneumatic operators for automatic control and with low-fire start switches. .Special body and trim materials can be offered for some sizes and types of control valves
Principle of operation
cf a standard cam assembly
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .Connecting bracket & linkage assemblies to facilitate positioning of control motor. .Accessory flanges for wafer-type valves or as an alternate to some standard threaded connections. .Position switches to provide electrical indication of valve position.
2..
p SVNCHROoc
valve
standard
cam
AlI data shown on this page are subject
to change
without
notice.
I I
E 4.200 1 .1 390
I I
SYNCHRO~
valves
The "standard" cam assemblies are designed under norma! ambient conditions.
for use
"Totally greater pheres.
enclosed" protection
cam assemblies against corrosive
are designed for or dusty atmos-
SYNCHRO@ BUTTERFLY VALVES
M-TYPE
OR
sTYPE
SYNCHRO@ POPPET VALVES
P- TYPE
SYNCHRO@ OIL VALVES
O-TYPE
AlI data shown on this page are subject to change without notice. r l E 4.200 1.2 190 I 1
SYNCHRO@ valves
SPECIFICATIONS SELECTION CHART FOR SYNCHRO@ GAS VALVES

.:l p In mbar
NATURAL
GAS
(sp.
gr. 0.65)
In m3st/h
III "'
AIA (sp. gr. 1.00)
1 11111 (') ~"'(D...a)~

In m3st/h
I. ~
III 1 1111 9 ~~gg~
III ~
111111 ~ ~~~ ~
' "'
j l! ! l~ (') ~"'(D...a)
MANUAFACTURED
GAS
(sp.
gr. 0.38)
In m3st/h
~ PROPANE ...: GAS
III "' (sp.
1 11111 M~"""...aoO gr. 1.52) In ;.3st/h
III ~
Il ~i~~oo8
1111 ...ao -~
III ~
Il ~8.?,'g88
1111 ...ao -~
III 8888 ~ i
1 ~
III ~
"'
"'
Il 11111 ..,"'(Ot-"'~
III R,
111111 9 ~~!6g~
III
1 1111t ~ ~~~~~
t ~
J ~
l ~ ~~
BUTANE GAS (sp. gr. 2.00) In m3st/h
AlI data shown on this page are subject to change without notlce.
L~~J
SYNCHRO@ valves
POPPET
VALVES
TOTALLY ENCLOSED CAM ASSEMBLY
62 62
62 62
OIL VALVES
STANDARD CAM ASSEMBLY
62
[jJ
ISO
7/1
( can
be
obtained
in
NPT ). B2. 1, except valve for units size 3/4 .and be 1. : ISO used in the 7/1. same assembly.
[2J Pipe threads conform to ANSI standard rn 57 mm for high temperature versions. @] Standard and totally enclosed cam
SYNCHRO~
cannot
Ali data shown
on this page are subject
to change
without
notice.
I I
E 4.200.2.5 490
I I
SYNCHRO@ valves
ACCESSORIES
POSITION SWITCHES Position switches provide positive electrical indication that the valve is at minimum position prior to burner light-off. Both totally enclosed and standard cam assemblies can be supplied with SPDT switches mounted on them. For standard cam assembly SYNCHRO@ valves specify no.014316 Low Fire Start Switch illustrated in sketch [IJ including SPDT switch. a standard low fire start switch LFSS opens the circuit when valves leaves minimum position. For DPDT contacts specify :Iess no.021514 withno.033121 switch but switch. specify
[g]
For SPDT switch action at other than minimum, no.014309 start switch assembly. For SPDT combination no.018189.
high-Iow fire limit switch. specify
For totally enclosed cam assembly SYNCHRO@ valves specify no.025460 LFSS illustrated in sketch [ZJ ( closed to Normally Open at minimum ) or a no.026606 combination high / low fire start switch ( not illustrated ) High or low fire start switch assembly may be set to actuate at either high or low fire positions, but not both.
ADJUSTABLESTOP ~
Where il mighl be preferable lo prevenl air valve from closing fully, use no.023226 adjustable stop -skelch ~ -lo create an artifici al minimum. Air valves can be supplied with adjustable "open" position SPDT switch no.300048 standard cam or no. 300040 far totally enclosed cam ( not illustrated ) .
TORQUE REQUIREMENTS Torque requirements for SYNCHRO@ valves at maximum rated pressures are summarized in table below. Triplex, quadruplex, etc. valve combinations require the addition of individuai torques shown, which may result in torque requirements as high as 115 Nm or more. Lower inlet pressures can reduce the torque needed. Always check with the operator manufacturer to be sure that the operator selected meets the torque requirements of the SYNCHRO@ valve on which it will be mounted. SYNCHRO~ valves 1/2"-P to 21/2"-P 11/2"-M to 4"-M 11/2"-M(SHP) to 4"-M(SHP)
3"-5, 3"-5 6"-M 8"-M 10"-M 12"-M 3/8"-0 to 1"-0
14atO.7barto2~at17
Torque Nm 10 14 20 14 20 20 20 20 20
bar I
Air valves M-3" M-4" M-6" M-8",10" M-12",14" M-16",18"
Torque 3 3 7 11 23 23
4"-5 (5HP), 4"-5 (5HP)
AlI data shown
on this page afe subject
to change
without
notice.
I I
E 4.200.2.6J 390
Type GD-6 annular-body
butterfly
valve
Generai: The Type GD-6 control damper is a valve designed for clamp-fitting between two flanges and shou/d, In sizes above DN 200, always be insta/Jed with the spindle in the horizontal position. Centering ho/es are provided in sizes as from DN 300. Lengths: Manufacturer's standard, special designs possib(e Spindle seal: Gland packing, O-seafing rings Special spindle seal design: Gland packing with sealing-air feed system or self-adjusting type incorporating cup springs
ODeratinQ data: For clamp-fjtting between flanges as per DIN standard, PN 6/10/16 or as per ANSI, 150 Ibs. Suitable for temperatures from -40 C to + 1,000 C, depending on material combination Standard temperature gradations: t< 100 C, 100 C < t< 350 C, 350 C < t< Actuation modes: Manual: Standard, with ratchet adjustment, at least 16 positions
450 C t>
450 C
damper can be focked in
InfiniteJy adjustab/e fine positioning (SFD-6) (Jight-weight Locking by means of wing-bolt, acting on the spindle
type)
InfiniteJy adjustable fine po5itioning (RDST-32) Locking by means of damping of the adjusting lever
(heavy-duty
type)
Worm-gear actuation systenis

Handwheels (chain-wheefs)
Motor oReration: electrically operated control and positioning systems for alI voltages, including those with spring-operated retum systems
Pneumatically operated double and single-action
rotary actuator
systems and rams
Hydraulically operated actuator systems

also suitable for flameproof designs, suitable accessories: End-position switches, proximity initiators, positionlng actuators, position transducers Please state operating pressure, fluid, operating temperature, differential pressure, DN and PN when ordering
Right of modification without notice reserved
I-I
Januarv. 2000
Type
GD-6
annular-body valve
butterfly
Materials:
(5tandard) Type: GD-6 EjM Body I handle and scale Disk (up to DN 100) Disk (DN 250 onward) Spindle
Type: GD-6 E/E Body, handle and scale Disk (up to DN 100) Disk (DN 125 onward) Spindle
GG 25 St 37 GG 25 St 37
GG 25 Brass 63 GG 25 Brass 58
Type: GD-6 E/S Body I handle and scale Disk (up to DN 100) Disk (DN 125 onward) Spindle
GG 25 St 37 GG 25 1.4021
Type: GD-6 E/V Body I handle and scale Disk Spindle
GG 25 1.4301 1.4021
Type: Body Disk Spindle Handle
GD-6
V IV
Type:
GD-6
5/5 AI AI 1.42021
and scale
1.4301 1.4301 1.4305 GG25
Body Disk Spindle Handle and scale
GG25
Type: Body Disk Spindle Handle
GD-6
S/V
AI 1.4301 1.4021
Other materials on request
and scale
GG
25
Sealing
modes In the valve paS5age -+
CorTesponding approx. 1%
leakage
rates of KVS value of KVS value of KVS value of KVS value
Valve disk contoured dosure type Valve disk flat-contact lype (up to a maximum of 90 c and DN 300) with body seat ring Body seat ring with flexible sealing insert sheathed on three sides
approx. 0.11 0.2 %
-+-+-
approx. approx.
0.110.2 0.011
% 0.02 %
Wherenot specified to the contrary, we supply butterf1y valves up to DN 300 in flat-contact type fonn (max. 90 C) and in slightly contoured closure form as from DN 350. Pleaserefer to our catalogue for further control and isolating and shut-off dampers. Special designs with ceramic lining, etc., on request.
Rjght of modification without notice reserved
2-1
Januarv.2000
butterfly
valve
Type
GD-6
with RDST -32 infinitely adjustable fine positioning ~

200 100 150
30 40 40 40 45
So 60
115
140
12
255 255 255
215 250 275
150 175
195
255
15 15 15 25
%,
250 350 450
220
290
310
415
255
290
320
410
360 420 495 600
520
620
30
30
290 290 400 400
480 540
645 750
~ 4 DN . D
550 700
70 80
780 980
35 40
900
25
25 25 25
75 83 95
115 150
60
10
155 163
40
65
100 150
75
105.
10
12 12 15
175 195 240
30 40
140
195
Type
with
GD-6
DIN/ISO , fitting . flange
200
250 350 450
550.
40
40 45 50 60 70
175
220 290 360
255
310
15
15 25
265
320
.,~~
Il W C
415 520 620 780
420 490 550 625
30 30
35
O "iii C 11) E i5
420 495
700
I '-r-"" I';. .,
I' I
I 1200 90 Versions 790 1295 45 920 up to DN 2000 on request I
Spindle stub to customer's specification with square, twin-cheek spigot stub or key
2-2 Right o( mOOlflcation wItj1QJt nodce reser.ed
Jaluary.
2000
Type
GD-6
annular-body valve
butterfly
DN 15
B 25
C 60
0 D 44
0 d 8
G 105 105
H 125
25
25
75
60
10
140
* = Standard
version
no longer
with ratchet handle but instead with RDST -32 fine adjustment or worm-gear actuation
1-2
JanUalY,2000
RJghtot modlflcatlon wllhout notic~ ~ ,
butterfly
valve
Type
GD-6
LB bearings on
100 30
115
with outboard both sides and GD-6 LB/2 with outboard one side for
140
12
130
360
160
bearing on
150 200
40 40 40 45
So
150
195
15 15
130
400 425 480 580 480 540 785

890 1080
160 160
operating temperatures >600 oC .~
175 220 290 360
255
130 130 180 180
250 350
310 415 520
15
160 160 160 160
25
450
550
30
30
60 70 80
90 Versons
420 495 600

790
620
180 180 180 180 on request
700
780 980
1295
35
160 160 160 I
900
40
45 2000
Typical example with exposed spindle

I
1200
up to DN
Selection 100---~The characteristics curve of a damper signifies the correlation between flow and damper angle of opening. In the case of the OPEN/CLOSED damper which is used for shutoff/isolation, the damper opening may have an angle of up to 900. For control functions, the nominaI damper diameter should , be selected in such a way that maximum flow is assured at a maximum 70 damper opening. The damper has an approximately equal-percentage flow characteristic curve in the 0 to 70 damper opening positioning range.
9C 80
of control -
dampers (butterfly valves)

i*
z
~
I ~ I I ., I
?r
~ QJ 0E ro -o
~I iC 60
50
LO
~A
:J:D:
,--+-
-i
e c: 8 '.e QJ ~ :J u
-1-
, .
30
20
10
-!/4-" .~~.I..1O ~o 20 3G 'O ~ 00 70 !O 90.
::0:
. -7
=il1 ~
~ ~ ~ ti:
W-~~~
-~ff~nk~1
Januarv.2000
Material
pairings
as
a function
of
temperature
St 37
* = Heat-resistant cast steel
HII
1.4541 1.4571
---1.4828 1.48Z8 -I 1.4848
Permissible differential pressures with the restrictor disk closed and a reference temperature of 30 C
Table 2
"""'~
_~5
I~~.
D N~.f.'~~~' ;:n;.~, p .rwn\:, "'.'J:

10
20 25 32 40 50 65 80
c
6 6 6 -2-: ~ 3 3 l,i-
DN .~~... -~'fI:lA.
p 'rwm. .."..."
1.5
--500
10 10 .7 4
,
150 175 200

225
550 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
1..!:.~ .Q. .Q. M E 1
300
t::1= 2
2
350
100
400 450
Reduction factor for determination pressure at higher temperatures

3
of permissibJe differentiaJ
Table
Right of modiflcatJon without notJcereserved I
Januarv.2000
Type
GD-6
annular-body valve
butterfly
Kv values
Table 4
The Kv vaJues state m3 water per hour at 20 oC and pressure drop 1 bar. Kvs = Kv at 60 angJe of opening
Januarv.
2000
Instructians far Installatian, Maintenance and Operatian far annular thrattle valves with stuffing bax packing
Before Installation With valves with actuator is at the upper spindle-end a saw-cut and a point on the sindle and the mounting-arrangement to check-up the disc position on one level.
Valves with actuator To check.up the disc postion, there js a saw-cut at the upper end of the spindle and a ponit on the spindle an the mounting.arrangement. In "CLOSE" position the point and the saw-cut are on one level.
Construction of an electrical actuator . First please heed, that both, the valve as well as the actuator must set by hand in OPEN position and after that back in approx. 450 position. Please connect the electrical-actuator in accordance with the switch-plan witch we have deposit seperatJy.
After this please check the worir.ing-ness of the actuator as w elI as the correct rotatory-sense of the actuator .
Attentlon
Dlease: please drive the actuator with torgue-switch
In dosing-direction,
Use the Umit-switches in dosing-direction only as control-switch (signal). With pneumatic-actuators please heed, if the springs oben, or dose.
Generally, and that is valid with the consb"Uction of the actuator, the valve as well as the actuator must be set in noPENn position.
From DN 200 anwards, the valve must be Installedharizantally. Passibledeviatians must be dedared with yau arder.
Insert the prepared tupe-sealing cocenbically The flange-connecting srews tightens evenly.
During tightening, bradng of the valve-body must be avoid.
A performance check is to made by opening an dosing the valve severa' times.
The .spindle sealing takes ~Iace by a special stuffing box packing, and adjustable gland. A Readjustment or the packing during the operation is possible.
In case of high pressure or higher speed flow, the throttJe valve must be opened upon first operation.
InMax - Revolution
Type InMax-50.75 - Y InMax- 100 - Y InMax30 - YF Torque Supply Motor running time 40/60/90/120/150 sec.at 90 40/60/90/120/150 sec. at 90 40/60/90/120/150 sec. at 90
E X P L O S I O N P R O O F
Electrical, industrial rotary actuators - size M 3-pos, 0...10 VDC, 4...20 mA, 24..230 VAC/DC, 95 Angle of rotation incl. 5 pretention 50/75 Nm - 100 Nm without and 30 Nm - 50 Nm with safety operation (spring return)
Subject to change
InMaxInMaxInMaxInMaxInMaxInMax-
50.75 - Y 100 - Y 30 - YF 50 - YF ... - VA ... - CT
Compact - Easy installation - Universal - Cost effective - Safe

Spring return without without Control mode 3-pos, 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA 3-pos, 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA Feedback Wiring diagram SB 4.0 SB 4.0 SB 5.0 SB 5.0 50 Nm & 75 Nm 24..230VAC/DC 100 Nm 24..230VAC/DC 30 Nm 24..230VAC/DC 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA
~ 20 sec. at 90 3-pos, 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA
InMax- 50 - YF 50 Nm 24..230VAC/DC 40/60/90/120/150 sec. at 90 ~ 20 sec. at 90 3-pos, 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA 0...10VDC, 4...20 mA InMax- ... - VA Type as above but with stainless steel housing (AISI 316) gearbox parts in stainless steel, cable gland and hollow rivet nickel-plated InMax- ... - CT Type as above but with AL - housing and amercoat paint, gearbox parts in stainless steel, cable gland and hollow rivet nickel-plated
Application
Damper Ball valve Throttle valve
Description size M
The new InMax actuators are a revolution for safety, control and shutoff dampers, VAV systems, ball valves, throttle valves, linear motion valves and other motorized applications for HVAC systems, in chemical, pharmaceutical, industrial and Offshore-/Onshore plants, for use in safe areas. IP 65 protection, small dimensions, only 9,5 kg weight, universal functions and technical data, an integrated heater and an optional stainless steel housing guarantee safe operation even under difficult environmental conditions. High quality brushless motors guarantee long life. All actuators are programmable and adjustable on site. Special tools or equipment are not required. 5 motor running times - according to the actuator type - are selectable or adjustable on site. The integrated universal power supply is self adaptable to input voltages in the range of 24 to 230 VAC / DC. The actuators are 100% overload protected. InMax-...-F actuators are equipped with spring return fail safe function Standard shaft connection is a squared direct coupling with 16 x 16 mm. Different accessories are available to adapt aux. switches, terminal boxes or adaptations for ball valves and throttle.
Highlights u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u Industrial actuators Universal supply unit from 24 to 230 V - AC/DC 5 different motor running times (40-60-90-120-150 sec./90), adjustable on site Spring return fail safe operation in ~ 20 sec. 3-pos, 0...10 VDC, 4...20 mA control mode, with or without spring return function Feedback signal 0...10 VDC and 4...20 mA Reverse function 100 % overload protected Compact design and small dimension (l x w x h = 286 x 150 x 116 mm) Direct coupling to the damper shaft with squared connection 16 x 16 mm 95 Angle of rotation incl. 5 pre-tention Robust aluminium housing (optional stainless steel) with IP 65 protection Simple manual override include + preparation for comfortable manual override Gear made of stainless steel and sinter metal Only ~ 9,5 Kg weight Integral heater for ambient temperatures down to -40C Integral safety temperature sensor Integral equipment for manual adjustment (push button, lamp, switch) Preparation for adaptable aux. switches type InSwitch Range of accessories
Schischek GmbH Germany D-90579 Langenzenn, Mhlsteig 45, Gewerbegebiet V, Tel. ++49 (0)9101-90810, Fax ++49 (0)9101-908177, Email ExMax@schischek.de
Malux Finland Oy, P.O.Box 69, FIN-06151 PORVOO, Finland Phone: +358 (0)19 57 45 700, Fax: +358 (0)19 57 45 750, www.malux.fi
InMax-100-Y InMax-..-V
Technical data
InMax-30-YF
InMax-50-YF A
Special makes
InMax-50.75-Y
InMax-100-Y
InMax-30-YF
InMax-50-YF
Torque motor Torque spring return (F) Dimension of external torque Supply voltage/Frequency Dimension Protection class Angle of rotation and indication Working direction Motor running time Motor Spring return (F) Spring return running time (F) Safety operations (F) Control mode Y Feedback signal U Resistance of Y and U signals Reverse function Adjustment of Y and U Axle of the actuator Electrical connection Diameter of cable Cable gland Manual override Integral heater Housing material and weight Dimensions Ambients Operation mode Self adjustment Maintenance Wiring diagrams (SB) Delivery Parameter at delivery
50 / 75 Nm selectable on site 100 Nm 30 Nm 50 Nm without F without F min. 30 Nm min. 50 Nm above mentioned torques are min. torques in blocked position, external torque should be max. 80 % of max. actuator torque but min. 15 Nm 24...230 VAC/DC, + 15 % / - 20% , self adaptable, Frequency 50...60 Hz +/- 20 % max. starting currents see table (in acc. with voltage, I start >> I rated), max. 20 W blocking position, approx. 16 W for heater class I (grounded) 95, incl. ~ 5 pre-tention, mechanical value indication selectable by left/right mounting to the damper/valve shaft 40 / 60 / 90 / 120 / 150 sec. at 90 selectable on site brushless DC Motor without F without F spring return in the event of loss of power without F without F spring return in ~ 20 sec. at 90 without F without F min. 10.000 in acc. with construction of damper and ambient 3-pos, 0..10 VDC, 4...20 mA in acc. with wiring, selectable on site, galvanic seperation between supply and signals 0..10 VDC, 4...20 mA in acc. with wiring, selectable on site Input signal Yu 0...10 VDC @ 10 kW, Yi 4...20 mA @ 100 W. Feedback signal Uu 0...10 VDC @ 1.000... W, Ui 4...20 mA @ 0..800 W Bridge between wiring 3 and 4 (signal wise) gets a reverse function of Y and U If the angel of rotation is different to 90 the input Y and output signal U can be adjusted to the new angel of rotation squared 16 x 16 mm, direct coupling, 100 % overload protected cable, ~1 m, diameter of wires 0,5 mm, for electrical connection a terminal box is required! ~ 7,1 mm and ~ 7,4 mm ~ 7,1 mm and ~ 7,4 mm ~ 7,1 mm and ~ 7,4 mm ~ 7,1 mm and ~ 7,4 mm M16 x 1,5 standard Manual override only if supply voltage is cut, use delivered socket wrench, slow motion, enough torque/force is required Attention: with manual operation of the spring danger of injury exists, with release/let go the hexagonal spanner! integral heater, controlled, for ambient temperature down to - 40C Aluminium die cast housing ~ 9,5 Kg , painted (optional in stainless steel version ~ 15 Kg, Type InMax-.../VA) l x w x h 286 x 150 x 116 mm, for diagramm see extra information ME storage temp. - 40..+ 70C, working temperature - 40...+ 50C, humidity in acc. with EN 60335-1 100 % ED at initial system checkout for motor you need to start the self adjustment mode. maintenance free, maintenance must be complied with regional standards, rules and regulations SB 4.0 SB 4.0 SB 5.0 SB 5.0 1 actuator, 1 m cable, squared shaft connection 16x16 mm, 4 x M8x140 mm screws , 4 nuts M8 socket wrench for simple manual override 50 Nm, 90 sec./90 100 Nm, 90 sec./90 30 Nm, 90 sec./90
50 Nm, 90 sec./90
Certification
EMV Low voltage IP-Protection Potential compensation
InMax actuators - size M

EMV-RL 89/336/EG Low-voltage RL 72/23/EG IP 65, in acc. with EN 60529 external PA-terminal, 4 mm
Accessories or special solutions - size M

InMax-...-VA InMax-...-CT InBox-... InSwitch MKK-M HV-M Adaptations AR-16-xx above listed types in stainless steel version, housing AISI 316. above listed types in Al box and amercoat painted Terminal boxes 2 external aux. switches, adjustable on site mounting bracket for terminal boxes type InBox-... direct on actuator comfortable manual override for InMax actuators size M various adaptations for dampers/valves on request Reduction of square damper connection from 16 mm to 14, 12
Schischek GmbH Germany D-90579 Langenzenn, Mhlsteig 45, Gewerbegebiet V,Tel. ++49 (0)9101-90810, Fax
++49 (0)9101-908177, Email
ExMax@schis chek.de
InMax-50.75-Y
InMax-50.75-Y InMax-100-Y Special makes

Electrical connection
InMax-30-YF InMax-..-VA
InMax-50-YF
Parameter, Adjustment - Failure indication
InMax actuators are equipped with a universal supply unit working at a voltage range from Switch - Push button - Lamp 24 to 230 VAC/DC. The supply unit is self adjustable to the connected voltage! for adjustment, behind the blancking plug The safety operation of the spring return function works if the supply voltage is cut. 10-position switch (S) Push button(T) 3-colour LED
S T
Wiring diagram InMax-50.75-Y and InMax-100-Y Continuous control or 3-pos without spring return SB 4.0 Parameter selection
Example: InMax-50.75-Y Requested parameter: Torque 75 Nm Running time motor 90 sec/90 Result: switch position (S) 07
Type InMax-50.75 -Y InMax- 100 -Y InMax- 30 -YF InMax- 50 -YF Running times 40 sec./90 60 sec./90 90 sec./90 120 sec./90 150 sec./90 Torques 50 Nm 75 Nm 100 Nm 30 Nm 50 Nm q q Position of switch S u 00 05 u 01 06 u 02 07 u 03 08 u 04 09 u u u u
YmA YVDC
PE a
A
2
heater
Function of switch a and b: - a closed, On (Off) - in acc. to left/right mounting ot the actuator - b closed, Off (On) - in acc. to left/right mounting ot the actuator
Wiring diagram InMax-30-YF and InMax-50-YF Continuous control or 3-pos with spring return SB 5.0
24...230 VAC/DC
Self adjustment: To adjust the signal input/output to the Angle of rotation of the damper/valve the button T must be pushed for minimum 3 sec.
YmA YVDC
PE a
A
2
heater
Function of switch a and b: - a closed, On (Off) - in acc. to left/right mounting ot the actuator - b closed, Off (On) - in acc. to left/right mounting ot the actuator
Attention! !
Never use actuators in spring return mode without external torque/force.
+ ~
24...230 VAC/DC + ~ ~
Self adjustment: To adjust the signal input/output to the Angle of rotation of the damper/valve the button T must be pushed for minimum 3 sec.
VDC/mA
UmA UVDC
I
B
PA
Function, adjustment and parameter

A) Self adjustment of Angle of rotation: Switch (S) into position 02 (low torque) or 07 (high torque), then push button (T) for minimum 3 seconds. The actuator will drive into both end positions to be adjusted. LED indicates green. Adjusmtent time needs approx. 180 sec. (90 sec. On, 90 sec. Off). After that, switch S into position 00-09 in acc. with your required torque and running time. B) Selection of running time and torque: Put switch (S) into the correct/selected position in acc. to above table. The selected parameter will work at next operation of the actuator. Adjustment can be done even without supply voltage. If supply voltage is available turn switch only if actuator is not running. C) Running time spring return: Standard ~ 20 sec D) Change from modulating into 3-pos operation mode: Push button (T) 3 times. LED changes from green to yellow. Push button within next limits: - Push time min. 0,2 sec. - The max. time for 3 push is 5 sec. E) Change from modulating into 3-pos operation mode: Push button (T) 3 times. LED changes from yellow to green.
VDC/mA
UmA UVDC
I
B
PA
F) Additional information for 3-pos operation: a closed, b open = direction I b closed, a open = direction II a and b closed = Motor doesn't work a and b opened = Motor doesn't work Direction (I and II) depends on left/right mounting of the actuator to the damper/valve. You can change direction of the motor by changing electrical wiring terminal 3 and 4. G) Reverse function: Bridge between wiring 3 and 4 (signal wise) gets a reverse function of Y and U.
Modulating- 3 pos- change

LED GREEN YELLOW Status Supply available, Actuator active in modulating mode Supply available, Actuator active in 3-pos mode
Error indication
See extra information EL
www.schischek.com
InMax-50.75-Y InMax-100-Y Special makes
InMax-30-YF InMax-..-VA
InMax-50-YF
Mounting instructions and important information for operation and installation Important information for installation and operation
A. Installation, commissioning, maintenance The cable of the actuator must be installed in a fixed position and protected against mechanical and thermical damage. In acc. with operation InMax actuators are maintenance free. The actuators must not be opened by the customer. For outdoor installation a protective housing against rain, snow and sun should be applied to the actuator, as well as a constant supply at terminal 1 and 2 for the integral heater. B. Shaft connection, selection of running time, heater InMax actuators are equipped with a direct coupling squared shaft connection of 16 x 16 mm. The housing of the actuator is axially symmetrically built to select open/close direction of the spring return function by left/right mounting. In acc. to the actuator type 5 different motor running times can be selected on site. The integral heater is for ambient temperatures down to -40C. C. Minimum load Minimum load not less than 20% of the rated torque, min. 10 Nm D. 3-pos control mode See extra information EL. E. Spring return Spring return function works if the supply voltage (terminal 1 or 2) is cut. In the event of an electrical interruption, the spring returns to its end position. F. Operation at an ambient temperature below - 20C See extra information EL: G. Excess temperature InMax actuators are equipped with an additional temperature sensor to stop the actuator before reaching this max. temperature. In this case the failure must be eliminated immediately on site.
Mounting on air dampers with double squared shaft connection

Details see extra information ME.
Mounting on air dampers with clutch

Mounting of quarter turn valves

InSwitch - adaptable external aux. switches

InSwitch is an accessory to InMax actuators size M, fixing directly onto the actuator. InSwitch are aux. switches with with 2 potential free contacts, adustable on site.
InBox - adaptable terminal box

For electrical connection of an InMax actuator. InBox-Y/S for InMax-50.75, ..-100, ..-30-YF, ..-50-YF To adapt the InBox direct to the actuator housing an additional accessory type MKK-M is required.
Extra information "EL" (see additional data sheet)

extra technical information, versions of circuit diagrams and failure indication
Extra information "ME" (see additional data sheet)

extra technical information, dimensions, installation instruction and illustration
D.IM-07.01-M-en-Y 2005-11-15
IMECO
MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ENTRETIEN PREVENTIVE PRAVENTIV WARTUNG MANUTENCION PREVENTIVA MANUTENO PREVENTIVA Milano Italy
Konserwacja zapobiegawcza
MOD.
FREQUENZA / FREQUENCE / FREQUENCE / ANZAHL FRECUENCIA / FREQUNCYA / czstotliwo PUNTI DINTERVENTO MAINTENANCE POINTS POINTS DINTERVENTION WARTUNGSZEITPINKT PUNTOS DE INTERVENCION PONTOS DE INTERVENAO .. .. .. . . .. MESE MONTH 1 MOIS MONAT MES MES .. .. .. ... ... ... MESE MONTH 6 MOIS MONAT MES MES . . . . MESE . MONTH . 12 MOIS . MONAT MES MES .
Punkty interwencji
I CANDELA DACCENSIONE GB SPARK IGNITOR F BOUGIE DALLUMAGE D ZUNOKERZE E BUJIA DE ENCEDIDO P VELA DE ACENO W
miesic
miesic
. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
miesic .
wieca zapalania
ELETTRODO RILEVAMENTO FIAMMA FLAME ROD ELECTRODE DE DETECTION FLAMME FLAMMENSTAB ELECTRODO DE LLAMA ELECTRODO DE CHAMA
I GB F D E P W I GB F D E P W I GB F D E P W I GB F D E P
elektroda wykazujca pomie

FILTRO GAS GAS FILTER FILTRE GAZ GAS FILTER FILTRO GAS FILTRO GAS
filtr gazu
FINESTRE INGRESSO ARIA INLET AIR WINDOW S FENETRES DENTREE DE LAIR OFFNUG FURLUFTZUTRITT ORIFICIO DE ENTRADA AIRE ORIFICIO DE ENTRADA AR
okna wprowadzajce powietrze

FILTRO RIDUTTORE ARIA COMPRESSA (Se usato) COMPRESSED AIR FILTER (If used) FILTRE REDUCTEUR AIR COMPRIME (si employe) LUFT FILTER REDUZIERSTATION FILTRO REDUCTOR AIRE COMPRIMIDO FILTRO REDUCTOR AR COMPRIMIDO
W filtr redukujcy powietrze sprone (jeli uywane)

DOPO UNA SETTIMANA DI FUNZIONAMENTO CONTINUO DEL BRUCIATORE VERIFICARE IL SERRAGGIO DI TUTTI I BULLONI DI FISSAGGIO DEL BRUCIATORE NELLA CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE AFTER ONE WEEK OF BURNER WORKING, CHECK THE TIGHTENING OF ALL FIXING BOLTS OF BURNER IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER.
VERIFICA CONTROL CONTROLE. KONTROLLE.. CONTROL. VERIFIAO.
Kontrola.
. . .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
PULIZIA CLEANING .. NETTOYAGE PUTZEN.. LIMPIEZA. LIMPIEZA
SOSTITUZIONE. REPLACEMENT SUBSTITUTION ERSETZUNG.. SUSTITUCION SUBSTITUIAO
czyszczenie
wymiana.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
ALARM ACTIVATED POSSIBLE CAUSE
1.
Minimum gas pressure
1-a) Gas supply pressure lower than that prescribed. 1-b) Gas filter clogged. 1-c) Gas pressure after main stabilizer insufficient or completely lacking. 1-d) Gas pipe/pressure switch pneumatic connection interrupted.
2.
Maximum gas pressure
With burner off: (valves closed) 2-a) Faulty pressure switch micro (the contact does not close). With burner on: (valves open) 2-b) Gas pressure too high. Exceeding pressure switch set value. Erroneous gas pressure adjustment.
3. Minimum combustion air pressure
3-a) Burner fan not working or rotating in wrong direction. 3-b) Fan section opening clogged. 3-c) Fan / pressure switch pneumatic connection interrupted.
4. Minimum circulating air pressure
4-a) Fans not working and/or insufficient air flow. 4-b) Pressure switch pneumatic connection interrupted.
5.
High temperature
5-a) Safety Thermoresistance/Thermocouple interrupted. 5-b) Wrong setting of intervention value on instrument. 5-c) Unsuitable temperature setting.
6.
Flame control block
Insufficient flame signal Non-ignition pilot. Control of faulty flame.

1
SUGGESTED REMEDIES 1-a) Restore prescribed value. 1-b) Replace filter cartridge. 1-c) Check condition of internal membrane. If broken gas leaks out of air valve (replace). Check, with water gauge inserted between stabilizer and main valve, that the gas pressure value is within the calibration field of the spring. This value can be read on the plate situated on the stabilizer. If necessary, work on the adjusting screw.
1-d) Restore the connection. 2-a) Replace pressure switch. 2-b) Check the calibration of the pressure stabilizer. 3-a) Start up the fan and check the rotation direction. 3-b) Clean the suction opening and, if mounted, the filters. 3-c) Restore connection. 4-a) Check that the air flow is in conformity with that of the project. 4-b) Restore connection 5-a) Replace thermoresistance/thermocouple 5-b) Set correct value 5-c) Check the regulation parameters. Make sure that the instrument is working correctly (see temperature regulator operating instructions). 6) See technical bulletin of Flame control.
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
CONSTRUCTION: Nr.1 AS DRAWING - Nr.1 SIMMETRICAL G1 WET G2 DRY
L G O
F E D D E F G H I L M N H O P
IMECO
r r
N
51 57 47 51
58
M N
6 7 10 3
I
45 46
48 50 49
H
8 9 11 12 1 4
13
L H
44 35 40 65 44
42
M
22
53
52 14 16 15 56
F
32 33 34
36 39
39
40
38
O
42 55 61
60 20 23
17 29 29 30 18
D
27
28
31
60
19
67 64 62 65 66 62 63
54
54
A
62
63
25 I/P 26 24
62
65
66
62 60 21
IMECO
IMECO
IMECO
B A C
IMECO
AIR
OIL
GAS
IMECO
VIEW FROM -A-
BALL VALVES FOR GAS

066
LO N D O N B A L L VA LV E , F U L L F LO W
Female/female threads Lever handle in steel Body in nickel-plated brass Minimum and maximum working temperatures: -20C, 60C (class T2 under EN331) Threads: ISO 7/1 Rp parallel (equivalent to DIN EN 10226-1 and BS21)
SIZE
1 / 4 3/8 1/2 3/4 49.5 52.4 23.5 37 80 18 5 24 37 80 21 5 61 30.5 68 37
1 85 45.5
11/4 11/2 99.5 58 75 109 71 90
2 130 85 97
A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm) CH (mm)

WORKING PRESSURE
48.3 54.8 58.8 88.5 25 5 113 31 5
113 137.5 157.3 157.3 38 5 47 5 54 5 66 5
Kg/cm2 bar
WORKING PRESSURE
psi
72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5
067
LO N D O N B A L L VA LV E , F U L L F LO W
Male/female threads Lever handle in steel Body in nickel-plated brass Minimum and maximum working temperatures: -20C, 60C (class T2 under EN331). Female thread: ISO 7/1 Rp parallel (equivalent to DIN EN 10226-1 and BS21) Male thread: ISO 7/1 R taper (equivalent to DIN EN 10226-1 and BS21)
SIZE
1 / 4 3/8 1/2 3/4 56.9 58.9 23.5 37 80 18 5 24 37 80 21 5 68 30.5
11/4 11/2
A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm) CH (mm)

WORKING PRESSURE
75.5 90.5 37 45.5
150 115.5 135.5 58 75 71 90 85 97
48.3 54.8 58.8 88.5 25 5 113 31 5
113 137.5 157.3 157.3 38 5 47 5 54 5 66 5
Kg/cm2 bar
WORKING PRESSURE
psi
72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5
A RT. 066067
2_21
MANOMETRI RIEMPIEMENTO
BOURDON
ANTIVIBRAZIONI
DI GLICERINA
Particolarmente indicati per pompe, motocompressori, motori diesel, presse, centraline oleodinamiche, o comunque su tutti gli impianti ove si hanno vibrazioni, pulsazioni, colpi d'ariete.
GLICERINE Parlicularly
FILLED suitable
ANTIVRATION
BOURDON
PRESSURE
GAUGES machines
for pumps, where
engine-compressors, there are vibrations,
diesel engine presses, oleodynamic pulsations, water hammers.
or for any instal/ation
TIPO DI MONTAGGIO
-AssEMBLING
TYPES
k
MG1/5 5fem bof/on Wall bof/on connecfion connecfion 5fem low bock connecfion Flush low bock connecfion
ESECUZIONE STANDARD diametri nominali: mm. 63-80-100-150-200-250. classe di precisione: :!:1% v,F.S. ( 1,6% g 63-80) cassa e anello: alluminio (acciaio inox g 63) presa di pressione: o"one G 1/2 A UNIISO 228/1 o 1/2 NPT ANSIB2.1 elemento elastico: lega CuSN8 tubo bourdon a "C" fino a 60 bar tubo a spirale da 100 bar tuto a spirale acciaio temperato da 400 bar movimento: o"one a orologeria di tipo rinforzato indice: acciaio brunito tipo azzerabile quadrante: alluminio fondo bianco con scala e graduazioni in nero
SCALE
-RANGES
(1/4 g 63)
STANDARD EXECUTION dial size: mm. 63-80-100.150.200.250. accurancy: :!:1% on full scale {1,6% 063-80} cae and ring: aluminium {stainless steetg 63) pressure connection: brass G 1/2 A UNIISO 228/I elastic e/ement: CuSN8 "C" Bourdon tube to 60 bar spiral tube from 100 bar tempered steel spiral tube from 400 bar movement: clockwork brass reinforced type pointer: bumished steel adiustable type dial: white aluminium with scale and black 9raduatians
ar 1/2 NPT ANSI B2.1 {I/4063}
--
bar 0...06* 0...1 0...1.6 0...2.5 0...4 0...6 0...10 0...16 0...25 0...40 0...60 0...100 0...160 0...250* 0...400* 0...600* 0...1000* 0...1600* 0...2500** 0...4000***
Disponibili solo dol DN lCO Available only from OS lCO
** Disp'?nibili Available solo dai DN 150 on/y from OS 150
bar -1...0
-1...0.6 -1...1.5 -1...3 -1...5 -1...9 -1...15 -1...24
*** Disp'?nibili solo dai DN 2CO Available only from OS 2CO
AWERTENZE In presenza di ossigeno o per teml'erature ambiente inferiori a + 100( sconsigliabile l'uso della glicerina. OPZIONI E COMPONENTI AUSlLIARI o quadranti con scale particolori: singole: psi-kpa doppie: bar e kpa o separatori di Ruido direni o a disanza o serpentine. o ammortizzatori. o rubineni e valvole a spillo. o contani elenrici o velro con indice di massima Irascinabile , azzerabile dai fronte o sgrassaggio per ossigeno.
WARNING In presence
of oxygen
or for ambient
temperature
inferior
to + 1O'C,
the use of glycerine OPTIONS C dial AND
is inadvisable. AUXIUARY scale: single: double: COMPONENTS psi-kpa bar and kpa
with special
C d!aphragm c sIphons C dumpeners
seals, direct
or at a distance
C cocks and needle C electric C plain contacts
valves pointer, zeroing by front
glass with maximum for oxigen
C degreasing
BIOLCHI Via Angelo
R.di
Antonio Biolchi & C. s.a.s.

5
I = .-m....>~ -c:"' :s~g1U "On~ ~-r--
" o O O ~ Q. "O m O> .~ u

Eo..' .~ .!!1 "O -"O
,
"' m mNOm "O:: "'OCDE ~o-go c: .
ar ~ .-o. :J CI) CD ffi "O CI) "'
(/) ro O> "' .9. m ~ jE-- . m Q) <-E~ -uoC. (Jt'Ju Z;E.0;~ ~"80'~ 8. ~ .~~~ ." . .'.':Jo "O:JO)1U 0".,o>-(/)~ ~~~ ~ ~(/)ID'mg~.. :Q e~ EQ.> (!) (!) "'
--"O Q)"' .-'"ro o u-> .~~~
~ Q)
" m 9!
'50>~S ,,"0~~ .-"' ::
!(!~E -~~
~~ej~ ~"Oa.a. ~~~~ ~

~ ~ c: e., U~ ., ."
5 U ~ 8
.-.o~ I -o ~ .o~~tU=lli ~ $ .k. c: bS Z- 8.:2 E o U (f5 5 "1Bo~"'
uooc:c;"'ffi
tl ~.~ ~.~~ ~-a;@~
~
c: -a lii 1:3~~~~ Q)c:uz.a
~~~~~~.g@~ ~tlO.8:2a;~-(') ~
"0:1
C -o-g .-~ 9 ~"" "' ~ u -.,>-"' o"O.,C. ~ -"' Q. .j""ijj E .~~,$ OFm> (.) t Fl!I ffi "' I
~(!) 2c: i o .-.c: N $ -
"' c 5-0~ 1U .o
.(/)..!. ., """'c .2 ~ .!2
..,
Q) (/) "' .0"'.-
0-0.8
-.., o> .-~u
m
~o>m>-"mm
Cl)O8~o .-CI) uQ i u~ 2.-CD t5"0~ .o;CDo6 .

(,) -a;~"O ~OO~W~ .i8"1n~c:tUC: -5
"O
"' ..,
e
-0U "'
'2
om.coQ)I{)2-.'C <I:(') u"O(X).()j w~ .."O
~oo; m."00",-
-c w
-a; "0.-0 : QI'-..u tU ai~~<D ~ ~ ~ O;e .c iri c: ~(/)c (/)~Q)

~0.~ -~~ ~~.~ .S2-;:E Q;ro:gJ O) ro
~Ec:
-n
.u !O
c ~ ccc~ Ec~
~Ec"O w .,-.~ ~ c:
~ .2 ~;~~~!~~~ ~ -a
0 ...O ~ (/) O (/) "u Uc ~'O ~.['J~o.~ --g

(/) c.~
wO oQ)C:uC:O) ~ Q)",,"'c~.-~ t) O O >< W
< :Jc:O~a500t5CI)
C" O' m g'" 2~ '-
"'"U'O .;;Oo>~ o>.s ",2.08 ~ Il'' 9 t) ~ -; :2 .",E.oc gC')E.[!J:O~ o"' "'"' o>
-g .E ~~;;;8.5~lli W=e
~i
I. mQ)~u~d
Q)", I..'"'
uo>O>::-00",
m",-c. "Oo>c-
e"6 ~I/I
~ ~ . c .-o> O "
-iii$inc:J:Jo;~
~t5.~c8!~);i~CD
.-c (,)(,)za-8~8.()j1
~. c
.5~~1'-
~ ~~
~'~~
C . -"" "
-Nc,..
0.0't"'
Q)
tn ~ C) ...o.![. (!) c. tn j
c -.-02
d)"'Q)(/) -c:(/) ~="' Q)
Q) ~ Q) C) C) =Q) .8~ E.-ai [;j t c:Noo o~c: E:5",O

"O
E 0"0) U ",,0.:0-.: 0.","00>
Q)O.1, =c~ Q)0C.
C>..Q) ~ . ::"C"C ~ 02 ()0-~ :a~~~ .s:;,~.i: . .QEd)2 ~08!.W ~o > d)"Qc: -~.mC.B
c~""i6 "O0~2!;-N O> -c " "'",""i~ ooB"ffiE"8"' !/!
>8. .-' "'Q)ro ~ "'
~.@ -"' ","' o!\! b;::m .!!?0.0 O> *,.:"00""i " O> O> o. "O "Q0>.:-~""t5 ~ ~o o.~gr-::o. .9!. .: 8 O .: 0)"' ",,"'o>"' O>-~ "" ,g (I) .o ~ gjE .""i-=-ffi.:"Q; ~ ~ :B - i --"O c0>8 o~ -O') -"' O '2 -@ .:
.E~~ .o U ro
-"""-.O> ",W.:-
.:
' 6
00 .:-
.Q)0-1j;0>--'-.:(1)"0
.-~ ..."' ~ .-Q) c:

c: ".E ~.>
-"C
.-Q. > GI > "C O-< ~tu

GI ~ , ~ "c. 0 c. "' GI GI c.
O --Q) c: "'.-=n"" "0"0'2 0
..~Q)
.Q N ~ ~5.t: O.-Q).. -Q)~O Q)",Q)= Q) "' ~~",o f"C.Q)C.

~ "'
C"'~
0 Q) -v N .-0 w"8c:Q)C:OZ E .O;Q)
U)u
-C:Q) !E
-.(/)c
4) C o ,tU N .-.:
,
0
... Q) ~ v.
0
GlIlIl .N(') ~ -Q)"EQ)Q) C)C'! Q).-~ c..
tU E -;; ~ O> ~ -5 B,o W .: ~ -~ "' E w ~ 0) .E ~ ...~~ E ~m"':B~'E":S-g-O> "0 O>Z'p:~ ~ :c.2

.2 o -50> .:"0
~ -0><L0> "' ::gII5~ -~ -~ --5Q O>-" O"00ECW --e -(I) O>w
--o>""Q ;;;~ E ~ S ~t'!-1j;"Q;8uj< -""i i;J "O ~ W bI -~"".: .:@.:==0"0 w ~ 8 o"" ai Z "' 00
'~ ~UI
O o. I I -0"0 0>"0 "0
tn tn (!), ...'"' a.C ...UJ tn -.UJ.1'

C ,. ~ .-.c: O O "0 -- "0 ", "' -' --O> = ", m " ," '-'
.-C.GI N.. j " o () "' E5t:
~ ~ ~ .E ~'5 ~
W .-0;:: " ~.-Q)tc."'."'1: I-.!YNt:o ~0550C.-.~00 ~a~u.-U)COc:
~ ~ "'
d) ~ ca .~ :c ~.~2!. Q) F.Q", ~~. ~ :J(!).NQ.
~o '" .g.,.; v"' (!)(!)"O .~$~
~ . -.-o $"0
1b.82!. . .Q " .s .-(!)."' ""0E1j) o.1n!~
".~~ o (!) C:C:"0
-t:o.g-ffiO>~~C\I~~8.~S~~B~~E C -~--=Oo-~C:5Z(;sO>~(1)Oo e .:~o)WI'E o.-E=sE,m~~:-:

o.",Q
~
u '2
t ~I ~ ~
c:C) .5.~ .,
-o.,.' i.a;.c-a -E".c ~.~ 1IJ ~.0~~ 1;).c2. c: ",--o"E .,~~ ., J!l.o.'.,.91 ~.'ffi-O"iU "Q..C1;)
O"CD$ro.. a;:dffiffi ,s .~.~-g **"~~

8' o>~ ~., .c~!J~
c -O)bc c
E , .' '1:;
..0ro ro -U ", ~ ro ..c ~ -0 ., .c ~ ~.-N<nc:~'~'t;~~~~ -g OC;;~

8 ~-> Q",~'Q; C::J
U
~ Si .~ ro ~~ IIII .N .., -"O ~'"O~$.,
---O
~ ~ ~ u u - .~ g: ~ ~ Q. ffi u-8 ~ .:; O>~ E B'~ i !E>~~~~i~~~g,g>~o:B'W1lJ
(I) ... ..C-0 ~

.' o-N -0 ~ "O CC\I ., -.-E O)~ C.,-> "' ., ., '- C 0),
."O .2 "' c ~ (I) ~ ," ~ O., O .c > "O (I) ., O')g, ~ u ~ ~ c' ~~~.g~<n
c .o; c o '6.'~ c "0.~ .c ., ." ," .c c
15c;;~o g.g.~ C:.~~-a; .:j<n E

~.Q
Q)-WQ)Q) ~ -c: 1:)~()"a51:) --c:Q)
a5
E Q) ~ : ~ ~ ~ ~
EEO>~w
E
Q) 1:) -~~ Q)
Q)-ID "O~ 8 ~ .Q) .8 ~~ ~ .~
O>.:'E.::C: .-Q) C: ~ Q)Q) ~ '=' -~ e> .c
C) ~ffi> C ~~Q)1:) C .E ca E
~Q)~-8 O>"",
Q)"'."""w.m :~ .>.g(!) ~m~ 1:) C:1i5a>a>z;a>"" .~~EE~Q):Q -ffi
~ -'
"' .~ 9
u
:= ~ cc:m ~ ~ .~
.~"0.80(')
"'Q)YA a> ~a>0>~1:) ~

<i
-f c: 8
C) E o.C c ~ Cb o;l5$ ~ c: Q) .-c:.!9. -C:.'DO ~~2: .b c fjJ-,,;?;0 ..,~.,
1;)~ C)tn
~ ~ ~ ~ -8
--~E.c ~ '~
:c~g
"ON.. .,~'.c~g
-=o o'Q;i!!!:>J: ~ >

~
.'.'02'
~
c: ..c: 8 o Q>c: N ~
~ ~ "' ~ ~
~<!i:g
~ E m .-" o z "' N <.>t
~'@'0&-8g"@.,
~ C "'I?
C ,.
.,~"0-.
~-5 ~~~-e
ca ~ ~Q)
...Q) >:J:J "'.=oZ(,)~(j:J R ~asO"'~
w8c~ ffi~~
~oltJ
-fB~~~
O>"E~ ~z
;~] ~ ~VI
(I) ro ~ ~ .-.g? ~C[Q. 4) "o "

8
.c "'
., -J j.-1' c
."' " O ",., ..w .. "0 " "' <11--Q)E--~""'" " ",..<11<11 ~~'21nE -~"::<11 " " E
~~oc:<n~~'0$ ~.8.~~~.N c.~'ffiU; ~ c: c: c: .c: '~ c.
~~8,.S '&~'&'Qj '<II o '<II .. -," '<II ~(b "' "' c "' "' ~.!a.t=~ .Q~:J t==""" mc:Q) :J:5$E .!!1Q)5, .,- ~ ~E =:91.5 g>:J1:) c: c: .c:~ "' "' OO.-~"' .-1" E~c:1:)@"'~a; c:2.91;Q~;Q5E ::>!EW~~o-Q)
~ <D.~0 -o:g..X0 ;:]<D<D c
:8 l1! -.;= .Q "'..'..0LiJ~'5
~~~~E~O'Oc
"'~LiJ~.5
~ c .w0",,3cz ~~ <D0-;:]-""~-0~C O "' c 0 O ~ C~~ O ();:] R~~ ~..,~zffi~ <D~ Ca5 ~ () '2
., $ :> ro c: "' "" ., 'a;
Q=~~~g:o>wr---a>~gQS~52Eg . U O $: o. 0.0 > .c: I I O 0.1:) o>W ~ ! U ~ o> (!)
., ~ c: Q..~ Q 5.a; OEE>C)~
~
~
~~
.E<Do~~
N -L ,.. "' , ..., -" ~ O c.
", "' .~
4) "O cn
() E > .0"<11""' --<11
..,<II ..<II <II E <11 >
~
~;:]
:~x
-.-8 .-.\9
~19
ffi
-.~
O(!)Q."' co -<DC-o
, Q)tb ~ "O , -Q) .-.c ",c.OO -4::'~ ..:~g asQ5"Q.
.-~Q5 , , ~ "O.~ ~ .D -~e . oo:i9Q)1 .~"OOO 1":;;~@
,,'f! o"' ::
~ "C
~~-0~~ .() -o e 0-0
~ ~ LiJ
C'~
o j!!Q. --"'()
~e.., E !$1[) ~<D ~.,ftlJ ~ E ~E

ffi ~~o
Z~q)Q.();:]"'
~~~~~~C~~ 'P .-c 0 <D ~ F wa;.W.8E-o Q.i5 "'<D I<D0.a;C') ~

..,t:<D ~~-.uj~ ~0~~ib
..,
6 -<I:
~ .
Q)-
"' c .= "'o
.u "' .--0'0:
:J '5 = .-c. (/)ooE:J
'" al """:2
" O
~ C::JQ)",c: -
-m .,.. cn cn cn
:J
..~ .2<11 .,.. ~
-<11 <11
'"' <11'<11"'~ .."'..0 " " 0"'<11""' ~.'-01"..,Q) ~g>c:a;m"eiw~ Co(-a,gE:::!~ =0-~~~~~&SLiJr--.!1!~~.~,*~RO.~~ )LIie.;=~(, I
"'
"'
"' @ U "& .-,~ lllI"'...go- -"' 0- .."'

-<11
.2"
"'
-..,.
:J
(/).e ~C"' Ca-a~0..C')~~~~<D~~'gj Q..'?;<D~
'o~.-
~ ~UI
a.C
(1)
c "' .c 0.'".'C"'
4) ,.. ..'""'..
.'..-<11 cn
"0"C'I
.t= "' ~
w..
",-~<11.!a <11 <11"0..
~L. o-<DJP...'.i .:g0",,:s
"' " ..'<II <11...
-"8E~8't5:g:g> ZEQ)Q):J:J=~ OQ)C:C:O~
!
~
"-E E ~JfI. C[O~
.-;:]
~:0> "I
croC 0 0
Q)~!D"O "O..':5c
OO~ "'~00" 0
...1n~"". G) C:JUQ)
()g'(OE -:nQ)o
UooCro :JO
~ .c 'G)
-10-..'='"Q.0-~=&S(!)
~ ~ ~ .'Q)e~ .!9 c. c.-
~ "Q.~ 55 oooo$Q) ffi ~ p .E:
.:
., -"'-., ., >--o
.-'.1' -8~'i.~ ~
~1B ~E ;:! ...~ ~8j c ~.Q > c o
1""0"00-"' :S: ~
>
00'c.!!...
-g-g
8.'!: .,'5 Q)c
~;(j;~ e
'0
o'" ~c
->-o
.I: "
-=: .-(1)"0 > > (1) "' "' .., ~'""+0' C .-'" ...,"o C 2!
m
U ~ g'- ., .!a " o .Q

oO"U 1;02 >0.-"'U~ -~., Il Il"'" 0' .-~"'
E " -M ~ ~
c'" E :S " :;",," c

00>-"'00= .,C) "'2"0" -.," "' - ..".'~ g.-0..,
t 'u~ .~ ~az -@,g ~ LU=LU.g
~g ~~
~ .J:. .~~ .,: 8.1gg.c .~iKI gj;z~~~ ~'5j15 ~I:?O ~ ~B o~'1 .~~i~i~
-m -.2' ml
~io m.g.i
.c:J~ 'i .c (/) g-
+o'"'" " o
-~ o ! ~~
C O
: 2~~ ~8 $0.~ ;:!1::J~ 8j.~8 i~~~!~

a.a.a; ~ :S: E a;
:c~ :~ g'm
O)'"O c (/)~-' ~ .~~~ In -=:Jm Q)~-=
B"tO~ $~i~ ~ -.-~

:~.8~ ~e'~ -1i)E~ ~
, ~ .,
.,'" o: o. -= .= '" .W.1' ~ '""' 0 " .C,"C).' -~ ~., ~OoO~ -.""0"0
'i~~
e'5 ~\11
O Q.
(1)C (1)(1) ~ -0. "' C)
..~~ O)
iE !~g~~~~~ii.%~~j~~~ o.E:6~~.2-:;. ~ ZM ~~~-iQ)8!~F"""E .c ;:!<n~.C

(.) LU r- ~ ~ -~
Wo
:S:u.~
8 ~ I
~B.8
8 E Q)~S< ~~ .!aU)OS Q)"
r-
c. (/)"tO~G> c
E .".C
~ rD c :8 '6 w ~ q:
I " ~ ., "
O)cL c G> G> ~ 't: o. I:

u .p."C",
-c; d"c iD~~"C ~~

c "'
.c
~ ~
cu.-. G>
.-"C
c ~ ~'35. :cO>m
c "'G> E
"
0)""1'- c
'6 Eco
-c
""
"Oj-O)
O) E
0)
""
E
0)
e ' -as~ '

o.
c
0).,!, .0c'E
F'"'
O)
2Gj
O)N
as""-E
~ F-as~ ~ Q
Q) *~ C) <n ~c~fh ~~:a"5 o>:>lu~ ~ 3:: u~~ @"Ci ~.c= ~~~
~~,*Q5 .c:gQ)'ffi 'o ':J .c -
)&W; . ~
, " ,&9* .c ""," *" " c
~~ ,.
~~~~cc:$~"'.c: .C:IDaJ---o li -~ ~ "E ~ -!;;

., .o ~
""", 0).-",0)
"O)0)-oID -g E c"" 00
G>G>G>" .--'"~0)~~ +a;.G>
Q cE ",:6:'2 a: .o -~ 'O; O)~ ~

~~o~a~ Cl1;jcw~'t:~
G> ~
I .g~ ~o~E8 aJZwc.91

OI",~ C""c: 2~I :!2 Il ~ . ~ CM . ., .cC\l U,..Il ID '"'" .in "t: f- .t: .I: ~ o'~ G>c-",G>~G> .~ "t: "' g'
~.c:~~ ' ~"' Ino;~~ ~"C"8 -Q) Ot) "C:"t:~ c~O"' >.-., .,~~~ =~~o <C",t:fI) E"'"!; ~~~ c "~-;t:: Q)co,~:E LJi~~~ Z CN~:1~U ~ -"Q1..' ~"i <:1"C"C;J-Q)c >",Q)Q)a;c;"-Q) ~.DD";~O"C
C)aI rhc ~ J:~ ~0)()c~ '"' (!)-~-!;; :ro CI C'z -o c .~'2 E'i ~ :0~~(!) ~g~~i\:: ;>~:2?-~~ c 0) .iSVJ o ," c
.,:- (!)f~~~ffi ~~E~~ o.c ,ffi O) -o -g ~ ~ ~ ~ -o; a., "a5 E (J~~02-8~~N 1!J(1)0)"E~ Ccn aJ-5Il:"'~oz(;5~~O)f;J~"~gj.c:~ffiQ o Q) -'.0,".""",WI'--0(!)~~ 0:>
~ ~Q)-=--"O)
.CE.~!{! -.;;;Ee>
<n.-Q)0 ~-5!20(') (J fficn "' O)-~ ,

] ~~W~(!)-5 *,tUz}8 :{6 a ~ -;1; o",;;"E
c (!) -(!) tQ.C:~~ -
r,;j ... ~
-;g (I) c
,~
~~
-E .U) ~ :J"O-o C Cffi :J :E
.~i~~
.c"EffiC) -0a;.c;J .~C).16a;
a; -~.c .a; .Y. .\2
~~1h
-Q)~ Q)f;j~ z ~ ~1"-
o~UU)
~E~5ic 1n t al ~Q) ~ 2 "E
~~igj; ()()()'E:9 PAifX~ ~O'VO 66
~.-1'
~,Q
5:0.-0-0..Q
O-o-o-!D-!IJ-N
~~8~
t:t
8~"0~~..
.-o --oro~-05 -:QC') -m'j~c?J~~~8~'g ~ ~i-i~~R
N~A O
~-o.SQ t-;
i
.-06~ .SQ-!!!(!J""d5 ffi~Q)~C:Q) =~Q)(/)Q) .SQ O I. ~ m~ ~ -~~~-8-g U .;; .SQQ)
~..O.-~
-c:uoc:
o U offi ue! .SQ~N ~~-c.SQ-0 ~
c: :I~uQ)'8..C:C: ~~~"0~~ Q)c: "'~"'

-o~ci ~ Q) ~"0"O X .
.u 8 > ~
~
c:E
8 :Cu.~E"O ~55~E~ .--~ ~ a. -N"X<n .:@' z~ 0')t'Q)
.SQQ)
a,o
-g~ ffi~~-"0"'Q) .-~-~<n"O 5-.c c: ."iff" ~ ~ .x. mFo <n::JQ)c:Ou.!!1 "'o c O ~ a; .2 Q) "o ~ 5;. m.
,,;"'=a;Q)"0<n
i Q) c "' 'ffi <n Q)..!.' <n~55 ..::J~ -O "" '* ~~
O'
"'
Q)
0-0-0-5
8
-z
:
~ -f6
.SQ
Q) Q) U ~ >~ >--8 8 c: Q) .Q
! i~o ~!.i;---~ --~~ Q)

~
~
:5 (i\
Q)% .Od ~ Q
~c.
-<e'm @""d5.D.. 11!.SQ ~""d5",c ~ Q5 (!J U ~ ~ c: QS ro c.m Q) row -B~~ c:- ~c:-a;c:o.~:c o~8 .8-0 .~ -~.~o a 9 c: -0 [ S ~ i~ ~ -~ fij ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ :r; ~ ~ ~ :5 ~ -i ~ .o U ~ K
l
c:-"0 -~ O"c .~ *
i
ia;j~ 0 'fl~ c: K~~~~! -1j)
~o
~-gi -(/)c:
c: -Q)Q)(/)0-00 e.g!~.;~~i! .~t~~ff

g~ ~ "' Q)~ Q)~:'9~ ~~gg 8 Q)Q)c:-~","0"'~~t:.>c: "o ~:Q "'~">-<n ~.- 8.:E Q)-a;~ 8 ~~ gc:<n -g~ 0 .c 2. ~ .
-oro =1 ~Q ~
roc: y ~
ffi roC\J (/) ~E-8~
8 ~i<n 0 ~~~~~~0 ~~ c: t 2- .:- > "' ~.5 .~
OQ) ~ '~ ci~ c: c: C) E ~~~ 8 Q) E ",.g2ai -<noO)(!J O 6i~~/0e
d~~~ QtQt 'o'.

Q) ~ @' '5 U
c: -21
[~~~~~ t
::J ~.-'~ ffiE~.a~ O0F
U ffi -.a-
~:i~ t ~ ~
a. Q) 0 ~.~('1 ~:jo Q).-'... Q)Eo
.91Q) a. ~ ~ ~j 1j(/) .~a. .o,~ @ "Qj 05 0@ (Ij N 0"5 -(Ij -O (/)'t5 C
5 "-8 8..~ t
,~,
9 Kg K~g ~~~i t t t t
S U.-=U::! ~(I) U ,uUC: 0".9:.., ~::~~~ @ 0C: E "O5.~.~ ~~.ij;~0.ij;.~~,g'6
e~p~CI :a.Q(/j-oa.g,-
~8 8.~ t
Q)O
f ~j.~~ ~~i~~~.~~!il~li! o & ~55 g~ ~ "'~~ 8~;:f;.~~gd~ ~t t t t ct

.
~l~~~~~i g;:f;o~~-g8 ~ ~.~~ C~N O') ..

0'."'Q) Q)
0
8.-'i Q)(1)U :!2 a; B ~
~o Q) Eu c: mQ).-~Q) Em ~ ~Q) :5::! 0C: ..,Eo NU 0::!
m
Q) a.m ~~ g.!P. OQ) ~
s;. ~ ~~ ~~~ Q) ~ -O I R e
~
"'-Q) mc: = .-.~ ~~~ I ::!1=J(1)a.CD (l)E.~R~

.(Ij.(Ij"".0.-'(Ij(lj',Q) ~",Q U
L'~~ '
'
mc
Q) .m'
-g ~ "'@ :;"c
0 t')~
.-"0 8..E'E
E .CQ. .,(Ij~O()as0>= -0.~@ ., 2 -o~ ~ ~--'1IJ~ .~(Ij :a N ~8.~~.(/ji
ffi~&~:~;
.(Ij-o O> g> t= Q. E ~ (lj 0
Q)B
.5~
g;
~ 0 .-00 <D.l::ffi
E -.I::.911iS (I)(1)"Om U ::Ia.I::"5~.c:O~-U"' C:E<D.g..ijj ..I::E
Z.,-.~g> :c:m=
8
"O
"80~ -mF c:.-~c:OLU--.

= ~(ij:I;"OQ)~"0~~E.-~m C:~o .Q e? E.a 0 I "2
<D('1".-,e
Q)~. !5<D<D 8 ~OE ~.ijj

~~E
~.-=~$ ~Q)::!.-c:
~.~ ~.~ ~.~<DO o..,~~.a.~.Q1iSC:.?;
'6~ .0(1)
Q)
5. :Z;g.~
C.ij;~=";m@'
@Q)
m 5 9 .Cg('1 ~-0(1)~!;ja.<DO~~Q)C:~~
.E<D o;,. D;
~ 0.8
(1!~ ~ ~-
~ 2.8 ,,;.Q
(I) 0 ~U ~ ~ E -a; m .(Ij OmU -a. oU-U.E 0 U"O~ ~ ~ 0 ~
E -'~i'S8.~.= C)~~~0.'~F :g:oNU$ ~8 = 0 8~ .!2 ~ 8as-N(J).a; o~ ~ ffi al 0.-o.~~ S .EJ.~ffi.~~E'dj'.;~:E~~ i~CI!um.(/jN.1i5 ~ ~ ~~~ C '8'e1> 2i"'5 :~~-oe~ID-:E2i~~ >=~Q)g".~ O 0- a..~ 't5 0- 0 U .N ~ U E LU.E (/) 0- .!9.d z z a.~ 0>0 ~ 5 0>C/J @:!9 r-- ~ ~t t t t Qt Q~('i t') v
'X'-o 0> . (1) (1) 0> 0> 5;-0-.';.'; tb ~ 5; ~ C -"., "6 ..do = 5.c
0.!P. 8F~~<Dm(1)m I ~ ~ 5. gj.~ ""
o.,~'-.~C~ .2 -.,g:p C)-0~a)~~ W
C:E .(!J8. gc:~~.!2 aI8o~m
(!J~ 09: =c:
O>~ ~O> E 'dj'~.a;
.Q.~ B1Q 2E
F~c: ffi~" ~o~o;e
. (!J
ajS...::fSo.~~S .D- .9 .D- ...U g1' g1' coi "6

Q.'
~~~~.~~~~:U~'ffi c.D- 0 df=- D- Q) m E:J Q)E. "O c: l' 't' 't' -0 .2. 0)
C
<!io<!i5<!i~.QuQ-g ~ 0"0 O O" (Ij O O" N s;. t: GS;. .I:: 't' 't' 't' 't' 't'
,"" ,= O> '=1:) .:o: O> "'
~ '
.:.
w
o :}.
~ 0)
v O> {/) <O "'..C:O> E
~ a; ,..: ;? 0) 0) 0)1!J.c: .o; .? c ~ cO)u ",,{/)a; :'2 "5 .2 ~ a~ ~ we~ m.:0:g m-d ~~ c.,;:~~ .:o:C.:0:~ .'2-5
2 -2.2!:!Y"P.C: 0 .:e -o :I: "E 0 a;g>CUV-O c E E ..m'd5 c "'"(6 'd5'E g'-018' O) ~ 5;>~.E.' E E.~E~E'd51l.
(!J c,~ ~ a~~c -"'CC> -0>0."'.~ o."' "'~ 0>:221- ~","'
? 0) c c"" :'2~:2 ,,-{/) w ~ m m~ ~j~ 1:)"0;> -8-8-.g'm .g>"' -m .~ 8mEm ~ E .!!1

~O~
I')w. ...uE' O) {/) 0>c.0:.,., :'2~~.C:-o "~"c.QJ w O> ~ :s .c m~o~~ ~.~~~~ -go.> : .~1:) W~~ 12'{/)1Q-,-,.91 8~.c: 1:).c:~~ ~~{/) ~
g>:Ea5~5;~. .--"~~ ..-
"C
~
,= -O c O> "0; ~ " :)
u~ 1Y gs
Cc
1;) "" "' 1:)O>'=' "" O>.c: c 1:)W 1:)0> ., cE .&;1:) .,;: ~ ~ -~~ ~ ~ ~ "95 05 .8 ~ 0 ~C ~~Iffi~~~~ 0>2 "a5 O)ut: O'.~ '5 aJ m "(6 -~ ., ~
5 .8 . .E-" ffio O? .20> COO
-01:) .",. 0) :J. o O . "' ~5 .8~ ~ .c -fi8-1 "N 5; (!)

~~.. ~ .C--E .(1)
-Oc
2.N
~ (1)~.~mC -" (1) 0 ,-O .--0

(1) "' E "' "(6 "' ~-!)!~
0>1U al m .-~ 0>.'1;)-0 c.= .E., ~ "I?
gNO. -oE ,;..-;;;21.,; ~:E -@:s;, m ~~ .~ m"6 ~
8 C N
10 "'
~~'$'E1O~
-~ ",'d5~~-.'; -O
-!2' E2~
~ .","'> ffi.!5~m-fi:i.:2~~~~E'E!1!co~~ oE~ro-ooo> .coom-"
5.-.O; ., ~ 10 -0)1:) ~ -1:)~~~~~~~g~~~ .':r; w :;z;~ .'1;) > o>.g~
~d~'tJ...~-g~~*~"6$C~j~~ ~c-~ ~.~o ~.91 :>~ .~ .,
d~d~ c1'c1'
~~~E~~~~~j~~~E~d~2mgo~~E~8-~g .5t t t t Ot O..N
.'.. ~ "' ..m ~ .., .I:
N-~5
~
=' "' 8. o.~ .-.:J i ~~~

='.$ a E (') .a N "C 8 ~5=' ~ -5 -.E~ =' 8 o =' "'-S 8.0"~~ffi ~ c ~ B.:Q ., O"., =' ~.!!2 'i!T .Q E
..,"'" .::1".'.'0 ~U$!.0~~~N~ 5.'E,Q", -.,p:... Q)"'..'[(J-U"," ~>.5mo.5::1E~ B .E o m 5 - 8. x Q).0 o.E~"'.~ -.- E ~"' .o .I: ~-35.-:'Q)~.g~p8C!).~ U.0::1""'Q) ~
.o
~~.~~~'l~~~ ~~~~8~~ l' l' l' .ooi ~m~ ~gj~~.'

O?
-~~ "'..O"., ~.!!2 .Q E ~ Q)~$!.,~ e1", c ~ u ~(Q "'~ rn::1.Q"' "'~ ~ qJ~ Q) ~ -::1..~ ~~"rn U ffi
9 19!.fj~g~ ~iD'$~5~ l' l' l' l' t ~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~.,

.g.ro ~E .~ .. "',., ::I
E
..
g."C "'.$ "gj 5 ->-il5"

O .
Q)-~'", uQ)~.$!.c::1E~ ~ .--oU
".Q)
"' " o
""" .mI
Ez
~ o
8 ~0 uE~ .ro ~o ~.ro.~='~ ~OE -"C~ ~"'C ~ > ='", 9 I ='", ~ I ~~ Cco
~.~
~2:~.~~~.~.~~!~\m : ~ E~~ u~ a. g",
8 -~~~$!."& ~"'Q) w gj .~
.,.--"' -
~i~~~
~ ~ O' .o. -Q)"" Q)~ "
8~~0 ~coE "'Q)U..
.Q ~~
~~
~~
.,~
~g ~~ 5 o ..Q.1e(')
"' .iiiJ;"'
.c"~ .~;Bj~1 g~i ~- ~,g.~N.1e-;;;.!!2 u8~"C

.e!ffi.,~ii!=,5"C~gj 8 u ::!-.g). ~ .iii ~ 8 ~ .g). <{ ='~~ O" a.", "' ~ ~ c. (!JE.~rn.-rn.'"'~",=' a cg.iiiEg.iiiE"C -.Q gj .~ Q)~5::10~ "UJ"'.'Q)3 Q)$.-'"
:'Q) CC')~ (Q -Q) ~ ::I"2~ .m 9 o ~ .91." ." u f'-.., u ~16 -83~~

.'E ~ -" e$!.~ci ::I5@CJ .o."'.,.
Q)::1 ~offi
(\I
C3; o~
O (L O (L --(L =' .:J (L u gj~ 5 -~ -"' c 5 ffi "C ~ c. 0.5 u ~ (!J a e!(!J a.a ~~(!J --a "'~ --UJ c ~~.-.~.., .-<-cn
~ o 8. 'li!d 'li! t;j 8 .g.E-o<]) a.Q a. O) u ,., "C 3 m ~ a..~ -~~n1~~~"'~~ 8. .,~ o.E.m 8. 0 .' E O)~Eg'::1~"'.~~~~~;;:: ., =0"..,"2 U ..i!5UJ[(J~
='='t= ='~"'='=' " .-,,"C ~~3J ~ "' ~., ~~:r;~-~..-u-a;~-e!~ .., ..u.
-~
E~ .-~0..;;;-,,~ ~::1~E~.;:$!.
~~.~~~C ".-o. C..C'I C') ::IQ)O ~
='
Q1'Q1'
Nt
O 8. "' ~Q)
l'
~t
>
l'
6(/) t:~~Q)
o~:Jt: f;-~'5 t: .in
l'
Q) ~"" ~
l'
~ .~ .~6w
~ s
I
~(/)
t:
l'
~:J~ -"'()
l'
to ~ E
~~ .Qt:", .
0>0;
Wo
l'
:"i:tif'!;g~ :J~-~t; 'i~o,s~ ~ E o>", a.
-(J
l'
E~ c:~ 8ffi
0 ~..iO..g:~'s; E Cfb'$!.~'68~-m:!J'Q.-j' 0>0 .-uQ).05F=~Q)~Q),,::1~ O~.,E""E~-"UJm~~ciz::1"'~OOC5.,(jju,gj~ ~t t t t ct
.~a>
> O:Jto:(/)~:J ~ omOm~~
60.
C')~
~ ~
() ~
ta>uia;.~~t:
~~~~~~~ ~E~E~
~~~L ~-~..
.o:
'"'
'"'
~>-~
~ ~ --:?:o(/) 1::
(!}
o~ ~ -Q)
=
s. --(/)"'a>"""':J~~-t:",(/) m ~",~~~,," ~ ~ .ffi.-"'o () ~ z:JQ) Q) t::J~~c:i~~>~~~~.,Q~~~'0.~E :J O ~. t: -~- "O~
s.~~~~~~";;8.8~:~
~ -a. :J .o.~ 13"" Q)8. -o ~ ~ c:-
~ :J .~
.,
&~ .~ ~~~
-.,
.,
(/) s .c~.c~~:g-~ ~N8
;~;~E""g~
~ -.;=() O~
E ~ ~
~ca.,::.9a.Q)6m~~~~(/)~~
:)
.c: c:t13"t: E a ., .(/) 13~.~~C:.;g ~-gl1J (J 8.~~ ,s ~!I c: 'O u ffi ~ E .-Q).Q ~ C ~ ~ 2 = 8 ~ .~ Q)~ .~ 1 'O o (/).~t) .-~c: Y,QE
13 ., ~:ffi :Jw 5, .~.~E~ ~ 16 a w c: ~ ., ~ ~ ,s -~ .Q.., .,
Q) .~.= "Ot:.,:. m ~ -w~ "'~.~ c:i~c:i~.9~~.9~~N:)~8o.ffi CtCt t t t

o.. 8. ~~Q>~N!!:"OC:;S==.Qt= rrj~:J:O.ZQ)t:E~'ii"~~-g
~~~~.~i~~i~;~~ OC
~ .-o: . (/) .S2'.~",91.-~ "00;:: ..~.--.0:~.Q() .-~ 8 ~8:~8~il: ~~ gF ~ ~ t t t t t
= j9
v.
~i ;
9 @~j~ ~~.; ~ ..~~~
8.:ri"~ ~~.~ ~ .:g-i.g\8'

Q)~:J~6>.c:C:E;oY~I1)0~~~Q)
8.9
.A ~0;.",~-Q..c:
lI: a. $ Q)"C
;g~
~~.c:-g"t: "'.,
o t-
';B B ~gjg
-~"t:.~., ~
E o>~
E.O.5N ~ o
e .C:ai c:Z"t: ~.E 8. C::J ~ .0~

Cl. " d o o l1J "C c
~ .,'O 60;'S
:J(/) a: :J ..C') ..."" r--lI:
..5t
Ct
C...CIIC')
m~~ "8 O) :J ~
m~~ "8 -O)
~~~ ~ :j
~~~~ .c
-tn
~~
,~
~~
'2
~~ -tJ :J
~~
CD
$.6c:g'a5C: .a; ~.2JE.a,~ ~-~~~~ -:c~U) ~~

CD '5 -5 0):5
ffi"O ~ ~
~ -5
8 ~~ -E I ~~
--I ~-E ~E -O I
~ 11i-"' ~~ :
~ --;oCD ~ ~~ ,:J'5 ~ ~
~~ "8 ~ ~~~ gE"6 c:~~ ~ .~~ O'~ ~

~~ J.~o>s.C:~ o:"0~,,~:i~8J >c:.-N """, c: ~ O c:~.a; c:.Q ~ 5c: C:<I: -16 fj m
t ~ ~
.;;c:~ <I:~~ ~.s1ii

.'J
,..: ~
:J ~ tn z tn "8. ~d~~ ~ ~ a: :J -"'~~ :J~~ ~ ~ f'J :J()CD ~ ~~
:g tn~aJ
':?; ~~ tn.cg
~02~ 1A~:a
CC .i:.-~~~~~~~ -"' m ~
~"8 ~E~
~~5E
tn~ -o ~ I -OC')O)~ ffi ~ o m ~ -~-0~~CDC-~-0~ ~ () ~ o ci~~E

o ~~
CD ~~>~ ~ --rn-
~2 ~ ~ ~o
-~~
i
m
0) tntn -tn
"O
.5j -"5~
tiE
.C -~ 1-~ t ~CD ~~
-i~ 5-c ~~:r:; ~.'~-g.'"!;j e-~ g ~ g -a;-a; 8 .91-a; ~ "2 ~
0'0 ~.c
~ c -tJ-' "8 -9 ~%2.;':?;~-6.3"8

~
.g;P. iD ~ ~ ~ o, ~ ~ .Q*E.a!"8Cl)~." ~E.~ 0 ~!:J5"a\5J~ .Q~-= "NOJ,,~
~ .Q 5 Q)
~ fj ~ ~-;:Q)Q)
c: .tJ ~ ~2 .g ~ [[j "'.Q .c: ~ ~.2"" g>E~ ~~~ ~ ~'6~ ~~:)~.~ = ~ ffi ~.~~.~~C9 E:@~ g~(/)C9 ~:E~ .v.Q ., ~E1I! ~EB.E o> :c: "'11!~ ~
~E 5 tII -O
c: ~ .91E '~~ u,
E"' 9 -5~." C/)~~ O~
. ~ * :(') ~ffi ~ -i , c: ~ CO~ "C.- .c:"~~w ~ w ~E t ~~~.~~~ ~~~ t t ~8~d~2 t ct ~~0~~~~~~~8 Q~C'i (') ~
:~~tngj~02~iCD5a:tn~~CD-~E
'~'::)02~..\Y.;-~~~5~ ~~~.2 m "' ~ ~ c.c c ~ ., ~ ~ tn CD ~ C ~ -g .,:J~~ .,:J~ -c;~':J -()CD':J-o c:~I,9 ~

d~d~N~O~vtn-~O C1'C1' l' l' l'
l'
l'
l'
l'
l'
CO-o -co
o co ..c Q) O~ ...0C-c: Eco o"ii) UQ) ca ~ = Q) ~ "'Qj "O .2 o ... = o u
O> O) ~ ~ ~ .E!. a. o O> e ... c o u
'Q) :Qj .c u = ca 'Q)
(O)
... Q) :;: .~ 'Q) >
(/) Q) (/) (/) Q) c .t: O) i=
c Q) :~ ... o. ... 'Qj .c ... .c u o
.19 4) -0 .g '0 ~.~ ~ e.!;~ 0.0..m~

caC -'0 ~I; E.:Q
~ ~ [,j
ca~ -'w (/)~ ~<C.) ~~ .0 "ffi
.[,j ~ C
ca...
e 0.2 c g.m .
ca(/)g ,-4) "QjC'ffi -oC"O

4).- .-w C -0 O .-4) c .Q (I) W <1) a; 'o, "O C=,='o)0)"' =' (1) E 8>0:J 2?; , , "O , NC~ -,caO.m O(/) C)(/)
4)4).Q a:...~o
I ..~ ~ .E ffi
8 2?;"0
~ @; o. 2 O) ".9 c 2 "-6 O"" (/) g> ~ O) 2 :Q i "00 c O) :Q 5-
E~E "'c O)= "O"8~ 8~ -;;; > ~ ~
8
1;; 05 --O) '5 O) - -Q ~ o
~ (\II vr-..-
o. ~ ~
c:d.c 0.""Qj.c (1)8J~: 0)0) 0)'d5 ",=' O)gj", 0.(1) .CO)0)(1)-C(1)C~o 0) 1iJ-~ ~ 111 2?; 0) c= 0.
~
.Q E I I
I
vO Ov
~CQ. ~, "C --O) ~,--~ ~Q)~ (0

,0c:->0)0) -
"' .~.9? 00. 0m C

"""0 0-0
~c.8O) N W N m
c-a> :oO)c ~-iij ~ ='
(/)"O (/)c'0-(/) ~ ~
~:o
-~
ffi'.9? ,Q ~
-~
d!
$. ~
--"'iU o~ 5=om O)~ --="
J::r!~ (,)Q)(I... -Q
O Om
c.C c o "1O~ c:=~O.c:C & -8> I!= "O --- E --c
c~=m
C"' .CC",=,C 00 ~!!! 0) & ffi'
c: Q) .Q 'O ~ c S? o ~ .Ui ~P:. ~ c ~

~ ~ ~ -o '"" "' .c () rn
~ E E
8 Q) "O ~ c ~ ~cJ:: --o o :.o (/) !Eo~-8 o.N 0.0
o (\I "5 E
"' :;l E 6d V Lt)"'3" (Y)-.tU)-.t 60~uj(\1 .-Lt)(\J

I
l') I
U)cc o Q) Q
$ c. m .-~
CU,fj~ -~ ,Q)E~ ~E"<i5 ~8~

~Q)55 Q)c~
~ -o 0) c :o: E .~ (/} ~ Q) ~
.
:E o ~ 9 '6 (\I N ~ "O .~ ()

~ .o
I I I
00
'ot
8 @-~2~8 RI. ~ COLt) 00 O(\JCX) OOO(\1ro I
~ -
.c .s
~ O> 9 ~ ~ ~ ~ O> :5 o * lt) ':ti O> 0) c ~ 0) c .S2 Q.~.S2 Q) o "(6 Q) "O Q) "O "O * "O * * L{) ~ L{) L{) ~ :> ~ ~ -H* -H -H Q) Q)<11 Q) ~ ~"E ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .E .<O' "' '.ffi~.-"'Q)""ia Q) C) I:C"O""ia"OO "O= C) C) 00 C(I) Q)C),Q> Q.(/) C) C) ~ '-.c ~ c .O; ~ =' .! .~! Q) c. ~~
E 9
t ~ c ~ (/) E 9 * "' ':ji !O 00 (l)1~

~U)U) ~U) I
8 CU)
O> ::J
Q) "O ""ia <II .Q "O E
, ~ <II o "'Gi
<II .~ ~
O ~ ~U)01 @. I
I I I
8
I 00 I I !
08 t')..-
.ce "'05 ...~.c~ o)u):;;c. C cn "':=Q) c~ U) ...c.~ ~ ~ .c ~
I
-.1-.t0U)0 6
6~(\1~~~c.;j1
.=. ~ . ~ 'O v,o "' <.5 ~
-5 ! ~ iD
~ j!: * @> !a~ a.:-.f;.c>O~~~ ~.!!J. ~
:J:J:J:Jzzzz
:JI ail <01 ~I
aJaJIB~II~* QQU)C5QQU)C5 ..-U)..-U)..-U)..-U)
ffi .o E
88888888
Il
j c "j~
~~ >.I: cf~ :;) ~ 2 ,? [ E
~ ~ c ~ O)
~, 1 ~
..
1 g> ffi ., ~ ~ g ~ I
u .->"O." c I" m O> ,.s... ..: <ncJ:: .-.'u ffi E.~,\9 Q. <n .'u
o N ()( () ~0 "' .g 1 1 <l > m O O~ ~ ~

"'Q)"'O" ",~"0'"(5:Q -.E2(/)(/) ~.U -~! -a;bO ,,"'(/) o-a5 U
~ 8~ u
<D
<D
'u~"'
(/)
~O IIII e-e-
0000 (/)(/)
~O IIII e-e-
(/)(/)
";~E~...C'),, ~>"'U;
8",g.D-..' Q)"Uf/f~ (/):0"'~" >--
8 N-80 e -U >-.
o .~..J-a; U ."
(rl--
uu
(rl--
uu
.OA:O","
,-",Q)uro",(/)
"'
OoD-t:
..<
O"C.-.~t5
Q)
Q)
"C -,k
.v 9 CS g55 0 (/) 5"0"<i:(/)""(/)oc>-(/) U",:0-C').-
>
>'?~
8~~~ 1 > 1
a.~"0.U.
~ -9 .J.llII~NIlIINII:;!~0,,"R:oo:or3Q) .v oN--ci~--~-U :o A Q) C.O..J "'-"O
~Tffi~~-Q~
~ ~ ~r
(,)Qt
Qt
..
.'<1:t1~13 C:
c:
"01=.-
OO
~O
"'U)
.w-"C.,ffi-U)
c:o.'ffi-
8.
::!c:~
l?-1\Q5
.C"8c.
<O. ~O 1111 9-9U)U) 00
<O. ~O IIII 9-9"'U) 0
"'.'"0-oC:.'.'="' c:::!a-g ~~17Jc.().~.-.'9-8 ~5 -8c.~wffi E()Ql?-"'~U)E::! E ~C:O
.-
~:8 ~
>"i'1
~I~
s .c
\l) Ij)OO N-N--S!IOO~IOO1=N
8>
.'.9.
~ .;-1;)
"'
C"", U) -U) U)
() m",c:~C?~ .t=oc.
"O
m~~~~d~~~~~~I\.Q~~~~.!9:~ (.)ct ct t t ~
~ rJ: I
!II ~ uu
c ..-t-t t -t ".'UO> :> "' ~"E E-~.Q ..,.'~co,= ., 8' t') ... ,.:cj IIII
I
<D <D ,.:cj Il Il ffi~
g *' 5~ ~
2:~:a~'C
.2 -S-~ mc
e-e~ ~ uu cp. CCO&')C."O .8 ., ~ 8-0 c O ~ ., ~ m
e-e-
-.,~ ascJ::~E
~<n.'
;"E8.Q0>8"O
~8'-cco >&CII.'
~ .'
I I
L
C? ""~U)=Q)Q) U)E.gJ -=U
l
U)U)
t'i -
I I I I I I I I
~
m 8;--8t--~-t > I\ ~, o ~
I I I I I I I I
:
>
~ m 'Eu~&') VIlII~C\lIlIIC\lII~fficj[ "~al
:;!..'?;}; fiS8o C)'cjcj
:;!..'?1~18v&-E'ffiE~~2m fiS55(X)5-8~-t~"@",~8'~0> C)'cjcj'.cj ~~ W
o.'Q\C t 0>.'1
~
Ecc Q)oQ)
tD
tD
~O " " 9-98 U

U)U)
~O " " 9-98 U
:;Q53~f3~ ~uU)U)"",.!!2 :JC~C-:J:J :JOUJ~c. U) 'o ~ .E~Q)~~~ 5 > .c:2E:J -c

U)
~'~~ ~~ Q) C. ~ .."' .,--~ N~5J5.

05Q)C')"'
.
.-
U)
.;t
1;;"'
..'.Q""' "Ou:J
C')~Q)Q) "..."O
..,--
10
... ---'"
& ;;;~:I -lt)00
,.. -1000100 "'-"'--
i.
-.Q\AU1;;CO (!) C"' Q\O

;;;~J:~J:<!!.~:{!t,~ oO~ lt)oo
--~"'c.U)~U", OQ)Q) -E
U)OU)Q) .U E "Q:5
~
~
.. ..
/
/
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J
l~
o -
,l
.c 'm
I , I I I
.;t"" o"'--ci~--~
r
ct
vQ)"'. i~~E-5 OU)

U)c. U
Q) "O
."'",,"',,;;COOQ).5:J:1!c:1!!Q I :J
c.U)-'
Q)-'
(.)ct
t
"'cg> "'..85.6C:U -g~1O ;2;,CJ) .cGa , ~",:2~a5~ (I) 0.C.c~ ~~~~~
I..
j
.'D. ~O IIII
9-9-
.'D. ~O IIII
9-9-
:J "' (l)8E P. .~ ~~a5 3!1!.c

8. ~ .c,.~ ~U .0~~ 3 .
-'
I I I I I I I I I I I
(I)
.'(I)
~>-(I)
.-C'iCJ)oe
..8
()--() ~ >'?::i:
00 ..uu ...8<cj >'?I>~o
.=::.!!J1O-o.~u:J ,n'.."'1;j-"s~c '-(C\lu~~"'C')Q) cg'10~C') I\< 8 ~-g 8.i:.~
~ -oa. ffi
CJ)
~ c :5 S:01'
2~q C\loo
2qqoo~ ~oO1o~~d-E o~.!!..!!.d~.!!..!!.~.!!.~ 01'
"' ~~~~9 I\ l, t
.Cc ~~B~~ ol8.~~:g l'
rn
. ...
.~E~W~~ a5~ o>g ~,,:F. 'a5~'ffi (/)1;)m E " c .1:,,-5

~ ,O = m (0 (0 .-.0>..-0> 0 o> -o mO>"' .o
..:o IIII 9-98 "'
..:o IIII 9-9-
".~~~.1: -e .00"0.1:W~"8~~-5~ (!)Q5"Offim",,
."
0 2~
C
O) .:c CU '~ '0)0 >Qt
0 o
..
"'
8
.. <
.>m 8v-5ffi
.-
o> o '6~C')E",
~ SJ-c!"":S~~C') . :;;'?:i :;;'?1:!!1~g'0>:~~l,~~-5 ~8cs ~55(X)5 :J<-5~ 8 g'.0;... 2 N--N--V-"S "'0>,,:J~"'O 1000100 ,OWm~"OO> 1;) "'O>F N Il Il : N Il Il N Il > o.O~ V g? 5.0; ~ .o; ~ o;
--0~--~->(/)",-,~,,-,,-,.oJ9"O Qt t t
"'0>:J
.1:
.!9 0) "O o: -o o al mal -() . .~~ aI-0) ~: O)~ 0:8~ "'E .0) oro
4IE "O o~ ~.2 ~-8 (/)o .,c c c 00.2 w.21'

c", :JC
o > ...c., c :Jc 4I.,:J .--oB
~ -o '~ ~ro ~~
~~ ~
d ~ .o. ,~ ~ -0 O> c o .00 :J '00 ~~ .2 ~

:Jc .2 o ...~
.-E "tJ-,m~o .v O> C CU ~ .o; 0 C (J O 6=~ ~ .-{) 9 "' .-N c,", ...~ .-00
Q)~U){ :>o-t
~ U)c: Q) ~2 -
$ .~ ~
I 'E' ~ c
"[ {l) O) "- 'ffi (jj E. S Q) .-Q) ~ L&.t
c o "(ij c 2 I!!
g.m Q).e~ cC. o~ {)-"' Cc $:$ ...U)O> UI .-I:
~~
]1
~:;
:; ('), T= c + -
~ E "' c c
"
o .o: c o ~
J I~
~ "' E ~ '55 ~
~ (\I ;b \SI ~ ~ If'
...0-0 C cf6 Q).,QE E ",E Q)-0 C ~ Q) C .~t; "Co In"'
(O
0> :E E ,g ~:;f:. -o. "'o. 6;'~ o>ffi :E~ -8. ~"f3 -c -~~ O-.'
~ "' J; ~ ~ ~
"'-o; m... " (/)" CC (/)C=,f6 w.2t
-"' ~ " c .Q 0 c ~ ,,2 "' Q) .c-0 " W
1
~
Et;j S ~ ~ ~"' g~ ~;>o u.t
~!
+ s~ ,",Q ...01
zl
z
,), o: o
55 ~ ~ "aJ ~ O> c " c ~ <n ~ "' ~
~ o: " "o>:e. .~ co o>,
(/)
E .!!1.G) 55ro E C -a.~ o-o> .-o. o> ~ C ~o: ,,~
~NO. u.t
(J) "O
, .~ ~ Q.E ~~ (J)E "O, -"' ~E c :1; 'OuE .E"' ~(J)"O G)~~ "O",E ...a.(J) c81'
(J).c"O o .-,
.,
~ a: e E 8 .. 'C
S 'C '" '" "5 o.
(1) o .-= O (1) Q) U U
c 'o '0 ,g, ;;: ., 'O -
.2 ~ i ., 10 " <
~c?;
~.~
"'.cE
o ".: .5> o O) (/) ~ (/) .~ Q) CJ '5 CJ .. <rJJ

=~o C)-<n G)C<n . Q)E C .w '5 o "["O ~ e 0~ =8e!"' o () = '6a,.-~ ...a.'5E c81'
o :J ."O c"O G)o-.!, E= ~
o c ~ ti Q) Q) B '10 o o. Q) I!:
< a:
..
~-5 (J)~ ~
ffiQ) >ffi
~ ~."ffi~
t: ~ o .r. Q) .o Q)
.. ~ O) g' "E
i~.~ 8.w~ c.r:ro '6~E c 0.:e:$'.~ ~1'
C 0
~~
0) :E -o; ti ; > c ! '5 al
ct Q: "' ~ o ~ ~
..
.~ Q. (J) C :J . 'o.~
(/)
~ .-o o (/) (/) (1) C.) C.) "' ~ ;;: O) -0 "
c~Q. 8.!Y"* G) ~ C "O:J(J) 0~a."O ~1' , E :J E .1; ., EQ.
e! (J):J .r:<n -<n
c
"
C~~ .2~.~ )(=E G)~ C"-
5 .~ ,~ ~ CI a: 'ffi "' "' 4) ~ -4) U E CI E CI ti ~ ~
1'--
e! Q)Q. w
G)o.."'.~ C)c Co :PE:J () .~
~~~ c~E o u1'
c ., E 10 ~ :o '" ... E ., ~ w
>0) ~
1n $ o o:
..
~-
.E~ .E 00 "' ~~ .~ c wiD "'
.o ." ..c Q) .Q ~ Na3
..."'
.., ~
c "' "' ~ "a;
a5 .C1e D~E
~ ~.;2 C)(!)ro c.DE " ~,:) "C c. -0 (!)00 c~=(!) .-" "'.:.: -eNEu ~t
O) c .2 -o; ti ~ c 4) '"' ~ <
o:( o: ., ti .. ;: ,~ O:
..
.,
"'
'8g E-5
~g~~~
In Q) ~ :E .~ ""(O .;( 'O
..!!O)
...~ E o c ...ffi O", .Qffi ~Q. &O "C -cn o ~1' u c '6 "' ti a
c 'o 'u !O ,~ "CU 'c O) "'
~~ ---5 ~e "'o. c
0-.0:"'
ro"'C."'~ c:",!J}.."" .Q ::Jc: "' ;g U 0"-0 ~ '5c:.o-5 "'-0~-", .,.o ~ "' E ~m.-c:O ~i~!~
&S~ ffi--
"' ~
."
O) -0
E ~ E '!O ... ~-8 ~2

.~ ., "' E ., -" o ,g .~ u o@ .~ -tiJ oo=t5~
.-"' 8 N .c:u ~ .c u c: !l1
~. "'~"' O>~
~~.g~~ . .0 ~ 8. ~ o. -"' @ 1!! (l)j F'~ ",::J~.ca;.c "2g00!J}.~ ::J(1)U"",,!l} [L!J}..91"0"OU

:J ~(/)"ffi .
, "'
tU E o c tU :E () () 0) ffi o. o. tU
O> .o: o
:o 'O; "'ro 4)1:= ;:ro :oa; ~Q. ..o '60 ..(I) ~1'
~~'5id
P. $. '5 0 E -91 00
E$a; .~ ~
~ o. tU c 'o. (/) ~:g, cnE a;~ffiEc.? D-",-0) -c c ~"' -"O .e. ~.e $g
.E aJ>",o~ ~Q)...'ca; Q)." Q)-"' I .,,= .,,'2 c ~ d>. c 5 .r: ~ -C :) (!) m8 ~ .1; ~~0'5C .1;.!!1 g> :g> ~ c;,~ a..N~
~1:1B~ .c: ~ .~ C..c .-8:.~-g,e .g, ) ~ o ~ "'ro:.J-E "';: .,
,=C: c::) t.r:u g'...' .r: ' 2

.OQ).-0.:i -u
E ~u ",.2 c o= GI~ C). o~::2 ~ ~a.E...,Q
~
.@Q)~a5
C-c;; '"
~"' 00 -C
o'" 5 =8. ;e~ ~E -O) .." Q)cr 'C 0c ~" ~1'
-e "' "O c "' in
~~ =0 "O -0 :a;
E~ ~""' c ","' ~"' ",5 ~gj ~
5 ., t) ., c c o (J ., "(3 o 00
" aJ!j
",-E-S ".0:~ S~o.
~uO.Q.a 1nl9.iJ!.~ m --0:'O 2 ~u-.21n!i,.E O)-.,0)~u ~~C$~E g ~ ~~.$21 :J1O~ ~.g>~~~d

~~ E c .9--
:g~~ Q)iQ)Q; -m.C"O .O--oQ "'C)c:~
o. " -o. ~ -o. " o " -0 ~ -0 c " ~
-"' .o: g'~ ",=gj :E'88'
~~~"
00
"'1='~E .~ 'ffi~ ~-5~ .
:2:t:
..c :!16 4) ~ .c.Q ~1'
~EQ. al o ~ro", ~-~j ~M~
~~:g~8
~ < m
Q~,6~"':j:"':j: ~"',..0,.. d&Di7IDi!LL~~ .~o~
c p. ro ~ .x " 41 t) 41 ,'; ~ O) E o z
, -as -;'
.:.: ,~ ~ ~ .~ c: l\J 8 00 ..-"'1'-
.!- ~ -" .Q1.il Q) ~ -g ~ ~ ,~ ~z@~~ i ~~ ; ~ .g>Q)"8 o .-"'"O a
!
., c. E E.. c 0> in
c:"0(!)
"'...
c:ffi
1:3 .c~ u~ ~~ ,"::J :Ez ,}!1'
c O) ~ '5
~~~ c:.c:~ Q)ui5

"O(/)oQ c:S~
"?'\'
~ ~~
C\jC\j
'1ng.~~ ,:5:):)-~
ooN-c:
,"Q)~-' "'.E ~
:) g).C: ~~~ :.:D fA"!;i~~
cU)i.-.c: ::J:2~.Q1
Q)~ ~ o P> >U)E ~2 :.:'8'8 a;;c:c:2 cg> ~ .'a5~~~~ ~3~J:~~ $:!J~~~
~~C~~~~"" uC\l8~-,Q.Q.
E.cCX)~~o>o>
-.,,>-(!)
in1' ~~
E o u
~")c~.." ~ uoo:~ . ~ -o m ---5 O) O) c 8 '2

In .'.c:-In.o \l~ ~~:J ~ > -> ., ..- .o O) u m .2 .e
o. ln.'In o 0)-0
FQ)i!;cj
~~
" (/) ro
~(!) E
8! ,g ~ .~
Q;:.~(5~
-U '2 ~
o 1'OME 'E:~~8~
Q)C\lC\II "W ~$$ ~ ~,..,.. e
.g>-
.m
t ~ ~ ., 10 "E '" '" "O c '" Vi

O) "o: E cu "Gj
--" -N
~~ -c;,u
-S'"O >e p. o. O"' ",N -E .o:
-c"' .-.,
., o:
(!)
00
05(!)
fA
Viscosity: 6mm2 sek-1 ati 20C n = 1400 min-1 Discharge l/h hp internal Series VBR Size VBR P VBR M VBR G VBR F 45 80 120 160 30 60 100 140 20 50 80 120 011/0011 011/0012 011/0013 011/0014 90 n = 2800 min-1 Discharge l/h Maxi. Per. Pump Net RPM Weight (min -1) (kg) at I/D
3/ " 8 3/ " 8 3/ " 8 3/ " 8
at 9 bar
at 30 bar
at 40 bar
Article No. I
at 9 bar
at at Article No. Gear 30 40 Rotor I bar bar Size Shaft 60 50 013/0011 25 25 25 25 12 12 12 12 -
at I/D 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5
2800 2800 2800 2800
160 130 120 013/0012 240 200 190 013/0013 320 270 260 013/0014
VBGR PP VBGR PZ VBGR P VBGR M VBGR GZ VBGR G
150 200 300 450 600
100 160 240 390 540
80 140 200 360 480
011/0065 011/0062 011/0025 011/0026 011/0027
300 240 210 013/0040 400 310 280 013/0041 600 520 480 013/0023 900 800 730 013/0024 1100 930 870 013/0042 -
38 38 38 38 38 38
12 12 12 12 12 12
1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2
2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 1680
3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3
Discharge l/h hp internal Series VBR Size VBR P VBR M VBR G VBR F 45 80 120 160 30 60 100 140 20 50 80 120 012/0011 012/0012 012/0013 011/0014 90
Discharge l/h
at 9 bar
at 30 bar
at 40 bar
Article No. D
at 9 bar
at at Article No. Gear 30 40 Rotor D bar bar Size Shaft 60 50 014/0011 25 25 25 25 12 12 12 12

3/ " 8 3/ " 8 3/ " 8 3/ " 8
in watt at 220 V, 50 HZ at I/D 100 100 100 100
Initial Pump Breakaway Torque at I/D 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
160 130 120 014/0012 240 200 190 014/0013 320 270 260 014/0014
VBGR PP VBGR PZ VBGR P VBGR M VBGR GZ VBGR G
150 200 300 450 600
100 160 240 390 540
80 140 200 360 480
012/0065 012/0062 012/0025 012/0026 012/0027
300 240 210 014/0040 400 310 280 014/0041 600 520 480 014/0023 900 800 730 014/0024 1100 930 870 014/0042 -
38 38 38 38 38 38
12 12 12 12 12 12
1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2 1/ " 2
100 100 100 100 100 100
1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
VBHR P VBHR M VBHR G
1000 700
600
012/0037
56 56 56
18 18 18
3/ " 4 3/ " 4 3/ " 4
160 160 160
3,2 3,2 3,2
1500 1200 1000 012/0038 2000 1700 1400 012/0039
VBHGR P
3000 2200 2000 012/0049
75 75 75 75
22 22 22 22
1" 1) 1" 1) 1" 1) 1" 1)
1/ " 4 1/ " 4 1/ " 4 1/ " 4
280 280 280 280
4,6 4,6 4,6 4,6
VBHGR PZ 3700 3000 2700 012/0090 VBHGR M 4500 3600 3200 012/0050 VBHGR G 6000 4800 012/0051
*To insure proper pump functioning, all pipe connections must be sized as per the principles of fluid technology using the phase quantity and in accordance with the given conditions at the installation site! The size of the pump and/or device connections is not indicative of the size of the pipe connection which must be used.
FLOW METER
Model VL, VD, VE
Model V variable area flow meter is intended for reliable measuring and monitoring of liguid and gas flows.
FEATURES Sturdy construction Impact resistant flow tube Models VD and VE with flow adjustment valve and quick change tube Large selection of materials Flow alarm readiness
Model VD
Model VL
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Lubrication oil measurement Sealing and cooling water measurement Flush water applications Gas flow measurements
OPTIONS
Model VE

Model VL with constant flow regulator model 2914
Scale for alternative liquids and gases Low and/or high flow alarm Back light Constant flow regulator Viton or EPDM seals PES flow tube Model VE in multi-tube versions
Model VE6A
Technical data VL Model Weight End blocks Side plates Max. pressure Max. temperature Flow tube Connections Float Seals Accuracy
*) Special construction on request
VLA VLH VLK 0,75 kg 2,00 kg 0,95 kg Aluminium AISI 316 Nylon AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 30 bar 30 bar 20 bar 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) Grilamid (PA-12) (*PES) BSP 1/2" or NPT 1/2" AISI 329 or AISI 329/PTFE (depending on range) Nitrile (*Viton, EPDM) 5% F.S. (H2O, +20 C)
VL
VL
Special feature
D N V W X Alarm readiness NPT connections PES flowtube PES flowtube, Viton -seals Viton -seals
Scale
A R H2O (l/min) Air (Nl/min) Flow range
38
BSP 1/2
at +20C at +20C / 101,3 kPa
H2O 6H 3H 3K 3L 3M 4D 4E 4F
0,4 - 2 l/min 0,75 - 3,25 l/min 1,5 - 5,5 l/min 2 - 9 l/min 3 - 10 l/min 3 - 17 l/min 4 - 22 l/min 5 - 30 l/min
Air
134 202 BSP 1/2 51.5
15 - 75 Nl/min 30 - 130 Nl/min 40 - 180 Nl/min 60 - 280 Nl/min

4xM6-10
100 - 500 Nl/min 100 - 650 Nl/min 150 - 900 Nl/min

53
End block material

A H K Aluminium AISI 316 Nylon
MANUFACTURER
KYTOLA OY Olli Kytolan tie 1 P.O. Box 5 FI-40951 MUURAME FINLAND Phone +358 14 339 0600 Fax +358 14 631 419 E-mail sales@kytola.com www.kytola.com
LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
34
75 - 325 Nl/min
Technical data VD Model Weight End blocks Side plates Max. pressure Max. temperature Valve housing Valve spindle Flowtube Connections Float Seals Accuracy
VDA VDH VDK 0,75 kg 2,00 kg 0,95 kg Aluminium AISI 316 Nylon AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 30 bar 30 bar 20 bar 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) Aluminium AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 Grilamid (PA-12) (*PES) BSP 1/2" or NPT 1/2" AISI 329 or AISI 329/PTFE (depending on range) Nitrile (*Viton, EPDM) 5% F.S. (H2O, +20 C)
VD
VD
Special feature
53 51.5
Scale
A R H2O (l/min) Air (Nl/min) Flow range H2O 6H 3H 3K 3L 3M 4D 4E 4F
0,4 - 2 l/min 0,75 - 3 l/min 1,5 - 5 l/min 2 - 9 l/min 2 - 10 l/min 3 - 16 l/min 4 - 22 l/min 5 - 32,5 l/min
at +20C
34
at +20C / 101,3 kPa
Air
134
BSP 1/2
20
15 - 75 Nl/min 30 - 130 Nl/min 40 - 180 Nl/min 80 - 280 Nl/min 75 - 325 Nl/min
202
38
35
100 - 650 Nl/min 100 - 1100 Nl/min -
2xM6 4xM6-10 max. 90
22.5
End block material

MANUFACTURER
BSP 1/2
162
218
Technical data VE Model Weight End blocks Side plates Max. pressure Max. temperature Valve housing Valve spindle Flowtube Connections Float Seals Accuracy
VEA VEH VEK 0,75 kg 2,00 kg 0,95 kg Aluminium AISI 316 Nylon AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 30 bar 30 bar 20 bar 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) 80 C (*120 C) Aluminium AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 Grilamid (PA-12) (*PES) BSP 1/2" or NPT 1/2" AISI 329 or AISI 329/PTFE (depending on range) Nitrile (*Viton, EPDM) 5% F.S. (H2O, +20 C)
VE
VE
Special feature
Scale
34 20 BSP 1/2
A R
H2O (l/min) Air (Nl/min) Flow range
at +20C at +20C / 101,3 kPa
134
202
6H 3H 3K 3L 3M 4D 4E 4F
0,4 - 2 l/min 0,75 - 3 l/min 1,5 - 5 l/min 2 - 9 l/min 2 - 10 l/min 3 - 16 l/min 4 - 20 l/min 5 - 30 l/min
15 - 70 Nl/min
BSP 1/2
30 - 130 Nl/min 40 - 170 Nl/min 60 - 260 Nl/min 75 - 300 Nl/min 100 - 450 Nl/min 100 - 650 Nl/min 150 - 700 Nl/min
4xM6-10
38
53
51.5
End block material

MANUFACTURER
162
H2O
Air
max. 246
ELETTROVALVOLE A 3/2 VIE 3/2 WAYS SOLENOID VALVES
VALVOLE CORPO DI OTTONE AD AZIONE DIRETTA DIRECT ACTING VALVES WITH BRASS BODY
TIPO - TYPE
Caratteristiche Features Diametro / Orifice mm. bar Attacchi / Connections G
B397
tipo miniatura. miniature type 1.0 ... 3.0 1/8 0
D363
tipo standard standard type 1.5 ... 6.0 1/8 ... 1/4 0
B900
montaggio modulare for manifolding 1.5 1/8 (manifold) 0
B300
valvole per pilotaggi pilot valves 1.5 ... 2.0 1/8... 1/4 0 10 10 -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +90 C 10 VA 7W
p ammissibile min p admissible max
bar AC 2 ... 18 2 ... 25 10 bar DC 2 ... 18 0.75 ... 16.5 10 in funzione dei diametri / depending on diameters -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +130 C -10 ... +120 C 10 VA 7W -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +130 C -10 ... +120 C -10 ... +180 C 18 VA 14 W -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +130 C 10 VA 7W
Temperatura ambiente C Ambient temperature C Temperatura fluido Fluid temperature Potenza bobina Coil consumption Opzioni / Options
FKM EPDM RUB AC DC
comando manuale - manual override funzione normalmente aperta /universale - normally open / universal function
D301
VALVOLE CORPO INOX AD AZIONE DIRETTA DIRECT ACTING VALVES WITH ST. STEEL BODY
ELETTROVALVOLA 3/2 VIE FLANGIA 32x32 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE FLANGE 32x32
TIPO - TYPE
Diametro / Orifice mm. bar Attacchi / Connections G
B398
1.2 ... 2.5 1/8 0
D399
1.5 ... 5.5 1/8 ... 1/4 0
D330
ELETTROVALVOLA PER FUNZIONE VUOTO / ROMPIVUOTO SOLENOID VALVE FOR VACUUM / VACUUM BREAKER FUNCTION
p ammissibile min p admissible max
bar AC 3 ... 15 5 ... 15 bar DC 3 ... 15 5 ... 15 in funzione dei diametri / depending on diameters -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +130 C -10 ... +120 C 10 VA 7W -10 ... +50 C -10 ... +130 C -10 ... +120 C 18 VA 14 W
Temperatura ambiente C Ambient temperature C Temperatura fluido Fluid temperature Potenza bobina Coil consumption Opzioni / Options
FKM EPDM AC DC
anello di sfasamento di Ag - silver shading ring funzione normalmente aperta /universale normally open / universal function
SOLENOID VALVE 2/2 - NC (Normally closed) Pilot operated hung diaphragm G3/8 1
L133
D G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1
a 60 66 79 105
b 72 74,5 81 100
c 83 90 98 121
e 32 42 42 48,6
f 41 41 51 71
m 27 28 28 35
n 16 21 21 24,3
s 22 27 33 42
g 25,5 46
f GENERAL FEATURES Pilot operated hung diaphragm valve with full orifice. Designed for closed circuit hydraulic systems and for vessels draining. Suitable to shut off liquid and gaseous fluids (verify the compatibility of fluid with materials in contact). Not suitable for use with dangerous fluids listed in Group 1, therefore they are free from CE marking in conformity with article 3 3 of the European Directive 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment Directive). f TECHNICAL FEATURES Maximum allowable pressure (PS) Opening time Closing time Fluid temperature Max viscosity
f MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH FLUID Body Brass Sealing NBR or FPM Internal components Stainless steel and brass Seat Brass Core tube Stainless steel Shading coil Copper f COIL Continuous duty Coil impregnation Encapsulation material Insulation class Ambient temperature Electric connenctions Protection degree Voltages DC AC
16 bar from 100ms to 150ms from 100ms to 400ms -10C +90C (NBR) 0C +130C (FPM) 5E (37 cStokes or mm2/s)
ED 100% Polyester resin PTB (polybutylene-terephtalate) fiberglass reinforced F (140 C) on request class H (165C) - UL -10 C +60 C DIN 46340- 3 poles connectors (DIN 43650) IP 65 (EN 60529) with plug connector 12-24V (+10% -5%) 24V/50Hz - 110V/50Hz (120V/60Hz) - 230V/50Hz (+10% -15%)
(Other voltages and frequencies on request).
Differential pressure (bar) Port size ISO 228 Orifice size (mm) p max p min c.a. G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 10 12,5 17 0 10 G1 24 3 3 10 9 10 3 10 3 Gas c.c. Liquids c.a. c.c. 1,5 2,1 4,5 Kv (m3/h)
Series and type Valve L133B05 L133V05 L133B07 L133V07 L133B07 L133V07 L133B06 L133V06 L133B06 L133V06 Z923E Z923A 65 Z130A 44 Coil Z530A
Power absorption AC (VA) Inrush 23 Holding 14 c.c. (W) 9 Sealings Notes
Weight (kg)
NBR FPM NBR FPM NBR FPM NBR FPM NBR FPM 1
0,440 0,620 0,790 1,810
24
13
33 -
17
- Sealings : NBR = Nitrile-butylene elastomer FPM = Fluoro-carbon elastomer The nominal flow is guaranteed at pressure value 0,3 bar. Contact us in case of lower pressures. 1 The valves fitted with 50Hz coil can operate at 60 Hz but in this case the p max corresponds to the nominal value less 20%.
SIRAI ELETTROMECCANICA S.r.l.
- BUSSERO (MI) Italy - Tel. (+39) 0295038621 - Fax (+39) 0295038895 E-mail: info@sirai.com - www.sirai.com
0303/0503
f NOTES
L133
fSPARE PARTS
1 2
Kit description
Core diaphragms kit G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 G1 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 Z130A Z530A Z923A Z923E L133V05 L133B05 L133V07 L133B07 L133V07 L133B07 L133V06 L133B06 L133B-V05 L133B-V07 L133B-V07 L133B-V06 L133B-V05 L133B-V07 L133B-V07 L133B-V06 L133B-V07 L133B-V05 L133B-V06 (DC) L133B-V06 (AC)
Kit P.N.
G2991802 G2991801 G2990102 G2990101 G2990202 G2990201 G2991902 G2991901 G2927601 G2139901 G2918601 G2955801 2549101 3077801 3077701 2408202
Consisting of:
Core return spring pos.2 Diaphragm assembly with core assembly pos.3
Core return spring kit
n10 core return springs pos. 2
Guide assembly
Guide assembly pos. 4
Coil
Coil pos. 1
f INSTALLATION Solenoid valve can be mounted in any position; vertical with coil upwards preferred.
SIRAI ELETTROMECCANICA S.r.l.
- BUSSERO (MI) Italy - Tel. (+39) 0295038621 - Fax (+39) 0295038895 E-mail: info@sirai.com - www.sirai.com
THE VALIDITY OF REPORTED DATA IS REFERRED TO THE DATE OF ISSUE. POSSIBLE UPDATING ARE AVAILABLE ON REQUEST.
EC7830A, RM7830A, EC7850A, RM7850A 7800 SERIES Relay Modules

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
APPLICATION
The Honeywell EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A are microprocessor-based integrated burner controls for automatically fired gas, oil, or combination fuel single burner full modulation (EC/RM7850A) or on/off (EC/RM7830A) applications. The EC/RM7830A; EC/RM7850A system consists of a relay module, subbase, amplifier, and purge card. Options include keyboard display module (KDM), Personal Computer Interface, Data ControlBus Module, remote display mounting and Combustion System Manager Software. Functions provided by the EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A include automatic burner sequencing, flame supervision, system status indication, system or self-diagnostics and troubleshooting. Text readout on the Keyboard Display Module is available in English, Spanish, Portuguese, Katakana (Japanese), French, Chinese, German, and Italian languages. This document provides installation and static checkout instructions. Other applicable publications are: 63-2278: Q7700 Network Interface Unit Product Data. 65-0084: Q7800A,B 22-Terminal Wiring Subbase Product Data. 65-0090: S7800A Keyboard Display Module Product Data. 65-0091: S7810A Data ControlBus Module Product Data. 65-0228: S7810B Multi-Drop Switch Module Product Data. 65-0095: S7820 Remote Reset Module Product Data. 65-0097: 221729C Dust Cover Packing Instructions. 65-0102: ZM7850A Combustion System Manager Operating Instructions. 65-0109: R7824, R7847, R7848, R7849, R7861, R7886 Flame Amplifiers for the 7800 SERIES Product Data. 65-0131: 221818A Extension Cable Assembly Product Data. 65-0229: 7800 SERIES Relay Modules Checkout and Troubleshooting Product Data.
Environmental Ratings: Ambient Temperature: Operating: -40F to 140 F (-40C to +60C). Storage: -40F to 150 F (-40C to +66C). Humidity: 85% relative humidity continuous, noncondensing. Vibration: 0.5G environment. Approvals: RM7830A and RM7850A: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. MP268, Guide No. MCCZ. Canadian Standards Association Certified: LR9S329-3. Factory Mutual Approved: Report No. J.I.1V9A0.AF. Industrial Risk Insurers: Acceptable. Federal Communications Commission: Part 15, Class B, Emissions. EC7830A and EC7850A: Factory Mutual Approved. These products also comply with the following European directives: Gas Appliance Directive: 90/396/EEC. Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC. EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC. GASTEC: CE-63AP3070/1. Lloyds Register Approval. Oil appliances: EC7830A: DIN-5F 106/96. EC7850A: DIN-5F 107/96. These products are approved according to EN298, Automatic gas burner systems for gas burners and gas burning appliances with or without fans. Please note the following to comply with EN60730 for remote mounting of the KDM and/or remote reset module. It is necessary to provide electrical separation using insulation at least equivalent to double or reinforced insulation. This can be accomplished by either: 1. Optically isolating the communication and/or remote reset lines from the control cabinet or 2. Providing physical separation from the communication and/or remote reset lines using electrical conduit and a 204718a Remote Display Cover Assembly or other suitable enclosure that meets ip40 class of protection.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings (See Tables 3A, 3B, 3C and 3D): Voltage and Frequency: RM7830A and RM7850A: 120 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (10%). EC7830A and EC7850A: 220/240 Vac (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz (10%) Power Dissipation: 10W maximum. Maximum Total Connected Load: 2000 VA. Fusing Total Connected Load: 20A maximum, type FRN or equivalent.
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 1998 Honeywell Inc. All Rights Reserved
66-1092-2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES
INSTALLATION
When Installing this Product
1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition. 2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and marked on the product to make sure the product is suitable for the application. 3. Installer must be a trained, experienced, flame safeguard service technician. 4. After installation is complete, check out the product operation as provided in these instructions.
WARNING
Fire or Explosion Hazard. Can cause property damage, severe injury, or death. Carefully follow safety requirements when installing a burner control.
9. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, can cause interference with radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device of Part 15 of FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area can cause interference, in which case, the users, at their own expense, may be required to take whatever measures are required to correct this interference. 10. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Location
Humidity
Install the relay module where the relative humidity never reaches the saturation point. The relay module is designed to operate in a maximum 85% relative humidity continuous, noncondensing, moisture environment. Condensing moisture can cause a safety shutdown.
CAUTION
Electrical Shock Hazard or Equipment/ Control Damage. Can cause electrical shock or equipment damage. Disconnect power supply before beginning installation.
Vibration
Do not install the relay module where it can be subjected to vibration in excess of 0.5G continuous maximum vibration.
IMPORTANT 1. Wiring connections for the relay modules are unique; refer to Fig. 3 and 4 or the appropriate Specifications for individual subbase wiring. 2. Wiring must comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. 3. Wiring must comply with NEC Class 1 (Line Voltage) wiring. 4. Loads connected to the EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A must not exceed those listed on the relay module label or the Specifications; see Table 1. 5. Limits and interlocks must be rated to simultaneously carry and break current to the ignition transformer, pilot valve, and main fuel valve(s). 6. All external timers must be listed or componentrecognized by authorities who have proper jurisdiction. 7. For on-off gas-fired systems, some authorities who have jurisdiction prohibit the wiring of any limit or operating contacts in series between the flame safeguard control and the main fuel valve(s). 8. Two flame detectors can be connected in parallel with the exception of C7015 Infrared Flame Detectors.
Weather
The relay module is not designed to be weather tight. When installed outdoors, protect the relay module in an approved weather-tight enclosure.
Mounting Wiring Subbase

1. Mount the subbase in any position except horizontally with the bifurcated contacts pointing down. The standard vertical position is recommended. Any other position decreases the maximum ambient temperature rating. 2. Select a location on a wall, burner or electrical panel. The Q7800 can be mounted directly in the control cabinet. Be sure to allow adequate clearance for service, installation, access or removal of the relay module, expanded annunciator, KDM, flame amplifier, flame amplifier signal voltage probes, run/test switch, electrical signal voltage probes and electrical field connections. 3. For surface mounting, use the back of the subbase as a template to mark the four screw locations, then drill the pilot holes. 4. Securely mount the subbase using four no. 6 screws (not provided).
66-10922
Wiring Subbase
CAUTION
Electrical Shock Hazard or Equipment Damage. Can cause electrical shock or damage equipment. Disconnect the power supply before beginning installation. The internal block diagram of the EC/RM7830A is shown in Fig. 1 and the internal block diagram of the EC/RM7850A is shown in Fig. 2. 1. For subbase wiring and sequence charts, refer to Fig. 3 and 4.
L1 HOT N 1 5 CONFIGURATION JUMPERS RUN/TEST SWITCH MICROCOMPUTER RESET PUSHBUTTON RELAY DRIVE CIRCUIT 2K 3K 4K 5K 6K 7K
2. For remote wiring of the KDM, refer to the Specifications for the KDM (65-0090), Network Interface Unit (63-2278), Data ControlBus Module (65-0091) or Extension Cable Assembly (65-0131). 3. Disconnect the power supply from the main disconnect before beginning installation to prevent electrical shock and equipment damage. More than one disconnect can be required. 4. All wiring must comply with all applicable electrical codes, ordinances and regulations. Wiring, where required, must comply with NEC Class 1 (Line Voltage) wiring. 5. For recommended wire size and type, see Table 1. 6. For recommended grounding practices, see Table 2.
2 PLUG-IN PURGE TIMER CARD FLAME SIGNAL
TEST JACK F
PLUG-IN FLAME AMPLIFIER
G 22 SHUTTER
RELAY STATUS FEEDBACK AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS
STATUS LEDS ES2 3K2 16 LOS
SAFETY RELAY CIRCUIT
1K POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER AL
17 RT 20 2 LD2 7 7K1 21 2K1 9 6K1 4 3K1 3 OPTIONAL KEYBOARD DISPLAY MODULE RELAY CONTACT OPEN RELAY CONTACT CLOSED RELAY COIL FIELD WIRING INTERNAL WIRING F G ... 22 1K1 4K1 8 6 2K2 5K1 10
IGN PV1 PV2 MV FAN AL USER TERMINALS
DDL DDL COMMUNICATIONS 1
RS485 5 2 3 REMOTE RESET INDICATES FEEDBACK SENSING OF RELAY CONTACT STATUS AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS
1 2
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, RM7830A; 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, EC7830A. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. TO CONNECT L1 DIRECTLY TO LOS, AT LEAST ONE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN MUST BE PROVIDED EVERY 24 HOURS.
M15183B
Fig. 1. Internal block diagram of EC/RM7830A (see Fig. 3 for detailed wiring instructions).
66-10922
L1 HOT N 1 4 CONFIGURATION JUMPERS PLUG-IN PURGE TIMER CARD FLAME SIGNAL RUN/TEST SWITCH MICROCOMPUTER RESET PUSHBUTTON 2K 3K RELAY DRIVE CIRCUIT 4K 5K 6K 7K 8K 9K SAFETY RELAY CIRCUIT RELAY STATUS FEEDBACK AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS PLUG-IN FLAME AMPLIFIER TEST JACK F G SHUTTER 22 2
STATUS LEDS ES1
1K POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER
18 ES3 19 ES2 17 3K2 16 LOS 20 2 LD2 7 7K1 21 2K1 9 6K1 5 3K1 3 OPTIONAL KEYBOARD DISPLAY MODULE DDL DDL COMMUNICATIONS 1 2 3 RS485 5 REMOTE RESET 8K2 9K2 HIGH FIRE 8K1 COMMON LOW FIRE 9K1 MODULATE 15 14 F G ... 22 USER TERMINALS RELAY CONTACT OPEN RELAY CONTACT CLOSED RELAY COIL FIELD WIRING INTERNAL WIRING
M15184B
AL RT 6 1K1 2K2 5K1 10 4K1 8 IGN PV1 PV2 MV FAN AL
12 13
INDICATES FEEDBACK SENSING OF RELAY CONTACT STATUS AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, RM7850A; 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, EC7850A. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. TO CONNECT L1 DIRECTLY TO LOS, AT LEAST ONE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN MUST BE PROVIDED EVERY 24 HOURS.
Fig. 2. Internal block diagram of EC/RM7850A (see Fig. 4 for detailed wiring instructions).
66-10922
Q7800 G N AL FAN 3 4 5 RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN 6 7 8 9 10 F (L1) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 LOS PV2 1 L1 2 N FLAME DETECTOR ES2 AL
LEGEND ALARM (NORMALLY OPEN) ES2 PREIGNITION INTERLOCK INPUT FAN BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR IGN IGNITION L1 LINE VOLTAGE SUPPLY LOS LOCKOUT INPUT LD2 AIRFLOW SWITCH INPUT MV MAIN FUEL VALVE PV1 PILOT VALVE 1 (INTERRUPTED) PV2 PILOT VALVE 2 (INTERMITTENT) RT LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL
1 12O VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY (RM7830A). 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY (EC7830A). PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 SEE FLAME DETECTOR INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT WIRING.
EC/RM7830A Power Burner ON/OFF, GAS or OIL Sequence

LED DISPLAY INITIATE POWER PILOT FLAME MAIN ALARM BURNER BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR IGNITION 4 10 PILOT VALVE V2 8 21 STANDBY "PREPURGE" WAITING PRE IGNITION FIRST SAFETY TIME PILOT STABIL. MAIN TRIAL TIME MAIN STABIL. RUN POSTPURGE STANDBY
MAIN VALVE OPERATING CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS PREIGNITION INTERLOCK 17
LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL CLOSED LOCKOUT INPUT 1 AFS CHK 10 sec 2 AIRFLOW SWITCH CHECK
FLAME SIGNAL
SAFE START CHECK
FLAME PROVING
4 2 sec OPTIONS AFS CHK
5 3 sec
6 3 or 5 sec 5 sec
6 3 or 5 sec 5 sec
,,
9 6 20 3 7 AFS CHK SAFE START CHECK 6 2, 15 or 30 sec
M15185B
1 IF ON AT CALL FOR HEAT, HOLD (120 sec). LOCK OUT IF STILL ON. 2 IF OFF AFTER 10 SEC OF FAN, LOCK OUT. 3 TAKE LOCKOUT ACTION, CONTINUE POSTPURGE TIMING.
SELECT VIA ST7800A PURGE TIMER CARD.
5 DUE TO ONE EXTRA SECOND FOR SAFETY RELAY TEST, TIMING CAN VARY FROM 3 TO 4 SECONDS. 6 SELECT VIA CONFIGURATION JUMPERS OR MODEL NUMBERS.
Fig. 3. Wiring subbase and sequence chart for EC/RM7830A.

5 66-10922
Q7800 G N AL 3 4 FAN RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN 5 6 7 8 9 10 F (L1) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ES2 ES1 ES3 LOS PV2 HIGH FIRE COMMON MODULATE LOW FIRE
SERIES 90 FIRING RATE MOTOR B R W
LEGEND SERIES 90 CONTROLLER B R W AL ES1 ES2 ES3 FAN IGN L1 ALARM (NORMALLY OPEN) LOW FIRE SWITCH INPUT PREIGNITION INTERLOCK INPUT HIGH FIRE SWITCH INPUT BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR IGNITION LINE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
LOS LOCKOUT INPUT LD2 AIRFLOW SWITCH INPUT MV MAIN FUEL VALVE PV1 PILOT VALVE 1 (INTERRUPTED) PV2 PILOT VALVE 2 (INTERMITTENT) RT 1 L1 LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL
2 FLAME DETECTOR
1 2
120 VAC, 50/60 HZ POWER SUPPLY, RM7850A; 220-240 VAC, 50/60 HZ POWER SUPPLY, EC7850A. SEE FLAME DETECTOR INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT WIRING.
EC/RM7850A Power Burner Full Modulation, GAS or OIL Sequence

LED DISPLAY INITIATE STANDBY POWER PILOT FLAME MAIN ALARM BURNER BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR IGNITION 10 PILOT VALVE V2 21 MAIN VALVE OPERATING CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS PREIGNITION INTERLOCK 21 6 20 9 8 5 DRIVE TO HIGH FIRE PURGE DRIVE OR TO LOW WAITING FIRE PRE IGNITION FIRST SAFETY TIME PILOT STABIL. MAIN TRIAL TIME MAIN STABIL. RUN POSTPURGE STANDBY
LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL CLOSED LOCKOUT INPUT 1 AFS CHK 10 sec 2 AIRFLOW SWITCH CHECK
HF Sw 19 FLAME SIGNAL MOD HF LF MOTOR 4 2 sec AFS CHK OPTIONS 1 IF ON AT CALL FOR HEAT, HOLD (120 SEC). LOCK OUT IF STILL ON. 2 IF OFF AFTER 10 SEC OF FAN, LOCK OUT. 3 TAKE LOCKOUT ACTION. CONTINUE POSTPURGE TIMING. 4 SELECT VIA ST7800A PURGE TIMER CARD. 5 3 sec HF LF SAFE START CHECK
LF Switch FLAME PROVING
18
MOD
6 3 or 5 sec 5 sec
6 3 or 5 sec 5 sec
,
3 AFS CHK SAFE START CHECK 6 2, 15 or 30 sec
M15186B
5 DUE TO ONE EXTRA SECOND FOR SAFETY RELAY TEST, TIMING CAN VARY FROM 3 TO 4 SEC. 6 SELECTION VIA CONFIGURATION JUMPERS OR MODEL NUMBERS.
Fig. 4. Wiring subbase and sequence chart for EC/RM7850A.
66-10922

Table 1. Recommended Wire Sizes and Part Numbers. Application Line voltage terminals KDM Data ControlBus Module Remote Reset Module Communication Interface ControlBus Module 13 Vdc full-wave rectified transformer power input Recommended Wire Size Recommended Part Numbers
14, 16, or 18 AWG copper conductor, 600 TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C. volt insulation, moisture-resistant wire. 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with ground, or five-wire. 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with ground, or five-wire. 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair, insulated for low voltage. 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with ground. 18 AWG wire insulated for voltages and temperatures for given application. Belden 8723 shielded cable or equivalent. Belden 8723 shielded cable or equivalent. Belden 8723 shielded cable or equivalent. TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C.
The KDM, Data ControlBus Module (for remote mounting or communications) or Communication Interface ControlBus Module must be wired in daisy chain configuration, 1(a)-1(a), 2(b)-2(b), 3(c)-3(c). The order of interconnection of all the devices listed above is not important. Be aware that modules on the closest and farthest end of the daisy chain configuration string require a 120 ohm (1/4 watt minimum) resistor termination across terminals 1 and 2 of the electrical connectors for connections longer than 100 feet (31 meters). Table 2. Recommended Grounding Practices. Ground type Earth ground (subbase and relay module). 1. 2. 3. Signal ground (KDM, Data ControlBus Module, Communications Interface ControlBus Module). Recommended Practice Use to provide a connection between the subbase and the control panel of the equipment. Earth ground must be capable of conducting enough current to blow the 20A fuse (or breaker) in the event of an internal short circuit. Use wide straps or brackets to provide minimum length, maximum surface area ground conductors. If a leadwire must be used, use 14 AWG copper wire. Make sure that mechanically tightened joints along the ground path are free of nonconductive coatings and protected against corrosion on mating surfaces.
Use the shield of the signal wire to ground the device to the signal ground terminals 3(c) of each device. Connect the shield at both ends of the daisy chain to earth ground.
7. Recommended wire routing of leadwires: a. Do not run high voltage ignition transformer wires in the same conduit with the flame detector, Data ControlBus Module, or Remote Reset Module wiring. b. Do not route flame detector, Data ControlBus Module, or Remote Reset Module leadwires in conduit with line voltage circuits. c. Enclose flame detector leadwires without armor cable in metal cable or conduit. d. Follow directions in flame detector, Data ControlBus Module, or Remote Reset Module Instructions. 8. The KDM is powered from a low voltage, energy limited source. Mount the KDM outside of a control panel when it is protected from mechanical damage.
Flame Detector leadwires: The maximum flame sensor leadwire length is limited by the flame signal strength. c. Remote Reset leadwires: The maximum length of wire is 1000 feet (305 meters) to a Remote Reset pushbutton. d. Data ControlBus Module: The maximum Data ControlBus Module cable length depends on the number of system modules connected, the noise conditions and the cable used. The maximum length of all Data ControlBus Module interconnecting wire is 4000 feet (1219 meters). 10. Be sure loads do not exceed the terminal ratings. Refer to the label on the relay module or to the terminal ratings in Tables 3A, 3B, 3C and 3D.
b.
IMPORTANT A 13 Vdc power supply must be used any time more than one KDM is used. A maximum of two KDM, Data ControlBus Modules or S7810B Multi-Drop Switch Modules are allowed in any combination.
9. Maximum wire lengths: a. EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A leadwires: The maximum leadwire length is 300 feet (91 meters) to terminal inputs (Control, Running/Lockout Interlock).
7
Final Wiring Check

1. Check the power supply circuit. The voltage and frequency tolerance must match those of the relay module. (A separate power supply circuit can be required for the relay module.) Add the required disconnect means and overload protection. 2. Check all wiring circuits and complete the Static Checkout in Table 4 or 5 before installing the relay module on the subbase. 3. Install the relay module. 4. Restore power to the panel.
66-10922

Table 3A. RM7830A Terminal Ratings. Terminal No. G Earth G N 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F(11) 16 17 Abbreviation AL FAN L1 RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN ES2 Description Flame Sensor Ground a Earth Ground a Line Voltage Common (Neutral) Alarm (Normally Open) Burner/Blower Motor Line Voltage Supply (L1) Limits and Burner Control Airflow Switch Input Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) Main Fuel Valve Ignition Flame Signal Control Voltage Preignition Interlock Input Ratings 120 Vac, 1A pilot duty, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles. 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. b 120 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz ( 10%).c 120 Vac, 1 mA. 120 Vac, 5A. 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d 120 Vac, 2A at PF = 0.2.d 60 to 220 Vac, current limited. 120 Vac (+10/-15%) 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles. Carry 5A for 250,000 cycles. 120 Vac, 1 mA. 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.
20 LOS Lockout Input 21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 22 SHTR Shutter a See Table 2. b Honeywell has tested this output at 9.8A at PF = 0.5, 58.8A inrush for 100,000 cycles (EN298 approval does not require this test). c 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module. d Total load current excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush. Table 3B. EC7830A Terminal Ratings. Terminal No. G Earth G N 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F(11) 16 Abbreviation AL FAN L1 RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN Description Flame Sensor Ground a Earth Ground a Line Voltage Common(Neutral) Alarm(Normally Open) Burner/Blower Motor Line Voltage Supply (L1) Limits and Burner Control Airflow Switch Input Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) Main Fuel Valve Ignition Flame Signal Control Voltage Ratings 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10 A inrush for 5000 cycles. 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. 220 to 240 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz ( 10%). b 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA maximum. 220/230/240 Vac, 5A. 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c 220/230/240 Vac, 2A ignition.c 60 to 220 Vac, current limited. 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles; carry 5A for 250,000 cycles. 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.d
17 ES2 Preignition Interlock Input 20 LOS Lockout Input 21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 22 SHTR Shutter a See Table 2. b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module. c Total load current excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush for 250,000 cycles. d 220/240 Vac to 120 Vac, 10 VA stepdown transformer (not provided) must be used to drive the shutter.
66-10922

Table 3C. RM7850A Terminal Ratings. Terminal No. G Earth G N 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F(11) 12 13 14 15 16 Abbreviation AL L1 FAN RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN HI COM MOD LO Description Flame Sensor Ground a Earth Ground a Ratings Line Voltage Common(Neutral) Alarm (Normally Open) 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles. Line Voltage Supply (L1) 120 Vac, (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (10%). b Burner/Blower Motor 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c Limits and Burner Control 120 Vac, 1 mA. Airflow Switch Input 120 Vac, 5A. Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d Main Fuel Valve 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d Ignition 120 Vac, 2A ignition.d Flame Signal 60 to 220 Vac, current limited. Firing Rate High Fire 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e Firing Rate Common 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e Firing Rate Modulate 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e Firing Rate Low Fire 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e Alarm (normally closed) 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles; carry 5A for 250,000 cycles. Preignition Interlock Input 120 Vac, 1 mA. Low Fire Switch Input 120 Vac, 1 mA. High Fire Switch Input 120 Vac, 1 mA. Lockout Input 120 Vac, 1 mA. Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. s Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.
17 ES2 18 ES1 19 ES3 20 LOS 21 PV2 22 SHTR a See Table 2. b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module. c Honeywell has tested this output at 9.8A at PF = 0.5, 58.8A inrush for 100,000 cycles (EN298 approval does not require this test). d Total load current, excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush. e Can also be 24 Vac, 3A at PF = 0.5.
66-10922

Table 3D. EC7850A Terminal Ratings. Terminal No. G Earth G N 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F(11) 12 13 14 15 16 Abbreviation AL L1 FAN RT LD2 PV1 MV IGN HI COM MOD LO Description Flame Sensor Ground a Earth Ground a Ratings Line Voltage Common(Neutral) Alarm (Normally Open) 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles. Line Voltage Supply (L1) 220 to 240 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz ( 10%). b Burner/Blower Motor 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. Limits and Burner Control 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. Airflow Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 5A. Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c Main Fuel Valve 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c Ignition 220/230/240 Vac, 2A at PF = 0.2. c Flame Signal 136 to 220 Vac, current limited. Firing Rate High Fire 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d Firing Rate Common 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d Firing Rate Modulate 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d Firing Rate Low Fire 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d Alarm (normally closed) 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 6000 cycles; carry 5A for 250,000 cycles. Preignition Interlock Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. Low Fire Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. High Fire Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. Lockout Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA. Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.e
17 ES2 18 ES1 19 ES3 20 LOS 21 PV2 22 SHTR a See Table 2. b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module. c Total load current, excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush for 250,000 cycles. d Can also be 24 Vac, 3A at PF = 0.5. e 220/240 Vac to 120 Vac, 10 VA stepdown transformer (not provided) must be used to drive the shutter.
Mounting EC/RM7830A; EC/RM7850A Relay Module

1. Mount the relay module vertically on the Q7800 Subbase, or mount horizontally with the knife blade terminals pointing down. When mounted on the Q7800A, the relay module must be in an electrical enclosure. 2. When mounting in an electrical enclosure, provide adequate clearance for servicing, installation and removal of the relay module, KDM, flame amplifier, flame amplifier signal voltage probes, electrical signal voltage probes and electrical connections. a. Allow an additional 2 in. (51 mm) below the relay module for the flame amplifier mounting. b. Allow an optional 3 in. (76 mm) minimum on both sides of the relay module for electrical signal voltage probes. 3. Make sure no subbase wiring is projecting beyond the terminal blocks. Tuck in wiring against the back of the subbase so it does not interfere with the knife blade terminals or bifurcated contacts.
4. Mount the relay module by aligning the four L shaped corner guides and knife blade terminals with the bifurcated contacts on the wiring subbase and securely tightening the two screws without deforming the plastic.
STATIC CHECKOUT
After checking all wiring, perform this checkout before installing the relay module on the wiring subbase. These tests verify that the Q7800 Wiring Subbase is wired correctly and the external controllers, limits, interlocks, actuators, valves, transformers, motors and other devices are operating properly.
WARNING
Fire or Explosion Hazard. Can cause property damage, severe injury or death. Close all manual fuel shutoff valves before starting this test to prevent an explosion.
IMPORTANT Install the relay module with a plug-in motion rather than a hinge action.
66-10922 10

Use extreme care when testing the system. Line voltage is present on most terminal connections when power is on. Ensure proper selection of configuration jumpers before starting the burner operation.
General Instructions
1. Perform all applicable tests listed in the Static Checkout, Table 4 or 5, in the order listed. 2. Make sure all manual fuel shutoff valves are closed. 3. For each test, open the master switch and install the jumper wire(s) between the subbase wiring terminals listed in the Test Jumpers column. 4. Close the master switch before observing operation. 5. Read the voltage between the subbase wiring terminals listed in the Voltmeter column. 6. If there is no voltage or the operation is abnormal, check the circuits and external devices as described in the last column. 7. Check all wiring for correct connections, tight terminal screws, correct wire, and proper wiring techniques. 8. Replace all damaged or incorrectly sized wires. 9. Replace faulty controllers, limits, interlocks, actuators, valves, transformers, motors and other devices, as required. 10. Make sure normal operation is obtained for each required test before continuing the checkout. 11. After completing each test, be sure to open the master switch and remove the test jumper(s).
CAUTION
Electrical Hazard. Can cause equipment damage. Do not perform a dielectric test with the relay module installed. Internal surge protectors break down and conduct a current. This can cause the relay module to fail the dielectric test or destroy the internal lightning and high current protection. 1. Open the master switch before installing or removing a jumper on the subbase. 2. Before continuing to the next test, be sure to remove test jumper(s) used in the previous test. 3. Replace all limits and interlocks that are not operating properly. Do not bypass limits and interlocks.
Equipment Recommended
Voltmeter (1M ohm/volt minimum sensitivity) set on the 0 to 300 Vac scale and two jumper wires, No. 14 wire, insulated, 12 in. (304.8 mm) long with insulated alligator clips at both ends. Table 4. EC/RM7830A Static Checkout. Test No. 1 Test Jumpers None Voltmeter 5-L2 Normal Operation Line voltage at terminal 5. 1. 2. 3. If Operation is Abnormal , Check the Items Listed Below Master switch. Power connected to the master switch. Overload protection (fuse, circuit breaker, etc.) opened the power line.
2 3 4 5 6
None 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-4
17-L2 2-20 2-6 2-7
Line voltage at terminal 17. Alarm (if used) turns on. Line voltage at terminal 20. Line voltage at terminal 6. 1. 2. Fan (Burner Motor or Blower) starts. Line voltage at terminal 7.
Preignition interlocks. Alarm. Limits in Lockout Circuit. 1. 2. 1. Recycle limits. Burner control. Fan circuit. a. Manual fan switch. b. Fan power supply, overload protection and starter. c. Fan. Running Limits or Airflow Switch (LD2 input). Watch for spark or listen for buzz. a. Ignition electrodes are clean. b. Ignition transformer is okay. Watch for spark or listen for buzz. a. Ignition electrodes are clean. b. Ignition transformer is okay. Listen for click or feel head of valve for activation. a. Actuator if used. b. Pilot valve.
NOTE: Disconnect horn at this time (if used).
2. NOTE: Remove jumpers and reconnect alarm (if used). 7 5-10 Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is connected to terminal 10). 1. 1.
5-8
1. Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is connected to terminal 8). 2. Automatic pilot valve opens (if 2. connected to terminal 8). NOTE: Refer to wiring diagram of system being tested.
(continued)
11 66-10922

Table 4. EC/RM7830A Static Checkout (continued) Test No. 9 Test Jumpers 5-21 Voltmeter Normal Operation If Operation is Abnormal , Check the Items Listed Below
Same as test no. 8 for connections Same as test no. 8. If using direct to terminal 8. If using direct spark spark ignition, check the first stage ignition, check the first stage fuel fuel valve(s) instead of the pilot valve. valve(s) instead of the pilot valve. Automatic main fuel valve(s) open(s). If using direct spark ignition on a model with intermittent pilot on terminal 21, check the optional second stage fuel valve, if used. 1. 2. Listen for and observe operation of the main fuel valve(s) and actuator(s). Valve(s) and actuator(s).
10
5-9
Final
CAUTION
Electrical Hazard. Can cause equipment damage. After completing these tests, open the master switch and remove all test jumpers from the subbase terminals. Then remove bypass jumpers from the low fuel pressure limits (if used). Table 5. EC/RM 7850A Static Checkout.
Test No. 1 Test Jumpers None Voltmeter 4-2 Normal Operation Line voltage at terminal 4. If Operation is Abnormal, Check These Items 1. Master switch. 2. Power connected to the master switch. 3. Overload protection (fuse, circuit breaker, etc.) did not open the power line. Preignition interlocks. Alarm Limits in Lockout Circuit 1. Recycle limits. 2. Burner control. 1. Fan circuit. a. Manual fan switch. b. Fan power supply, overload protection and starter. c. Fan. 2. Running limits of Airflow Switch (LD2 input). 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz. a. Ignition electrodes are clean. b. Ignition transformer is okay. 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz. a. Ignition electrodes are clean. b. Ignition transformer is okay. 2. Listen for click or feel head of valve for activation. a. Actuator if used. b. Pilot valve. Same as test no. 4. If using direct spark ignition, check the first stage fuel valve(s) instead of the pilot valve. 1. Listen for and observe operation of the main fuel valve(s) and actuator(s). 2. Valve(s) and actuator(s). 1. 2. 1. 2. Low Fire Start Switch. Firing rate motor and transformer. High Fire Purge Switch. Firing rate motor and transformer.
2 3 NOTE: 4 5 6
None 17-2 4-16 Disconnect horn at this 4-16 2-20 4-16 4-16 5-4 2-6 2-7
Line voltage at terminal 17. Alarm (if used) turns on. time (if used). Line voltage at terminal 20. Line voltage at terminal 6. 1. Fan (Burner Motor or Blower) starts. 2. Line voltage at terminal 7.
NOTE: Remove jumpers and re-connect alarm (if used). Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is 7 4-10 connected to terminal 10). 8 4-8 1. Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is connected to terminal 8). 2. Automatic pilot valve opens (if connected to terminal 8). NOTE: 9 4-21 Refer to wiring diagram of system being tested.
10
4-9
Same as test no. 4 for connections to terminal 8. If using direct spark ignition, check the first stage fuel valve(s) instead of the pilot valve. Automatic main fuel valve(s) opens. If using direct spark ignition on a model with intermittent pilot on terminal 21, check the optional second stage fuel valve, if used. Voltmeter reads line voltage, then zero volts on terminal 18 after motor starts driving open. Firing rate motor drives open; line voltage at terminal 19 after motor is in High Fire position.
11 12
12-13 12-13
18-L2 19-L2
(continued)
66-10922
12

Table 5. EC/RM 7850A Static Checkout (continued).
Test No. 13 14 Test Jumpers 14-13 15-13 Voltmeter 19-L2 Normal Operation Firing rate motor drives closed; zero volts at terminal 19 after motor starts driving closed. 1. Raise setpoint of Series 90 controller firing rate motor should drive toward open. 2. Lower setpoint of Series 90 controller firing rate motor should drive toward closed. If Operation is Abnormal, Check These Items 1. Low Fire Start Switch. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer. 1. Series 90 controller. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer.
Final
CAUTION
Electrical Hazard. Can cause equipment damage. After completing these tests, open the master switch and remove all test jumpers from the subbase terminals. Also remove bypass jumpers from the low fuel pressure limits (if used).
WARNING
Explosion hazard. Can cause serious injury or death. Be sure all manual fuel shutoff valves are closed.
Mounting Other System Components (Fig. 5)

Refer to the applicable specifications for mounting other system components.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL FEATURES

The EC/RM7830A or EC/RM7850A Relay Module provide all customary flame safeguard functions as well as significant advancements in safety, annunciation, and system diagnostics.
Safety Shutdown (Lockout) Occurs If:

1. INITIATE Period a. Purge card is not installed or removed. b. Purge card is defective. c. Configuration jumpers were changed (after 200 hours of operation). d. AC line power errors, see Operation. e. Four minute INITIATE period is exceeded. 2. STANDBY Period a. Flame signal is present after 40 seconds. b. Preignition Interlock is open an accumulative time of 30 seconds. c. Airflow Switch feature is enabled and the Airflow Switch is closed for 120 seconds with Limits and Burner Control closed. d. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is energized. e. Main valve terminal is energized. f. Internal system fault. g. Purge card is not installed or removed. h. Purge card is defective. i. Lockout Input opens during STANDBY.
3. PURGE Period a. Preignition Interlock opens anytime during purge. b. Flame signal detected during purge. c. High Fire Switch fails to close within five minutes after the firing rate motor is commanded to drive to high fire position at start of purge (EC/ RM7850A). d. Low Fire Switch fails to close within five minutes, after firing rate motor is commanded to drive to low fire position at end of purge (EC/RM7850A). e. Airflow Switch Input does not close within 10 seconds. f. If Airflow Switch is disabled, there is no jumper between terminals 6 and 7. g. Airflow Switch opens during PURGE. h. Lockout Input opens during purge. i. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is energized. j. Main valve terminal is energized. k. Internal system fault. l. Purge card is removed. m. Purge card is defective. 4. PREIGNITION a. Lockout Input opens during PREIGNITION. b. Airflow Switch opens during PREIGNITION. c. Preignition Interlock opens during PREIGNITION. d. Flame signal detected during PREIGNITION. e. Ignition terminal is not energized. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is energized. g. Main valve terminal is energized. h. Internal system fault. i. Purge card is removed. j. Purge card is defective. 5. SAFETY 1 PERIOD a. Lockout Input opens during SAFETY 1. b. Airflow Switch opens during SAFETY 1. c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A). d. No flame is present at the end of SAFETY 1. e. Ignition terminal is not energized. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not energized. g. Main valve terminal is energized. h. Internal system fault. i. Purge card is removed. j. Purge card is defective.
13
66-10922

6. PILOT STAB. PERIOD a. Lockout Input opens during PILOT STAB. b. Airflow Switch opens during PILOT STAB. c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A). d. No flame is present. e. Ignition terminal is energized. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not energized. g. Main valve terminal is energized. h. Internal system fault. i. Purge card is removed. j. Purge card is defective. 7. MAIN TRIAL PERIOD a. Lockout Input opens during MAIN TRIAL. b. Airflow Switch opens during MAIN TRIAL. c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A). d. No flame is present. e. Ignition terminal is energized. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not energized. g. Pilot valve is energized during MAIN TRIAL stabilization. h. Main valve terminal is not energized. i. Internal system fault. j. Purge card is removed. k. Purge card is defective. 8. RUN Period. a. No flame is present. b. Lockout Input opens. c. Ignition/interrupted pilot valve terminal is energized. d. Main valve terminal is not energized. e. Internal system fault. f. Purge card is removed. g. Purge card is defective. h. Airflow Switch Input opens. 9. POSTPURGE Period a. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is energized. b. Main valve terminal is energized. c. Internal system fault. d. Purge card is removed. e. Purge card is defective. restarts. If the condition is not corrected and the hold condition exists for four minutes, the relay module locks out. Causes for hold conditions in the INITIATE sequence: a. AC line dropout detection. b. AC line noise that can prevent a sufficient reading of the line voltage inputs. c. Low line voltage brownouts. The INITIATE sequence also delays the burner motor starter from being energized and de-energized from an intermittent AC line input or control input.
Standby
The relay module is ready to start an operating sequence when the operating control input determines a call for heat is present. The burner switch, limits, operating limit control and all microcomputer-monitored circuits must be in the correct state for the relay module to continue into the PURGE sequence.
Normal Start-Up Purge

The relay module provides PURGE timing selectable from two seconds to thirty minutes with power applied and the operating control indicating a call for heat. 1. The Preignition Interlocks, Limits and Burner Control, Run/Test Switch, Airflow Switch Input, Lockout Input, and all microcomputer-monitored circuits must also be in the correct operating state. 2. The blower motor output, terminal 5, is powered to start the PURGE sequence. The firing rate motor is driven to the high fire position (EC/RM7850A). The PURGE timing does not begin until the Airflow Switch Input and High Fire Switch (EC/RM7850A) are both closed. 3. The Preignition Interlock Input must remain closed throughout PURGE or a safety shutdown occurs. 4. The Airflow Switch Input must close by ten seconds into PURGE or a safety shutdown occurs. 5. After the firing rate motor reaches the PURGE rate position and PURGE timing is completed, the motor drives to the low fire position (EC/RM7850A).
Ignition Trials
OPERATION
Sequence of Operation
The relay modules have the operating sequences listed below; see Fig. 3 and 4. The relay module LED provide positive visual indication of the program sequence: POWER, PILOT, FLAME, MAIN and ALARM.
Initiate
The relay module enters the INITIATE sequence when the relay module is initially powered. The relay module can also enter the INITIATE sequence if the relay module verifies voltage fluctuations of +10/-15% or frequency fluctuations of 10% during any part of the operating sequence. The INITIATE sequence lasts for two seconds unless the voltage or frequency tolerances are not met. When not met, a hold condition is initiated and displayed on the optional KDM for at least five seconds; when met, the INITIATE sequence
1. Preignition: With the firing rate motor at the low fire position (EC/RM7850A), the ignition transformer, terminal 10, is energized for three seconds. 2. First Safety Time (SAFETY1): a. With the firing rate motor at the low fire position (EC/RM7850A): (1) The pilot valves and ignition transformer, terminals 8, 10 and 21, are energized. Terminal 8 is an interrupted pilot valve and terminal 21 is an intermittent pilot valve. (2) During SAFETY1, the Low Fire Switch Input must be closed. If it opens, a safety shutdown occurs (EC/RM7850A). (3) The Preignition Interlock Input is ignored during SAFETY1, PILOT STAB., MAIN TRIAL, RUN and POSTPURGE. b. Flame must be proven by the end of three or five seconds to allow the sequence to continue. A safety shutdown occurs if there is no flame. 3. Pilot stabilization (PILOT STAB.): With flame proven, the ignition, terminal 10, is de-energized. The duration of this state is five seconds.
14
66-10922

WIRING SUBBASE RUN/TEST SWITCH RELAY MODULE
HONEYWELL
CONFIGURATION JUMPERS
PURGE TIMER
SEQUENCE STATUS LED PANEL
RESET BUTTON
DUST COVER
CAPTIVE MOUNTING SCREW
BURNER CONTRO
FLAME AMPLIFIER
M15187A
Fig. 5. EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A Relay Modules exploded view. 4. Main Trial (MAIN TRIAL): a. The MAIN TRIAL time is selectable as three or five seconds. After PILOT STAB., and with the presence of a flame, the main fuel valve, terminal 9, is powered. If a flameout occurs, the relay module locks out within one or two seconds, depending on the amplifier Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT). Thus, the second safety time is defined as MAIN TRIAL time plus the amplifier FFRT. b. During MAIN TRIAL, the Low Fire Switch Input must be closed (EC/RM7850A). If it opens, a safety shutdown occurs. c. After three or five seconds of MAIN TRIAL, terminal 8 is de-energized for main stabilization. Flame must remain proven during this fivesecond period.
Postpurge
The relay module (model specific) provides a two-, 15- or 30second POSTPURGE following the completion of the RUN period. The blower motor output is powered to drive all combustion products and any unburned fuel from the combustion chamber. It also supplies combustion air to burn fuel being purged from the fuel line downstream from the fuel shutoff valve. 1. The main fuel valve and the intermittent pilot valve, terminals 9 and 21, are de-energized and the firing rate motor is commanded to the low fire position (EC/RM7850A) to begin the POSTPURGE period. 2. The Preignition Interlock Input is ignored during POSTPURGE. 3. After the POSTPURGE period is completed, the relay module re-enters STANDBY.
Run
1. The firing rate motor releases to modulation. 2. The relay module is now in RUN and remains in RUN until the controller input, terminal 6, opens, indicating that the demand is satisfied or a limit has opened.
Run/Test Switch
The Run/Test Switch is located on the top side of the relay module, see Fig. 5. The Run/Test Switch allows the burner sequence to be altered as follows: 1. In Purge Drive to High Fire position, the Run/Test Switch, when placed in the TEST position, holds in PURGE with the firing rate motor in the High Fire position (EC/RM7850A).
15 66-10922

2. In the measured PURGE sequence, the Run/Test Switch, placed in the TEST position, causes the PURGE timing to stop. The firing rate motor is in the High Fire position. 3. In Purge Drive to Low Fire position, the Run/Test Switch, when placed in the TEST position, holds the burner in PURGE with the firing rate motor in the Low Fire position (EC/RM7850A). 4. During the PILOT STAB. period, the Run/Test Switch, when placed in the TEST position, stops the timer, allowing for pilot turn-down test and other burner adjustments. This activates a 15-second flameout timer that permits pilot flame adjustment without nuisance safety shutdowns. 5. During Run, the Run/Test Switch, when placed in the TEST position, drives the firing rate motor to the Low Fire position. SERVICE NOTE:
RUN/TEST SWITCH
Clipping and removing a site-configurable jumper enhances the level of safety.

SELECTABLE CONFIGURATION JUMPERS
IMPORTANT When the relay module is switched to the TEST mode, it stops and holds at the next Run/Test Switch point in the operating sequence. Make sure that the Run/Test Switch is in the RUN position before leaving the installation.
M7701B
Fig. 6. Selectable site-configurable jumpers. Table 6. Site-configurable jumper options.
SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Selectable Site-Configurable Jumpers
The relay module has three site-configurable jumper options, see Fig. 6 and Table 6. If necessary, clip the site-configurable jumpers with side cutters and remove the resistors from the relay module. The relay module reads the settings of these configuration jumpers at startup. After 200 hours of main valve operation, the relay module locks the jumper settings into internal memory. If these jumpers are changed after the 200 hours occur, the relay module locks out. This safety function assures that the relay module cannot be modified after it is installed in a particular location. If JR3 (Airflow Switch) is intact (no Airflow Switch), then a jumper must be installed between terminals 6 and 7. If JR3 is clipped (Airflow Switch is present), the relay module locks out if it detects a jumper between terminals 6 and 7.
Jumper Number JR1 JR2 JR3
Description First Safety Time Main Trial Time Airflow Switch
Intact 5 seconds 5 seconds No
Clipped 3 seconds 3 seconds Yes
SERVICE NOTE:
Clipping and removing a siteconfigurable jumper enhances the level of safety.
IMPORTANT Clipping site-configurable jumpers after 200 hours of operation results in a nonresettable Code 110, LOCKOUT. The relay module must be replaced.
Flame Signal Measurement

Measure the flame signal at the appropriate times as defined in the applicable flame amplifier specifications. For further checkout and troubleshooting, see form 65-0229.
Home and Building Control Honeywell Inc. Honeywell Plaza P.O. Box 524 Minneapolis MN 55408-0524
66-10922 R. R. Rev. 8-98
Home and Building Control Honeywell Limited-Honeywell Limite 155 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 3N7
Printed in U.S.A. on recycled paper containing at least 10% post-consumer 16 paper fibers.
www.honeywell.com
IGNITION TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL FORM TYPE F.8 -115/6000 V.
3/8 Thread
- Power
~250 VA - Primary tension 115 V - Short circuit primary current 2A - Secondary tension 6.000 V - Short circuit secondary current 20 mA - Frequency 50/60 Hz - Duty 100 % - Electrical junction box for connection to the grid - Gauged high tension between earth and ceramic insulator provided with a plug for H.T. cable - Vacuum encapsulation made of resin - Protecton degree IP55 - PVC box dimension 135x170x85 mm - Maximum overall dimension 135x220x85 mm - Fixing hole dimension 118x153 mm - Weight 4,5 kg abt.
7/
7.5 TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL SCALE POWER
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PDT 115 / PDT 215

TESTO 6342 0-200 mbar 4-20 mA (20.528.5 VDC)
7.5
7/
7.6 TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL FLOW RATE
FUEL KEROSENE / LIGHT OIL PUMPS
MP-051 E MP-052 HP-TECHNIK
VBHR-M-I-2-10
1500 Lt/h
ELECTRIC MOTOR MODEL POWER / 0,37 Kw IP55 (400 V-60 Hz)
FOR THE INSTRUCTIONS MAINTENANCE SEE MANUAL INSTRUCIONS ATTACHED
7.6
hp-TECHNIK Industrial Pumps: Series VB with Integrated Overflow Valve - hp internal gear pumps up to 40 bar
Pagina 1 di 4
Technical Selection Chart: Scaled Drawings

Direction of rotation viewed from shaft I = indirect counterclockwise D = direct clockwise The direction of rotation can only be changed in the factory. Therefore please assure that you state the desired direction of rotation as per the size chart/sheet when ordering!
hp internal gear pumps up to 40 bar (Direction I = indirect - counterclockwise) !!!

Viscosity: 6 mm2 sec-1 at 20 C Pump Series VB Size: n = 1400 min Discharge l/h at 9 bar 45 80 120 160 150 200 300 450 600 1000 at 30 bar 30 60 100 140 100 160 240 390 540 700 at 40 bar 20 50 80 120 80 140 200 360 400 600 011/0023 011/0024 011/0034
-1
n = 2800 min Discharge l/h at 9 bar 90 160 240 320 300 400 600 850 900 at 30 bar 60 130 200 270 240 310 520 750 850 at 40 bar 50
-1
Article No. I 011/0007 011/0008 011/0009 011/0010 011/0055 011/0056 011/0022
Article No. I 013/0007
Gear Threaded Rotor Shaft ConSize nection for (S/A)
max. allowed ManoPump meter RPM (minConnection 1 ) at I/D " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 1680 1680 1680 1680 1400 1400 1400
Net weight (kg)at I/D
VB P VB M VB G VB F VBG PP VBG PZ VBG P VBG MZ VBG M VBG GZ VBG G VBH P VBH M VBH G VBHG P
25 25 25 25 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 56 56 56 75 75 75
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 22 22 22
3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" " " " " " " " " " " 1" 1" 1"
2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 3,3 7,3 7,3 7,3 18,6 18,6 18,6
120 013/0008 190 013/0009 260 013/0010 210 013/0030 280 013/0056 480 013/0021 700 013/0070 730 013/0022
1100 1000 870 013/0065
1500 1200 1000 011/0035 2000 1700 1400 011/0036 3000 2200 2000 011/0046
VBHG PZ 3700 3000 2800 011/0085 VBHG M 4500 3600 3200 011/0047
http://www.hptechnik.com/e/products/1/1_2_1.htm
10/09/08
Pagina 2 di 4
VBHG G 6000 4800
011/0048
75
22
1"
"
1400
18,6
hp internal gear pumps up to 40 bar (Direction D = direct - clockwise)

Viscosity: 6 mm2 sec-1 at 20 C Pump Series VBSize: n = 1400 min-1 Discharge l/h at 9 bar 45 80 120 160 150 200 300 450 600 1000 1500 2000 3000 3700 4500 6000 at 30 at 40 bar bar 30 60 100 140 100 160 240 390 540 700 1200 1700 2200 3000 3600 4800 20 50 80 120 80 140 200 360 480 600 1000 1400 2000 2700 3200 Article No D 012/0007 012/0008 012/0009 012/0010 012/0055 012/0056 012/0022 012/0023 012/0024 012/0034 012/0035 012/0036 012/0046 012/0085 012/0047 012/0048 at 9 bar 90 160 240 320 300 400 600 850 900 1100 n = 2800 min-1 Discharge l/h at 30 bar 60 130 200 270 240 310 520 750 800 930 at 40 bar 50 120 190 260 210 280 480 700 730 870 Article No. D 014/0007 014/0008 014/0009 014/0010 014/0030 014/0056 014/0021 014/0070 014/0022 014/0065 Gear Rotor Size Threaded ConShaft nection for (S/A) Manometer Connection Heating Capacity H1 in Watt at 220V, 50Hzat I/D 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 160 160 160 280 280 280 280 Initial Pump Breakaway Torque at I/D 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 3,2 3,2 3,2 4,6 4,6 4,6 4,6
VB P VB M VB G VB F VBG PP VBG PZ VBG P VBG MZ VBG M VBG GZ VBG G VBH P VBH M VBH G VBHG P VBHG PZ VBHG M VBHG G
25 25 25 25 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 56 56 56 75 75 75 75
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 22 22 22 22
3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" " " " " " " " " " " 1" 1" 1" 1"
" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "
To insure proper pump functioning, all pipe connections must be sized as per the principles of fluid technology using the phase quantity and in accordance with the given conditions at the installation site! The size of the pump and/or device connections is not indicative of the size of the pipe connection which must be used.
10/09/08
Pagina 3 di 4
10/09/08
Pagina 4 di 4
Gear Rotor Size 25 38 56 75
Discharge l/h 1400 min-1 45 - 160 150 - 600 1000 - 2000 3000 - 6000 Discharge l/h 1400 min-1 45 - 160 150 - 600 1000 - 2000 3000 - 6000 2800 min-1 90 - 320 300 - 1100 Discharge l/h 1400 min-1 45 - 160 150 - 600 1000 - 2000 3000 - 6000 2800 min-1 90 - 320 300 - 1100 2800 min-1 90 - 320 300 - 1100
a1 35,5 39,5 48,5 62,5
a2 20 30 38 85
a3 33 38 45 70
b1 51 70 96 115
c1 41,5 55,5 71,5 129,5
c2 14 14 15 18
c3 16 16 18 25
c4 40 40 79 65
c5 20 20 27 37
c6 55,5 69,5 86,5 147,5
c7 76 76 124 127
c8 131,5 145,5 210,5 274,5
d1 12 12 18 22
sw/e 27/31,2 27/31,2 46/53,1 55/63,5
d2 54 54 60 80
d3 80 80 100 120
e1 G 3/8" G " G " G 1"
f1 139 139 162 211
f2 32 32 26,5 36
f3 90 90 118 150
f4 17 17 17,5 25
f5 26 23 25,5 35
f6 38 44 67 80
f7 92 92 120 150
f8 140 140 171 218
g1 40 48 55 80
g2 27 27 35 40
g3 67 75 90 120
h1 11 11 13 14,5
h2 13 13 13 15
h3 13 13 25
10/09/08
8/
8. DAMPERS 8.1
ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC (S5 S6 -S8)
The SC damper is primarily designed for use as a regulating and shut-off damper in flue gas installations. The blades are contra-rotating, to ensure a symmetrical gas flow and favourable control characteristics. The damper is available for manual or actuator control. Max. operating temperature: 350C DESIGN The damper consists basically of a casing, two blades, blade actuating arms and lever with rubbercovered handle. A position indicator (open-closed) is supplied. The damper is locked in the desired position with a nut. SIZE 031, 040, 050, 056, 063, 071, 080 MATERIAL AND FINISH The casing and blades of the damper are made of 3 mm thick sheet steel and the damper is painted with primer prior to delivery
8. 1
8/
8.2 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC WITH AUTOMATIC ACTUATOR AF8 (S6)
8. 2
8/
AUTOMATIC ACTUATOR AF8 FOR DAMPER (S6) (DWG. T04132)
8. 3
DESCRIZIONE
ASSIEME ATTUATORE AF8 (HONEYWELL)

CODICE
C04132
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
DATA FIRMA
29/09/2004 Michele
SCALA
1:2
DOCUMENTO
T04132
8/
TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL SUPPLY STROKE TIMING IMPUT RANGE
AUTOMATIC ACTUATOR FOR DAMPERS (S6)
PZZ 400 HONEYWELL M7284 C1000 460/3/60 V/Hz 90. 30 sec. 0 20 mA
DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT OF HONEYWELL SERVOMOTOR 1) Disconnect the electrical connections 2) Unloose the screws between the Servomotor and its support 3) Remove the Servomotor 4) Arrange the blade/s of the damper in "close position" 5) Assemble the new Servomotor with the shaft in "close position" 6) Tighten the screws between the new Servomotor and its support 7) Restore the electrical connections
NOTE: For the instruction manual see below
8. 4
Series 72 Modutrol IV Motors

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Replaces M744S,T,Y and M745S,T,Y Motors. M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, and M7294 are non-spring return motors; M7272, M7282, M7285, and M7286 are spring return motors. Oil immersed motor and gear train for reliable performance and long life. Wiring box provides NEMA 3 weather protection. Actuator motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac. Models available with factory installed transformer or an internal transformer can be field added. Quick connect terminals standardscrew terminal adapter available. Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older motors is standard with replacement motors.
APPLICATION
The Series 72 Modutrol IV Motors are used to control dampers and valves. The motors accept a current or voltage signal from an electronic controller to position a damper or valve at any point between open and closed.
Nominal timing of 30 seconds for 90 stroke and 60 seconds for 160 stroke. Valve and damper linkages, explosion-proof housing, and auxiliary switches available as accessories. Spring return motors are rated for 25 lb.-in. and 60 lb.-in torque. Non-spring return motors are rated for 35 lb.-in., 75 lb.-in., 150 lb.-in., and 300 lb.-in. torque. Models available with adjustable start (zero) and span. Models available with 4 to 20 mA input signal. Models available with 2 to 10 Vdc input signal. Die-cast aluminum housing.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1 Features ........................................................................... 1 Specifications ................................................................... 2 Ordering Information ........................................................ 2 Installation ........................................................................ 5 Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 10 Operation and Checkout .................................................. 12
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 2000 Honeywell All Rights Reserved
63- 2202- 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV MOTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Models: TRADELINE models are selected and packaged to provide ease of stocking, ease of handling and maximum replacement value. TRADELINE model specifications are the same as those of standard models unless specified otherwise. TRADELINE models have auxiliary switch cams. NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams cannot be field-added.)
IMPORTANT The specifications given in this publication do not include normal manufacturing tolerances. Therefore, an individual unit may not exactly match the listed specifications. Also, this product is tested and calibrated under closely controlled conditions and some minor differences in performance can be expected if those conditions are changed. Modutrol IV Order Number Guide: See Table 1. Dimensions: See Fig. 1.
Table 1. Modutrol IV Order Number Guide. M Motor 72 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc Controla 6 35 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 7 25 lb-in. Spring Return 75 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 8 60 lb-in. Spring Return 150 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 9 300 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 1 Single-ended shaft Non-Spring Return 2 Normally Closedb Spring Return 4 5 6 A B C D F G L Q M
a b
Dual-ended shaft
Non-Spring Return Normally Closedb Spring Return Normally Openc Spring Return Fixed Stroke Normally Closedb
0 Auxiliary Switches 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches 0 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches 0 Auxiliary Switch 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches XXXX
Adjustable Stroke Fixed Stroke Adjustable Stroke Fixed Stroke Normally Openc Normally Closedb
61
See Catalog for Complete O.S. Number
Adjustable zero and span. Electrically normally closed. Shaft rotates clockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor drives to normally closed position when powered with control wiring not connected. c Electrically normally open. Shaft rotates counterclockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor drives to normally open position when powered with control wiring not connected.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE wholesaler or distributor, refer to the TRADELINE Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number. If you have additional questions, need further information, or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone: 1. Your local Home and Building Control Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory). 2. Home and Building Control Customer Relations Honeywell, 1885 Douglas Drive North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386 In CanadaHoneywell Limited/Honeywell Limite, 35 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough, Ontario M1V 4Z9. International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Australia, Canada, Finland, France, Germany, Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, Spain, Taiwan, United Kingdom, U.S.A.
63-22024 2
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW OF BRACKET
4-7/8 (124) 4-5/8 (116) 5-1/2 (140)
4-1/4 (107) 5-13/16 (148) 2-5/16 (58)
11/16 (17) 1/4 (7) 4 5 4-1/16 (103) 4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) WIRING BOX 3/4 (19) 13/16 (20) 4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) 4-7/8 (124) 5-9/16 (141)
POWER END
1/4 (7)
MOTOR 1 6-7/16 (164)
SPRING RETURN MODEL SHOWN

1 2 SOME MODELS DO NOT HAVE AN AUXILIARY SHAFT. ALL OTHER DIMENSIONS ARE THE SAME. FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-3/4 (222); FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-1/4 (210); NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS 7-5/16 (185). FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS (SHOWN). FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS. FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS.
M17089BB
AUXILARY END
POWER END
5-3/8 (137) 2-9/16 (66)
9/16 (15) 2
3 4
ADAPTER BRACKET
3/4 (19) 5
Fig. 1. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor dimensions in in. (mm). Controller: These motors can be used with any electronic controller that provides a stable noise-free proportional current output as specified in Electrical Ratings, Input Range below. Electrical Ratings: Power Consumption: See Table 2. Input Range: Current, Nonadjustable: 4 to 20 mA nominal, 25 mA maximum. Current, Adjustable: 4 to 20 mA adjustable, 50 mA maximum. Zero/Null (Motor Closed): 0.08 to 18 mA. Span: 1.8 to 18 mA. Voltage, Nonadjustable: 2 to 10 Vdc. Input Impedance: 4 to 20 mA Input: 100 ohms. 2 to 10 Vdc Input: 400K ohms. Table 2. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor Power Consumption Ratings (at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz). Power Consumption Model M7261 M7272 M7274 M7281 M7282 M7284 M7285 M7286 M7294 19 26 15 23 28 23 28 23 23 Watts 0.20 0.26 0.71 0.24 0.28 0.24 0.28 1.00 0.24 Amps
63-22024
Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps): See Table 3. Table 3. Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps). One Contact Ratinga Full Load Locked Rotor
a
120V 7.2 43.2 3.6 21.6
240V
40 VA pilot duty, 120/240 Vac on opposite contact.
Stroke: Fixed 90 or 160 models available. Other models available with field adjustable strokes from 90 to 160 . Stroke adjusted by means of cams located in the wiring compartment. Timing: Nominal 30 seconds for 90 stroke and 60 seconds for 160 stroke. Dead Weight Load On Shaft: 200 lb (91 kg) on motor power or auxiliary end; maximum combined load of 300 lb (136 kg). Motor Rotation: Closed: Counterclockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor power end. Open: Clockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor power end. Mechanically Normally Closed: Spring return. Normally closed motors rotate to closed position on power loss. Mechanically Normally Open: Spring return. Normally open motors rotate to open position on power loss. Electrically Normally Closed: Both spring return and nonspring motors return to closed position on minimum signal. Electrically Normally Open: Both spring return and non-spring return motors return to open position on minimum signal. Ambient Temperature Ratings: -40 to 150 F (-40 to 66 C). Shaft: 3/8 in. [9.5 mm] square. Approvals: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. E4436; Guide No. XAPX. Canadian Standards Association Certified: General listed File No. LR1620; Guide No. 400-E.
Accessories: 198162AA Internal Transformer 120/208/240 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162EA Internal Transformer; 120 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162GA Internal Transformer; 220 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162JA Internal Transformer; 24 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary (for electrical isolation). 220736A Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; one switch, can be field-installed on TRADELINE models. 220736B Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; two switches, can be field-installed on TRADELINE models. 220738A Adapter Bracket raises motor shaft height by 19 mm to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. 220741A Screw Terminal Adapter converts the standard quick-connect terminals to screw terminals. 221455A Infinitely Adjustable Crank Arm, can rotate through downward position and clear motor base without requiring an adapter bracket. 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit provides NEMA 3 rating for Modutrol IV Motors mounted in position other than upright. 4074EZE Bag Assembly with parts that can provide CE compliance. 7617ADW Crank Arm, can rotate through downward position and clear motor base without requiring an adapter bracket. ES650-117 Explosion-Proof Housing encloses motor for use in explosive atmospheres. Not for use with Q5001 (or any other valve linkages). Order separately from O-Z/Gedney Inc. To order, contact: O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and Controls, (918) 641-7381 or (918) 641-7374; or write to: O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and Controls P.O. Box 471650 Tulsa, OK 74147-1650 (Requires Honeywell 7617DM Coupling.) Q100 Linkage connects Modutrol Motor to V51 Butterfly Valve. Requires the 220738A Adapter Bracket. Q181 Auxiliary Potentiometer for sequence or unison control of 1 to 4 additional modulating (Series 90) motors. Q5001 Bracket and Linkage Assembly connects Modutrol IV Motor to water or steam valve. Q605 Damper Linkage connects motor to damper. Includes motor crank arm. Q607 External Auxiliary Switch controls auxiliary equipment as a function of motor position.
63-2202 4
INSTALLATION
When Installing this Product...
1. 2. 3. 4. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the product to make sure the product is suitable for your application. Installer must be a trained, experienced service technician. After installation is complete, check out product operation as provided in these instructions.
Mounting
Use the following guidelines for proper motor mounting: Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal. Mounting flanges extending from motor housing base are drilled for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) machine screws or bolts. Non-Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in the closed position (at the counterclockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end). Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in their normal position. Normally closed models are shipped at the counterclockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end. Normally open models are shipped at the clockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end.
M7272, M7282, M7285, M7286
VERTICAL REFERENCE 10 FULLY CLOSED 10 VERTICAL REFERENCE FULLY CLOSED
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard. Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry. Disconnect all power supplies before installation. Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than one disconnect.
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Can damage the motor beyond repair. Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench. Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train and stroke limit contacts. IMPORTANT Always conduct a thorough checkout when installation is complete.
90 160
FULLY OPEN
FULLY OPEN 90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE
SPRING RETURN MOTORS M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, M7294

VERTICAL REFERENCE 10 45 FULLY CLOSED 160 90 VERTICAL REFERENCE FULLY CLOSED
Location
Allow enough clearance for accessory installation and motor servicing when selecting a location (see Fig. 1). If located outdoors, use liquid-tight conduit connectors with the junction box to provide NEMA 3 weather protection. If mounted outdoors in a position other than upright, install a 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit and liquid-tight connectors to provide NEMA 3 protection.
CAUTION
Motor Damage Hazard. Deteriorating vapors and acid fumes can damage metal parts. Install motor in areas free of acid fumes and other deteriorating vapors. In excessive salt environments, mounting base and screws should be zinc or cadmium plated, not stainless steel or brass. Use the 220738A Adapter Bracket for mounting on these surfaces.
90 DEGREE STROKE
FULLY OPEN
FULLY OPEN 160 DEGREE STROKE

M5509
NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS
Fig. 2. Motor shaft position at limit of rotation (viewed from motor power end).
63-2202 4
Adapter Bracket
The 220738A Adapter Bracket, positioned between the motor and the equipment, raises motor shaft height by 0.75 in. (19 mm) to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. The following applications require this bracket: Q607 External Auxiliary Switch. Damper linkage applications requiring added clearance to allow: Crank arm rotation through the downward position. Sufficient damper linkage to reach the motor shaft. All valve linkages except the Q5001. NOTE: When the bracket is not used in a replacement application, the damper linkage requires adjustment for the new shaft position. To mount the motor with the bracket: 1. Mount the bracket to the equipment with existing or standard bolts. 2. Using the provided bolts, mount the motor to the bracket threaded holes. See Fig. 3. For valve linkage applications (other than the Q5001): 1. Mount the bracket to the linkage. 2. Position the motor on the bracket to align the motor shaft with the linkage. 3. Attach the motor to the bracket with the four bolts provided. See Fig. 4.
Damper Linkages
The motor does not include a crank arm. Order the crank arm separately (see Accessories in the Specifications section). For detailed instructions on the assembly of specific linkages, refer to the Installation Instructions packed with the linkage.
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Stalling a motor can damage the drive shaft. Ensure installation of motors and linkages allows the motor to drive through full stroke without obstruction.
Valve Linkages
The Q100 Linkage requires a 220738A Adapter Bracket for all valve applications. Applications with the Q5001 Valve Linkage do not require the 220738A Adapter Bracket (see Fig. 4). For detailed instructions on specific linkage assemblies, refer to the instruction sheet packed with the linkage. In general, check the following points when installing a motor and linkage: Adjust valve and louver-type damper linkages so the damper or valve moves through only the maximum required distance while the motor moves through its full stroke. With modulating control, maximum damper opening should be no more than 60 degrees. Little additional airflow is provided beyond this point. Do not exceed load and torque ratings in any application.
Junction Box
When used with liquid-tight conduit connectors, the junction box provides NEMA 3 weather protection for the motor. The junction box, standard with replacement motors, encloses the terminals and provides knockouts for wiring conduits. Housing an internal transformer or internal auxiliary switches requires using a junction box.
63-2202 4
Wiring
3.
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard. Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry. Disconnect all power supplies before installation. Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than one disconnect. IMPORTANT All wiring must agree with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. 1. 2. Ensure that the voltage and frequency stamped on the motor correspond with the power supply characteristics. When connecting several motors in parallel, ensure that the power supply VA rating is large enough to provide power to all motors used without overloading.
4. 5. 6.
Fig. 5 shows that motor terminals are quick-connects located on top of the printed circuit board. To access the wiring compartment: a. Remove the four screws from the junction box top. b. Lift off the cover. Fig. 6 shows the internal wiring schematic. Refer to Fig. 7 and 8 for typical wiring.
Wire the motor as follows: 1. Remove the wiring box cover by removing the four screws holding the cover to the motor. 2. Wire motor to system using quick-connect terminals in wiring box. 3. Replace wiring box cover.
A
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH F (TEST) V(-) POWER END OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED) LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
B
(+) F RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
Y(+)
POWER END (-) T2 T1 LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED)
T2 T1
NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 2 TO 10 VDC INPUT MOTORS
NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 4 TO 20 mA NONADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS
SPAN ADJUST POTENTIOMETER RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH (+)

SPAN ADJUST MIN MAX
INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE) POWER END OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED)
() T2 T1
START ADJUST MIN MAX
LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH START ADJUST POTENTIOMETER NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 4 TO 20 mA ADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS
M5777
Fig. 5. Terminals and adjustments.
63-2202 4
F T2 CONTROLLER BRAKE CIRCUITRY 3 1
MOTOR T1 T2
1 L1 (HOT) L2
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT TRIAC SWITCHING TRIAC SWITCHING
L1 (HOT) L2
+
F
24V
T1 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED. CONNECTING F TO WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.
M5778
2 FEEDBACK POTENTIOMETER
Fig. 7. Typical system wiring.

CLOSE LIMIT OPEN LIMIT -20 mA ONTROLLER MOTOR
L1 L2 (HOT)
+
CCW WINDING (CLOSE) 2 CW WINDING (OPEN)
+
F 2
T1 T2
MOTOR
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. DIRECTION OF MOTOR TRAVEL AS VIEWED FROM POWER END. INTERNALLY MOUNTED TRANSFORMER. DO NOT CONNECT POWER SUPPLY TO T1 AND T2. BRAKE CIRCUITRY ONLY ON SPRING RETURN MODELS.
M5511
T1 T2 2
+
F
2 3
MOTOR
+
F 2
T1 T2
Fig. 6. Series 72 motor internal wiring schematic.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED. CONNECTING F TO WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.
M5774
Fig. 8. Driving up to six motors from one 4 to 20 mA controller.
63-2202 4

Zero and Span Adjustment for M7284Q and M7285Q Motors (Fig. 5.)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Adjust the start potentiometer fully clockwise (maximum zero) and the span potentiometer fully counterclockwise (minimum span). Set the controller current to the value required to drive the motor to the closed position. Turn the start potentiometer slowly counterclockwise until the motor begins to open. This is defined as the start or zero setting. Set the controller current to the value required to drive the motor to the fully open position. The motor will open. Turn the span potentiometer clockwise until the motor starts to close. The difference between the fully open span position current and the zero position current is defined as the operating span. Recheck the start and readjust the span potentiometer P1 if necessary. Turn the start potentiometer clockwise to increase the zero position. Recheck the span and readjust the span potentiometer if necessary. Turn it clockwise to increase the full span position. For sequential operation, as shown in Fig. 9, repeat the above steps for each motor.
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION FOR ADJUSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN MODELS
20 (10)
Auxiliary Switches
CAUTION
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Can damage the motor beyond repair. Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench. Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train and stroke limit contacts. Adjustable cams actuate the auxiliary switches. These cams can be set to actuate the switches at any angle within the motor stroke. Select switch differential of 1 or 10 . Motors with factory added auxiliary switches are shipped in the closed position (fully counterclockwise, as viewed from the motor power end) with auxiliary cams set to actuate switches 30 from the closed position and to provide 1 degree differential. With the motor in the closed (fully counterclockwise) position, the auxiliary switch breaks contacts R-B. See Fig. 10 for auxiliary switch wiring. TRADELINE Motors are shipped with auxiliary switch cams that permit acceptance of 220736A,B Internal Auxiliary Switch Kits. Refer to form 63-2228 for 220736A,B Installation Instructions.
6. 7. 8.
CONTROL OUTPUT mA CURRENT (OR VOLTS DC)
16 (8)
12 (6)
8 (4)
4 (2)
0 OPEN CLOSED MOTOR 1 1 1 3 CLOSED OPEN MOTOR 2 3 CLOSED OPEN MOTOR 3 3 2
MOTOR 1 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 4 AND 12 mA; FULLY CLOSED AT 4 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 12 mA. MOTOR 2 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 8 AND 16 mA; FULLY CLOSED AT 8 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 16 mA. MOTOR 3 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 12 AND 20 mA SIGNAL; FULLY CLOSED AT 12 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 20 mA.
UP TO 6 MOTORS CAN BE DRIVEN SEQUENTIALY OR IN UNISON FROM ONE CONTROLLER. ADJUST ZERO ADJUST AND SPAN ADJUST POTENTIOMETERS TO ACHIEVE DESIRED SEQUENCE. M2893A
Fig. 9. Sequential operation of motors.
63-2202 4
10
Auxiliary Switch Adjustment

IMPORTANT When adjusting the auxiliary switch cams use the following procedure: 1.Insert 1/8 in. screwdriver blade into a slot on cam and move the screwdriver top as far as possible in the required direction. See Fig. 10. 2.Repeat step 1 in successive cam slots until the cam is in the required position. Use the following procedure to obtain the desired auxiliary switch settings: 1. Remove the top cover from the motor to gain access to the motor terminals and auxiliary cams. 2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. 3. Connect a current source to the positive and negative terminals. 4. Drive the motor to the position where the auxiliary equipment is to be switched by increasing or decreasing the current. 5. For a switch differential of 1 , check continuity of auxiliary switch contacts R-B and rotate the cam as follows: a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam clockwise until the R-B contacts close. b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam counterclockwise until the R-B contacts open. 6. 7. 8. For a switch differential of 10 rotate the cam approximately 180 so the slow-rise portion of the cam actuates the switch. Check continuity of the auxiliary switch contacts R-B. Rotate the cam as follows: a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam counterclockwise until the R-B contacts close. b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam clockwise until the R-B contacts open. c. Make final adjustment in the proper direction to obtain contact make or break at the desired position. Check for the proper differential and switching of the auxiliary equipment by driving the motor though the full stroke in both directions. Disconnect power, remove current source, reconnect the controller, and replace the top cover on the motor.
9. 10.
NOTE: Changing the differential from 1 to 10 reverses the switching action. For example, with a 10 differential, switch contacts R-B make and R-W break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation. With a 1 differential, switch contacts R-W make and R-B break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation.
MOVE SCREWDRIVER AT TOP ONLY TO ADJUST CAM. 1/8 INCH STRAIGHT-BLADE SCREWDRIVER
NOTE: CAMS ARE OFFSET VERTICALLY TO PROVIDE BETTER VIEW OF BACK CAM.
SLOW RISE PORTION (APPROX. 10 DIFF.) INNER AUXILIARY CAM (BLUE)
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH
FAST RISE PORTION (APPROX. 1 DIFF.) LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTER AUXILIARY CAM (RED)
FAST RISE PORTION (APPROX. 1 DIFF.)
SLOW RISE PORTION (APPROX. 10 DIFF.)
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY CAM (BLUE)
MOTOR OPEN
POWER END
MOTOR CLOSE
LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY POWER END SWITCH OF MOTOR
OUTER AUXILIARY CAM (RED)

M17101
Fig. 10. Auxiliary switch adjustment.
11
63-2202 4
OPERATION AND CHECKOUT

Operation
The motor feedback potentiometer and control current input circuit form a bridge circuit. As long as the final control element remains at the position proportional to the input current from the controller, the circuit is balanced, and the motor does not run. When the value of the controlled medium changes, the current from the controller changes, and unbalance is amplified to energize the Triac switching to run the motor in the proper direction to correct the change in the temperature or the pressure. The motor turns the feedback potentiometer to rebalance the circuit and stop the motor. Inspect the motor, linkage, and valve or damper to see that all mechanical connections are correct and secure. In damper installations, the pushrod should not extend more than a few inches past the ball joints. Check to see that there is adequate clearance for the linkage to move through its stroke without binding or striking other objects. See controller or system instructions for additional checkout procedures.
Motor Operation Checkout

Check motor operation as follows: 1. To close the motor, open terminals +, -, and F. 2. To open the motor, connect terminal F to the negative (-) motor terminal.
Checkout
After installation and linkage adjustment, operate the motor through the controller. Make sure that: The motor properly operates the damper or valve. The motor responds properly as the input is varied. The auxiliary switch, if used, operates at the desired point of motor rotation.
63-22024
B.B. Rev. 11-00
Printed in U.S.A. on recycled paper containing at least 10% post-consumer paper fibers.
8/
8.3 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SC WITH MANUAL ACTUATOR (S5-S8)
8. 5
8/
DAMPER TYPE K-405
8.4 ROUND CONTROL DAMPER SF WITH MANUAL ACTUATOR (S4)
8. 6
8/
8.5 ROUND AUTOMATIC CONTROL AF8 DAMPER ON EDGE WET SECTION
8. 7
DESCRIZIONE
ASSIEME ATTUATORE AF8 (HONEYWELL)

CODICE
C04132
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
DATA FIRMA
29/09/2004 Michele
SCALA
1:2
DOCUMENTO
T04132
8/
TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL SUPPLY STROKE TIMING IMPUT RANGE
AUTOMATIC ACTUATOR FOR HOOD DAMPERS
HIC105HIC110 HONEYWELL M7284 C1000 440/3/60 V/Hz 90. 30 sec. 0 20 mA
DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT OF HONEYWELL SERVOMOTOR 1) Disconnect the electrical connections 2) Unloose the screws between the Servomotor and its support 3) Remove the Servomotor 4) Arrange the blade/s of the damper in "close position" 5) Assemble the new Servomotor with the shaft in "close position" 6) Tighten the screws between the new Servomotor and its support 7) Restore the electrical connections
NOTE: For the instruction manual see below
8. 8
Series 72 Modutrol IV Motors

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Replaces M744S,T,Y and M745S,T,Y Motors. M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, and M7294 are non-spring return motors; M7272, M7282, M7285, and M7286 are spring return motors. Oil immersed motor and gear train for reliable performance and long life. Wiring box provides NEMA 3 weather protection. Actuator motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac. Models available with factory installed transformer or an internal transformer can be field added. Quick connect terminals standardscrew terminal adapter available. Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older motors is standard with replacement motors.
APPLICATION
The Series 72 Modutrol IV Motors are used to control dampers and valves. The motors accept a current or voltage signal from an electronic controller to position a damper or valve at any point between open and closed.
Nominal timing of 30 seconds for 90 stroke and 60 seconds for 160 stroke. Valve and damper linkages, explosion-proof housing, and auxiliary switches available as accessories. Spring return motors are rated for 25 lb.-in. and 60 lb.-in torque. Non-spring return motors are rated for 35 lb.-in., 75 lb.-in., 150 lb.-in., and 300 lb.-in. torque. Models available with adjustable start (zero) and span. Models available with 4 to 20 mA input signal. Models available with 2 to 10 Vdc input signal. Die-cast aluminum housing.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1 Features ........................................................................... 1 Specifications ................................................................... 2 Ordering Information ........................................................ 2 Installation ........................................................................ 5 Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 10 Operation and Checkout .................................................. 12
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 2000 Honeywell All Rights Reserved
63- 2202- 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Models: TRADELINE models are selected and packaged to provide ease of stocking, ease of handling and maximum replacement value. TRADELINE model specifications are the same as those of standard models unless specified otherwise. TRADELINE models have auxiliary switch cams. NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams cannot be field-added.)
IMPORTANT The specifications given in this publication do not include normal manufacturing tolerances. Therefore, an individual unit may not exactly match the listed specifications. Also, this product is tested and calibrated under closely controlled conditions and some minor differences in performance can be expected if those conditions are changed. Modutrol IV Order Number Guide: See Table 1. Dimensions: See Fig. 1.
Table 1. Modutrol IV Order Number Guide. M Motor 72 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc Controla 6 35 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 7 25 lb-in. Spring Return 75 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 8 60 lb-in. Spring Return 150 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 9 300 lb-in. Non-Spring Return 1 Single-ended shaft Non-Spring Return 2 Normally Closedb Spring Return 4 5 6 A B C D F G L Q M
a b
Dual-ended shaft
Non-Spring Return Normally Closedb Spring Return Normally Openc Spring Return Fixed Stroke Normally Closedb
0 Auxiliary Switches 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches 0 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches 0 Auxiliary Switch 1 Auxiliary Switch 2 Auxiliary Switches XXXX
Adjustable Stroke Fixed Stroke Adjustable Stroke Fixed Stroke Normally Openc Normally Closedb
61
See Catalog for Complete O.S. Number
Adjustable zero and span. Electrically normally closed. Shaft rotates clockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor drives to normally closed position when powered with control wiring not connected. c Electrically normally open. Shaft rotates counterclockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor drives to normally open position when powered with control wiring not connected.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE wholesaler or distributor, refer to the TRADELINE Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number. If you have additional questions, need further information, or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone: 1. Your local Home and Building Control Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory). 2. Home and Building Control Customer Relations Honeywell, 1885 Douglas Drive North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386 In CanadaHoneywell Limited/Honeywell Limite, 35 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough, Ontario M1V 4Z9. International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Australia, Canada, Finland, France, Germany, Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, Spain, Taiwan, United Kingdom, U.S.A.
63-22024 2
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW OF BRACKET
4-7/8 (124) 4-5/8 (116) 5-1/2 (140)
4-1/4 (107) 5-13/16 (148) 2-5/16 (58)
11/16 (17) 1/4 (7) 4 5 4-1/16 (103) 4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) WIRING BOX 3/4 (19) 13/16 (20) 4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) 4-7/8 (124) 5-9/16 (141)
POWER END
1/4 (7)
MOTOR 1 6-7/16 (164)
SPRING RETURN MODEL SHOWN

1 2 SOME MODELS DO NOT HAVE AN AUXILIARY SHAFT. ALL OTHER DIMENSIONS ARE THE SAME. FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-3/4 (222); FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-1/4 (210); NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS 7-5/16 (185). FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS (SHOWN). FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN MODELS. FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS.
M17089BB
AUXILARY END
POWER END
5-3/8 (137) 2-9/16 (66)
9/16 (15) 2
3 4
ADAPTER BRACKET
3/4 (19) 5
Fig. 1. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor dimensions in in. (mm). Controller: These motors can be used with any electronic controller that provides a stable noise-free proportional current output as specified in Electrical Ratings, Input Range below. Electrical Ratings: Power Consumption: See Table 2. Input Range: Current, Nonadjustable: 4 to 20 mA nominal, 25 mA maximum. Current, Adjustable: 4 to 20 mA adjustable, 50 mA maximum. Zero/Null (Motor Closed): 0.08 to 18 mA. Span: 1.8 to 18 mA. Voltage, Nonadjustable: 2 to 10 Vdc. Input Impedance: 4 to 20 mA Input: 100 ohms. 2 to 10 Vdc Input: 400K ohms. Table 2. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor Power Consumption Ratings (at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz). Power Consumption Model M7261 M7272 M7274 M7281 M7282 M7284 M7285 M7286 M7294 19 26 15 23 28 23 28 23 23 Watts 0.20 0.26 0.71 0.24 0.28 0.24 0.28 1.00 0.24 Amps
63-22024
Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps): See Table 3. Table 3. Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps). One Contact Ratinga Full Load Locked Rotor
a
120V 7.2 43.2 3.6 21.6
240V
40 VA pilot duty, 120/240 Vac on opposite contact.
Stroke: Fixed 90 or 160 models available. Other models available with field adjustable strokes from 90 to 160 . Stroke adjusted by means of cams located in the wiring compartment. Timing: Nominal 30 seconds for 90 stroke and 60 seconds for 160 stroke. Dead Weight Load On Shaft: 200 lb (91 kg) on motor power or auxiliary end; maximum combined load of 300 lb (136 kg). Motor Rotation: Closed: Counterclockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor power end. Open: Clockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor power end. Mechanically Normally Closed: Spring return. Normally closed motors rotate to closed position on power loss. Mechanically Normally Open: Spring return. Normally open motors rotate to open position on power loss. Electrically Normally Closed: Both spring return and nonspring motors return to closed position on minimum signal. Electrically Normally Open: Both spring return and non-spring return motors return to open position on minimum signal. Ambient Temperature Ratings: -40 to 150 F (-40 to 66 C). Shaft: 3/8 in. [9.5 mm] square. Approvals: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. E4436; Guide No. XAPX. Canadian Standards Association Certified: General listed File No. LR1620; Guide No. 400-E.
Accessories: 198162AA Internal Transformer 120/208/240 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162EA Internal Transformer; 120 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162GA Internal Transformer; 220 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary. 198162JA Internal Transformer; 24 Vac 50/60 Hz primary, 24 Vac secondary (for electrical isolation). 220736A Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; one switch, can be field-installed on TRADELINE models. 220736B Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; two switches, can be field-installed on TRADELINE models. 220738A Adapter Bracket raises motor shaft height by 19 mm to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. 220741A Screw Terminal Adapter converts the standard quick-connect terminals to screw terminals. 221455A Infinitely Adjustable Crank Arm, can rotate through downward position and clear motor base without requiring an adapter bracket. 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit provides NEMA 3 rating for Modutrol IV Motors mounted in position other than upright. 4074EZE Bag Assembly with parts that can provide CE compliance. 7617ADW Crank Arm, can rotate through downward position and clear motor base without requiring an adapter bracket. ES650-117 Explosion-Proof Housing encloses motor for use in explosive atmospheres. Not for use with Q5001 (or any other valve linkages). Order separately from O-Z/Gedney Inc. To order, contact: O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and Controls, (918) 641-7381 or (918) 641-7374; or write to: O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and Controls P.O. Box 471650 Tulsa, OK 74147-1650 (Requires Honeywell 7617DM Coupling.) Q100 Linkage connects Modutrol Motor to V51 Butterfly Valve. Requires the 220738A Adapter Bracket. Q181 Auxiliary Potentiometer for sequence or unison control of 1 to 4 additional modulating (Series 90) motors. Q5001 Bracket and Linkage Assembly connects Modutrol IV Motor to water or steam valve. Q605 Damper Linkage connects motor to damper. Includes motor crank arm. Q607 External Auxiliary Switch controls auxiliary equipment as a function of motor position.
63-2202 4
INSTALLATION
When Installing this Product...
1. 2. 3. 4. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the product to make sure the product is suitable for your application. Installer must be a trained, experienced service technician. After installation is complete, check out product operation as provided in these instructions.
Mounting
Use the following guidelines for proper motor mounting: Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal. Mounting flanges extending from motor housing base are drilled for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) machine screws or bolts. Non-Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in the closed position (at the counterclockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end). Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in their normal position. Normally closed models are shipped at the counterclockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end. Normally open models are shipped at the clockwise rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end.
M7272, M7282, M7285, M7286
VERTICAL REFERENCE 10 FULLY CLOSED 10 VERTICAL REFERENCE FULLY CLOSED
CAUTION
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Can damage the motor beyond repair. Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench. Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train and stroke limit contacts. IMPORTANT Always conduct a thorough checkout when installation is complete.
90 160
FULLY OPEN
FULLY OPEN 90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE
SPRING RETURN MOTORS M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, M7294

VERTICAL REFERENCE 10 45 FULLY CLOSED 160 90 VERTICAL REFERENCE FULLY CLOSED
Location
Allow enough clearance for accessory installation and motor servicing when selecting a location (see Fig. 1). If located outdoors, use liquid-tight conduit connectors with the junction box to provide NEMA 3 weather protection. If mounted outdoors in a position other than upright, install a 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit and liquid-tight connectors to provide NEMA 3 protection.
CAUTION
Motor Damage Hazard. Deteriorating vapors and acid fumes can damage metal parts. Install motor in areas free of acid fumes and other deteriorating vapors. In excessive salt environments, mounting base and screws should be zinc or cadmium plated, not stainless steel or brass. Use the 220738A Adapter Bracket for mounting on these surfaces.
90 DEGREE STROKE
FULLY OPEN
FULLY OPEN 160 DEGREE STROKE

M5509
NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS
Fig. 2. Motor shaft position at limit of rotation (viewed from motor power end).
63-2202 4
Adapter Bracket
The 220738A Adapter Bracket, positioned between the motor and the equipment, raises motor shaft height by 0.75 in. (19 mm) to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. The following applications require this bracket: Q607 External Auxiliary Switch. Damper linkage applications requiring added clearance to allow: Crank arm rotation through the downward position. Sufficient damper linkage to reach the motor shaft. All valve linkages except the Q5001. NOTE: When the bracket is not used in a replacement application, the damper linkage requires adjustment for the new shaft position. To mount the motor with the bracket: 1. Mount the bracket to the equipment with existing or standard bolts. 2. Using the provided bolts, mount the motor to the bracket threaded holes. See Fig. 3. For valve linkage applications (other than the Q5001): 1. Mount the bracket to the linkage. 2. Position the motor on the bracket to align the motor shaft with the linkage. 3. Attach the motor to the bracket with the four bolts provided. See Fig. 4.
Damper Linkages
The motor does not include a crank arm. Order the crank arm separately (see Accessories in the Specifications section). For detailed instructions on the assembly of specific linkages, refer to the Installation Instructions packed with the linkage.
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Stalling a motor can damage the drive shaft. Ensure installation of motors and linkages allows the motor to drive through full stroke without obstruction.
Valve Linkages
The Q100 Linkage requires a 220738A Adapter Bracket for all valve applications. Applications with the Q5001 Valve Linkage do not require the 220738A Adapter Bracket (see Fig. 4). For detailed instructions on specific linkage assemblies, refer to the instruction sheet packed with the linkage. In general, check the following points when installing a motor and linkage: Adjust valve and louver-type damper linkages so the damper or valve moves through only the maximum required distance while the motor moves through its full stroke. With modulating control, maximum damper opening should be no more than 60 degrees. Little additional airflow is provided beyond this point. Do not exceed load and torque ratings in any application.
Junction Box
When used with liquid-tight conduit connectors, the junction box provides NEMA 3 weather protection for the motor. The junction box, standard with replacement motors, encloses the terminals and provides knockouts for wiring conduits. Housing an internal transformer or internal auxiliary switches requires using a junction box.
63-2202 4
Wiring
3.
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard. Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry. Disconnect all power supplies before installation. Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than one disconnect. IMPORTANT All wiring must agree with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. 1. 2. Ensure that the voltage and frequency stamped on the motor correspond with the power supply characteristics. When connecting several motors in parallel, ensure that the power supply VA rating is large enough to provide power to all motors used without overloading.
4. 5. 6.
Fig. 5 shows that motor terminals are quick-connects located on top of the printed circuit board. To access the wiring compartment: a. Remove the four screws from the junction box top. b. Lift off the cover. Fig. 6 shows the internal wiring schematic. Refer to Fig. 7 and 8 for typical wiring.
Wire the motor as follows: 1. Remove the wiring box cover by removing the four screws holding the cover to the motor. 2. Wire motor to system using quick-connect terminals in wiring box. 3. Replace wiring box cover.
A
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH F (TEST) V(-) POWER END OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED) LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
B
(+) F RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
Y(+)
POWER END (-) T2 T1 LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED)
T2 T1
NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 2 TO 10 VDC INPUT MOTORS
NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 4 TO 20 mA NONADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS
SPAN ADJUST POTENTIOMETER RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH (+)

SPAN ADJUST MIN MAX
INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (BLUE) POWER END OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH CAM (RED)
() T2 T1
START ADJUST MIN MAX
LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH START ADJUST POTENTIOMETER NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. 4 TO 20 mA ADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS
M5777
Fig. 5. Terminals and adjustments.
63-2202 4
F T2 CONTROLLER BRAKE CIRCUITRY 3 1
MOTOR T1 T2
1 L1 (HOT) L2
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT TRIAC SWITCHING TRIAC SWITCHING
L1 (HOT) L2
+
F
24V
T1 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED. CONNECTING F TO WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.
M5778
2 FEEDBACK POTENTIOMETER
Fig. 7. Typical system wiring.

CLOSE LIMIT OPEN LIMIT -20 mA ONTROLLER MOTOR
L1 L2 (HOT)
+
CCW WINDING (CLOSE) 2 CW WINDING (OPEN)
+
F 2
T1 T2
MOTOR
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. DIRECTION OF MOTOR TRAVEL AS VIEWED FROM POWER END. INTERNALLY MOUNTED TRANSFORMER. DO NOT CONNECT POWER SUPPLY TO T1 AND T2. BRAKE CIRCUITRY ONLY ON SPRING RETURN MODELS.
M5511
T1 T2 2
+
F
2 3
MOTOR
+
F 2
T1 T2
Fig. 6. Series 72 motor internal wiring schematic.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED. CONNECTING F TO WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.
M5774
Fig. 8. Driving up to six motors from one 4 to 20 mA controller.
63-2202 4

Zero and Span Adjustment for M7284Q and M7285Q Motors (Fig. 5.)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Adjust the start potentiometer fully clockwise (maximum zero) and the span potentiometer fully counterclockwise (minimum span). Set the controller current to the value required to drive the motor to the closed position. Turn the start potentiometer slowly counterclockwise until the motor begins to open. This is defined as the start or zero setting. Set the controller current to the value required to drive the motor to the fully open position. The motor will open. Turn the span potentiometer clockwise until the motor starts to close. The difference between the fully open span position current and the zero position current is defined as the operating span. Recheck the start and readjust the span potentiometer P1 if necessary. Turn the start potentiometer clockwise to increase the zero position. Recheck the span and readjust the span potentiometer if necessary. Turn it clockwise to increase the full span position. For sequential operation, as shown in Fig. 9, repeat the above steps for each motor.
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION FOR ADJUSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN MODELS
20 (10)
Auxiliary Switches
CAUTION
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard. Can damage the motor beyond repair. Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench. Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train and stroke limit contacts. Adjustable cams actuate the auxiliary switches. These cams can be set to actuate the switches at any angle within the motor stroke. Select switch differential of 1 or 10 . Motors with factory added auxiliary switches are shipped in the closed position (fully counterclockwise, as viewed from the motor power end) with auxiliary cams set to actuate switches 30 from the closed position and to provide 1 degree differential. With the motor in the closed (fully counterclockwise) position, the auxiliary switch breaks contacts R-B. See Fig. 10 for auxiliary switch wiring. TRADELINE Motors are shipped with auxiliary switch cams that permit acceptance of 220736A,B Internal Auxiliary Switch Kits. Refer to form 63-2228 for 220736A,B Installation Instructions.
6. 7. 8.
CONTROL OUTPUT mA CURRENT (OR VOLTS DC)
16 (8)
12 (6)
8 (4)
4 (2)
0 OPEN CLOSED MOTOR 1 1 1 3 CLOSED OPEN MOTOR 2 3 CLOSED OPEN MOTOR 3 3 2
MOTOR 1 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 4 AND 12 mA; FULLY CLOSED AT 4 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 12 mA. MOTOR 2 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 8 AND 16 mA; FULLY CLOSED AT 8 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 16 mA. MOTOR 3 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 12 AND 20 mA SIGNAL; FULLY CLOSED AT 12 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 20 mA.
UP TO 6 MOTORS CAN BE DRIVEN SEQUENTIALY OR IN UNISON FROM ONE CONTROLLER. ADJUST ZERO ADJUST AND SPAN ADJUST POTENTIOMETERS TO ACHIEVE DESIRED SEQUENCE. M2893A
Fig. 9. Sequential operation of motors.
63-2202 4
10
Auxiliary Switch Adjustment

IMPORTANT When adjusting the auxiliary switch cams use the following procedure: 1.Insert 1/8 in. screwdriver blade into a slot on cam and move the screwdriver top as far as possible in the required direction. See Fig. 10. 2.Repeat step 1 in successive cam slots until the cam is in the required position. Use the following procedure to obtain the desired auxiliary switch settings: 1. Remove the top cover from the motor to gain access to the motor terminals and auxiliary cams. 2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. 3. Connect a current source to the positive and negative terminals. 4. Drive the motor to the position where the auxiliary equipment is to be switched by increasing or decreasing the current. 5. For a switch differential of 1 , check continuity of auxiliary switch contacts R-B and rotate the cam as follows: a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam clockwise until the R-B contacts close. b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam counterclockwise until the R-B contacts open. 6. 7. 8. For a switch differential of 10 rotate the cam approximately 180 so the slow-rise portion of the cam actuates the switch. Check continuity of the auxiliary switch contacts R-B. Rotate the cam as follows: a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam counterclockwise until the R-B contacts close. b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam clockwise until the R-B contacts open. c. Make final adjustment in the proper direction to obtain contact make or break at the desired position. Check for the proper differential and switching of the auxiliary equipment by driving the motor though the full stroke in both directions. Disconnect power, remove current source, reconnect the controller, and replace the top cover on the motor.
9. 10.
NOTE: Changing the differential from 1 to 10 reverses the switching action. For example, with a 10 differential, switch contacts R-B make and R-W break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation. With a 1 differential, switch contacts R-W make and R-B break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation.
MOVE SCREWDRIVER AT TOP ONLY TO ADJUST CAM. 1/8 INCH STRAIGHT-BLADE SCREWDRIVER
NOTE: CAMS ARE OFFSET VERTICALLY TO PROVIDE BETTER VIEW OF BACK CAM.
SLOW RISE PORTION (APPROX. 10 DIFF.) INNER AUXILIARY CAM (BLUE)
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH
FAST RISE PORTION (APPROX. 1 DIFF.) LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY SWITCH OUTER AUXILIARY CAM (RED)
FAST RISE PORTION (APPROX. 1 DIFF.)
SLOW RISE PORTION (APPROX. 10 DIFF.)
RIGHT/INNER AUXILIARY SWITCH INNER AUXILIARY CAM (BLUE)
MOTOR OPEN
POWER END
MOTOR CLOSE
LEFT/OUTER AUXILIARY POWER END SWITCH OF MOTOR
OUTER AUXILIARY CAM (RED)

M17101
Fig. 10. Auxiliary switch adjustment.
11
63-2202 4
OPERATION AND CHECKOUT

Operation
The motor feedback potentiometer and control current input circuit form a bridge circuit. As long as the final control element remains at the position proportional to the input current from the controller, the circuit is balanced, and the motor does not run. When the value of the controlled medium changes, the current from the controller changes, and unbalance is amplified to energize the Triac switching to run the motor in the proper direction to correct the change in the temperature or the pressure. The motor turns the feedback potentiometer to rebalance the circuit and stop the motor. Inspect the motor, linkage, and valve or damper to see that all mechanical connections are correct and secure. In damper installations, the pushrod should not extend more than a few inches past the ball joints. Check to see that there is adequate clearance for the linkage to move through its stroke without binding or striking other objects. See controller or system instructions for additional checkout procedures.
Motor Operation Checkout

Check motor operation as follows: 1. To close the motor, open terminals +, -, and F. 2. To open the motor, connect terminal F to the negative (-) motor terminal.
Checkout
After installation and linkage adjustment, operate the motor through the controller. Make sure that: The motor properly operates the damper or valve. The motor responds properly as the input is varied. The auxiliary switch, if used, operates at the desired point of motor rotation.
63-22024
B.B. Rev. 11-00
Printed in U.S.A. on recycled paper containing at least 10% post-consumer paper fibers.
8/
8.6 ROUND MANUAL CONTROL DAMPER ON EDGE DRY SECTION
8. 9
8/
MANUAL CONTROL AF16 FOR HOOD DAMPERS (DWG. T05514)
8.10
DESCRIZIONE
COMANDO MANUALE AF16

CODICE
C0T5514
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
Fe360
5
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
15/03/2005 Michele
1:2.5
FORMATO
A3
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
T05514
9/
9. ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
9.1 P&I DIAGRAMS FLOW SHEET P&I DIAGRAM G1 P&I DIAGRAM G2
(DWG. TA0406.07) (DWG. IMECO) (DWG. IMECO)
see page # 1.1 see page # 7.1 see page # 7.2
9.1
9/
9.2
WET END HOOD BURNER CONTROL PANEL - Q1ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS IMECO
9.2
9/
9.3
DRY END HOOD BURNER CONTROL PANEL -Q2ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS IMECO
9.3
IMECO
9/
9.4
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS LIST
FIELD/DCS CONNECTION CABLE LIST DWG. A0406.07C/0./6 HOODS PLANT ELECTRIC DOCUMENT.ORGANIZATION DWG.A0406.07L/0/21
9.4
Recard CMPC ABSORMEX PM2

FIELD/DCS CONNECTION CABLE LIST
NOTE: ALL CABLES FROM AND TO MOTOR DRIVER OR MCC ARE MISSING IN THIS CABLE LIST. PLEASE IT NEEDS TO CONSIDERER THEM ACCORDING WITH REQUEST LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
DCS CABLE LIST

A406C0801
C
DCS CABLE LIST

A406C0805
C
DCS CABLE LIST

A406C0802
SUPPLY CABLE LIST

A406C0806
CABLE CODE CONTAINED PREFIX DESTINATION MAEP P S C

POWER SUPPLY CABLE SHIELDED CABLE COMMON CABLE MOISTURE ANAL. PANEL WET BURNER PANEL DRY BURNER PANEL ELECTROP. PANEL SKID FIELD DEVICE PLANT FIELD DEVICE COATING ELEC.PANEL COATING PNEUM.PANEL
NUMBER 000 ------------999

A B
DCS CABLE LIST

B
BEP1/BEP2/Q6 PANEL AUX CABLE LIST

A406C0807
BEP1 BEP2 SCPP1 SF PF CEP1 CPP1
A406C0803
DCS CABLE LIST

A406C0804
rev.
modif.
date.
customer
order
RECARD CMPC ABSORMEX PM2

inst. unit prev.
A406
des. date
3
FIELD/DCS CONNECTION CABLE LIST CABLES LIST

5 4
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
0
rev.
A0406.07C
2
6
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CABLE LIST
D
DCS PANEL
CABLE
NUMBER TYPE
TERMINAL
REFERENCE
DCS ANALOG IN
+24 IN1+ GND +24 IN2+ GND +24 IN3+ GND +24 IN4+ GND +24 IN5+ GND +24 IN6+ GND +24 IN7+ GND +24 IN8+ GND +24 IN9+ GND +24 IN10+ GND +24 IN11+ GND +24 IN12+ GND
date. customer inst. unit
SPF001 SPF002 SPF003 SPF004 SPF005 SPF006 SPF007 SPF008 SPF009 SPF010 SPF011 SPF012
ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X1mm2 +SHD
+ + + + + + + + + + + + order
TT122 TT120 TT222 TT220 TT320 TT420 TT520 TT100 TT200 TT400
4-20mA 2W
0-600C
ON FIELD
4-20mA 2W 0-600C ON FIELD

C
2W 0-100 mbar PDT115 4-20mA ON
FIELD
+ A
2W 0-100 mbar PDT215 4-20mA ON
FIELD
+ + -
rev.
modif.

prev.
A406
des. date
3

5 4
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
1
rev.
A0406.07C
2
6
1
2 DCS PANEL
6
NUMBER
CABLE LIST
CABLE
10
11
12
13
TERMINAL
14
15 REFERENCE
16
TYPE
DCS ANALOG IN
DCS ANALOG OUT
+24 IN16+ GND +OUT1 -OUT1 GND +OUT2 -OUT2 GND +OUT3 -OUT3 GND +OUT4 -OUT4 GND +OUT5 -OUT5 GND +OUT6 -OUT6 GND +OUT7 -OUT7 GND +OUT8 -OUT8 GND +OUT9 -OUT9 GND +OUT10 -OUT10 GND +OUT11 -OUT11 GND +OUT12 -OUT12 GND +OUT13 -OUT13 GND
date. customer inst. unit
SPF013 SBEP101 SBEP201 SPF014 SPF015 SPF016 SPF017 SPF018 SPF019 SPF020 SPF021 SPF022 SPF023 SPF024
+ XC/15 XC/16 XC/15 XC/16 + + + + + + + + + + + order
ME 300
INC/DEC TEMPERAT. BURNER G1
4-20mA 2W FIELD 0-999
4-20mA 0-100%
BEP1 PANEL BEP2 PANEL

FIELD
INC/DEC TEMPERAT. BURNER G2
4-20mA 0-100%
TZZ400 EM101 EM102 EM103 EM104 EM105 EM106 EM107 EM108 EM109 EM110
4-20mA
0-100%
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
4-20mA
0-100%
FIELD
A
rev.
modif.

prev.
A406
des. date
3

5 4
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
2
rev.
A0406.07C
2
6
1
2 DCS PANEL
CABLE LIST
CABLE
NUMBER TYPE
10
11
12
13
TERMINAL
14
15 REFERENCE
16
+24V IN1 GND +24V IN2 GND +24V IN3 GND +24V IN4 GND +24V IN5 IN6 IN7 DCS DIGITAL INPUT IN8 IN9 IN10 +24V IN11
CPF001 CPF002 CPF003 CPF004

1 2 3 4 5
ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X1mm2 +GND
1 2 3 4
CBEP101
ANTIFLAME CABLE 16X1mm2
5 6 7 1 2 3 4
6 7 1 2 3 4 5
IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 COM IN17 IN18 IN19 IN20
rev. modif.
CBEP201
CPF005
C NO GND C NO GND BRW BLK BLU BRW BLK BLU XC/17 XC/18 XC/19 XC/20 XC/21 XC/22 XC/23 XC/24 XC/31 XC/32 XC/33 XC/34 XC/17 XC/18 XC/19 XC/20 XC/21 XC/22 XC/23 XC/24 XC/31 XC/32 XC/33 XC/34 ? ? ? ? ?
PDSAH400 PDSAH410 ZS3716 ZS3718
FIELD
FIELD
WET HOOD LIMIT SWITCH

FIELD
DRY HOOD LIMIT SWITCH

FIELD
BURNER START (CYCLE) BURNER ON TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LOW FIRE) ALARM ON GAS SELECTED OIL SELECTED BURNER START (CYCLE) BURNER ON
B C
BEP1 PANEL
BURNER G1
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LOW FIRE) ALARM ON
BEP2 PANEL
BURNER G2
GAS SELECTED OIL SELECTED COM N.O N.C N.O N.C
HOOD MOVEMENT SELECTORS

WET END OPEN WET END CLOSE DRY END OPEN DRY END CLOSE
A
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5 4
des. date
3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
3
A0406.07C
of
rev.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CABLE LIST
D
DCS PANEL
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CABLE
NUMBER TYPE
TERMINAL
REFERENCE
DCS DIGITAL OUTPUT
24V
24V
C NO DO2 C NO C DO3 NC C DO4 NC NO DO5 C NO DO6 C NO C DO7 NC C DO8 NC NO DO9 C NO C DO10 NO 1A C NO 0V 1A C NO GND DO1
6 7 8 9 10
CBEP102
11 12 13 14 15 16 6 7 8 9 10
CBEP202
11 12 13 14 15 16
XC/3 XC/4 XC/5 XC/6 XC/7 XC/8 COM XC/11 XC/12 XC/13 XC/14 XC/3 XC/4 XC/5 XC/6 XC/7 XC/8 COM XC/11 XC/12 XC/13 XC/14 + + GND
CUSTOMER EMERGENCY
BURNER START
11
12
FANS OK 10 PDSAL 310
BURNER STOP FANS OK ENABLE MODULATION
Q1 PANEL BURNER G1
11 12
CUSTOMER EMERGENCY
BURNER START BURNER STOP
FANS OK 10 PDSAL 311
FANS
OK 9
ENABLE MODULATION
Q2 PANEL BURNER G2
B
EV1 COM EV2
CPF006
RECARD ELECTROPNEUM. PANEL
rev.
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5 4
des. date
3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
4
A0406.07C
of
rev.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CABLE LIST
D
SUPPLY PANEL
CABLE
NUMBER TYPE
TERMINAL
REFERENCE
POWER SUPPLY 460VAC
L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND
PBEP101
ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X2,5mm2 +GND
XC/1 XC/2 XC/3 GND XC/1 XC/2 XC/3 GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND
BEP1 PANEL
460V-60Hz O,8KW
WET BURNER G1
PBEP201
ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X2,5mm2 +GND
BEP2 PANEL 460V-60Hz

O,8KW
DRY BURNER G2
C
PPF001 PPF002 PPF003 PPF004 PPF005 PPF006 PPF007
PZZ400
110/24VAC 29VA
FIELD
EM 1
110/24VAC 29VA FIELD
EM 2
B
POWER SUPPLY 110VAC
EM 3
EM 4
EM 5
EM 6
rev.
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5 4
des. date
3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
5
A0406.07C
of
rev.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CABLE LIST
CABLE
NUMBER
D
TYPE
TERMINAL
REFERENCE
D
POWER SUPPLY 110VAC
POWER SUPPLY220VAC POWER SUPPLY 24VDC
L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND L1 L2 GND 12+ 11XC/9 COM XC/10 GND 12+ 11XC/9 COM XC/10 GND mv+ mv0 24
date. inst. unit
PPF008 PPF009 PPF010 PPF011 PMAEP001 PMAEP002 PMAEP003 SPF023 CPF007
L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND L N GND + C N.O N.C GND + C N.O N.C GND 9+ 1213 14
order prev.
EM 7
EM 8
EM 9
EM 10
110/24VAC 29VA FIELD MOISTURE SENSOR FIELD PRESSURE SENSOR FIELD PRESSURE SENSOR FIELD
C
MT300
220VAC 100VA
PDT115
24VDC SUPPLY
PDT215
24VDC SUPPLY
BEP1 BURNER PANEL

B
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR ON BOARD

TERMINAL XC
ANTIFLAME CABLE
2X1mm2 +SCH
TERMOC.TYPE J 0-600C 4-20mA
TT121
FIELD
PDSAL310
FIELD TERMOC.TYPE J 0-600C 4-20mA
BEP2 BURNER PANEL
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR ON BOARD TERMINAL XC
SPF024 CPF008
ANTIFLAME CABLE
2X1mm2 +SCH
TT221 FIELD
PDSAL311
FIELD
Q6 MOISTURE PANEL
A
CMAEP001 CMAEP002
customer
ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X1mm2 +GND ANTIFLAME CABLE 2X2,5mm2 +GND
ME300
ZYRCONIA MOISTURE SENSOR FIELD

A
rev.
modif.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5 4
des. date
3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
6
A0406.07C
of
rev.

D
DUOSYSTEM HOOD PLANT

FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM SYMBOLS
A40608L01
G1 BURNER TEMP. CONTROL LOOP TIC100

A40608L09
MP051 / MP151 START STOP

A40608L17
HOOD RETRACTION SYSTEM

A40608L02
C
G2 BURNER TEMP. CONTROL LOOP TIC200

A40608L10
LIC1 LOGIC
A40608L18
HOOD FANS START UP/ TURN OFF CYCLES

A40608L03
DIFF.PRESS. CONTROL LOOP PDIC115

A40608L11
M09PM FAN CONTROL

A40608L19
M09PM & M22PM MOTOR FAN START/STOP

A40608L04
DIFF.PRESS. CONTROL LOOP PDIC215

A40608L12
WET HOOD MOTOR DAMPERS

A40608L20
M10PM & M11PM COMBUSTION FANS START/STOP

A40608L05
B
COMB.AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL LOOP TIC400

A40608L13
WET HOOD MOTOR DAMPERS

A40608L21
B
M07PM / M08PM FANS START/STOP

A40608L06
M07PM / M08PM SPEED SET

A40608L14
G1 BURNER START/STOP
A40608L07
WET & DRY HOOD TEMPERATURES AND PDSAH400 & 410 ALARM
A40608L15
A40608L08
A
QCS MOISTURE LOOP

A40608L16
A
rev.
modif.
date.
customer
order

inst. unit prev.
A406
des. date
HOODS PLANT ELECTRIC DOCUMENTATION

5
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
0
rev.
A0406.07L
2
21
1
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM SYMBOLS

D D
+ -
INCREASE/DECREASE COMMAND
ANALOG INDICATOR
A
>1 =
ALARM ON INDICATOR
GENERIC INTERFACE
RELAY CONTACT
1-0
TWO POSITION SELECTOR
ANALOG INDICATOR WITH LIMIT RANGE
OR FUNCTION
GENERIC SENSOR OR TRASMITTER
LIMIT SWITCH
1-2
TWO POSITION SELECTOR
SET POINT
&
I SET POINT WITH LIMIT RANGE
AND FUNCTION DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
PUSH BUTTON
A M
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL COMMAND
HI > X%
COMPARATOR (OUT = 1 WHEN IN > X)
GENERIC BUTTON
ANALOG SELECTOR
X OR
INVERTER ON INPUT
EXCLUSIVE OR FUNCTION LO < X% ELECTRIC VALVE INVERTER ON OUTPUT
COMPARATOR (OUT = 1 WHEN IN < X)
STRT
START BUTTON
LOGIC SWITCH
MSS
MINIMUM SIGNAL SELECTOR
STOP
STOP BUTTON
TON
DELAY ON TIMER
S R
INV
SET/RESET FLIP FLOP
TON MODULATION VALVE IN
TIMER DIAGRAMS
LOGIC ALARM
TOFF
DELAY OFF TIMER
INVERTER
OUT
DELAY
INDICATOR
W X PID
PID CONTROLLER
RELAY INTERFACE
M 1
SERVOMOTOR
TOFF IN
IF PID=0 Y = 0% OUT DELAY
rev.
modif.
date.
customer
order

inst. unit prev.
A406
des. date
HOODS PLANT ELECTRIC DOCUMENTATION

5
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
1
rev.
A0406.07L
2
23
1
WET & DRY RETRACTION HOOD SYSTEM

WET END OPEN-CLOSE
1- 0
DISPLAY DCS
WEB BREAK
WET END CLOSE
DRY END OPEN-CLOSE

1- 0
DRY END CLOSE

D
WEB BREAK
>1 =
YANKEE TO MINIMUN
>1 = S R
>1 =
YANKEE TO MINIMUN
>1 =
FUNCTION REFERENCE AEROTHERMIC

WET END OPEN WET END CLOSE DRY END OPEN
&
G1 MIN
& S R
G2 MIN
WET END CLOSE
DRY END CLOSE
DRY END CLOSE
ZS3716 WET
OPEN
ZS3718 DRY EV1 EV2

OPEN
SEEI OPERATOR PANEL

modif. date. customer
CLOSE
CLOSE
FZ1
inst. unit
FZ2
A
rev.
order
A406
prev. des. date
HOODS PLANT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS

5
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
2
rev.
A0406.07L
2
21
1
HOOD FANS START UP/TURN OFF CYCLE

HOOD FANS START UP CYCLE
STRT
DISPLAY DCS FUNCTION REFERENCE AEROTHERMIC

rev.
START UP CYCLE ON
HOOD FANS TURN OFF CYCLE

STOP
TURN OFF CYCLE ON

D
G1 STOP 60 SEC 30 SEC

TON
S R
TON
>1 =
G2 STOP
30 MIN
S R
& &
&
TON
>1 =
C
ENABLE M07PM STOP M09PM / M22PM START CYCLE

(SHEET 4)
M10PM / M11PM START CYCLE

(SHEET 5 & SHEET 16)

(SHEET 6)
(SHEET 9)
ENABLE M08PM STOP

(SHEET 10)
M07PM STOP CYCLE

(SHEET 6)
M08PM STOP CYCLE

(SHEET 6)
M10PM M11PM M09PM M22PM STOP CYCLE STOP CYCLE

(SHEET 5 & SHEET 16) (SHEET 3)
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
3
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
M09PM & M22PM FANS START/STOP

STOP
STOP
DISPLAY DCS
(SHEET 3)
M09PM START
STRT
M09PM RUN
M09PM FAULT ALARM
M09PM EMERG. ALARM
M09PM FAN MOTOR CURRENT

I
M22PM STOP
STOP
M22PM START
STRT
M22PM RUN
M22PM FAULT ALARM
M22PM EMERG. ALARM

I
D
A
(0 A)
A
(0 A)
(100A)
(50A)
INV
INV
INV
INV

rev.
>1 = >1 =
S R
M09PM RUN
M09PM / M22PM START CYCLE (SHEET 3) M09PM / M22PM STOP CYCLE (SHEET 3)
>1 = >1 =
S R
M09PM / M22PM STOP CYCLE

(SHEET 3)
START
RNG
FLT
EME
CRN
MCC
U V W
MCC
U V W
START
RNG
FLT
EME
CRN
M09PM MOTOR STARTER

A
M22PM MOTOR STARTER

A
modif.
date.
customer
order

inst. unit prev.
A406
des. date

5
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
4
rev.
A0406.07L
2
21
1
M10PM WET COMBUSTION FAN START/STOP

M10PM STOP
STOP
M11PM DRY COMBUSTION FAN START/STOP

M10PM FAULT ALARM M10PM EMERG. ALARM M10PM FAN MOTOR CURRENT
I STOP STRT
DISPLAY DCS
M10PM START
STRT
M10PM RUN
M11PM STOP
M11PM START
M11PM RUN
M11PM FAULT ALARM
M11PM EMERG. ALARM

I
D
A
(0 A)
A
(0 A)
(100A)
(100A)
INV
INV
INV
INV
>1 = >1 =
S R
M10PM RUN

rev.
>1 = >1 =
S R
M11PM RUN
MCC
U V W
M10PM MOTOR STARTER

A
START
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
RNG 3
FLT
EME
CRN
MCC
U V W
START
RNG
FLT
EME
CRN
M11PM MOTOR STARTER

A
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
5
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
M07PM / M08PM FANS START/STOP

M07PM STOP
STOP

rev.
8
M07PM START
STRT
M07PM RUN
M07PM FAULT ALARM
M07PM EMERG. ALARM
M08PM STOP
STOP
M08PM START
STRT
M08PM RUN
M08PM FAULT ALARM
M08PM EMERG. ALARM
INV
INV
INV
INV
M07PM-M08PM START CYCLE (SHEET 3) M07PM STOP CYCLE (SHEET 3)
>1 = >1 =
S R
M07PM RUN
M07PM-M08PM START CYCLE (SHEET 3) M08PM STOP CYCLE (SHEET 3)
>1 = >1 =
S R
M08PM RUN
C
MCC
U V W
M07PM MOTOR DRIVER

A
START
RNG 3
FLT
EME
MCC
U V W
START
M08PM MOTOR DRIVER

A
RNG 3
FLT
EME
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
6
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
ALARM STOP
STOP

rev.
START
STRT
START
FLAME ON
MODULATION
D
(SHEET 6) (SHEET 4) (SHEET 5)
M07PM RUN M09PM RUN M10PM RUN
&
& &
G1 STOP
(SHEET 3)
G1 ON
(SHEET 2)
G1 MIN
YANKEE RUNNING TISH400 HIGH HIGH TEMP.

(SHEET 13)
M09PM RUN (SHEET 4) M10PM RUN (SHEET 5) M07PM RUN (SHEET 6) YANKEE RUNNING TISH 400 (SHEET 13)
&
G1 MOD ENABLE
BURNER STOP BURNER ALARM ALARM = ON
BURNER START & RESET ALARM

START & = RESET RUN & STOP = OFF
BURNER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
INTERLOCKS OK
BURNER IN OPERATION OPERATION = ON TEMPERATURE CONTROL
RUN = ON STOP =
START
BURNER ONOPERAT.=CLOSE
MINIMUM=OPEN
Q1 WET BURNER LOCAL PANEL

A A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
7
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
ALARM STOP
STOP

rev.
START
STRT
START
ON
MODULATION
D
(SHEET 6) (SHEET 4) (SHEET 5)
M08PM RUN M09PM RUN M11PM RUN YANKEE RUNNING
&
& &
G2 STOP
(SHEET 3)
G2 ON
(SHEET 2)
G2 MIN
M08PM RUN (SHEET 6) M09PM RUN (SHEET 4) M11PM RUN (SHEET 5) YANKEE RUNNING (SHEET 13)
TISH 400
&
G2 MOD ENABLE
TISH400 HIGH HIGH TEMP.

(SHEET 13)
BURNER STOP BURNER ALARM

ALARM = ON RUN = ON STOP =
BURNER START & RESET ALARM

START & = RESET RUN & STOP = OFF
BURNER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
INTERLOCKS OK
BURNER IN OPERATION OPERATION = ON TEMPERATURE CONTROL
START
BURNER ON
OPERAT.=CLOSE MINIMUM=OPEN
Q2 DRY BURNER LOCAL PANEL

A A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
8
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
WET HOOD TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TIC100

INPUT I TIAH121 HIGH TEMP SET POINT I I DCS/QCS SET POINT A M 0=DCS 1=QCS
DISPLAY DCS FUNCTION

WITH SUPPLY ON 4/20mA LOOP
BURNER G1 TIC100
D
A
(530C)
(0C)
(510C)
HI > 550C
TIAH121 HIGH HIGH TEMP
QCS SETPOINT
TIC100
OPERATION SET POINT
LO < 150C
ENABLE V1 STOP
0 1 TIC100 AUT/MAN TO QCS

C
REVERSE ACTION W X PID Y
G1 ON (SHEET 7)
TZZ100
M
CIRC. AIR
1
BURNER TO MINIMUN
0 G1 MOD ENABLE (SHEET 7) 1 (SHEET 2) G1 MIN 4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C (0%)
&
GAS COMBUST. AIR
GAS MOTORVALVE
4/20 mA
REFERENCE AEROTHERMIC
A
TT100 TC "J"
4-20mA 0-600C
Q1 LOCAL PANEL
date. customer inst. unit order prev.
CIRC. AIR
TT100 TE100
rev.
modif.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet
FOMAT
9
A0406.07L
of
21
rev.
DRY HOOD TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TIC200

INPUT I TIAH200 HIGH TEMP SET POINT I I DCS/QCS SET POINT A M 0=DCS 1=QCS

BURNER G2 TIC200
D
A
(530C)
(0C)
(510C)
HI > 550C
TIAH200 HIGH HIGH
TEMP
TIC200
POINT
OPERATION SET POINT
QCS SET
LO < 150C
ENABLE V2 STOP
0 1 TIC200 AUT/MAN TO QCS REVERSE ACTION W X PID Y

C
G2 ON (SHEET 8)
TZZ200
M 1 BURNER TO
CIRC. AIR
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
GAS MOTORVALVE 4/20 mA
TT200
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
Q2 LOCAL PANEL
date. customer inst. unit order prev.
rev.
modif.

5
G2 MOD ENABLE (SHEET 8)
1
4
(SHEET 2) G2 MIN
MINIMUM
(0%)
&
GAS COMBUST. AIR
CIRC. AIR
TT200 TE200
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2
des. date
3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 10
21
rev.
Wet burner deltap controller PDIC115

4mA = 0 mBar 20mA = 100 mBar WITH SUPPLY ON 4/20mA LOOP PDT115 SET POINT I I
PDIC115
D
M10PM FAN SPEED

I
(0 mBar)
(100 mBar)
(0 mBar)
(80 mBar)
PDIC115
OPERATION SET POINT
COMB. AIR + PDT115 -
M10PM DRIVER
B
SPD
RPM
A
G1
V W
MCC
PDT115
M10PM DRIVER
WET COMBUSTION AIR FAN
CIRC. AIR
order prev.
rev.
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 11
21
rev.
Wet burner deltap controller PDIC215

4mA = 0 mBar 20mA = 200 mBar WITH SUPPLY ON 4/20mA LOOP PDT215 SET POINT
PDIC115
D
M11PM FAN SPEED

I I
(0 mBar)
(200 mBar)
(0 mBar)
(80 mBar)
PDIC215
OPERATION SET POINT
COMB. AIR + PDT215 -
M11PM DRIVER
B
SPD
RPM
A
G2
V W
MCC
PDT215
M11PM DRIVER
WET COMBUSTION AIR FAN
CIRC. AIR
order prev.
rev.
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 12
21
rev.
13
TIC 400 COMBUSTION AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

TIC 400 INPUT
I
TIC400 COMBUSTION AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

rev.
TIC 400 HIGH TEMP
TIC 400 SETPOINT

D
A
145C
OPERATION SETPOINT
(0C)(600C)
(0C)
(140C)
TIC 400
TO BURNERS
EXHAUST AIR
TT 400
REVERSE ACTION
W X PID Y
PZZ 400
C
HI > 150C
TISH400 (SHEET 7)
M 1
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
FRESH AIR
S4
F4 R1
B
4/20mA
0-100%
TO BURNERS
M 1
TT 400
TC TYPE "J"
COLD AIR MOTORDAMPER
PZZ 400
ON FIELD
FRESH AIR
F1
order prev.
M22PM
A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 13
21
rev.
WET REC. FAN M07PM

M07PM FAN SPEED INC/DEC
+ -
SICM07PM
I + -
DRY REC. FAN M07PM SICM07PM

M08PM FAN SPEED INC/DEC M08PM FAN SPEED SET POINT
I
DISPLAY DCS FUNCTION REFERENCE FOMAT

rev.
M07PM FAN SPEED SET POINT

I
M07PM FAN RPM

I
M08PM FAN RPM

I

D
(0 rpm)
(1710 rpm) (0 rpm)
(1710 rpm)
(0 A)
(400A)
(0 rpm) (1710 rpm)
(0 rpm) (1710 rpm)
(0 A)
(400A)
MIN FAN SPEED

(900 rpm) 0 1
MIN FAN SPEED

(900 rpm) 0 1
C
G1 MIN
(SHEET 2)
(SHEET 2)
G2 MIN
SPD
RPM
CRN
SPD
RPM
CRN
MCC
U V W
MCC
U V W
M07PM DRIVER
A
M08PM DRIVER
A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 14
21
rev.

rev.
8
TI120
I
TI122
I
TI220
I
TI222
I
TI320
I
TI420
I
TI520
I
PDSAH400
COMBUSTION AIR FILTER CLOGGED
PDSAH410
R1 FRESH AIR FILTER CLOGGED
D
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C
20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
4mA = 0C 20mA = 600C
TT120
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT122
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT220
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT222
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT320
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT420
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
TT520
TC "J" 4-20mA 0-600C
COMBUSTION AIR FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH
R1 FRESH AIR FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH
PS400
A
PS410
A
modif.
date.
customer inst.
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2
dis. numb.
rev.

5
des. date
4 3
LUCCA - ITALY
A0406.07L 15
of
FOMAT
21

rev. PAPER MOISTURE
QCS MOISTURE CONTROL LOOP

MOISTURE MISURE I MOISTURE SET POINT I
D
LEVEL ADAPTER Y
C
100% 85.0% W X PID Y X 25%
Y X 50% 100%
QCS SET POINT TO HOODS
QCS
MOISTURE REGULATION 25% = 150C 95.0% = 510C
IF THE PAPER MOISTURE REGULATION N.B. IS MADE BY QCS CONNECT THE PAPER MOISTURE SIGNAL DIRECTLY TO THE LEVEL ADAPTER
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 16
21
rev.
OIL PUMP MP051/MP151 CONTROL LOGIC

OIL/GAS SELECTED G1 G2 MP051 STOP
STOP

rev.
MP051 START
STRT
MP051 RUN
MP051 FAULT ALARM
MP051/MP151 SELECTION
MP151 STOP
STOP
MP151 START
STRT
MP151 RUN
MP151 FAULT ALARM
1- 0
>1 =
M10PM/M11PM START CYCLE (SHEET 3)
>1 =
S R
>1 =
M10PM/M11PM START CYCLE (SHEET 3)
>1 =
S R
STOP CYCLE (SHEET 3)
M10PM/M11PM
&
M10PM/M11PM STOP CYCLE (SHEET 3) LOW-LOW LEVEL OIL TANK (SHEET 17)
&
LOW-LOW LEVEL OIL TANK (SHEET 17)
>1 =
&
B B
ENABLE
RNG
FLT
ENABLE
RNG
FLT
CLOSE=OIL OPEN=GAs
CLOSE=OIL OPEN=GAs
MCC
U V W
PUMP ON
PUMP ON
MCC
U V W

modif.

date.
MP051
customer inst. unit
KEROSENE PUMP 1

order prev.
M
A
MP151
KEROSENE PUMP 2
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 17
21
rev.
OIL TANK
A
LEVEL CONTROLLER LIC 1

LOW LEVEL ALARM LOW -LOW LEVEL ALARM
OIL TANK LEVEL

I
0%
100%
IN >80%
STOP MILL PUMP START MILL PUMP

C
IN < 30%
IN < 20%
IN < 10%
LOW LOW LEVEL OIL TANK (SHEET 16)
4mA = 0% 20mA = 100%
WHITH SUPPLY ON 4/20mA LOOP
LT 1
FIELD
A
rev.
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 18
21
rev.
M09PM SPEED INC/DEC

rev. modif.
8
+ -
MIC300
M09PM FAN SPEED
D
UMIDITY INPUT
I
SET POINT
I 0=MAN 1=AUTO
M09PM SPEED AUTO/MAN

A M
SPEED SET POINT

I
(0%) (1000 (200 (600 gr/Kg) gr/Kg) gr/Kg)
(0%) (100%)
(0%) (100%)
MIC300
OPERATION SET POINT
MT300
0 DIRECT ACTION W Y 1
ME300
EXHAUST AIR
X PID MIN OUTPUT SIGNAL LIMITED TO 50%
R1
4mA = 0 KgH20/KgAir 20mA = 0.999 KgH2O/KgAir
SPD
RPM
MAEP1
MCC
EXHAUST AIR
MT300
A
M09PM DRIVER
EXHAUST AIR FAN
M09PM
A
date.
customer
order

inst. unit prev.
A406
des. date

5
N.Monti 17/01/08
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
rev.
A0406.07L 19
2 1
21

1 rev.
HIC 101
WET HOOD PROFILE CONTROL DAMPER N1
I
HIC 102
I
HIC 103
I
HIC 104
I
HIC 105
I
HIC 106
I
D
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
M 1
M 1
M 1
M 1
M 1
WET HOOD PROFILE CONTROL DAMPER
HIC 101
A
HIC 102
HIC 103
HIC 104
HIC 105
HIC 106
A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 20
21
rev.

1 rev.
HIC 107
I
HIC 108
I
HIC 109
I
HIC 110
I
D
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4mA = 0%
20mA = 100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
4/20mA 0-100%
M 1
M 1
M 1
HIC 107
A
HIC 108
HIC 109
HIC 110
A
modif.
date.
customer inst. unit
order prev.
A406
N.Monti 17/01/08
2

5
des. date
4 3
dis. numb.
LUCCA - ITALY
sheet of
FOMAT
A0406.07L 21
21
rev.
9/
9.5 TECHNICAL DATA: MANUFACTURER MODEL LENGTH A SHEATH O.D. TEMPERATURE RANGE INTERFACE CARD IDENTIFICATION TE-100/TE-120 TE-121/TE-122 TE-200 TE-220 TE-221 TE-222 TE-420 TE-520 TE-320 TE-400 RANGE (C) 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600 0/600
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Thermocouple: SEICO Thermocouple: TYPE J Thermo resistance: PT100 (See below) 8 mm (See below) 403 2W (RTD/4-20 mA) for PT100 404 2W (TES/4-20 mA) for TC J TYPE J J J J J J J J J J THERM. POCKET Included Included Included Included Included Included Included Included Included Included LENGTH A 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm 700 mm 300 mm
FOR OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SEE USER MANUAL ATTACHED 9.5
Mounting and Installation Advice 00809-0301-2654 Rev. AA, September 2001
Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple Assemblies
Product Manual
Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple Assemblies
NOTICE Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product. For further details please contact your local Rosemount representative.
CAUTION
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings. For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount Sales Representative.
Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
Cover Photo: Product Overview Temperature Sensors and Transmitters
Table of Contents
SECTION 1 Temperature Measurement with Resistance Thermometers SECTION 2 Temperature Measurement with Thermocouples
Description and Measuring Principle .................................................... Structure ................................................................................................... Methods of Connection ............................................................................ Areas of Application ................................................................................. 5 5 7 8
Description and Measurement Principle ............................................... 9 Installation of Protective Tubes ........................................................... 10 Leads and Connections .......................................................................... 10 Areas of Application ............................................................................... 11
SECTION 3 Assembly of Housing
Rules and Regulations ........................................................................... Operating Stress .............................................................................. Starting Torques for Screw-in Type Threads ................................ Assembly of Housing with Flange Mounting ................................ Installation of Ceramic Housing in Plants at Operating Temperature .............................. Connection of Transmitter ..............................................................
13 13 13 13 14 14
APPENDIX
Appendix I Limit Tolerances of the Basic Values ............................................. 15 Appendix II Limit Tolerances for Thermocouples .............................................. 15
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple
Section
1 Temperature Measurement with Resistance Thermometers
Description and Measuring Principle ......................................... Structure ......................................................................................... Methods of Connection ................................................................ Areas of Application ..................................................................... page page page page 5 5 7 8
DESCRIPTION AND MEASURING PRINCIPLE
Temperature measurement with resistance thermometers is based on the property possessed by all conductors and semiconductors, namely that their resistance varies as a function of temperature. This property is more or less pronounced, depending on the particular material. The relative change in the resistance as a function of temperature (dR/dt) is known as the temperature coefficient, the value of which is usually not constant over the range of temperature of interest, but is itself a function of temperature. The result is that the mathematical relationship between resistance and temperature takes the form of a highorder polynomial. Figure 1 shows the change in resistance as a function of temperature for a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.
Figure 1: Pt 100 characteristic curve
STRUCTURE
The resistance temperature detector is made up of a platinum coil wound on a suitable support. The wire coil is either fused into glass or embedded in ceramic. To meet todays requirements for more compact dimensions and higher resistance values, extremely thin platinum layers are applied to a ceramic substrate instead of wires (see Fig. 2).
Figure 2: Glass wire-wound, ceramic wire-wound and thin-film resistance thermometers
To protect them against mechanical damage (pressure or flowing liquid) these measuring elements are usually installed into suitable protective tubes (measuring inserts). This also ensures easy replacement without the need to replace the complete fitting. As resistance thermometers are contact-making temperature sensors (i.e. the sensor has to reach the temperature of the medium in which measurement is to be performed) the housing has to be adapted to the application (see Fig. 3).
Figure 3: Resistance thermometer modules
METHODS OF CONNECTION
When using resistance thermometers for temperature measurement, the fact that the measurement result is influenced by the resistance of the selected lead wire must be taken into account. Three circuit types are commonly used: 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire circuits. The most accurate measurements are obtained with the 4-wire circuit, as in this case the measurement is not affected by lead wire resistance or environment temperature of lead wires (see Fig. 4). The 3-wire circuit is normally used for eliminating the lead wire resistance (Wheatstone bridge). In the case of the 2-wire circuit the lead wire resistance is fully measured by the measuring bridge. By the use of modern control equipment the influence of the lead wire resistance at 2-wire circuit can be compensated by a line compensation resistor, which is independent of temperature.
Figure 4: Methods of connection
AREAS OF APPLICATION
Resistance thermometers can be used over a temperature range of -220 C to +600 C. Their advantages are: High temperature ranges Resistance to vibration High immunity to electrical interference Long-term stability Robust design High accuracy Resistance thermometers are used in the following industries: Chemical industries Petrochemical industries Pharmaceutical industries Power generation Mechanical engineering Food & beverage Mining
Section
2 Temperature Measurement with Thermocouples
Description and Measuring Principle ......................................... page 9 Installation of Protective Tubes ................................................ page 10 Leads and Connections .............................................................. page 10 Areas of Application ................................................................... page 11
DESCRIPTION AND MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE
A thermocouple consists of two electrical conductors of different materials connected to one another at one end (measuring junction). The two free ends build a compensation point resp reference junction. The thermocouple can be extended by using an extension or a compensating cable. The extension or compensating cables are connected to a measuring instrument, e.g. a galvanometer or electronic measuring unit (see Fig. 5).
Figure 5
The thermoelectric voltage appearing at the reference junction depends on the thermocouple wire material and on the temperature difference between the measuring junction and the reference junction. For temperature measurement, the temperature of the reference junction must be kept constant (e.g. 0 C) or must be well known, to make a appriopriate correction in mV (see Fig. 6).
Figure 6
Extension cables are manufactured of the same material as the corresponding thermocouple, e.g. Cu-CuNi, Fe-CuNi. Compensating cables are manufactured of special materials. Up to 200 C compensating cables supply the same thermoelectric voltage as the thermocouples to which they are connected. The thermoelectric voltages of the thermocouples are laid down in so-called basic value series. e.g. PtRh30%-PtRh6% Fe-CuNi NiCr-NiAl PtRh87/13%-Pt PtRh90/10%-Pt and others in DIN IEC 584-1 Type B Type J Type K Type R Type S
and
Fe-CuNi Type L Cu-CuNi Type U These thermocouples are not more available for use in new plants (thermoelectric voltage according to DIN 43710). Basic value tables are available on request only at manufacturer site.
The compensating cable for a thermocouple must be made of a material to suit the particular type of thermocouple, so compensating leads are colour-coded. For standardized compensating cable the regulations contained in DIN EN 60584 apply. Maximum temperatures indicated by manufacturer have to be considered. Most thermocouples are supplied ready for operation, that is in a protective mounting to prevent damage to the thermocouple by mechanical forces or chemical attack.
INSTALLATION OF PROTECTIVE TUBES
The protective tubes of thermocouples must be adapted to the particular operating conditions. Precious metal thermocouples are always protected with a ceramic tube, even if the unit has a metallic protective mounting. At high temperatures the protective tubes should be installed vertically, where possible, i.e. suspended, to avoid damage deflection to the protective tube and thermocouple through bending. If specific conditions on site make a horizontal installation unavoidable, long protective tubes have to be suitably supported.
LEADS AND CONNECTIONS
When laying and connecting extension resp. compensating cables, care must be taken to connect the positive pole of the thermocouple to the positive terminal of the indicating instrument. If extension cables or compensating cable are used, care must be taken not to interchange positive and negative conductors. To prevent errors, the positive and negative leads bear a corresponding marking.
10
All connections must be absolutely clean and firmly tightened. The corresponding positive and negative terminals should have the same temperature potential. The compensating cables between the thermocouple and the indicating instrument should comply with the requirements for insulated leads in power systems (VDE 0250) . In exceptional cases, the regulations for insulated leads in telecommunications systems (VDE 0810) may be applied.
AREAS OF APPLICATION
In the negative temperature range, thermocouples can be used down to -200 C. For temperatures above 1000 C thermocouples made of platinum and a platinum/rhodium alloy are used. Advantages of thermocouples are: Very high temperature ranges Fast response Compact design Extremely high resistance to vibration Long term stability Robust design. Thermocouples are used in the following and other industries: Chemical industries Pharmaceutical industries Power generation Mechanical engineering Food & beverage Mining Iron and steel Ceramics and glass
11
12
Section
3 Assembly of Housing
Rules and Regulations ......................................................... page 13, 14
RULES AND REGULATIONS
For assembly of housing following instructions are to be considered. VDE/VDI 3511 Technical temperature measurement/instruction VDE/VDI 3512 Set-up for temperature measurements AD instruction leaflets (1) Working group pressure vessels TRB technical directions for tank construction (1) Vd TV regulations (1)
Operating stress
The stresses, indicated in the drawing, apply to the supplied housing. The load data, included in the standards for every type, are valid for housing according to DIN 43763 and DIN 43772.
Starting torques for screw-in type threads

Applicable to screw-in type threads of housing according to DIN 43763 and DIN 43772 as well as comparable housing according to customers specification. G 3 8, G G 50 Nm 100 Nm
Above starting torques are to be used as well for coupling rings with similar threads.
(1)
To be considered in case of weld-in type protective tubes. Material, weld and pressure test according to operating conditions
13
Assembly of housing with flange mounting

The seal is to be selected according to the requirements. During insertion of the seal, a good support is necessary. Fastening screws are to be tightened evenly and crosswise.
Installation of ceramic housing in plants at operating temperature

Temperature of the plant: 1600 C insertion speed: 12 cm/min 1200 C insertion speed: 1020 cm/min
Connection of transmitters
When connecting transmitter, the installation-, connection- and test instructions of the manufacturers are to be considered.
14
Appendix
A
APPENDIX I Limit tolerances of the basic values according to DIN IEC 751 and DIN 43760
Basic values according to DIN IEC 751 Platinum RTDelements Ohm 18.49 60.25 100.00 138.50 175.84 212.02 247.04 280.90 313.59 345.13 375.71 390.26 Ohm/K 0.44 0.41 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.35 0.34 0.33 0.33 0.31 0.30 0.29 according to DIN 43760 Nickel RTDelements Ohm 0.24 0.14 69.5 100.0 161.8 240.7 289.2 Ohm/K 0.55 0.35 0.47 0.55 0.69 0.90 1.04 Limit tolerances according to DIN IEC 751 Platinum RTD-elements according to DIN 43760 Nickel RTDelements Ohm corresp. C
Appendix I and Appendix II
C -200 -100 -60 0 100 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 850
Ohm 0.56 0.32 0.06 0.13 0.20 0.27 0.33 0.38 0.43
Class A corresp. C 1.3 0.8 0.15 0.35 0.55 0.75 0.95 1.15 1.35
Ohm
Class B corresp. C
0.12 0.30 0.48 0.64 0.79 0.93 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.34
0.3 0.8 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 4.6
1.0 0.2 0.8 1.6 2.3
2.1 0.4 1.1 1.8 2.1
APPENDIX II Limit tolerances for thermocouples according DIN IEC 584-2

Class
Limit tolerances () Typ T Limit tolerances () Typ E Typ J Typ K Limit tolerances () Type R and S Type B
(1) (2)
1
(1)
3(2)
(1)
(1)
0.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 1 C or 0.0075 x |t| 1C or 0.015 x |t| Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges -40 C up to 350 C -40 C up to 350 C -200 C up to 40 C 1.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.0075 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.015 x |t| Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges -40 C up to 800 C -40 C up to 900 C -200 C up to 40 C -40 C up to 750 C -40 C up to 750 C ---40 C up to 1000 C -40 C up to 1200 C -200 C up to 40 C 1.0 C or 1.5 C or 0.0025 x |t| 4 C or 0.005 x |t| [1+(t-1100) x 003] C Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges 0 C up to 1600 C 0 C up to 1600 C ----600 C up to 1700 C 600 C up to 1700 C
Limit tolerances for thermocouples are indicated in degrees centigrade or as percentage of the measured temperature in degrees centigrade. Whichever value is greater applies. Thermocouples and thermocouple wires are usually supplied with limit tolerances according to the table above valid for temperature range above of -40 C. The thermocouple limit tolerances of same material at temperatures below -40 C may be exceeded as stated for tolerance class 3 according to DIN IEC 5 84-2. Thermocouples requested by purchaser with limit tolerances according to classes 1, 2 or 3 may be obtained by special material selection.
|t| = Temperature in degrees Centigrade
15
This document is available electronically at www.fisher-rosemount.com
Fisher-Rosemount satisfies all obligations coming from legislation to harmonise product requirements in the European Union.
Rosemount Temperature GmbH

Frankenstrae 21 63791 Karlstein Germany Phone +49 (6188) 992-0 Fax +49 (6188) 992-286 Internet www.fisher-rosemount.de/rtemp
Fisher-Rosemount Ltd.
Heath Place Bognor Regis, PO22 SH6, England Phone +44 (1243) 863-121 Fax +44 (1243) 867-554 Internet www.rosemount.com
MFM25-2654.A01 1.09.01 Rev. AA Technical alterations reserved
VD/Kroeber
Printed in Germany
9/
9.6
9/
9.6 AIR SAFETY SWITCHES TECHNICAL DATA: IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER MODEL PRESSURE RANGE
(See below) Kromschroder (See below) (See below)
IDENTIFICATION
PS 410 PS 400 PS 310 PS 311
STATUS
N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.
SET POINT mbar 5 5 5 5
MODEL/range
DG10U/1-10mbar DG10U/1-10mbar DG10U/1-10mbar DG10U/1-10mbar
FOR OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SEE CHAPTER # 7
9.7
10/
10. SPARE PARTS HOOD MOVEMENT SYSTEM S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS
A406.07 01.09.08
YANKEE HOOD DUOSYSTEM PM2 OFFICINE RECARD for CMPC
Dwg. n TR0537
List n GR0537
Sheet 1 of 2
R =RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS Q =QUANTITY SUPPLIED
* =IN COMMON WITH OTHER ITEMS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident. DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC
DRAWING
Q SP.P. n S R *
7 9
Synchronism shaft ass.y Ball bearing SKF 12 16 O-Ring Circlip Drive side wheel 3 O- Ring 4 Ball bearing SKF 6212-C3 Ref. 171-Viton 32014 X/DF Ref.164-Viton 70UNI7435-75
T15482
2 4 4 2 2 2 1
T15477
2 1 2 1 2
6 3 4 16
Tender side wheel O-Ring Ball bearing SKF Circlip 30 UNI7435-75 Ref.171-Viton
6212-C3
T15481
2 1 2 8 2 * *
10.1
10/
HOOD MOVEMENT SYSTEM S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0537
List n GR0537
Sheet 2 of 2
R =RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS Q =QUANTITY SUPPLIED
* =IN COMMON WITH OTHER ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC
DRAWING 4/1 26 Pneumatic cylinder Limit switch

TRA/8250/M/200
Q SP.P. n S R * 4 2 1 1
NORGREN
OMRON E2AM30KS15WPB1-2M PNP N.O.
10.2
10/
HOOD WET SECTION\ S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0552
List n GR0552
Sheet 1 of 1
R =RACCOMANDED SPARE PARTS Q =QUANTITY SUPPLIED
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * 10 10 1
1 18
Automatic command AF8 Servomotor
C04132
M7284C1000
10.3
10/
HOOD DRY SECTION S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0553
List n GR0553
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * 2 2 1
14 4
Manual command AF16 Damper Lever
C05514
C03391
10.4
10/
FAN ASSEMBLY V1 S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0545
List n GR0545
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * 1 1 2 2 1 2 2
V1
Centrifugal fan Wheel Sx.
MB 160, CL CBI III LG 90 CBI
SKF Wheel side bearings 22224 EKC3+H 3124 22224 Motor side bearings EKC3+H 3124 SKF +N2 FRB 14215
10.5
10/
FAN ASSEMBLY V2 S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0546
List n GR0546
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * 1 1 2 1 2
V2
Centrifugal fan Wheel Dx.
MB 160, CL III CBI RD 90 CBI SKF
22224 EKC3+H 3124 22224 Motor side bearings EKC3+H 3124 +N2 FRB 14215 Wheel side bearings
SKF
10.6
10/
A406.07 01.09.08
COMBUSTION CHAMBER G1 Dwg. n TR0547 COMBUSTION CHAMBER G2 Dwg. n TR0548
List n GR0547 List nGR0548
Sheet 1 of 1 Sheet 1 of 1
10.7
10/
DUCTWORKS S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08

List n GR0554 Sheet 1 of 1
Dwg. n TR0554
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * A322447-40-11CB-A C04132 1
10
S6
Automatic damper 560 Actuator unit AF8
2 3 12
PZZ-400
1 1 1 1
Servomotor Manual damper 1000 Manual damper 560
M7284 C1000
Honeywell A322447-100021-CM-A A322447-40-21CM-F
S8
11
S5
10.8
10/
COMBUSTION AIR ASS.Y S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part 1 Ident. V4/V5
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0549
List n GR0549
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION Centrifugal fan
Code or type
FOMAT DRAWING
Q SP.P. n S R * 2
VCM 801 F.FERRARI N12B LG.0 (V4)-RD0 (V5) F.FERRARI
Wheel Sx.(V5) Dx (V4) Wheel side bearings Motor side bearings 3 V belt
F.FERRARI
F.FERRARI F.FERRARI
4 /
4 3
10.9
10/
WET AIR EXHAUST SYSTEM S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0550
List n GR0550
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * F.FERRARI 1 1 F.FERRARI 1 1 1
V3
Centrifugal fan Wheel Sx Wheel side bearings Motor side bearings
FQ1121N12B
F.FERRARI F.FERRARI
1 /
1 3
V-Belt
10.10
10/
HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub Part Ident.
A406.07 01.09.08

List n GR0544 Sheet 1 of 1
Dwg. n TR0544
DESCRIPTION
Code or type
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * F.FERRARI 1
V6
Make up Fan Wheel / Wheel side bearings
EF906/I4A/A 21
Motor side bearings / 3 V-Belt /
10.11
10/
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER S =SUPPLIED SPARE PARTS SP.P. =SPARE PARTS Item Sub 1-2 TE-120 TE-121 3-4 TE-122 TE-200 5-6 TE-220 TE-221 7-8 TE-222 9 TE-420 Part Ident. TE-100
A406.07 01.09.08
Dwg. n TR0551
List n GR0551
Sheet 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket Temperature sensor + therm. pocket
Code or type
Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 900 Thermocouple J Lg 700 Thermocouple J Lg 300
AEROTHERMIC Q SP.P. DRAWING n S R * 2

2
1 * * *
2 2 1
10
TE-520
11
TE-320
12
TE-400
12 13 14 15
PS400410 PS310311
Pressure switch
DG 10 U
Kromschoder
10.12
11
11. DRAWINGS PLANT
PLANT ASSEMBLY PLANT P&I FOUNDATION ASSEMBLY HOODS MOVEMENT SYS. WET END SECTION DRY END SECTION FAN ASSEMBLY V1 FAN ASSEMBLY V2 COMBUSTION CHAMBER G1 COMBUSTION CHAMBER G2 DUCTWORKS ASSEMBLY COMBUSTION AIR ASSEMBLY HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM EXHAUSTER SYSTEM ON FIELD INSTRUM.SYSTEM FEEDING FUEL OIL ASS.Y
TA0406.07 TA0406.07_P&I TR0535 TR0537 TR0552 TR0553 TR0545 TR0546 TR0547* TR0548* TR0554 TR0549 TR0544 TR0550 TR0551 TR0555
LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST
GR0535 GR0537 GR0552 GR0553 GR0545 GR0546 GR0547 GR0548 GR0554 GR0549 GR0544 GR0550 GR0551 GR0555
* = SEE PAGE 7.3 FOR DWG. TR0547 AND TR0547
11.1
ITALIANO/ ENGLISH COMPONENTI IMPIANTO TIPICI / TYPICAL PLANT COMPONENTS ANTIVIBRANTI= ANTIVIBRATION PAD ATTACCO PISTONE= PISTON SUPPORT BAVETTA=SEALING STRIP BRACCIO=ARM BRUCIATORE=BURNER CAMERA COMBUSTIONE=COMBUSTION CHAMBER CAPPA= YANKEE HOOD CASSONE INFERIORE=BOTTON RECEIVER CASSONE LATERALE=SIDE RECEIVER CASSONE SUPERIORE=TOP RECEIVER CERNIERA FEMMINA= FEMALE HINGE COLLANTE=GLUE COMPENSATORE= EXPANSION JOINT CONDOTTO= DUCT CONVETITORE= CONVERTER CORPO CENTRALE RECUPERATORE= HEAT EXCHANGER ASS.Y CURVA= BEND DADO=NUT FILTRO= FILTER FINECORSA= LIMIT SWITCH FORCELLA CON SNODO=FORK GUARNIZIONE=GASKET GUIDA RUOTA=GUIDE RAIL LAMIERINO COPERTURA=COVER PLATE LEVA=LEVER MORSETTO=CLAMP MOTORE=MOTOR OTTURATORE=STOPPER PERNO=PIN PIASTRA=PLATE SUPPORT PIATTO=PLATE PORTELLO=INSPECTION DOOR
1
PRESSOSTATO=PRESS SWITCH QUADRO SONDA UMIDITA= HUMIDITY CONTROL PANEL RACCORDO= CONNECTION PIECE RACCORDO=CONNECTION PIECE RETE=NET RIDUZIONE=RIDUCTION PIECE ROSETTA=WASHER SCHEMA PNEUMATICO= PNEUMATIC PANEL SCHEMA SINCRONISMO= SYNCRONYSME SHAFT ASS.Y SERRANDA=DAMPER SERVOCOMANDO=SERVOMOTOR STAFFA=SUPPORT STRUTTURA SOSTEGNO CAPPA= HOOD SUPPORT FRAME SUPPORTO=SUPPORT TAPPO=PLUG TASSELLO=ANCHOR BOLT TELAIO PORTAFILTRI= FILTER FRAME TERMOCOPPIA=TEMPERATURE SENSOR TRASMISSIONE VENTILATORE = V-BELT FAN TRENO GAS=GAS TRAIN TUBO RAME=PIPE VALVOLA=VALVE VENTILATORE=FAN VITE=SCREW GRUPPI IMPIANTO TIPICI / TYPICAL PLANT GROUP
GRUPPO CAPPA AR E MOVIMENTAZIONE / HOODS MOVEMENT SYSTEM GRUPPO FONDAZIONI / FONDATION GROUP GRUPPO CONDOTTI + SOSTEGNI CONDOTTI / DUCTWORKS GROUP GRUPPO SEMICAPPA WET / WET END SECTION GROUP GRUPPO SEMICAPPA DRY / DRY END SECTION GROUP GRUPPO VENTILATORE V1 / FAN ASSEMBLY "V1" GRUPPO VENTILATORE V2 / FAN ASSEMBLY "V2"
2
GRUPPO ESTRAZIONE / EXHAUSTER SYSTEM GRUPPO BATTERIA B1 / HEATING COIL "B1" GROUP GRUPPO BATTERIA B2 HEATING COIL "B2" GROUP GRUPPO STRUMENTAZIONE SU CAMPO / ON FIELD INTRUMENTS GROUP GRUPPO PARTI DI RICAMBIO / SPARE PARTS GROUP GRUPPO BATTERIA ARIA DI MAKE-UP / MAKE-UP AIR HEATING COIL GROUP GRUPPO ESTRAZIONE / EXHAUSTER GROUP GRUPPO STRUMENTAZIONE SU CAMPO ASPIRAZIONE POLVERI / ON FIELD INSTRUMENT GROUP GRUPPO SCRUBBER + VASCA / SCRUBBER + TANK GROUP GRUPPO CONDOTTI ASPIRAZIONE POLVERI / DUCTWORKS GROUP GRUPPO CASSA ASPIRANTE SB2 / SUCTION BOX SB2 GROUP GRUPPO CASSA ASPIRANTE SB4 / SUCTION BOX SB4 GROUP GRUPPO BIG SUCTION SB7 / BIG SUCTION SB7 GROUP GRUPPO FONDAZIONI ASPIRAZIONE POLVERI / FOUNDATION GROUP
10/09/0816.21
Pag.1 di 6
Report Distinta Base Tecnica

Codice Prodotto: A0406.07 Descrizione: RECARD - MEXICO - CMPC ABSORMEX - PM2 Liv. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Pos 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Codice GR0535 C16073 C16074 A434305 C05924 A314551-01 TEFB1220 DFZM16 REFZ16 RPFZ17X30 C18489 C18514 C18521 A314551-12 A314551-14 AP81365 AC81360 TEFZM12X50 RPFZ13X24 REFZ12 DFZM12 RCFZ13 BFFZM24 DFZM24 C18529 DFZM20 REFZ20 RPFZ21X37 C22905-11 C22905-21 C21616 C21617 C23329 Descrizione GRUPPO FONDAZIONI PIATTO CON BARRE SU G1/G2 LAMIERA PIEGATA PROFILO DI ANCORAGGIO PIATTO CON BARRE STAFFA DI FISSAGGIO B=250 TASSELLO A ESPANSIONE FB D=12/20 ART.8610 DADO M16 UNI558-ISO4032 CL8.8 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A16 UNI1751 FE ZIN ROSETTA PIANA 17X30 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN CONTROTELAIO PER MB160 CONTROTELAIO PER VCM801 N12A CONTROTELAIO SU FQ1121 N12B STAFFA DI FISSAGGIO B=200 STAFFA DI FISSAGGIO B=400 ANTIVIBRANTE PUMAF ART.81365 TIPO P ANTIVIBRANTE COMAF C ART.81360 PIRELLI VITE TE M12X50 UNI5739-ISO4017 FE ZINC ROSETTA PIANA 13X24 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A12 UNI1751 FE ZIN DADO M12 - UNI 5588-65-A-6S ISO 4032 ROSETTA CARPENTERIA 13 UNI5716 C50 FE ZIN BARRA FILETTATA M24 L=1000 MM FE ZIN DADO M24 UNI558-ISO4032 CL8.8 FE ZIN RONDELLA DI=14 DE=34 S=3 DADO M20 UNI558-ISO4032 CL8.8 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A20 UNI1751 FE ZIN ROSETTA PIANA 21X37 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN CAMMINAMENTO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE DX CAMMINAMENTO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE SX CAMMINAMENTO SX RECUPERATORE CAMMINAMENTO DX RECUPERATORE PROFILO DI ANCORAGGIO Materiale UM PZ Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ NR NR NR NR Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 PZ PZ PZ NR NR PZ NR NR PZ NR NR NR PZ NR NR NR PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ Q.t 1 4 4 6 6 12 115 18 34 68 2 2 1 26 40 22 24 100 150 100 200 24 6 70 10 24 8 16 1 1 1 1 4 Lu.Taglio LarghezzDescrizioPeso 0 0 0 41 0 10 0 2,8 0 23 0 1,7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 176 0 30,2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPECIAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Finitura VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIARE RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL5009
VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL..
102,8 VERNICIATURA RAL5009 2 VERNICIATURA RAL.. 2,3 VERNICIATURA RAL5009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 135 135 300 510 1
FeZincato FeZincato FeZincato FeZincato FeZincato
Fe360
ZINCATURA A FREDDO
Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360
VERNICIATURA RAL.. VERNICIATURA RAL.. VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL5009 VERNICIATURA RAL..
10/09/0816.21
Pag.2 di 6
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
GR0537 C15466 C05269 C05268 RF40SE C05270 MP20007/250 C18967 C18969 C18964 C21114 C21108 C15541 C21064 C15477 C15481 C15492 C21280 C13086 C05262 TEFZM20X45 REFZ20 RPFZ21X37 C02399 C15937 C15938 C15939
GRUPPO CAPPA AR E MOVIMENTAZIONE SCHEMA PNEUMATICO DI APERTURA E CHIUSURA CAPPA ATTACCO PISTONE PERNO TESTA A SNODO TIPO RF 40 SE M42X2 CERNIERA FEMMINA MP2 TIPO 017/250 PERNO X CERNIERA FEMM.MP2-007/250 ASS GUIDA RUOTA SINCRO DX 190-0-C.200 MAGGIOR ASS GUIDA RUOTA SINCRO SX 190-0-C.200 MAGGIOR ASSIEME GUIDA SUPERIORE 190-0 C.200 MAGGIORATA STAFFA ATTACCO POSTERIORE PISTONE STRUTTURA SOSTEGNO CAPPA A406 SUPPORTO DI ADATTAMENTO PER STRUTTURA ASSIEME SINCRONISMO D=190 I=4070 GRUPPO RUOTA SCANALATA D=190 I=310 GRUPPO RUOTA LISCIA D=190 I=310 STAFFA FISSAGGIO CILINDRO VITE TCEI M20X45 INOX FINECORSA STD E2A-M30KS15-WP-B1 2M PNP N.O. ANELLO SEGER PER ALBERO D=40 UNI7435-40 VITE TE M20X45 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A20 UNI1751 FE ZIN ROSETTA PIANA 21X37 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN GRASSO SKF LGHB2 (CONFEZIONE=5KG) BARRA FILETTETA M27 L=1000 DADO M27 UNI 5588-ISO 4032 CL8.8 RODETTA PIANA 28X50 UNI 6592-69 ROSETTA ELASTICA A27 UNI 1751 VITE TE M20X60 UNI 5739-ISO 4017 CL8.8 SPINA ELASTICA 8X50 UNI8752 A-ST ATTACCO SOLLEVAMENTO CAPPA (MAX 10000KG) ROSETTA CON LINGUETTA UNI6600-21 R40P GRUPPO RECUPERATORE R1 CASSONE SUPERIORE NEW CASSONE INFERIORE NEW CORPO CENTRALE CASSONE LATERALE CON FILTRI TELAIO PORTAFILTRI CASSONE LATERALE R1
Fe360 AISI304
PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ
1 1 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 1 2 2 2 2 4 16 2 8 80 64 64 1 8 96 96 32 48 8 4 80 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4
0 0 MICHELE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 13,8 ZINCATURA A FREDDO 1,8 0 0 0 60 60 0 23,5 3220 91,5 275 50 64,9 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25,3 0 1896 147,3 175,6 906,8 338 VERNICIATURA ALLUMINIO 10 VERNICIATURA ALLUMINIO 171 VERNICIATURA ALLUMINIO 0 0
Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 AISI304
VERNICIATURA RAL.. VERNICIATURA RAL.. ZINCATURA A FREDDO VERNICIATURA RAL..
ZINCATURA A FREDDO
PZ NR Fe360 PZ FeZincato NR NR Grafite FeZincato FeZincato FeZincato NR KG PZ PZ PZ
27 C15940 28 C15963 29 SE8X50 30 C10523 31 C02914 3 GR0544 1 C15312 2 3 4 5 6 C15322 C15214 C21061 C15419 C15377
FeZincato PZ FeZincato PZ Fe360 Fe360 AISI304 AISI304 Alluminio Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 NR PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ
7 KC926500X500X23 FILTRO 500X500X23 8 KC926625X500X23 FILTRO KC 926 625X500X23
10/09/0816.21
Pag.3 di 6
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 C15431 10 C15280 11 C00493 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CB5242C TEIM10X30 RPI10,5X21 REI10 TEIM5X15 DIM5 RPI5,3X10 REI5 C05968 1348081/8 20801/21/8 1348081/4 TEFZM12X40 RPFZ13X24 REFZ12 C21719 GR0545 C20515 C20826 GR0546 C20531 C20826 GR0547 C20539 C18182 C18187 C20827 C04375 C17024 C22783 DBM12 RPFZ13X24 REFZ12 C04376 C23325 C04374 13480101/2 C02034
TELAIO PORTAFILTRI SX SOSTEGNO RECUPERATORE GUARNIZIONE D=5 FIBRA DI VETRO COLLANTE BOSTIK(CONF.=0,85 KG)5242C VITE TE M10X30 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 AISI 304 ROSET.PIANA 10,5X21 UNI6592 AISI304 ROSETTA ELAST.A10 UNI1751 AISI304 VITE TE M5X15 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 AISI 304 DADO M5 UNI5588-ISO4032 CL8.8 AISI 304 ROSETTA PIANA 5,3X10 UNI6592-69 AISI304 ROSETTA ELASTICA A5 UNI1751 AISI304 TUBO DI RAME 8X6 RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO RIDUZIONE CONICA RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO D=1/4" PER TUBO DI RAME D=8 VITE TE M12X40 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 FE ZIN ROSETTA PIANA 13X24 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A12 UNI1751 FE ZIN VENTILATORE EF905/I4A/A KW5,5/6 60HZ 21 GRUPPO VENTILATORE V1 VENTILATORE MB160 RD90 GIUNTO ANTIVIBRANTE ASPIRANTE TIPO T6 PER MB160 GRUPPO VENTILATORE V2 VENTILATORE MB160 LG90 GIUNTO ANTIVIBRANTE ASPIRANTE TIPO T6 PER MB160 GRUPPO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE G1 BRUCIATORE MEGAFIRE 15M GUARNIZIONE SP 2.5 CILIN.REFR./ATT.BRUC MEGAFIRE SUPPORTO BRUCIATORE MEGAFIRE TRENO GAS/GASOLIO G1 GUARNIZIONE CON RINFORZO IN INCONEL ASSIEME CAMERA COMBUSTIONE D=1750 VALVOLA ARIA DI COMBUSTIONE DN300 DADO M12 ROSETTA PIANA 13X24 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A12 UNI1751 FE ZIN PIATTO SU FONDELLO S.T CULLA SOSTEGNO BRUCIATORE D=535 TUBO DI RAME RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO 1/2" PER TUBO RAME 10 TUBO RAME D=8 EST
Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Fibra di vetMT NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR Rame MT NR NR Ottone NR NR FeZincato NR FeZincato NR PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ Fibra ceram Fe360 PZ PZ Fibra ceram MT COR-TEN PZ PZ Bronzo PZ FeZincato NR FeZincato NR Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Rame MT NR Rame MT
1 6 35 1 106 106 106 8 8 10 10 0,5 2 1 1 24 24 24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 30 1 1 16 16 16 4 1 8 2 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 VERNICIATURA ALLUMINIO 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11,7 VERNICIATURA RAL 5009 0 0 1524 0 0 0 0 0 4,3 VERNICIATURA RAL.. 0 0 0
10/09/0816.21
Pag.4 di 6
2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
20 1348081/4 21 20801/21/4 7 GR0548 1 C20539 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 8 1 2 9 1 10 1 2 3 4 6 7 C18182 C18187 C20828 C04375 C16974 C22783 DBM12 RPFZ13X24 REFZ12 C04376 C23325 C04374 13480101/2 C02034 1348081/4 20801/21/4 GR0549 C20534 C20535 GR0550 C20533 GR0551 C18205 C18201 DG10U SDG10U 6342 C13075
RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO D=1/4" PER TUBO DI RAME D=8 RIDUZIONE CONICA 1/2"-1/4" GRUPPO CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE G2 BRUCIATORE MEGAFIRE 15M GUARNIZIONE SP 2.5 CILIN.REFR./ATT.BRUC MEGAFIRE SUPPORTO BRUCIATORE MEGAFIRE TRENO GAS/GASOLIO G2 GUARNIZIONE CON RINFORZO IN INCONEL CAMERA DI COMBUSTIONE 1750 VALVOLA ARIA DI COMBUSTIONE DN300 DADO M12 ROSETTA PIANA 13X24 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A12 UNI1751 FE ZIN PIATTO SU FONDELLO S.T CULLA SOSTEGNO BRUCIATORE D=535 TUBO DI RAME RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO 1/2" PER TUBO RAME 10 TUBO RAME D=8 EST RACCORDO DRITTO MASCHIO CONICO D=1/4" PER TUBO DI RAME D=8 RIDUZIONE CONICA 1/2"-1/4" GRUPPO ARIA COMBURENTE VENTILATORE VCM801N12B LG0 VENTILATORE VCM801N12BRD0 GRUPPO ESTRAZIONE VENTILATORE FQ1121N12B RD0 GRUPPO STRUMENTAZIONE SU CAMPO ANALIZZATORE ALL'OSSIDO DI ZIRCONIO QUADRO Q6 UMIDITA' (220V-50HZ) PRESSOSTATO CAMPO 1 - 10 MBAR STAFFA PER PRESSOSTATO DG-10U TRASMETTITORE PRESS.DIFFERENZ. MOD.6342 0-200 MBAR TERMOCOPPIA TIPO J L=900 USC 4-20MA RANGE 0-600 TERMOCOPPIA TIPO J L=700 USC 4-20MA RANGE 0-600 TERMOCOPPIA TIPO J L=300 USC 4-20MA RANGE 0-600 SUPPORTO PER QUADRO QUADRO Q1 PER MAXON MEGAFIRE COMM A406 QUADRO Q2 PER MAXON MEGAFIRE COMM A406 GRUPPO SEMICAPPA WET ASSIEME ATTUATORE AF8 (HONEYWELL) ASSIEME PROTEZIONE MOTORINI A406 ASSIEME SEMICAPPA WET A406 S.T.
Ottone
NR NR PZ PZ
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 30 1 1 16 16 16 4 1 8 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 2 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 11,7 VERNICIATURA RAL 5009 0 0 1524 0 0 0 0 0 4,3 VERNICIATURA RAL.. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23,4 VERNICIATURA RAL 0 0 0 0 190 10850
Fibra ceram PZ PZ PZ Fibra ceram MT COR-TEN PZ PZ Bronzo PZ FeZincato NR FeZincato NR Fe360 PZ Fe360 PZ Rame MT NR Rame MT Ottone NR NR PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ NR NR PZ PZ Fe360 PZ NR Fe360 PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ AISI304 AISI430 PZ PZ
8 C15444 9 C11322 10 C18218 11 C20830 12 C20831 11 GR0552 1 C04132 2 C21161 3 C21172
10/09/0816.21
Pag.5 di 6
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
4 A434042 5 DCIM10 6 DBIM10 7 RPI10,5X21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 1 2 C16040 C16039 C16041 A434043 C18250 C05882 C05883 C12244 C16042 GR0553 C05514 C21352 C16042 A434042 DCIM10 DBIM10 RPI10,5X21 C16040
ASSIEME MORSETTO CENTRALE DADO A CALOTTA M10 UNI5721 AISI304 DADO BASSO M10 UNI 5589 AISI304 ROSET.PIANA 10,5X21 UNI6592 AISI304 BAVETTA 21.7 BAVETTA 19.4 BAVETTA 12.4 ASSIEME MORSETTO COPRIGIUNTO TENUTA ORIZZONTALE L=3050 TENUTA VERTICALE NUOVA TENUTA VERTICALE NUOVA PORTELLO BLOW-BOX (TRAV.L=260) COPRIGIUNTO BAVETTA GRUPPO SEMICAPPA DRY COMANDO MANUALE AF16 SEMICAPPA DRY A406 S.T COPRIGIUNTO BAVETTA ASSIEME MORSETTO CENTRALE DADO A CALOTTA M10 UNI5721 AISI304 DADO BASSO M10 UNI 5589 AISI304 ROSET.PIANA 10,5X21 UNI6592 AISI304 BAVETTA 21.7
AISI304
PZ NR NR NR
18 30 30 30 2 10 2 12 1 1 1 20 12 1 2 1 10 16 26 26 26 2 8 2 10 20 1 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LEVEL IN
0,1 0 0 0 0,6 0,54 0,35 0,1 7,5 0,7 0,7 0 0,2 0 5 8797 0,2 0,1 0 0 0 0,6 0,54 0,58 0,1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ZINCATURA A FREDDO 0 0 0 0 53 0 0 0
Alluminio lePZ Alluminio lePZ Alluminio lePZ AISI304 PZ AISI304 PZ AISI304 PZ AISI304 PZ AISI304 PZ Alluminio lePZ PZ Fe360 PZ COR-TEN PZ Alluminio lePZ AISI304 PZ NR NR NR Alluminio lePZ Alluminio lePZ Alluminio lePZ AISI304 PZ AISI304 PZ PZ PZ PZ Fe360 PZ PZ PZ Fe360 PZ Acciaio Zin NR PZ Fe360 PZ COR-TEN PZ Cor-ten a PZ PZ Fe360 PZ PZ
C16039 BAVETTA 19.4 C16052 BAVETTA 19.7 A434043 ASSIEME MORSETTO COPRIGIUNTO C12244 PORTELLO BLOW-BOX (TRAV.L=260) GR0554 GRUPPO CONDOTTI + SOSTEGNI CONDOTTI C20644 COMPENSATORE METALLICO DN1350 C20645 COMPENSATORE METALLICO DN1200 A119962-210-21 COMPENSATORE RETT. MONO ONDA 1122X712 C21625 COMPENSATORE METALLICO DN1350 C20762 COMPENSATORE METALLICO D=1200 A310590-60 GIUNTO ANTIVIBRANTE TONDO D=450 K4052500450 SERRANDA DI SOVRAPRESSIONE TIPO K405-2 500X450 KC926500X625X48 FILTRO KC926 500X625X48 A322447-40-11-CB-ASERRANDA AUT. BIPALA D=560 A322447-40-21-CM-F SERRANDA MANUALE BIPALA D=560 A322447-100-21-CM SERRANDA MANUALE BIPALA D=1000 GR0555 GRUPPO ALIMENTAZIONE CARBURANTE A130276 SERBATOIO CARBURANTE C15446 LIVELLO VISIVO IVL 3/8-1700
10/09/0816.21
Pag.6 di 6
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 5 6 8 10 12 13 14 15 16 26 36 47 48 49 50
C18513 C15449 DFZM12 C22272
MISURATORE DI LIVELLO KSR MOD.1003 GIUNTO TRE PEZZI 3/8" DADO M12 - UNI 5588-65-A-6S ISO 4032 ASSIEME POMPE ALIMENTAZIONE CARBURANTE TUBAZIONE COLLEGAMENTO BARILOTTO SKID POMPE ASSIEME TUBAZIONE TUBAZIONE DI SCARICO SERBATOIO FLANGIA DN40 PN16 UNI2278-67 VITE TE M16X60 ISO4017 DADO M16 UNI558-ISO4032 CL8.8 FE ZIN GUARNIZ.X FLANGIA DN 40 C4430 SP. 2 VITE TE M12X60 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 FE ZIN GUARNIZ.FLANGIA DN25 C4430 SP.2 VITE TE M12X40 UNI5739-ISO4017 CL8.8 FE ZIN ROSETTA ELASTICA A12 UNI1751 FE ZIN ROSETTA PIANA 13X24 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN ROSETTA CARPENTER.13 UNI6600 FE360 MANICOTTO 3/8" FE360 ROSETTA PIANA 17X30 UNI6592-69 FE ZIN COPPIA RUBIN.PER LIVELLO D.3/8 X13
AISI316 PZ FeZincato PZ FeZincato PZ PZ Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 Fe360 FeZincato PZ PZ PZ PZ PZ NR NR NR NR NR FeZincato NR FeZincato NR NR Fe360 PZ NR NR
1 1 16 1 1 1 1 1 16 16 3 12 1 4 4 16 4 1 24 1
0 0 UNION C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 2,3 7,2 0 1,85 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 C22502 C15459 C22270 C05776 C04288 DFZM16 K540 TEFZM12X60 K525 TEFZM12X40 REFZ12 RPFZ13X24 RC13
51 MF38 52 RPFZ17X30 53 41638
INLET 1/2" ATOMIZING AIR P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h
1/2" ATOMIZING AIR INLET
P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h
1" Q=800Lt/h P =10Bar
DESCRIZIONE
RECARD - MEXICO - CMPC ABSORMEX - PM2

CODICE
A0406.07
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
08/11/2007 maurizio
1:1
FORMATO
A1
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TA0406.07_P&I_DIAGRAM
14a
CEMENTO AUTOLIVELLANTE CONCRETE TELAIO DI BASE BASE FRAME
14
13
12
11
10a
10
A.1
1 2 3
LASTRA DI POLISTIROLO POLYSTYRENE
MONTARE IL VENTILATORE SUL CONTROTELAIO DI BASE COMPLETO DI ANTIVIBRANTI MOUNT THE FAN ON THE BASE COUNTERFRAME COMPLETE WITH ANTIVIBRATION PADS COLLEGARE IL VENTILATORE ALLE TUBAZIONI, REGOLANDONE L'ALTEZZA E LA BOLLA CON LE APPOSITE BARRE FILETTATE BASE COUNTERFRAME SALDARE I MONTANTI POS.12 AL TELAIO WELD THE FIXING SUPPORTS ITEM 12 TO THE BASE FRAME FISSARE AL PAVIMENTO I MONTANTI CON BULLONI AD ESPANSIONE M12x80 FIX THE STANDS TO THE FLOOR WITH EXPANSION BOLTS M12x80 TAGLIARE LA PARTE SPORGENTE DEI MONTANTI CUT THE PROTRUDING PARTS OF STANDS ESEGUIRE GETTO IN CEMENTO FINO AL LIVELLO SUPERIORE DEL TELAIO DI BASE GROUNT WITH CONCRETE THE BASE FRAME UP TO THE ITS TOP INSERIRE TRA TELAIO DI BASE E BASAMENTO INERZIALE UNA LASTRA DI POLISTIROLO DI 20-25mm DI SPESSORE INSERT BETWEEN THE BASE FRAME AND THE FAN FRAME A PLATE OF POLYSTYRENE FOAM,20-25mm ESEGUIRE GETTO IN CEMENTO AUTOLIVELLANTE NEL BASAMENTO INERZIALE GROUNT THE CONCRETE ON THE FAN FRAME TOGLIERE LA LASTRA DI POLISTIROLO LASCIANDO ARIA TO REMOVE THE POLYSTYRENE PLATE LEAVING AIR
A.1a
CONTROTELAIO DI BASE
4 5 6 7 8 9
C L PAPER MACHINE
A.4
4026 4026 1300 1300
1800
1800
1950
1950
1360
1770
1770
1950
1800
1800
1950
CL YANKEE
+3900
2500 300
2500 300
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO FONDAZIONI
CODICE
GR0535
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
CL YANKEE
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
12/11/2007 maurizio
1:25
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TR0535
VIEW "W" SCALE 1:25
FORNITURA RECARD
FORNITURA RECARD
piano lavorato Recard
530 450 45 560 40 80
330
80
40
80
40
320
45

40
40
M2
2900formato carta 3256tavola
560
2080 2184
530 450
1120 1150
1110 1150
530 450
2227 2307
530 450
piano lisce
pavim. finito
livello0.00
450
320
4200interasse sopporti
2900formato carta
3256tavola
3530
3850
3610
4100
330
DRIVE SIDE LATO COMANDO
FORATURA TRAVI MACCHINA SCALA 1:50
C L PAPER MACHINE
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO CAPPA AR E MOVIMENTAZIONE

CODICE
4100
GR0537
IMOD
MATERIALE
40
PESO kg
80
M2 0
0
SCALA
LATO SERVIZIO TENDER SIDE
DATA FIRMA
14/11/2007 Stefano
1:20
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
PARTICOLARE "D" DETAIL "D"
TR0537
FORNITURA RECARD
piano lisce
livello0.00
MONTAGGIO BAVETTE LATO SERVIZIO SEALING STRIPS ERECTION DETAIL TENDER SIDE
MONTAGGIO BAVETTE LATO COMANDO SEALING STRIPS ERECTION DETAIL DRIVE SIDE
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO SEMICAPPA WET

CODICE
GR0552
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
12/02/2008 simone
1:20
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TR0552
B
FORNITURA RECARD
piano lisce
livello0.00
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO SEMICAPPA DRY

CODICE
GR0553
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
12/02/2008 simone
1:20
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TR0553
Flangia premente
3457 2968 359 130 1481 2555 n32 fori 19 1074 625=125x5
Cuscinetto bloccato
Cuscinetto libero
1122x712 i.f.
1410
318
660
220
1226.4
712 782 832 3297.4
985 i.f.
Motore : gr.315 kW 288 - poli 4
Portina d'ispezione 1250
Flangia aspirante
15
n24 fori 16 Drenaggio tappato 2" gas
A
50
A
200
2840 RETE PER BASE CALCESTRUZZO
435
950 2318
950
985 3275 35 50 635 635 635 635 250 385 50 1065 1105
Cuscinetto bloccato
Cuscinetto libero
PART. GIUNTO A DENTI
1830
1900
Sopporto SNL 524 cusc.22224 EK C3 + H 3124 n.2 FRB 14-215
Sopporto SNL 524 cusc.22224 EK C3 + H 3124 .
MASSIMO DISALLINEAMENTO
ASSIALE LATERALE ANGOLARE 1.0 mm. 0.05 mm. 5'
CARICO STATICO VENTILATORE = 35000 N (motore escluso) CARICO STATICO PARTI ROTANTI = 5900 N (motore escluso) CARICO DINAMICO = 12100 N (motore escluso)
DATI DI RILUBRIFICAZIONE
POS. DENOMINAZ.
CUSCINETTO LIBERO CUSCINETTO BLOCCATO GIUNTO A DENTI
TIPO DI LUBRIFICANTE
GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 O EQUIVAL. O EQUIVAL. O EQUIVAL.
1125=125x9
Q.TA'
62 62 grammi grammi
1242
1192
1122
INTERVALLO
550 550 ore ore
470 grammi
8000 ore
DESCRIZIONE
00
REV.
ISSUED - EMESSO
DESCRIPTION - DESCRIZIONE
STANDARD TOLERANCE SENZA UNLESS INDICATED DI TOLLERANZA PER QUOTE INDICAZIONE
12-05-08
ISSUED - REDATTO
SCALE - SCALA
GRUPPO VENTILATORE V1
CODICE
APPROV.
DATE - DATA
35
n12 fori 19
DRAWING No.
- No. DISEGNO
SCOSTAMENTI DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONI TOLERANCE SCOSTAMENTI
OVER THRU 8 THRU
8 30
OVER THRU
30 120
OVER THRU
120 400
OVER
400
OVER 1000 THRU 2000
OVER 2000 THRU 4000 OVER 4000
THRU 1000
+ - 0.2
+ 0.4 -
+ - 0.6
+1 -
+ -3
+ -5
+6 -
+8 -
1 : 22.5
WEIGHT-PESO (kg)
362073
MATERIAL TYPE - TIPO MATERIALE MATERIAL COMPOSITION - NATURA MATERIALE
GR0545
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
TITLE
- TITOLO
DATA
19/05/2008 Michele
1:10
ven. MB 160 sist.8 cl.3 or.9-RD90

R
E
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
. .
TUTTE LE DIMENSIONI SONO IN MILLIMETRI
. .
ITEM
1 JOB 1 COMMESSA
FORMATO
FIRMA
A0
T I
F I
D
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
I T Y
SY
TR0545
ISO 9001 Cert.n.0646
QU
FROM RICAVATO DA
361163B
8.0866/01
3457 2968 359 130 1074
2555 1481
Flangia premente
n32 fori 19
1
625=125x5
1122x712 i.f.
Cuscinetto bloccato
Cuscinetto libero
1410
5 318
660
220 3297.4
1226.4
985 i.f.
Motore : gr.315 kW 288 - poli 4
712 782 832
Portina d'ispezione 1250
Drenaggio tappato 2" gas
Flangia aspirante
15
A
50
A
200
n24 fori 16
2840 RETE PER BASE CALCESTRUZZO
435
950
950
3275 35 50 635 635 635 635 250 385 50 985 1065 1105
Cuscinetto bloccato
Cuscinetto libero
1830
1900
PART. GIUNTO A DENTI

Sopporto SNL 524 cusc.22224 EK C3 + H 3124 n.2 FRB 14-215
5
Sopporto SNL 524 cusc.22224 EK C3 + H 3124 .
MASSIMO DISALLINEAMENTO
ASSIALE LATERALE ANGOLARE 1.0 mm. 0.05 mm. 5'
CARICO STATICO VENTILATORE = 35000 N (motore escluso) CARICO STATICO PARTI ROTANTI = 5900 N (motore escluso) CARICO DINAMICO = 12100 N (motore escluso)
DATI DI RILUBRIFICAZIONE
POS. DENOMINAZ.
CUSCINETTO LIBERO CUSCINETTO BLOCCATO GIUNTO A DENTI
TIPO DI LUBRIFICANTE
GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 GRASSO SKF-LGEP2 O EQUIVAL. O EQUIVAL. O EQUIVAL.
Q.TA'
62 62 grammi grammi
INTERVALLO
550 550 ore ore
470 grammi
8000 ore
35
n12 fori 19
DESCRIZIONE
00
REV.
STANDARD SCOSTAMENTI DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONI TOLERANCE SCOSTAMENTI PER QUOTE
ISSUED - EMESSO
DESCRIPTION - DESCRIZIONE
TOLERANCE SENZA UNLESS INDICATED DI TOLLERANZA INDICAZIONE
12-05-08
ISSUED - REDATTO
SCALE - SCALA
GRUPPO VENTILATORE V2
CODICE
APPROV.
DATE - DATA
DRAWING No.
- No. DISEGNO
OVER THRU 8 THRU
8 30
OVER THRU
30 120
OVER THRU
120 400
OVER
400
OVER 1000 THRU 2000
OVER 2000 THRU 4000 OVER 4000
THRU 1000
+ - 0.2
+ 0.4 -
+ - 0.6
+1 -
+ -3
+ -5
+6 -
+8 -
1 : 22.5
WEIGHT-PESO (kg)
362072
MATERIAL TYPE - TIPO MATERIALE
GR0546
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
DISEGNATO DATA
CONTROLLATO
APPROVATO
SCALA
TITLE
- TITOLO
19/05/2008 Michele
ven. MB 160 sist.8 cl.3 or.9-LG90

R
E
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
. .
TUTTE LE DIMENSIONI SONO IN MILLIMETRI
. .
ITEM
1 JOB 1 COMMESSA
FORMATO
FIRMA
T I
F I
D
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
I T Y
SY
TR0546
ISO 9001 Cert.n.0646
FROM RICAVATO DA
361163B
8.0866/19
1125=125x9
0 1:10 A0
1242
1192
1122
QU
t2025;DIREZIONE
DEL FLUSSO FLOW DIRECTION
14a
14
13
12
11
10a
10
A.1
280
70
8849
18734
1200 /
1350
82
84
85
85
83
86
88
89
89
87
4567 4567
7700
A.1a
C L YANKEE
TO BE CARE THAT THE COMPNSATOR IS ASSEMBLED ACCORDING TO THE AIR FLOW, AS INDICATED IN THE SKETCH
10
t2025;N.B.
ASSICURARSI CHE IL COMPENSATORE SIA MONTATO RISPETTO AL FLUSSO DELL'ARIA, COME INDICATO NEL PARTICOLARE
1922
1922
6551
200 13 7
65 44 46
65
46
46
65
46
46 45 64
1749
t2025;INDICAZIONE
DI PRE-ESTENSIONE PER COMPENSATORI

t2025;PARTICOLARE
43
9
64
N 53 I 43
210 = 200 + 10
80
81
80
81
450
450
PRE-EXTENTION INDICATION FOR EXPANTION JOINT
FISSAGGIO SUPPORTI SUPPORTS FIXING DETAIL
F4 S4
PS 400
52 51
47
43
Q1
65
t2025;MONTAGGIO TIPICO PER CONDOTTI CON ARIA IN PRESSIONE (+) TYPICAL ASSEMBLY FOR DUCTS WITH PRESSURE AIR (+)
Q2
101 65 37
TT 400
20
80 81 71
2980
35
2
t2025;MONTAGGIO
1767
67
TIPICO PER CONDOTTI CON ARIA IN DEPRESSIONE (-) TYPICAL ASSEMBLY FOR DUCTS WITH DEPRESSURE AIR (-)
74
M07PM
M08PM
43
V5 M11PM
S6
10 1396
41
V4 M10PM LEVEL + 3,85

560
73
m or k r edo rhc s
80
21 2 22
81 94
94
560
V1
77
m or k r edo rhc s
V2
3
42
66
80 81
712 x1122
1552
130
1581
43
483
28
1133
712 x1122
617
985
0 28
42 35
617
3
34
35
TT 122
667
S5
1 700
1200x900 I.F.
TT 222
28
37
130
200=100+100\P(150=100+50)\P(200=175+25)\P(100=50+50)
26
38
62
1754
VITI AUTOFILETTANTI MILL SUPPLY SELF-TAPPING SCREW LAMIERA ALLUMINIO Sp.10/10 MILL SUPPLY ALLUMINIUM SHEET 10/10 ANELLO 30x3 Fe 360 MILL SUPPLY STEEL RING 30x3
2094
1 00 0
1758
1670
1133
t2025;INSULATION
200
THICKNESS
30x3
ME 300
24
27
TT 520
55
DISTANZIATORI MILL SUPPLY PIATTO 30x5 Fe 360 SPACERS STEEL FLAT 30x5
R 60 0
t2025;COIBENTAZIONE
78
1300
24
6 11
60
LANA DI ROCCIA MILL SUPPLY ROCK WOOL
15
72
512
17
6
15
1300
32
908
31 32 29
F1 V6 M22PM
63
638 I.F.
PS 410
898
ALLUMINIUM SHEET 10/10 LAMIERA ALLUMINIO Sp. 10/10 MILL SUPPLY
G1
61
39
G2
560
40
38
560
90
11
S8
TT 420
54
902
120
CONDOTTO DUCT INSULATION TYPICAL DETAIL
2 80
210
59
1200
73 74
1481
745
31
1 8 10
71
16
18 59
280
14500
25
210
12 00 0 15 33
41
91
93
92
38
M09PM
TT 320 PS310 PS311
69
985 TP 12 TP
35
130
70
56
58
36
1500
58
R1
V3
11 33
33 17
: SALDATURA SUL CONDOTTO SEAM WELD ON DUCT ** : SALDARE DOPO AVER ESEGUITO L'AGGIUSTAGGIO IN ALTEZZA WELD AFTER HAVE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT *** : SALDATURA SEAM WELD **** : NON SALDARE DON'T WELD
t2025;*
28 0 1 8 10 724
TYPICAL SCHEME OF DAMPER ASSEMBLY

200 300 90
24
OPEN CLOSE FLOW FLOW CLOSE OPEN
15193
1782
15
24 33
1783 2000
1782
33
100
500
500
1200
68 100
A.4
9684
* * * * SI CONSIGLIA DI LASCIARE ACCESSIBILE TUTTE LE ZONE FLANGIATE DELL'AIR-SYSTEM IN MODO DA RIPRENDERE SENZA IMPEDIMENTI IL TIRAGGIO DEI SINGOLI BULLONI FINO A 3 VOLTE CON UN INTERVALLO DI 7 GIORNI L'UNO DALL'ALTRO DAL PRIMO AVVIAMENTO, VERIFICANDO OGNI VOLTA LA TENUTA. SOLO DOPO LA TERZA RIPETIZIONE (21 GIORNI DALL'AVVIAMENTO), COMPLETARE COME IN FIGURA LA COIBENTAZIONE. WE RECOMMMEND YOU TO LET ACCESSIBLE ALL THE FLANGED ZONES OF THE AIR-SYSTEM, SO TO TAKE AGAIN WITHOUT PROBLEMS THE NIPPLES O EVERY SINGLE BOLT SINCE A MAX OF THREE TIMES WITH A BREAK OF 7 DAYS FROM ONE TO THE OTHER STARTING FROM THE FIRST START UP. YOU HAVE TO VERIFY THE SEAL EVERY TIME. ONLY AFTER THE THIRD REPETITION (21 DAYS FROM THE START-UP) TO COMPLETE INSULATION AS DESCRIBED IN THE DRAW
15
TYPE "A"
TYPE "C"
TYPE "D"
TYPE "F"
500
71
99
57
23 68 15
23
57
99
500
75
3927 2000 2000 3927
CONDOTTO NUOVO
22
7493
1 1350
14
800 800 2
1 20 0
21
1 1350
11178
1 20 0
21 14
6284
12759
F
TP TT 220
7493
8690
76
sch m k r o de r ro
CONDOTTO NUOVO
CONDOTTO NUOVO
22
15
- DISEGNATO CON SEMI-CAPPE A META' CORSA - DRAWN WITH HALF-HOODS AT HALF STROKE t2025;- TUTTE LE QUOTE RIFERITE ALLE OPERE EDILIZIE SONO INDICATIVE. LE QUOTE DIRIFEIMENTO VALIDE SONO QUELLE RELATIVE ALLA MACCHINA. - ALL DIMENSIONS REFERED TO THE BUILDING ARE APPROXIMATE. THE VALID DIMENSIONS ARE THOSE REFERRED TO PAPER MACHINE CENTER LINES.
74
5 13 0 12 00 12 00 5 13 0
72 73
TT 100 TT 121
1 TP
13 20
1
20 19
125
125
TT 120
TT 221
TT 200
TP TP
4710
= POSSIBILITA' DI AGGIUSTAGGIO (TELESCOPICO) 2690 2690 2565 2565
C L YANKEE
t2025;USARE
VITI AUTOFILETTANTI USE SELF-DRILLING SCREW 1927 4026 2099 2099 4026 1927
1816
79
= TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT POSSIBILITY
LEVEL + 0,00
= POSSIBILITA' DI AGGIUSTAGGIO (FLANGIA LIBERA) = FREE FLANGE ADJUSTMENT POSSIBILITY
DESCRIZIONE
53 C L PAPER MACHINE
C L PAPER MACHINE
CODICE
GRUPPO CONDOTTI
IMOD MATERIALE PESO kg
GR 0554
SCALA
E-E (DISEGNATA A CAPPA CHIUSA) (DRAW IN CLOSED HOOD POSITION)
t2025;SEZIONE/SECTION
12
13
14
15 15a
16
- TOLLERANZE GENERALI DI LAVORAZIONE ALBERI ...................... h11 FORI ........................ H11 ALTRE QUOTE ................. Js11 VALORI ANGOLARI ............. SMUSSI DI SPIGOLI ........... RACCORDI CONCAVI ............ FILETT. QUAL. MEDIA ......... .................. RUGOSITA' Ra ................ CARPENTERIA SALDATA ......... 30' DA 0.2 A 0.5 DA 0.5 A 1.0 UNI 5545 0.2 SU 100 3.2 u m Js 13
DATA FIRMA
13/02/2008 GG A036257
VERSIONE
1:25
FORMATO Data Stampa
DOCUMENTO
950N
1050N
DESCRIZIONE
VENTILATORE VCM801N12B LG0

Denominazione VENT
VCM 801 N12B LG0 200 Z

Materiale Nr. modello Data
FOMAT AEROTHERMIC SRL ordine 133

Disegnato
12/03/2008
Peso (kg) Data
CODICE
623
C20534
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
ventilatori industriali S.p.A.
Arzignano ( VICENZA ) ITALIA
ARIA COMBURENTE V4 MARZOTTO Appr. Disegno INGOMBRO Scala N 091684001 1:24
Contr.
DATA FIRMA
SCALA
25/03/2008 maurizio
1:20
FORMATO
A3
Quote senza indicazione di tolleranza grado di precisione UNI EN 22768-m
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
ATTENZIONE: PESO COMPRENSIVO DI MOTORE E ACCESSORI
T20534
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO RECUPERATORE R1
CODICE
GR0544
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
1896
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
1:10
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TR0544
2500N
1500N
VENTOLINA DI RAFFREDDAMENTO CASSA IN CORTEN
ATTENZIONE: PESO COMPRENSIVO DI MOTORE E ACCESSORI

DESCRIZIONE
Denominazione VENT
FQ 1121 N12S RD0 250 W

Materiale Nr. modello Data
VENTILATORE FQ1121N12B RD0

Peso (kg) Data
FOMAT AEROTHERMIC SRL ordine 133 ESTRAZIONE Disegno INGOMBRO N 091684003

Disegnato
1633
CODICE
C20533
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
26/03/2008
SCALA
Contr.
DATA
25/03/2008 maurizio
1:20
ventilatori industriali S.p.A.
MARZOTTO
Scala
Appr.
FORMATO
FIRMA
A2
Arzignano ( VICENZA ) ITALIA
1:36
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
T20533
Quote senza indicazione di tolleranza grado di precisione UNI EN 22768-m
14a
14
13
12
11
10a
10
A.1 A.1a
A.4
B
DESCRIZIONE
GRUPPO STRUMENTAZIONE SU CAMPO

CODICE
GR0551
IMOD
MATERIALE
PESO kg
0
SCALA
DATA FIRMA
13/02/2008 simone
1:25
FORMATO
A0
DOCUMENTO
VERSIONE
Data Stampa
TR0551

A406 - Manuale Cappa e Bruciatori

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

A406 - Manuale Cappa e Bruciatori

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

S.R.L.

Partita IVA 01294070469

MANUFACTURER ECCONFORMITY DECLARATION

MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE

Lucca, li: 01-09-2008

MILL LOCATION : PLANT SYSTEM : :

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

SPECIFIED THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE ISSUED BY

PAGE 10.1 to 10.11 PAGE 11.1

INLET GAS DN80-PN16 P=300 mbar

INLET GAS DN80-PN16 P=300 mbar

INLET 1/2" ATOMIZING AIR P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h

1/2" ATOMIZING AIR INLET

P= 8 Bar Q=440 Lt/h

1" Q=800Lt/h P =10Bar

RECARD - MEXICO - CMPC ABSORMEX - PM2

HOW TO USE THE INFORMATIONS GIVEN IN THIS MANUAL

PRODUCTION ORGANISING DEPARTMENT

Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3 Sect. 3

par. 3 par. 3.1 par. 3.2 par. 3.3

INSTRUCTIONS/SAFETY START-UP OPERATION CLEANING

SPARES DEPARTMENT Sect. 10 par. COMPLETE

2. SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION

T/D m/min g/m mm mm % B.D. % B.D.

V//Hz V//Hz bar m

7571 2262 5309

Kg/h Kg/h Kg/h

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7

6.1 6.2 (V3)

Descrizione GRUPPO RECUPERO CALORE (R1) 2.9

7.4 7.5 7.5.1 7.6 7.7 1 1 2 1

12.1 12.2 13 13.1 13.2

GENERAL RULES FOR SECURITY

-Burners (G1/G2) -Follow the IMECO maintenance instructions

HOOD/YANKEE GAP ADJUSTMENT

TYPICAL WET SECTION

TYPICAL DRY SECTION

DANGER! DONT TOUCH

PNEUMATIC DIAGRAM (T15466)

SCHEMA PNEUMATICO DI APERTURA E CHIUSURA CAPPA

PISTON Dia.250 mm PISTON RUN 200 mm (TRA/8250/M/200 NORGREN)

Back to Selector Page

Mountings and Switches

T RA/8000 RA/8000/IU RA/8000/W5

T RA/8000/M RA/8000/MU RA/8000/W6

RA/8000/G TRA/8000/G RA/8000/W RA/8000/X3

RA/8000/MG TRA/8000/MG RA/8000/MW RA/8000/X4

Cylinder with non-rotating piston rod ( 32 to 100 mm)

For combinations of cylinder variants consult our Technical Service.

RA/8000, RA/8000/M A/8 / /

Substitute Ports: ISO 228 (G 1/8 to G 1) A Substitute 8

Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320

Page 16 QA/8032/34 QA/8040/34 QA/8050/34 QA/8063/34 QA/8080/34 QA/8100/34 QA/8125/34 Style UH

Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320

Cylinder 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320

Page 20 QA/8032/51/* QA/8040/51/* QA/8050/51/* QA/8063/51/* QA/8080/51/* QA/8100/51/*

Page 18 QA/8032/61/* QA/8040/61/* QA/8050/61/* QA/8063/61/* QA/8080/61/* QA/8100/61/*

Page 8 QA/8032/59 QA/8040/59 QA/8050/59 QA/8063/59 QA/8080/59 QA/8100/59 QA/8125/59

Page 21 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22 QM/140/010/22

Model Reed Solid state Pneumatic

M/50/LSU/.. M/50/RAC/5V M/50/EAP/.. M/50/EAN/..

M/50/LSU/CP M/50/EAP/CP M/50/EAN/CP

90 M/P34615/5 M/P34615/5 M/P34615/5